Manual: Ipos Positioning and Sequence Control System

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
Manual
IPOSplus® Positioning and Sequence Control System
Edition 11/2009 11645415 / EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Contents
Contents
1 General Information .......................................................................................... 14
1.1 Structure of the safety notes ..................................................................... 14
1.2 Liability for defects .................................................................................... 15
1.3 Exclusion of liability................................................................................... 15
1.4 Copyright................................................................................................... 15
2 Safety Notes ...................................................................................................... 16
2.1 General information .................................................................................. 16
2.2 Designated use ......................................................................................... 17
2.3 Target group ............................................................................................. 17
2.4 Programming errors .................................................................................. 17
3 System Description........................................................................................... 18
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 18
3.1.1 Scope of this documentation ..................................................... 18
3.1.2 Creating programs ..................................................................... 19
plus®
3.2 IPOS – features ................................................................................. 19
3.3 Controlling IPOSplus® units ....................................................................... 22
3.3.1 Active control signal source ....................................................... 22
3.4 Technology options / application modules ................................................ 22
3.4.1 Technology options.................................................................... 22
3.4.2 Application modules................................................................... 23
3.5 Technical data........................................................................................... 25
3.5.1 MOVIDRIVE® B ......................................................................... 25
3.5.2 MOVITRAC® B .......................................................................... 25
3.5.3 MQx ........................................................................................... 26
3.6 Reference documents............................................................................... 27
3.6.1 General manuals ....................................................................... 27
3.6.2 Manuals for serial interfaces/fieldbuses .................................... 27
3.6.3 Manuals for synchronized axis movements............................... 27
3.6.4 Manuals for application modules ............................................... 27
3.6.5 Manuals for the MQx fieldbus interfaces ................................... 27
4 IPOS Variables................................................................................................... 28
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 28
4.2 Overview of the system variables ............................................................. 29
5 Task Management and Interrupts .................................................................... 40
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 40
5.2 Task management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B .......................................... 40
5.3 Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® A......................................................................... 43
5.4 Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® B......................................................................... 43
5.4.1 Processing time for task 1 / task 2............................................. 43
5.4.2 Task 3 ........................................................................................ 44
5.4.3 Implementation information ....................................................... 44
5.4.4 Example..................................................................................... 45
Manual – IPOSplus® 3
Contents
5.5 Interrupts................................................................................................... 45
5.5.1 Example..................................................................................... 46
5.6 Interrupts for MOVIDRIVE® A and B......................................................... 46
5.6.1 Interrupt activation ..................................................................... 46
5.6.2 Error interrupt............................................................................. 46
5.6.3 Touch probe DI02 interrupt........................................................ 47
5.6.4 Timer0 interrupt ......................................................................... 48
5.7 Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B................................................... 49
5.7.1 Calling up the variable interrupt ................................................. 49
5.7.2 IPOS access to the internal interrupt control ............................. 50
6 Position Detection and Positioning................................................................. 53
6.1 Encoder evaluation ................................................................................... 53
6.2 Motor encoder (X15) ................................................................................. 54
6.3 Encoder combinations .............................................................................. 54
6.4 External encoder (X14) ............................................................................. 57
6.4.1 Positioning on external encoder (X14)....................................... 57
6.4.2 Slip compensation with external encoder .................................. 57
6.5 SSI absolute encoder (DIP) ...................................................................... 60
6.5.1 Startup ....................................................................................... 60
6.5.2 1. Select encoder type P950...................................................... 60
6.5.3 2. Set direction of rotation of the motor P35_ ............................ 61
6.5.4 3. Set counting direction P951 for the SSI absolute encoder .... 61
6.5.5 4. Set encoder scaling P955...................................................... 61
6.5.6 5. Set position offset P953......................................................... 61
6.5.7 6. Set Zero offset P954.............................................................. 62
6.5.8 7. Set encoder factors P942 and P943...................................... 62
6.5.9 8. Set P941 actual position source ............................................ 62
6.6 Referencing............................................................................................... 63
6.6.1 Type 0: Reference travel to zero pulse...................................... 67
6.6.2 Type 1: CCW end of the reference cam .................................... 67
6.6.3 Type 2: CW end of the reference cam....................................... 68
6.6.4 Type 3: CW limit switch ............................................................. 69
6.6.5 Type 4: CCW limit switch........................................................... 69
6.6.6 Type 5: No reference travel ....................................................... 70
6.6.7 Type 6: Reference cam flush with CW limit switch .................... 70
6.6.8 Type 7: Reference cam flush with CCW limit switch ................. 71
6.6.9 Type 8: Without enable.............................................................. 72
6.7 Modulo function......................................................................................... 73
6.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 73
6.7.2 Operating principle .................................................................... 74
6.7.3 Travel strategies ........................................................................ 77
6.7.4 Project planning ......................................................................... 80
6.7.5 Project planning examples......................................................... 80
6.7.6 Frequently asked questions....................................................... 83
4 Manual – IPOSplus®
Contents
6.8 Cam controllers......................................................................................... 84

6.8.1 Standard cam controller............................................................. 85
6.8.2 Expanded cam controller ........................................................... 89
7 Position Detection via Binary Inputs............................................................... 96
7.1 Types of built-in encoders......................................................................... 96
7.2 Principle of the position detection ............................................................. 96
7.3 Position detection with MOVIDRIVE® B.................................................... 97
7.4 Position detection with MOVITRAC® B..................................................... 98
7.5 Position detection with MQx...................................................................... 99
7.5.1 Proximity sensor evaluation....................................................... 99
7.5.2 DI0 and DI1 terminal assignments............................................. 99
7.5.3 Position detection with built-in encoder ................................... 100
7.5.4 Encoder monitoring.................................................................. 100
7.5.5 Storing the actual position ....................................................... 100
7.5.6 Counter .................................................................................... 101
7.5.7 Connecting the built-in encoders ............................................. 101
plus®
8 IPOS and Fieldbus ................................................................................... 102
8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 102
8.2 Binary inputs and outputs ....................................................................... 103
8.2.1 Fieldbus interface, DIO and DIP .............................................. 103
8.3 Cyclical process data .............................................................................. 103
8.3.1 Cyclical preset process data.................................................... 103
8.3.2 Cyclical user-specific process data.......................................... 104
8.4 Acyclical communication ......................................................................... 105
8.5 Special features of communication via SBus .......................................... 105
8.6 Special features of communication via RS-485 ...................................... 106
8.7 Fieldbus control words and fieldbus status words .................................. 106
plus®
9 IPOS and Synchronized Motion ............................................................. 107
9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 107
9.2 Speed synchronization via master/slave function ................................... 107
9.3 Synchronous operation with a DRS option card ..................................... 107
9.3.1 Activating and deactivating the free running function .............. 108
9.3.2 Setting the zero point for DRS11B........................................... 109
9.3.3 Activating and deactivating the offset function......................... 111
9.3.4 Switching between positioning and synchronous operation .... 113
9.4 Synchronous operation with technology option "Internal synchronous
operation"................................................................................................ 115
9.4.1 Requirements .......................................................................... 115
9.5 Synchronous operation with technology option "Cam" ........................... 116
9.5.1 Requirements .......................................................................... 117
10 IPOSplus® for MOVITRAC® B – Characteristics............................................. 118
10.1 Requirements.......................................................................................... 118
10.2 Functionality ............................................................................................ 119
11 IPOSplus® for MQx – Characteristics.............................................................. 120
11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 120
Contents
11.2 Starting the programming tool................................................................. 121

11.3 Sequence control system........................................................................ 121
11.4 Digital inputs and outputs........................................................................ 121
11.5 Values of the DIAG11 variable for the error IPOS ILLOP ....................... 122
12 P9xx IPOS Parameters.................................................................................... 123
12.1 P90x IPOS reference travel .................................................................... 123
12.1.1 P900 Reference offset ............................................................. 123
12.1.2 P901 Reference speed 1 ......................................................... 124
12.1.3 P902 Reference speed 2 ......................................................... 124
12.1.4 P903 Reference travel type ..................................................... 124
12.1.5 P904 Reference travel to zero pulse ....................................... 126
12.1.6 P905 Hiperface offset X15....................................................... 126
12.1.7 P906 Cam distance ................................................................. 126
12.2 P91x IPOSplus® parameters.................................................................... 127
12.2.1 P910 Gain X controller............................................................. 127
12.2.2 P911/912 Positioning ramp 1/2................................................ 127
12.2.3 P913/P914 Travel speed CW/CCW......................................... 127
12.2.4 P915 Velocity precontrol.......................................................... 127
12.2.5 P916 Ramp type ...................................................................... 128
12.2.6 P917 Ramp mode.................................................................... 130
12.2.7 P918 Bus setpoint source........................................................ 130
12.3 P92x IPOS monitoring ............................................................................ 131
12.3.1 P920/P921 SW limit switch CW/CCW ..................................... 131
12.3.2 P922 Position window.............................................................. 131
12.3.3 P923 Lag error window............................................................ 131
12.3.4 P924 Positioning interruption detection ................................... 131
12.4 P93x IPOSplus® special functions ........................................................... 132
12.4.1 P930 Override.......................................................................... 132
12.4.2 P931 IPOS CTRL.W Task 1 .................................................... 132
12.4.3 P932 IPOS CTRL.W Task 2 .................................................... 132
12.4.4 P933 Jerk time......................................................................... 132
12.4.5 P938 Speed task 1 .................................................................. 132
12.4.6 P939 Speed task 2 .................................................................. 133
12.5 P94x IPOSplus® encoder......................................................................... 134
12.5.1 P940 IPOS variable edit .......................................................... 134
12.5.2 P941 Actual position source .................................................... 134
12.5.3 P942/P943 Encoder factor numerator/denominator ................ 134
12.5.4 P944 Encoder scaling ext. encoder ......................................... 135
12.5.5 P945 Synchronous encoder type (X14)................................... 135
12.5.6 P945 Synchronous encoder counting direction (X14) ............. 136
12.5.7 P947 Hiperface offset X14....................................................... 136
12.5.8 P948 Automatic encoder replacement detection ..................... 137
Contents
12.6 P95x absolute encoder (SSI) .................................................................. 138

12.6.1 P950 Encoder type .................................................................. 138
12.6.2 P951 Counting direction .......................................................... 138
12.6.3 P952 Cycle frequency.............................................................. 139
12.6.4 P953 Position offset................................................................. 139
12.6.5 P954 Zero offset ...................................................................... 139
12.6.6 P955 Encoder scaling.............................................................. 139
12.6.7 P956 CAN encoder baud rate.................................................. 139
12.7 P96x IPOSplus® modulo function ............................................................ 140
12.7.1 P960 Modulo function .............................................................. 140
12.7.2 P961 Modulo numerator .......................................................... 140
12.7.3 P962 Modulo denominator....................................................... 140
12.7.4 P963 Modulo encoder resolution ............................................. 140
12.8 P97x IPOS synchronization .................................................................... 141
12.8.1 P970 DPRAM synchronization ................................................ 141
12.8.2 P971 Synchronization phase ................................................... 141
13 Compiler – Editor ............................................................................................ 142
13.1 Technical features................................................................................... 142
13.2 First steps ............................................................................................... 143
13.2.1 Step 1: Starting IPOSplus® Compiler with MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio............................................................................ 143
13.2.2 Step 2: Creating a new project ................................................ 145
13.2.3 Step 3: The first IPOSplus® program ........................................ 148
13.2.4 Step 4: Compiling and starting the IPOSplus® program ........... 151
13.3 Settings for the IPOSplus® Compiler ....................................................... 154
13.4 Search function ....................................................................................... 157
13.5 Creating a new project ............................................................................ 158
13.5.1 Project properties..................................................................... 158
13.5.2 Defining the program structure ................................................ 159
13.6 Saving a project ...................................................................................... 161
13.7 Setting up a project management structure ............................................ 162
13.8 Opening a project.................................................................................... 164
13.9 Handling projects with MOVIDRIVE® B .................................................. 164
13.9.1 Saving a project in the inverter ................................................ 164
13.9.2 Loading a project from the inverter .......................................... 165
13.9.3 Calling up a project from the inverter....................................... 165
13.10 Compiling a project ................................................................................. 166
13.11 Compiling and downloading .................................................................... 167
13.12 Starting a program .................................................................................. 167
13.13 Stopping a program ................................................................................ 167
13.14 Comparison with unit .............................................................................. 167
13.15 Debugger ................................................................................................ 168
13.16 Variable window...................................................................................... 169
13.17 Program information ............................................................................... 171
13.18 Entering instructions ............................................................................... 172
13.19 Comments............................................................................................... 173
Contents
13.20 Overview of the icons.............................................................................. 174

14 Compiler – Programming ............................................................................... 175
14.1 Preprocessor........................................................................................... 176
14.2 Preprocessor statements ........................................................................ 176
14.3 #include................................................................................................... 178
14.4 Include folders......................................................................................... 179
14.5 #define .................................................................................................... 179
14.6 #undef ..................................................................................................... 180
14.7 #declare .................................................................................................. 181
14.8 SEW standard structures ........................................................................ 182
14.9 User-defined structures........................................................................... 184
14.10 long ......................................................................................................... 186
14.11 initial long ................................................................................................ 186
14.12 #pragma .................................................................................................. 187
14.13 Explanation of const.h and io.h / constb.h and iob.h .............................. 188
14.14 Identifiers ................................................................................................ 190
14.15 Constants................................................................................................ 190
14.16 IPOSplus® variables in the compiler ........................................................ 191
14.16.1 Example................................................................................... 191
14.17 Declaration of global variables................................................................ 191
14.18 Indirect addressing – pointer................................................................... 192
14.19 numof().................................................................................................... 193
15 Compiler – Operators ..................................................................................... 194
15.1 Order of priority of operators................................................................... 194
15.2 Unary operators ...................................................................................... 195
15.3 Binary operators...................................................................................... 196
15.3.1 Example................................................................................... 196
15.4 Ternary operators ................................................................................... 196
15.4.1 Example................................................................................... 196
16 Compiler – Constructions .............................................................................. 197
16.1 if...else..................................................................................................... 197
16.1.1 Syntax...................................................................................... 197
16.2 for............................................................................................................ 198
16.2.1 Syntax...................................................................................... 198
16.3 while........................................................................................................ 199
16.3.1 Syntax...................................................................................... 199
16.4 do...while................................................................................................. 200
16.4.1 Syntax...................................................................................... 200
16.5 switch...case...default.............................................................................. 202
16.5.1 Syntax...................................................................................... 202
16.6 return....................................................................................................... 203
Contents
17 Compiler – Functions ..................................................................................... 204

17.1 User-defined functions ............................................................................ 204
17.2 Overview of commands for standard functions ....................................... 205
17.2.1 Standard bit functions .............................................................. 205
17.2.2 Standard communication functions.......................................... 206
17.2.3 Standard positioning functions................................................. 206
17.2.4 Standard program functions .................................................... 206
17.2.5 Standard setting functions ....................................................... 207
17.2.6 Special standard unit functions................................................ 207
17.3 Standard functions .................................................................................. 208
17.3.1 _AxisStop................................................................................. 208
17.3.2 _BitClear .................................................................................. 209
17.3.3 _BitMove.................................................................................. 209
17.3.4 _BitMoveNeg ........................................................................... 209
17.3.5 _BitSet ..................................................................................... 210
17.3.6 _Copy ...................................................................................... 210
17.3.7 _FaultReaction......................................................................... 210
17.3.8 _GetSys ................................................................................... 211
17.3.9 _Go0 ........................................................................................ 217
17.3.10 _GoAbs.................................................................................... 218
17.3.11 _GoRel..................................................................................... 219
17.3.12 _InputCall................................................................................. 220
17.3.13 _Memorize ............................................................................... 221
17.3.14 _MoviLink................................................................................. 222
17.3.15 _MovCommDef ....................................................................... 227
17.3.16 _MovCommOn......................................................................... 229
17.3.17 _Nop ........................................................................................ 229
17.3.18 _SBusCommDef ...................................................................... 230
17.3.19 _SBusCommOn....................................................................... 234
17.3.20 _SBusCommState ................................................................... 234
17.3.21 _SetInterrupt ............................................................................ 235
17.3.22 _SetSys ................................................................................... 236
17.3.23 _SetTask.................................................................................. 238
17.3.24 _SetTask2................................................................................ 239
17.3.25 _SetVarInterrupt ...................................................................... 240
17.3.26 _SystemCall............................................................................. 241
17.3.27 _TouchProbe ........................................................................... 242
17.3.28 _Wait........................................................................................ 243
17.3.29 _WaitInput................................................................................ 243
17.3.30 _WaitSystem............................................................................ 244
17.3.31 _WdOff..................................................................................... 244
17.3.32 _WdOn..................................................................................... 245
18 Compiler – Examples...................................................................................... 246
18.1 Setting bits and output terminals............................................................. 246
18.2 Clearing bits and output terminals .......................................................... 247
Contents
18.3 Querying bits and input terminals ........................................................... 248

18.3.1 Testing single bits .................................................................... 248
18.3.2 Testing several bits.................................................................. 248
18.4 Querying an edge ................................................................................... 249
18.4.1 Example 1................................................................................ 249
18.4.2 Example 2................................................................................ 251
18.5 Value of a number................................................................................... 252
18.6 MoviLink command ................................................................................. 253
18.6.1 Reading an internal unit parameter ......................................... 253
18.6.2 Writing a variable via SBus ..................................................... 254
18.6.3 Reading a parameter via SBus................................................ 255
18.7 SCOM communication ............................................................................ 256
18.7.1 Receiver................................................................................... 256
18.7.2 Sender ..................................................................................... 257
18.8 Touch probe interrupt processing ........................................................... 258
18.9 State machine, fieldbus control with emergency mode........................... 261
18.9.1 Mode 0..................................................................................... 265
18.9.2 Mode 1..................................................................................... 265
18.9.3 Mode 2..................................................................................... 265
18.9.4 Mode 3..................................................................................... 265
18.10 Compiler programming frame ................................................................. 266
19 Compiler – Error Messages............................................................................ 275
20 Assembler – Introduction............................................................................... 276
20.1 Setting the user travel units .................................................................... 276
20.1.1 Travel distance factors NUMERATOR/DENOMINATOR ........ 276
20.1.2 UNIT ........................................................................................ 278
20.2 First steps ............................................................................................... 279
20.2.1 Starting the IPOSplus® Assembler ........................................... 279
20.2.2 Creating a new program .......................................................... 280
20.2.3 Compiling and starting the program......................................... 281
21 Assembler – Editor ......................................................................................... 282
21.1 Example .................................................................................................. 283
21.2 Creating programs .................................................................................. 283
21.2.1 Inserting command lines.......................................................... 283
21.3 Compiling and downloading .................................................................... 284
21.4 Starting/stopping programs ..................................................................... 285
21.4.1 Variable window....................................................................... 285
21.5 File/unit comparison ................................................................................ 285
21.6 Debugger ................................................................................................ 285
21.6.1 Execute to cursor..................................................................... 286
21.6.2 Single step ............................................................................... 286
21.7 Loading the program from the inverter.................................................... 287
21.8 Overview of the icons.............................................................................. 287
Contents
22 Assembler – Programming ............................................................................ 288

22.1 Basics ..................................................................................................... 288
22.1.1 Program header....................................................................... 288
22.1.2 Task 1 / Task 2 / Task 3 .......................................................... 288
22.1.3 Comments ............................................................................... 288
22.1.4 Program branches ................................................................... 288
22.1.5 Subroutine system ................................................................... 288
22.1.6 Program loops ......................................................................... 289
22.1.7 Positioning commands............................................................. 289
22.1.8 Binary/analog inputs/outputs ................................................... 289
22.1.9 Access to system values/parameters ...................................... 289
22.1.10 Variables.................................................................................. 290
22.1.11 Program line ............................................................................ 290
22.2 Binary inputs/outputs .............................................................................. 291
22.2.1 Binary inputs ............................................................................ 291
22.2.2 Binary outputs.......................................................................... 293
22.3 Analog inputs/outputs ............................................................................. 296
22.3.1 Reading analog inputs/outputs ................................................ 296
22.3.2 Setting analog outputs ............................................................. 296
23 Assembler – Commands ................................................................................ 297
23.1 General information ................................................................................ 297
23.2 Overview of commands .......................................................................... 297
23.2.1 Arithmetic commands .............................................................. 297
23.2.2 Bit commands .......................................................................... 298
23.2.3 Communication commands ..................................................... 298
23.2.4 Positioning commands............................................................. 299
23.2.5 Program commands ................................................................ 299
23.2.6 Set commands......................................................................... 300
23.2.7 Special unit commands............................................................ 300
23.2.8 Comparison commands........................................................... 301
23.3 Arithmetic commands ............................................................................. 302
23.3.1 Fundamental operations ADD / SUB / MUL / DIV ................... 302
23.3.2 Auxiliary arithmetic functions NOT / MOD ............................... 303
23.3.3 Logical operations AND / OR / XOR........................................ 304
23.3.4 SHIFT commands SHL / SHR / ASHR .................................... 305
23.4 Bit commands ......................................................................................... 307
23.4.1 Bit commands BSET / BCLR / BMOV / BMOVN ..................... 307
23.5 Communication commands .................................................................... 309
23.5.1 MOVLNK.................................................................................. 309
23.5.2 MOVCOM ................................................................................ 314
23.5.3 MOVON ................................................................................... 315
23.5.4 SCOM ...................................................................................... 316
23.5.5 SCOMON................................................................................. 321
23.5.6 SCOMST ................................................................................. 322
Contents
23.6 Positioning commands ............................................................................ 323

23.6.1 Reference travel GO0.............................................................. 323
23.6.2 GOA absolute positioning / GOR relative positioning .............. 325
23.7 Program commands................................................................................ 329
23.7.1 Program command END.......................................................... 329
23.7.2 Subroutine call CALL ............................................................... 329
23.7.3 Jump commands JMP ............................................................. 330
23.7.4 Loop commands LOOP ........................................................... 332
23.7.5 No Operation NOP / remark REM / return RET / TASK /
TASK2 / wait WAIT .................................................................. 333
23.8 Set commands ........................................................................................ 336
23.8.1 Copy variables COPY.............................................................. 336
23.8.2 Read system values GETSYS................................................. 336
23.8.3 Set commands variable SET / fault response SETFR / Indirect
addressing SETI / Interrupt SETINT /
system values SETSYS........................................................... 339
23.8.4 SETSYS................................................................................... 344
23.8.5 VARINT.................................................................................... 347
23.9 Special unit commands ........................................................................... 349
23.9.1 ASTOP / MEM / TOUCHP / WDOFF / WDON ........................ 349
23.10 Comparison commands .......................................................................... 355
23.10.1 Comparison operations CPEQ / CPGE / CPGT / CPLE /
CPLT / CPNE........................................................................... 355
23.10.2 Logical operations ANDL / ORL / NOTL .................................. 358
24 Assembler – Examples ................................................................................... 360
24.1 "Flashing light" sample program ............................................................. 360
24.1.1 Sample "Controller" ................................................................. 360
24.1.2 Sample "Positioning" ............................................................... 361
24.2 "Hoist" sample program .......................................................................... 362
24.2.1 Characteristics ......................................................................... 362
24.2.2 Settings.................................................................................... 362
24.2.3 Schematic structure ................................................................. 363
24.2.4 Terminal wiring ........................................................................ 364
24.2.5 Setting parameters relevant to the example ............................ 365
24.2.6 Calculating the IPOSplus® parameters..................................... 365
24.2.7 Input terminals ......................................................................... 366
24.2.8 Output terminals ...................................................................... 366
24.2.9 Program source code (with remarks)....................................... 367
24.3 "Jog mode" sample program................................................................... 368
24.3.2 Settings.................................................................................... 368
24.3.3 Input terminals ......................................................................... 369
Contents
24.4 "Table positioning" sample program ....................................................... 372

24.4.2 Settings.................................................................................... 373
24.4.3 Input terminals ......................................................................... 374
Index................................................................................................................. 378
General Information
1 Structure of the safety notes
1 General Information
1.1 Structure of the safety notes
The safety notes in these operating instructions are designed as follows:
Pictogram SIGNAL WORD

Type and source of danger.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to prevent the danger.
Pictogram Signal word Meaning Consequences if

disregarded
Example: DANGER Imminent danger Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries
General danger
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
Specific danger,
e.g. electric shock NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its environ-
ment
INFORMA- Useful information or tip.

TION Simplifies the handling of the
drive system.
General Information
Liability for defects
1
1.2 Liability for defects

Compliance with this manual and the operating instructions of the units is prerequisite
for fault-free operation and fulfillment of any right to claim under warranty. You should
therefore read the manual and operating instructions of the units before you start work-
ing with the software and units.
Make sure that the operating instructions are available to persons responsible for the
machinery and its operation as well as to persons who work independently on the units.
You must also ensure that the operating instructions are legible.
1.3 Exclusion of liability

You must comply with the information contained in this manual and in the operating in-
structions of the units to ensure safe operation and to achieve the specified product
characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRIVE assumes no liability
for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance
of the operating instructions. In such cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.4 Copyright
© 2009 – SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
Safety Notes
2 General information
2 Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons and
damage to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and
observed. Ensure that persons responsible for the system and its operation as well as
persons who work independently on the units have read through the manual carefully
and understood it. If you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation,
please contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
The following safety notes refer to the use of the IPOSplus® positioning and sequence
control system. Also take into account the supplementary safety notes in the individual
sections of this documentation and in the documentation of the units.
2.1 General information

Read through this manual carefully before you start working with IPOSplus®.
This document does not replace the detailed operating instructions for the units. This
manual assumes that the user has access to, and is familiar with, the documentation on
the units.
Never install damaged products or put them into operation. Submit a complaint to the
shipping company immediately in the event of damage. Only qualified personnel observ-
ing the applicable accident prevention regulations and operating instructions are al-
lowed to perform installation and startup tasks.
During operation, units with this type of enclosure may have live, uninsulated, and some-
times moving or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.
Removing covers without authorization, improper use, as well as incorrect installation or
operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to machinery.
Refer to the documentation for more information.
Safety Notes
Designated use
2
2.2 Designated use

Use the positioning and sequence control system with IPOSplus® for the following units
from SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG:
• MOVIDRIVE® B
• MOVITRAC® B
• MQx
In addition, the following discontinued products support IPOSplus®:
• MOVIDRIVE® A
• MOVIDRIVE® compact
• MOVITRAC® 07
2.3 Target group

The IPOSplus® user is a qualified person has been trained accordingly.
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that the user attends additional product training
courses for units and motors that are programmed with IPOSplus®.
Any work related to installation, startup and maintenance of the devices as well as trou-
bleshooting may only be performed by qualified personnel. Observe IEC 60364 and
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 60664 or DIN VDE 0110 as well as the
national accident prevention regulations.
Qualified personnel in the context of these basic safety notes are persons familiar with
installation, assembly, startup and operation of the product who possess the required
qualifications.
All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
be carried out by qualified personnel who are appropriately trained.
2.4 Programming errors

The IPOSplus® positioning and sequence control system allows you to adjust the
IPOSplus® units to meet the exact specifications of your application. As with all position-
ing systems there is, however, the risk of a programming error, which may result in un-
expected (although not uncontrolled) system behavior.
System Description
3 Introduction
3 System Description
3.1 Introduction
The basic functions and options of IPOSplus® units ensure that the program is no longer
only an open-loop speed controller.
In fact, the positioning and sequence control system integrated in MOVIDRIVE® can
often take a great deal of the load off the machine controller (PLC), or maybe even re-
place it.
Reducing the central control offers SEW customers significant potential savings in terms
of hardware and the complexity of electrical installation.
The programming work is divided between the PLC and inverter control. However, users
must familiarize themselves with the system. This includes getting to know IPOSplus® if
you want to make effective use its benefits.
3.1.1 Scope of this documentation

The present documentation provides information on the positioning and sequence con-
trol with IPOSplus® for MOVIDRIVE® B.
With a reduced command set, IPOSplus® can also be used in conjunction with the
MOVITRAC® B control cabinet inverter and the MQx modules from decentralized tech-
nology. Any deviations regarding the functionality compared to MOVIDRIVE® B are
pointed out in the respective technical data in the following sections:
• IPOSplus® for MOVITRAC® B see (page 118)
• IPOSplus® for MQx see (page 120)
First, the manual describes the language-independent functions of IPOSplus®.
• Position control
• Position processing
• Task management
• Interrupt management
• IPOS parameters
• IPOS variables
Then, the documentation focuses on the programming in compiler language.
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you create new programs in Compiler language.
All MOVIDRIVE® B units can be programmed in this language.
Next, the documentation focuses on the programming in assemble language.
The final section describes program examples. It includes an example for beginners with
the basic structure of the state machine of a sequential program. We recommend that
you begin with this basic structure and develop the user program from there.
System Description
3
IPOSplus® – features
3.1.2 Creating programs

You can create IPOSplus® programs using either the Assembler or the Compiler. Both
programming tools are included in the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software package.
INFORMATION
Application modules solve typical drive tasks without the user having to create a pro-
gram. Instead of programming, you only have to set the parameters for a tried and
tested program (application module) created by SEW-EURODRIVE. This saves you
time, and you do not need the programming know-how described in this manual.
3.2 IPOSplus® – features

• In conjunction with encoder feedback, IPOSplus® positioning control provides high-
performance point-to-point positioning capability.
• The program is run independent of encoder feedback and operating mode.
• The unit continues to run the user program even if the unit develops a malfunction
(troubleshooting is possible in the user program).
• IPOSplus® can run several user programs/tasks simultaneously, independent of one
another. Tasks can be interrupted using interrupts.
• The user programs can contain several 100 program lines (see Technical data
(page 25)).
• Easy-to-use and comprehensive control options for IPOSplus® units.
• Access to all available options:
– Input/output card
– Fieldbus interfaces
– Synchronous operation card
• Extensive communication options:
– System bus (S-bus)
– RS-485 (RS-232 with USS21A, UWS11A, UWS21A interface adapters)
– Fieldbus interfaces
• Processing of binary and analog input/output signals.
• Positioning with adjustable travel speed and positioning ramps.
• Presetting for position, speed and torque control loops with minimized lag error.
System Description
3
• Absolute encoder processing.

• 1024 32-bit variables are available in the IPOSplus® program (see Technical data
(page 25)).
• With IPOSplus®, all inverter parameters can be read and written via communication
commands.
• 2 touch probe inputs.
• Ramp types:
– Linear
– Sine
– Square
– Bus ramp
– Jerk-limited
– Electronic cam
– I-synchronous operation
• Status and monitoring functions:
– Lag error monitoring
– Position reporting
– Software and hardware limit switches
– Encoder function
• 9 reference travel types
• The following functions can be changed during movement:
– Target position
– Travel speed
– Positioning ramp
– Torque
• "Endless positioning" is possible.
• Override function.
• The following technology functions can be controlled with a virtual encoder:
• Electronic cam
• Internal synchronous operation
System Description
3
• Programming in the Compiler also offers:

– Program creation in a high-level language
– Symbolic variable names
– Possibility of creating program modules that can be used again in other projects
– Clear, modular and structured programming
– Different programming techniques for loops
– Compiler control using preprocessor commands
– Standard structures
– User-defined structures
– Standard functions
– Debugger for troubleshooting
– Extensive options for making comments
• Programming in the Assembler offers:
– Remark lines
– Programming in user travel units (units are entered in the program header)
• Setpoint selection. Depending on the hardware and the required setpoint, the
following options are available for the specification:
– Analog setpoints
– Fixed setpoints
– Fixed setpoints + analog setpoints
– Motor potentiometer
– Master/slave operation with SBus
– Master/slave operation with RS-485
– DRS setpoint (only with the DRS11 option)
– Fieldbus/fieldbus monitor setpoint (only with the fieldbus interface option)
– IPOSplus® position setpoint
Whether you need to use encoder feedback for setpoint processing depends on
which operating mode is selected. The setpoint that is actually active depends on the
following settings:
– Operating mode P700
– Setpoint source P100
– Setting of the input terminal parameters P600 ... P619
– Fieldbus PO data assignment/monitor mode
– Selection of manual operation
System Description
3
Controlling IPOSplus® units
3.3 Controlling IPOSplus® units

IPOSplus® units can be controlled as follows:
• Control via input terminals on the unit
• IPOSplus® control word on "System variable" H484 CTRL. WORD
• RS-485 interface
• Fieldbus interface
• SBus (system bus)
3.3.1 Active control signal source

Control via input terminals and the IPOSplus® control word H484 are always in effect.
You can determine additional control signal sources using the following parameters:
• Setpoint source P100
• Control signal source P101
• Process data description P870 ... P872
3.4 Technology options / application modules

3.4.1 Technology options
MOVIDRIVE® units with the technology option (ending OT in the unit designation) offer
additional functions, such as:
• Internal Synchronous Operation (ISYNC)
• Electronic cam
• Application modules
• Auto ASR (Anti slip regulation, currently only available with MOVIDRIVE® A)
• SBus TP (SBus touch probe, only available with MOVIDRIVE® A; in the
MOVIDRIVE® B standard unit, this is solved using a variable interrupt).
The functions "internal synchronous operation (ISYNC)" and "electronic cam" are ex-
plained in the section "IPOSplus® and synchronized movements" and described in detail
in separate manuals. In these cases, additional IPOSplus® variables are assigned sys-
tem functions that you can address in IPOSplus® user programs.
System Description
Technology options / application modules
3
3.4.2 Application modules

An application module is a protected user program designed by SEW that can be loaded
into the inverter.
A comprehensive package of coordinated functions, easy-to-use input boxes and finely-
tuned user guidance make startup easier to handle. The user cannot adjust the
IPOSplus® program.
Overview of application modules

Positioning
473361163
Winding
473365515
System Description
3 Technology options / application modules
Overview of application modules

Flying saw
473369867
Internal Synchronous Operation ISYNC
(only MOVIDRIVE® B and MCH)
473374219
Rotatory positioning
473378571
The intelligent application modules in the technology option offer a new level of function-
ality. All the important machine data is easily accessible. There are almost no sources
for errors, since only those parameters required for the application have to be entered.
All relevant data, for example, terminal states or position values, can be observed using
a diagnostics tool during the ongoing operating process.
The functionality of each these modules is described in individual manuals.
System Description
Technical data
3
3.5 Technical data

3.5.1 MOVIDRIVE® B
Encoder resolution: IPOSplus® always operates with 4096 increments/motor revolution
X15, motor encoder (Pre-requisite: Encoder resolution of 128, 512, 1024 or 2048 pulses/motor revolution
X14, external encoder (any other encoder resolutions are not permitted) or resolver)
X62, absolute encoder (including absolute
encoder from HIPERFACE®)
Maximum program length/program memory: 16 kByte corresponds to ca. 200 ... 250 Assembler commands
Command processing time: the total in Task 1 und Task 2 ≤ 12 Assembler commands/ms):
Task 1: 1 ... 10 Assembler commands/ms
Task 2: 2 ... 11 Assembler commands/ms
Task 3: free computing time
Interrupts: 1 interrupt triggered by timer, error or touch probe interrupts task 1.
4 variable interrupts that interrupt task 2 and 3.
Variables: 1024, of which 128 (0 ... 127) can be stored in non-volatile memory
Value range: - 231 ... +(231 - 1)
System variable area IPOS variables H453 to H560
Touch probe inputs: 2 inputs, processing time 200 µs
Sampling interval of analog inputs: 1 ms
Sampling interval of binary inputs: 1 ms
Binary inputs/outputs: MOVIDRIVE® B: 8 inputs/6 outputs
DIO option: 8 inputs/8 outputs
DIP option: 8 inputs/8 outputs
Analog inputs/outputs: MOVIDRIVE® B: 1 input (0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
DIO option: 1 input (0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 0 ... 20 mA)
2 outputs (±10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
3.5.2 MOVITRAC® B
Encoder resolution: MOVITRAC® B has no encoder inputs but supports the position detection via binary
inputs (counter input).
For the technical data of the binary inputs, refer to section "Position detection via
binary inputs" (page 96)
Maximum program length/program memory: 8 kByte
Command processing time: Task 1: 1 Assembler command/ms
Task 2: 2 Assembler commands/ms
Interrupts: -
Touch probe inputs: -
Sampling interval of analog inputs: 1 ms
Sampling interval of binary inputs: 5 ms
Binary inputs/outputs: MOVITRAC® B 6 inputs/3 outputs
FIO21B option 7 Inputs
Analog inputs/outputs: MOVITRAC® B 1 input (0 ... 10 V)
FIO11B option 1 input (± 10 V)
1 output (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
System Description
3 Technical data
3.5.3 MQx
Encoder resolution: MQx module has no encoder inputs but supports the position detection via binary
inputs (counter input).
For the technical data of the binary inputs, refer to section "Position detection via
binary inputs" (page 96)
Maximum program length/program memory: 4 kByte
Command processing time: Task 1: 1 Assembler command/ms
Task 2: 2 Assembler commands/ms
Interrupts: -
Touch probe inputs: -
Sampling interval of analog inputs: -
Sampling interval of binary inputs: 4 ms/input frequency at the counter inputs: max. 4 KHz
Binary inputs/outputs: MQ.21./MQ.22.: 4 inputs and 2 outputs
MQ.32.: 6 Inputs
Analog inputs/outputs: -
System Description
Reference documents
3
3.6 Reference documents

This document describes the IPOSplus® positioning and sequence control integrated in
MOVIDRIVE®.
The following reference list is an overview of the documents referred to in this documen-
tation. You do not have to have read these documents to be able to program with
IPOSplus®; they simply offer additional information.
All the documents are available on the SEW-EURODRIVE website under
http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
3.6.1 General manuals

• MOVIDRIVE® MDX60B/61B system manual
• MOVITRAC® B system manual
• Manuals for the MQx field distributors
3.6.2 Manuals for serial interfaces/fieldbuses

• MOVIDRIVE® MDX60B/61B Communication and Fieldbus Unit Profile
• DFx MOVIDRIVE® fieldbus interface
3.6.3 Manuals for synchronized axis movements

• MOVIDRIVE® Electronic Cam, addendum to the system manual
• MOVIDRIVE® Synchronous Operation Card Type DRS11
• MOVIDRIVE® Internal Synchronous Operation
3.6.4 Manuals for application modules

• MOVIDRIVE® Positioning with Absolute Encoder Option DIP11
• MOVIDRIVE® Extended Positioning via Bus
• MOVIDRIVE® Bus Positioning
• MOVIDRIVE® Table Positioning with Bus Control
• MOVIDRIVE® Modulo Positioning
3.6.5 Manuals for the MQx fieldbus interfaces

• Drive System for Decentralized Installation: PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors
• Drive System for Decentralized Installation: INTERBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors
• Drive System for Decentralized Installation: DeviceNet/CANopen Interfaces, Field
Distributors
kVA n IPOS Variables
4 f
Introduction
i
Hz
P Hz
4 IPOS Variables
4.1 Introduction
The integrated positioning and sequence control system uses global variables that are
used by all the tasks and interrupts. There are no local variables that are only declared
either in a task or a function.
All variables (page 25) are 32-bit variables treated as signed integers during calcula-
tions and comparisons. In the user program, you must check that the final result of a cal-
culation lies within the number range.
The number range can be represented as follows in a number circle:
4294967295 0 (decimal absolute)

0xFFFF FFFF 0x0 (hexadecimal)
-1 0 (IPOS value)
2147483648 2147483647
0x8000 0000 0x7FFF FFFF
-2147483648 2147483647
473666955
Example:
H0
H 0 = 4, H1 = 7, H 3 = =0
H1
H 0 = 2147 483 647, H1 = 1, H 3 = H 0 + H1 = −2147 483 648
Each variable has an index that can be used to read and write variables using, for ex-
ample, the Movilink command (_MoviLink/ MOVLNK). The index is calculated as follows:
Index = VarNo. + 11000
Example: H371 has the index 11371.
IPOS Variables kVA n
Overview of the system variables
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz
4.2 Overview of the system variables

Some IPOS variables are assigned set functions and are referred to as system variables
(page 25).
The symbolic names are available in the Compiler when one of the following lines is in-
serted at the start of the program:
#include <constb.h> //symb. name MOVIDRIVE B system variables
The following table describes the function of the system variables and their names in the
Compiler and Assembler.
Variables in the range specified that are not assigned are reserved for internal functions
and cannot be used for user variables.
No. Name Description
Compiler /
Assembler
128 This variable can be used in a user-specific IPOS program. The variable is used by the application modules to
store the program identification.
360 Variable range for This variable range is assigned additional system variables if the technology options internal synchronous
... internal synchro- operation or electronic cam are used. In all other cases, these can be used by the user as required.
452 nous operation or
electronic cam
453 ModuloCtrl / Control word for the modulo function (see also modulo function and IPOS parameter).
MODULOCTRL Bit 0 TargetReset_Off
Bit 0 = 0: The current positioning task is deleted (ModTagPos is set to ModActPos) if the positioning operation
is interrupted (for example, if the enable is revoked or if the controller inhibit or stop bit is set).
Bit 0 = 1: The target position is held even if the enable has been revoked or if the controller inhibit or the stop
bit has been set. If the drive is enabled again, it continues with the positioning process.
Bit 1 TargetGAZ_Select
Bit 1 = 0: Standard setting, 360° output corresponds to 216 incr.
Bit 1 = 1: Setting for increasing the resolution: 360° corresponds to the product from modulo numerator P961
x modulo encoder resolution P963. Positioning cannot be performed over several revolutions.
454 ModTagPos / Modulo target position
MOD.TAGPOS If a changed value is written to the modulo target position for an enabled inverter, positioning begins in output
units. The position setpoint (for H453.1 = 0) is set in 16 bit resolution in the unit H454 MODTAGPOS = k x
360° + 0 ... 360°= k x 216 + 0 ... (216 -1) (k = number of complete revolutions).
Once a new value has been written to the variable, only the target position within a revolution is visible in vari-
able H454. We recommend that you also write the new value to a temporary variable for improved diagnos-
tics.
Once position 454 has been written, the firmware calculates an incremental target H492. This causes H473 bit
19 "In position" to remain set for up to 1 ms.
455 ModActPos / Modulo actual position
MOD.ACTPOS The current modulo actual position moves (in 16 bit resolution when H453.1 = 0) between 0 and 216 incre-
ments (0° and 360°).
456 ModCount / Increments within a modulo revolution before scaling to the output.
MOD COUNT
Display value of the internal temporary result when the incremental encoder value H509/H510/H511 (IPOS
encoder value) is converted to the modulo actual position H455.
For H456 = (IPOS encoder value) MOD (P961 x P963)
H455 = H456/(P961 x P963) x 216 (prerequisite: H453, bit 1 = 0)
See section "Modulo positioning". If 0 is written to H456, H455 is set automatically to 0.
4 f
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
473 StatusWord / The status word can be used to query the operating status of the inverter.
STAT.WORD Bit function with level "1" Bit function with level "1"
0 No function 13 Imax signal (P442)
1 /Malfunction 14 /Motor utilization 1
2 Ready 15 /Motor utilization 2
3 Output stage on 16 /DRS prewarning
4 Rotating field ON 17 /DRS lag error
5 Brake released 18 DRS slave in position
6 Brake applied 19 IPOS in position (see also H493)
7 Motor standstill (from n < 20 rpm) 20 IPOS referenced
8 Parameter set 21 Reserved
9 Speed reference (P400) 22 /IPOS fault
10 Speed window (P410) 23 Reserved
11 Setpoint/actual comparison (P420) 24 Current limit reached
12 Current reference (P430) 25 LSM commutated
26 S-pattern profile is generated
27 Inverter in safe stop
28..31 Reserved
If the actual position of the drive is within the position window around the target position, the
"IPOS in position" bit is set even when the enable signal is removed or the controller inhibit is acti-
vated.
474 Scope474 / These two variables can be used together with the oscilloscope SCOPE function integrated in MOVITOOLS®
SCOPE 474 MotionStudio to record measured values.
475 Scope475 / Example: Measurement of the actual position value of a modulo axis. In the IPOS program, the command
H474 = H455 is called up cyclically and in SCOPE, channel 1 is set to IPOS variable H474 Low and channel 2
SCOPE 475
is set to IPOS variable H474 High.
476 DRS_Ctrl / Signal level of the binary outputs of the synchronous operation board DRS11, READ and SET.
DRS CTRL. Bit terminal level
0 X40.9 AUSG0
1 X40.10 AUSG1
2..14 Reserved
15 Set hardware fault DRS (fault 48)
16..31 Reserved
477 DRS_Status / Signal level of the binary inputs and status signals of the synchronous operation board type DRS11,
DRS STATUS READ.
Bit terminal level / status signals
0 X40.5 INP4 free input 1
1 X40.6 INP5 Free input 2
2 /DRS prewarning
3 /DRS lag error
4 DRS slave in position
5 Master standstill
6..31 Reserved
478 AnaOutpIPOS2 / Analog outputs of the terminal expansion board type DIO11, only SET.
ANA.OUT IP2 The value of variable H478 is output on an analog output when the corresponding terminal is programmed to
"IPOS OUTPUT 2".
Option DIO11 is required for MOVIDRIVE® A and B; for MCH and MCS / MCV / MCV 40A, an output can be
programmed as a binary output or analog output.
Variable value physical outputOutput terminal assignment
- 10000..0..10000 AOV1/AOC1/AO01 P640 analog output AO1 = IPOS OUTPUT 2
- 10000..0..10000 AOV2/AOC2/AO01 P643 analog output AO2 = IPOS OUTPUT 2
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
479 AnaOutpIPOS / Analog outputs of the terminal expansion board type DIO11, only SET.
ANA.OUT IP The value of variable H479 is output on an analog output when the corresponding terminal is programmed to
"IPOS OUTPUT".
Option DIO11 is required for MOVIDRIVE® A and B; for MCH and MCS / MCV / MCV 40A, an output can be
programmed as a binary output or analog output.
Variable value physical outputOutput terminal assignment
- 10000..0..10000 AOV1/AOC1/AO01 P640 analog output AO1 = IPOS OUTPUT
- 10000..0..10000 AOV2/AOC2/AO01 P643 analog output AO2 = IPOS OUTPUT
480 OptOutpIPOS / Binary outputs of the terminal expansion board types DIO11/DIP11, only SET.
OPT.OUT IP The READ function can be performed for MOVIDRIVE® A using H482 and for MOVIDRIVE® B using H521.
If a DIO11 or DIP11 option is not inserter, virtual terminals can be set in status word 2 via fieldbus if, for exam-
ple, P873 = STATUSWORD 2.
The bits of variable H480 are reproduced on the binary outputs of the basic unit if the relevant terminal is set
to IPOS OUTPUT.
If a binary output is toggled in IPOS, the physical output at the terminal is toggled 1 ms later if it is set as the
IPOS output.
Bit IPOS name DIO (+ DIO) DIO + DIP DIO + -field- DIP DIP + field- Fieldbus
bus bus
P63x has an effect on DIO P63x has an effect on DIP P873 status
word 2
0 DO10 X23:1 X23:1 X23:1 X61:1 X61:1 Bit 8
1 DO11 X23:2 X23:2 X23:2 X61:2 X61:2 Bit 9
2 DO12 X23:3 X23:3 X23:3 X61:3 X61:3 Bit 10
3 DO13 X23:4 X23:4 X23:4 X61:4 X61:4 Bit 11
4 DO14 X23:5 X23:5 X23:5 X61:5 X61:5 Bit 12
5 DO15 X23:6 X23:6 X23:6 X61:6 X61:6 Bit 13
6 DO16 X23:7 X23:7 X23:7 X61:7 X61:7 Bit 14
7 DO17 X23:8 X23:8 X23:8 X61:8 X61:8 Bit 15
8 X61:1
9 (X23:1) X61:2
10 ... X61:3
11 (X23:8) X61:4
12 X61:5
13 X61:6
14 X61:7
15 X61:8
481 StdOutpIPOS / Binary outputs of the basic unit, only SET.
STD.OUT IP If a binary output is toggled in IPOS, the physical output at the terminal is toggled 1 ms later if it is set as the
IPOS output.
Bit IPOS name
0 DB00 cannot be programmed, fixed assignment with "/Brake"
(0) DO00 MQx If P628 = IPOS OUTPUT (only MQx)
1 DO01 If P620 = IPOS OUTPUT
2 DO02 If P621 = IPOS OUTPUT
3 DO03 Only with MOVIDRIVE® B if P622 = IPOS OUTPUT
4 f
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
482 OutputLevel / Signal level of the binary outputs, READ only.
OUTPUT LVL Bit IPOS name DIO (+ DIO) DIO + DIP DIO + -field- DIP DIP + field- Fieldbus
MOVIDRIVE® A bus bus
(MOVIDRIVE® B: P63x has an effect on DIO P63x has an effect on DIP P873 status
H521) word 2
0 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00
1 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01
2 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02
3 DO10 X23:1 X23:1 X23:1 X61:1 X61:1 Bit 8
4 DO11 X23:2 X23:2 X23:2 X61:2 X61:2 Bit 9
5 DO12 X23:3 X23:3 X23:3 X61:3 X61:3 Bit 10
6 DO13 X23:4 X23:4 X23:4 X61:4 X61:4 Bit 11
7 DO14 X23:5 X23:5 X23:5 X61:5 X61:5 Bit 12
8 DO15 X23:6 X23:6 X23:6 X61:6 X61:6 Bit 13
9 DO16 X23:7 X23:7 X23:7 X61:7 X61:7 Bit 14
10 DO17 X23:8 X23:8 X23:8 X61:8 X61:8 Bit 15
11 X61:1
12 (X23:1) X61:2
13 ... X61:3
14 (X23:8) X61:4
15 X61:5
16 X61:6
X61:7
X61:8
483 InputLevel / Signal level of the binary inputs, READ only.
INPUT LVL Bit IPOS name DIO (+ DIO) DIO + DIP DIO + -field- DIP DIP + field- Fieldbus
MOVIDRIVE® A bus bus P870 = sta-
(MOVIDRIVE® B: tus word 2
H520) 0 DI00 Depends on the basic unit, e.g. X13:1
1 DI01 X13:2
2 DI02 X13:3
3 DI03 X13:4
4 DI04 X13:5
5 DI05 X13:6
6 DI10 X22:1 X22:1 X22:1 X60:1 X60:1 Bit 8
7 DI11 X22:2 X22:2 X22:2 X60:2 X60:2 Bit 9
8 DI12 X22:3 X22:3 X22:3 X60:3 X60:3 Bit 10
9 DI13 X22:4 X22:4 X22:4 X60:4 X60:4 Bit 11
10 DI14 X22:5 X22:5 X22:5 X60:5 X60:5 Bit 12
11 DI15 X22:6 X22:6 X22:6 X60:6 X60:6 Bit 13
12 DI16 X22:7 X22:7 X22:7 X60:7 X60:7 Bit 14
13 DI17 X22:8 X22:8 X22:8 X60:8 X60:8 Bit 15
14 X60:1
15 (X22:1) X60:2
16 ... X60:3
17 (X22:8) X60:4
18 X60:5
19 X60:6
20 X60:7
21 X60:8
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
484 ControlWord / IPOSplus® control word (unit functions READ and SET).
CTRL.WORD The IPOSplus® control word can always be used, irrespective of the operating mode, control signal source and
setpoint source. The IPOSplus® control word is connected by an OR command with the terminal functions, the
fieldbus control word and the control word in the unit via the RS-485/RS-232 and the SBus.
Bit function with level "1" Bit function with level "1"
0 No function 16 Reserved
1 No enable 17 Reference cam
2 CW 18 Reference travel start
3 CCW 19 Slave free running
4 n11/n21 (fixed setpoint 1) 20 Setpoint block
5 n12/n22 (fixed setpoint 2) 21 Reserved
6 Fixed setpoint selection 22 DRS zero point set
7 Parameter switchover (param. set 2) 23 DRS slave start
8 Ramp switchover (ramp set 2) 24 DRS teach in
9 Motor potentiometer up 25 Reserved
10 Motor potentiometer down 26 Reserved
11 External fault 27 Condition Monitoring switching signal:
12 Fault reset Drive vibration warning
13 Hold control 28 Condition Monitoring switching signal:
14 CW limit switch Vibration fault
15 CCW limit switch 29 Condition Monitoring switching signal:
Brake wear error
30 Controller inhibit
31 Reserved
485 T0_Reload / READ and SET loading value for the user timer 0 cycle time. The cycle time can be specified with H485 if a
T0 RELOAD user timer (TIMER0 (H489)) is to be used cyclically with the SET INTERRUPT (SETINT) command. The time
value entered in H485 is reloaded automatically with this time value every time the timer 0 runs down (H489 =
0). Value range: 0 ... 231 -1 ms.
486 Reserved
487 Timer_2 / Time for user timer 2, READ and SET.
TIMER 2 User time 2 counts upwards.
Value range: 0 ... 231 -1 ms.
TIMER 1 User timer 1 counts downwards to 0.
TIMER 0 User timer 0 counts downwards to 0. An interrupt branch is performed when the timer value reaches 0 if the
SET INTERRUPT (SETINT) command is being used. The cycle time can be specified with the variable T0
RELOAD (H485) if a user timer is to be used cyclically with the SET INTERRUPT (SETINT) command. See
section "Task management and interrupts".
4 f
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
490 WdogTimer / Time for the user watchdog, READ and SET.
WD.TIMER The watchdog timer counts down to 0. The WATCHDOG ON (WDON) command activates the timer and
determines the cycle time.
491 SetpointPos / Current setpoint position, READ.
SETP.POS. IMPORTANT: System control variable Value must not be overwritten.
The setpoint position always has the following unit, regardless of the encoder pulse count per rev-
olution: 4096 Inc./motor revolution (encoder resolution ≥ 512).
The current setpoint position represents the absolute position that is currently valid for position
control in the travel job in progress. The changes of the setpoint position result from the calcu-
lated travel profile taking into account the positioning ramp, the travel speed, the ramp type etc. Once the
requested travel has been completed and the drive is in standstill, H491 corresponds to H492.
Value range: -231 ... 0 ... 231 -1 inc.
492 TargetPos / Current target position, READ and SET.
TARGET POS The target position always has the following unit, regardless of the encoder pulse count per revolution: 4096
Inc./motor revolution (encoder resolution ≥ 512).
This variable represents the current target position of the travel job currently in progress. H492 displays the
position in its absolute form.
Example:
1. current drive position: 50000 Inc.
2. GOR NOWAIT #-8000 Inc.
3. current target position: 42000 Inc.
Value range: -231 ... 0 ... 231 -1 inc.
If H492 is written directly (not using a GO command), H473, bit 19 "In position" remains set for up to 1 ms.
493 PosWindow / Positioning window, READ and SET. H493 is identical to P922.
POS.WINDOW The positioning window defines a distance range around the target position (H492) of a travel or stop com-
mand (GOx or ASTOP TARGET POSITION). As soon as the drive has reached the positioning window, the
signal "IPOS IN POSITION" is generated. This message is available via a binary output that is to be parame-
terized to the "IPOS IN POSITION" function and in the system variable H473, bit 19. The "IPOS IN POSI-
TION" message is reset as soon as a GO command is placed.
The position window is always monitored provided an operating mode with IPOS is active (P700). The posi-
tioning accuracy is not affected by the value of the position window.
Setting range: 0 ... 50 ... 215 - 1 increments
494 LagWindow / Lag error window, READ and SET. H494 is identical to P923.
LAG WINDOW The lag error window defines the maximum permitted difference between the current setpoint position, which
the ramp generator specifies every 1 ms, and the actual position. If the specified value is exceeded, fault F42
(lag error) is triggered. The response to F42 must be set using parameter P834 "Response LAG ERROR".
Deactivation: You can deactivate the lag error monitoring by setting the P923 Lag error window to 0.
Setting range: 0 ... 5000 ... 231 - 1 increments
495 LagDistance / Lag distance, READ.
LAG DISTAN Value of the current lag distance in positioning (difference between setpoint and actual position).
Value range: 0 ... 231 - 1 increments
496 SLS_right / Software limit switch CW, READ and SET. H496 is identical to P920.
SLS RIGHT Limits travel in a clockwise direction. The value is given in user travel units.
Setting range: - 231 ... 0 user units ... 231 - 1 increments
497 SLS_left / Software limit switch CCW, READ and SET. H497 is identical to P921.
SLS LEFT Limits travel in a counterclockwise direction. The value is given in user travel units.
Setting range: - 231 ... 0 user units ... 231 - 1 increments
498 RefOffset / Reference offset, READ and SET. H498 is identical to P900.
REF.OFFSET The reference object allows for a shift of the machine zero without physically shifting the reference mark. The
following applies:
Machine zero = reference position + reference offset
The drive moves to the reference point during the reference travel and stops there. After the reference travel,
the machine zero is calculated with reference point and reference offset.
The reference offset is given in user travel units.
Setting range: - 231 ... 0 ... + 231 - 1
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
499 SetpPosBus / Setpoint position bus, READ.
SP.POS.BUS Contains the setpoint position which is sent via the fieldbus process data. The setpoint position is only
accepted if "POSITION LO" and "POSITION HI" are programmed in the PO-data description (parameter
group P87_).
500 TpPos2_VE / Only used in MOVIDRIVE® B; reserved in MOVIDRIVE® A.
TP.POS2VE The value of the virtual encoder H376 is stored in H599 if input DI03 has been activated (see also
_TouchProbe()/TOUCHP).
501 TpPos1_VE / Only used in MOVIDRIVE® B; reserved in MOVIDRIVE® A.
TP.POS1VE The value of the virtual encoder H376 is stored in H501 if input DI02 has been activated (see also
_TouchProbe()/TOUCHP).
502 TpPos2_Abs / The touch probe positions are stored in the following variables:
TP.POS2ABS
503 TpPos1_Abs / Encoder Encoder position Touch probe 1 Touch probe 2
TP.POS1ABS DI02 DI03
504 TpPos2_Ext / Motor encoder (X15) H511 ACTPOS.MOT H507 TP.POS1MOT H505 TP.POS2MOT
TP.POS2EXT External encoder (X14) H510 ACTPOS.EXT H506 TP.POS1EXT H504 TP.POS2EXT
505 TpPos2_Mot / Absolute encoder (X62) H509 ACTPOS.ABS H503 TP.POS1ABS H502 TP.POS2ABS
TP.POS2MOT
506 TpPos1_Ext /
TP.POS1EXT
507 TpPos1_Mot /
TP.POS1MOT
508 IPOS counter • Counter value for the frequency input (if it is activated via DIP switch S14)
• High-resolution motor position (if the interpolated position signal is set via P916)
509 ActPos_Abs / Current actual position of the DIP absolute encoder (SSI), READ.
ACTPOS ABS IMPORTANT: System control variable Value must not be overwritten.
This actual position is determined via the signals which are active on plug connector X62 (DIP11A
option).
Unit: Increments depending on the encoder resolution.
510 ActPos_Ext / READ current actual position external encoder.
ACTPOS EXT IMPORTANT: System control variable Value must not be overwritten.
The actual position is determined via the track signals which are active on plug connector X14.
Position detection is only performed if connector X14 is used as the encoder input.
Unit: Increments depending on the encoder resolution.
511 ActPos_Mot / READ current actual position motor encoder.
ACTPOS.MOT IMPORTANT: System control variable Value must not be overwritten.
The actual position always has the following unit, regardless of the encoder pulse count per revo-
lution: 4096 increments per motor revolution (encoder resolution 512 inc., exception: MQx with
NV26 has 24 Increments per motor revolution).
4 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Furthermore, the following variables are assigned functions or reserved in

MOVIDRIVE B®:
Compiler /
Assembler
512 Reserved
...
515
516 CCount_MotOn Activate C track (zero pulse) counter for motor encoder X15.
0 = Counter disabled/1 = Counter enabled
517 CCount_ExtOn Activate C track (zero pulse) counter for external encoder X14.
0 = Counter disabled/1 = Counter enabled
518 CCount_Mot Counting of the zero pulses at X15. Low word is incremented with every zero pulse at the motor encoder
X15.
519 CCount_Ext Counting of the zero pulses at X14. Low word is incremented with every zero pulse at the external encoder
X14.
520 InpLevelB / Signal level of the binary inputs, READ only.
INPUTLVLB
Bit IPOS DIO DIO + DIP DIO + DIP DIP + Fieldbus
MOVIDRIVE® B name (+ DIO) fieldbus fieldbus P870 =
(MOVIDRIVE® A: control
H483) word 2
0 DI00 Depends on the basic unit, e.g. X13:1
1 DI01 X13:2
2 DI02 X13:3
3 DI03 X13:4
4 DI04 X13:5
5 DI05 X13:6
6 DI06 X16:1
7 DI07 X16:2
8 DI10 X22:1 X22:1 X22:1 X60:1 X60:1 Bit 8
9 DI11 X22:2 X22:2 X22:2 X60:2 X60:2 Bit 9
10 DI12 X22:3 X22:3 X22:3 X60:3 X60:3 Bit 10
11 DI13 X22:4 X22:4 X22:4 X60:4 X60:4 Bit 11
12 DI14 X22:5 X22:5 X22:5 X60:5 X60:5 Bit 12
13 DI15 X22:6 X22:6 X22:6 X60:6 X60:6 Bit 13
14 DI16 X22:7 X22:7 X22:7 X60:7 X60:7 Bit 14
15 DI17 X22:8 X22:8 X22:8 X60:8 X60:8 Bit 15
16 X60:1
17 (X22:1) X60:2
18 ... X60:3
19 (X22:8) X60:4
20 X60:5
21 X60:6
22 X60:7
23 X60:8
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
521 OutpLevelB / Signal level of the binary outputs, READ only.
OUTPUTLVLB
Bit IPOS DIO (+ DIO + DIP DIO + - DIP DIP + Fieldbus
MOVIDRIVE® B name DIO) fieldbus fieldbus P873 = sta-
(MOVIDRIVE® A: tus word 2
H482)
0 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00 DB00
1 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01 DO01
2 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02 DO02
3 DO03 DO03 DO03 DO03 DO03 DO03 DO03
4 DO04 DO04 DO04 DO04 DO04 DO04 DO04
5 DO05 DO05 DO05 DO05 DO05 DO05 DO05
6 DO10 X23:1 X23:1 X23:1 X61:1 X61:1 Bit 8
7 DO11 X23:2 X23:2 X23:2 X61:2 X61:2 Bit 9
8 DO12 X23:3 X23:3 X23:3 X61:3 X61:3 Bit 10
9 DO13 X23:4 X23:4 X23:4 X61:4 X61:4 Bit 11
10 DO14 X23:5 X23:5 X23:5 X61:5 X61:5 Bit 12
11 DO15 X23:6 X23:6 X23:6 X61:6 X61:6 Bit 13
12 DO16 X23:7 X23:7 X23:7 X61:7 X61:7 Bit 14
13 DO17 X23:8 X23:8 X23:8 X61:8 X61:8 Bit 15
14 X61:1
15 (X23:1) X61:2
16 ... X61:3
17 (X23:8) X61:4
18 X61:5
19 X61:6
20 X61:7
21 X61:8
522 RecStatS1 / Status word for receiving SCOM data objects (double words) via the system bus
SBUS1REC A receive bit is reserved for each data object set up using _SBusCommDef/SCOM. The first receive object
initialized in the IPOS program is assigned bit 0, the second one bit 1, etc. When MOVIDRIVE® receives a
telegram from an initialized receive object, the corresponding bit is set. The bit can only be reset in the user
program. Event-driven telegrams can be sent and received via the SBus if a variable interrupt has been set
for the corresponding bit in H522. The bit reset must make up the last command in the interrupt routine.
When designing a process image, the user must ensure that no side effects are caused when the same
object is received during processing (cyclical receipt of an object). To reset the bit, use the BITCLEAR com-
mand so that receive bits in other transfers are not lost.
523 RecStatS2 / Only with CAN bus via DFC11B: Status word for receiving SCOM data objects (double words) via the
SBUS2REC CAN bus
A receive bit is reserved for each data object set up using _SBusCommDef/SCOM. The first receive object
initialized in the IPOS program is assigned bit 0, the second one bit 1, etc. When MOVIDRIVE® receives a
telegram from an initialized receive object, the corresponding bit is set. The bit can only be reset in the user
program. Event-driven telegrams can be sent and received via the SBUS if a variable interrupt has been set
for the corresponding bit in H523. The bit reset must make up the last command in the interrupt routine.
When designing a process image, the user must ensure that no side effects are caused when the same
object is received during processing (cyclical receipt of an object). To reset the bit, use the BITCLEAR com-
mand so that receive bits in other transfers are not lost.
4 f
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
524 IPOS_Setp / IPOS setpoint, correcting variable of the PID controller when H540 = 1. When H540 = 0 or 2 the setpoint
IPOS_SETP can also be written directly from the user program.
H524 can be used as a torque setpoint or speed setpoint when P100 Setpoint source = IPOS and P700
Operating mode 1 = xxx&M-control, CFC or SERVO.
1 increment in H524 then corresponds to 0.21 rpm setpoint speed or 0.01% IN torque setpoint
525 Reserved
...
529
530 VarIntReq / If the corresponding request bit of a variable interrupt is set, a variable interrupt is triggered irrespective of
VARINTREQ the actual interrupt condition. The relevant variable interrupt must be activated beforehand.
Bit 0: Request for variable interrupt 0
540 PID_Mode / Operating mode of the PID controller, H540 and P260 are identical.
PID.MODE 0 = Controller deactivated (default)
1 = Control active
2 = Step response (open control system)
541 PID_K_p / PID-controller: Factor of the proportional component, H541 and P263 are identical, 3 decimal places; 0 <=
PID.KP KP <= 32000 (= 32,000); default: 1000 (= 1,0)
542 PID_Outp_P / PID-controller: Current value of the controller's P-component

PID.OUTPP
543 PID_Outp_I / PID-controller: Current value of the controller's I-component
PID.OUTPI The value for the l-component is in the high word, the internal components for decimal places are in the low
word, for example, H543 = 0x30000 -> l-component = 3.
544 PID_Outp_D / PID-controller: Current value of the controller's D-component
PID.OUTPD
545 PID_Feedf / PID controller precontrol value; H545 and P266 are identical
PID.FEEDF -32000 <= Precontrol <= 32000; default: 0
546 PID_Command / PID-controller: Setpoint, H546 and P271 are identical
PIDCOMMAND When P270 = 0 (= "Parameter"), P271/H546 contains the required process setpoint
-32000 <= Setpoint <= 32000 (for speed control, 1 increment corresponds to 0.2/min); default: 0
547 PID_CmdAdr / PID-controller: Setpoint address, H547 and P272 are identical
PID.CMDADR When P270 = 1 (= "IPOS variable"), P272/H547 contains the address of the IPOS variable with the setpoint;
default: 0
548 PID_CmdScale / PID controller: Factor for scaling the setpoint, H548 and P274 are identical, weighted with 3 decimal places
PID.CMDSCA -32000 (-32,000) <= KSetpoint <= 32000 (32,000); default: 1000 (1,0)
549 PID_ActAdr / PID controller: Address of actual value, H549 and P276 are identical
PID.ACTADR When P275 = "IPOS variable", P276/H549 contains the address of the IPOS variable; default: 0
550 PID_ActScale / PID-controller. Scaling factor of the filtered actual value, H550 and P277 are weighted identically with 3 dec-
PID.ACTSCA imal places -32,000 <= KActual value <= 32,000; default: 1000 (1,0)
551 PID_ActNorm / PID controller: Filtered and scaled actual value, diagnostics value
PID.ACTNOR
552 PID_ActOffset / PID controller: Integer, permanent offset of actual value, H552 and P278 are identical
PID.ACTOFF -32000 (-32000) <= Offset <= 32000 (32000); default: 0
553 PID_ActMin / PID controller: Minimum value for actual value after smoothing, scaling and offset, H553 and P280 are iden-
PID.ACTMIN tical.
-32000 (-32000) <= xe,min <= 32000 (32000); Default: 0
554 PID_ActMax / PID controller: Maximum value for actual value after smoothing, scaling and offset, H554 and P281 are iden-
PID.ACTMAX tical.
-32000 (-32000) <= xe,max <= 32000 (32000); default: 10000 (10,0)
555 PID_LimitMin / PID controller: Minimum output value, H555 and P282 are identical
PID.LMTMIN -32000 (-32000) <= xcontroller,min <= 32000 (32000); default: -1000 (-1,0)
556 PID_Limit_Max / PID controller: Maximum output value, H556 und P283 are identical
PID.LMTMAX -32000 (-32000) <= xcontroller,max <= 32000 (32000); default: 10000 (1,0)
f 4
i
Hz
P Hz

Compiler /
Assembler
557 PID_SetpMin / PID controller: Minimum output value for correcting variable, H557 and P284 are identical
PID.SETMIN -32000 (-32000) <= xa,min <= 32000 (32000); Default: 0
558 PID_SetpMax / PID controller: Maximum output value for correcting variable, H558 and P285 are identical
PID.SETMAX -32000 (-32000) <= xa,max <= 32000 (32000); Default: 7500 (7,5)
559 PID_Status / PID-controller status word
PID.STATUS Bit 0 = Total of actual value and offset exceeds limit xemin
Bit 1 = Total of actual value and offset exceeds limit xemax
Bit 2 = Value of the controller P-component is limited
Bit 3 = I-component of the controller is deactivated
Bit 4 = Value of the controller I-component is limited
Bit 5 = Value of the controller D-component is limited
Bit 6 = PID-controller correcting variable is limited
Bit 7 = Total of PID-controller correcting variable and presetting is limited
560 Reserved
kVA n Task Management and Interrupts
5 f
Introduction
i
Hz
P Hz
5 Task Management and Interrupts

5.1 Introduction
IPOSplus® can process several subprograms at the same time. One subprogram corre-
sponds to one task. The following functions can trigger interrupts for task 1:
• Timer0 overflow
• System error/unit error
• Touch probe DI02
MOVIDRIVE® B can interrupt task 2 and task 3 with 4 additional interrupts, which are
triggered by the comparison with a variable value.
MOVIDRIVE® A can execute 2 subprograms – task1 and task 2 – running independently
of each other.
MOVIDRIVE® B can execute 3 subprograms – task1, task 2 and task 3 – running inde-
pendently of one another.
You can run MOVIDRIVE® B in the same way as MOVIDRIVE® A.
The following variables are global. All tasks and interrupts use the same variables:
• H0 - H511 for MOVIDRIVE® A
• H0 - H1023 for MOVIDRIVE® B
There are no local variables that are only declared in either a task or a function. There
is an overview of the areas reserved for system variables in section "IPOS variables /
Overview of the System Variables".
You can enter the commands in a program window. You must create all program sec-
tions using the same language: Assembler or Compiler.
5.2 Task management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B

Task 1 is the main program. You can start task 1 using the lightning symbol in the toolbar
or using the keypad (P931). Initialize and start task 2 and task 3 using program com-
mands. Task 3 is only available with MOVIDRIVE® B. The interrupt is initialized using
program commands and triggered using an interrupt event. If you stop task 1 using the
STOP icon in the toolbar, this stops the entire IPOS processing. The DBG keypad can
be used to stop all tasks by setting parameter P931 to STOP. When P931 = STOP, only
task 1 is stopped. After a restart the program continues where it was interrupted.
Task Management and Interrupts kVA n
f 5
Task management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B i
Hz
P Hz
Toolbar for MOVIDRIVE® A
473926155
[1] = Status of task 1: START = started

[2] = Status of task 2: PSTOP = stopped
[3] = Lightning icon to start task 1
[4] = STOP icon to stop the entire IPOS processing
Toolbar for MOVIDRIVE® B
474186507

[4] = Lightning icon to start task 1
[5] = STOP icon to stop the entire IPOS processing
IPOSplus® processes a task cyclically. A task starts with the first command again once
the last command has been completed. If you only want to execute an initialization rou-
tine in task 1 once, you can exclude this program section using an endless loop.
main()
{
// Program code only initialization
while(1)
{
// cyclical program code
}
}
5 f
i Task management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B
Hz
P Hz
The following table gives an overview of the functions and properties of the tasks and
interrupts.
Task 1 Task 2 Task 3 (only "Task1" inter- Variable
MOVIDRIVE® B) rupt interrupt
(only
MOVIDRIVE®
B)
_SetTask2(ST
2_START,
Start
Task2Name); Not available Not available
MOVIDRIVE® A
or TASK2
Lightning icon START Mxx With the
or P931 in _SetTask(ST2 defined inter-
keypad _SetTask(ST3_S rupt event
_START,
TART, With the
Start Task2Name);
Task3Name); or defined inter-
MOVIDRIVE® B or TASK
TASK TASK3, rupt event
TASK2,
START Mxx
START Mxx
STOP icon or
_SetTask2(ST
Stop 2_STOP,
Not available Not available
MOVIDRIVE® A Task2Name);
or TASK2
STOP icon or STOP Mxx
P931 in key- STOP icon or As task 1
pad STOP icon or
_SetTask(ST2
_SetTask(ST3_S
_STOP, As task 1 or as
Stop TOP,
Task2Name); assigned task
MOVIDRIVE® B Task3Name); or
or TASK 2 or 3
TASK TASK3,
TASK2, STOP
STOP Mxx
Mxx
With other
Interrupt Via "Task1" Cannot be task 1 interrupt
Not available Not available
MOVIDRIVE® A interrupt interrupted with higher pri-
ority
With other With variable
Interrupt Via "Task1" With variable With variable task 1 interrupt interrupt in the
MOVIDRIVE® B interrupt interrupt interrupt with higher pri- same task with
ority higher priority
Debug with
breakpoint and Yes No1) No1) Yes No1)
single step
Command pro-
1 Assembler 2 Assembler Assembler
cessing time Not available Not available
command/ms commands/ms command/ms
MOVIDRIVE® A
min. 1 com-
1 ... 10 2 ... 11 Assem- mand per ms;
As task to
Assembler bler com- additional com-
Command pro- which the
commands/ mands/ms, mands are pro-
cessing time As task 1 interrupt is
ms, factory factory set- cessed
MOVIDRIVE® B assigned (task
setting: 1 com- ting: 2 com- depending on
2 or 3)
mand/ms mands/ms the processor
utilization
1) Copy commands to task 1 for debugging.
f 5
Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® A i
Hz
P Hz
5.3 Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® A

In addition to the general section in chapter "Task Management for MOVIDRIVE® A and
B", this section provides specific implementation information for MOVIDRIVE® A: The
motion sequence with the positioning commands is programmed in task 1.
Program the following functions in task 2:
• Rapid, time-critical processes
• Calculations
• Monitoring for system values
• Communication with the SEW operator terminals
• Copying variables cyclically to the oscilloscope variables H474, H475
• Formatting the fieldbus/SBus process data with a machine control function or
another MOVIDRIVE®
In this way, IPOSplus® also performs these functions when the interrupt routine is active
in task 1.
5.4 Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® B

In addition to the general section in chapter "Task Management for MOVIDRIVE® A and
B", this section provides specific implementation information for MOVIDRIVE® B:
5.4.1 Processing time for task 1 / task 2

The factory setting for the task processing time is:
• Task 1: 1 command/ms (P938 = 0)
• Task 2: 2 commands/ms
You can speed up the processing time in both tasks to include up to 9 additional com-
mands per ms. You can assign the additional commands for task 1 using parameter
P938 (index 8888) and for task 2 using parameter P939 (index 8962). This means that
a maximum of 1 + 9 = 10 commands can be performed in task 1 and 2 + 9 = 11 in
task 2.
5 f
i Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® B
Hz
P Hz
When you assign the maximum number of additional commands/ms to task 1 and task
2, the following combinations are possible:
Task 1 Task 2
P938 Command/ms P939 Command/ms
0 1 9 11
1 2 8 10
2 3 7 9
3 4 6 8
4 5 5 7
5 6 4 6
6 7 3 5
7 8 2 4
8 9 1 3
9 10 0 2
Example: P938 = 2, P939 = 3 => Task 1 processes 3 commands/ms, task 2 processes

5 commands/ms
5.4.2 Task 3
Task 3 is available from the B series units. Task 3 processes at least 1 command/ms.
Depending on the unit configuration and on the setting of P938/P939, task 3 will perform
additional commands. 20 ... 40 commands/ms is the typical number of commands for
task 3. The absolute resource requirements for command processing is ca. 20 ... 40%
lower in task 3 compared with task 1 or task 2. Application components, for which the
guaranteed run time of the individual program lines is not important, are processed
faster in task 3.
5.4.3 Implementation information

In contrast to MOVIDRIVE® A, you program the motion sequence in task 1 or task 3.
Program the following functions in task 2 or task 3:
• Rapid, time-critical processes
• Calculations
• Monitoring for system values
• Communication with the SEW operator terminals
• Copying variables cyclically to the oscilloscope variables H474, H475
• Formatting the fieldbus/SBus process data with a machine control function or
another MOVIDRIVE®
In this way, IPOSplus® also performs these functions when the interrupt routine is active
in task 1.
Note that in contrast to task 3, the processing time per command in task 2 is determin-
istic.
Interrupts
f 5
i
Hz
P Hz
5.4.4 Example
MOVIDRIVE® B positions a travel drive. A PLC controls MOVIDRIVE® via a fieldbus.
Change the individual parameters directly on MOVIDRIVE® using SEW keypads.
Proposed solution:
Task 1: Programming the motion sequence
Task 2: HMI communication with the operator terminal
Task 3: Fieldbus communication with the PLC
It is important to distribute the additional commands correctly, depending on the appli-
cation:
• Interrupt-oriented programs:When a user program is interrupt-oriented and the
task 1 interrupts should be processed quickly, task 1 must be assigned a high
calculation priority using additional commands in P938.
• Runtime-optimized programs:If, for example, process data is to be converted in
IPOS, this must be done as quickly as possible. Task 3 can be used to process
convert routines as quickly as possible. In this case, task 1 and task 2 should be
assigned as few additional commands/ms as possible. This ensures the fastest total
application performance if tasks 1 and 2 run with the minimum speed.
5.5 Interrupts
An interrupt - triggered by an event - interrupts the processing of the task it is assigned
to. The entire interrupt routine is run through once, as long as it is not interrupted by an
interrupt with a higher priority of the same task.
An interrupt that is activated by _SetInterrupt() or SETINT can be triggered by a timer0
overflow, a system/unit fault or touch probe DI02 and interrupts task 1.
In MOVIDRIVE® B, up to 4 additional variable interrupts can be activated using
_SetVarInterrupt() or VARINT. They interrupt task 2 or task 3 as required.
The response time for task 1 interrupts (unit fault, DI02 touch probe or T0_overflow) is
dependent on the number of activated interrupts (1 interrupt <= 1ms, 2 interrupts <=
2ms, 3 interrupts <= 3ms). The response time for variable interrupts is dependent on the
number of activated interrupts <= 1ms.
If an interrupt is triggered during a wait command, the waiting time of the command con-
tinues to run in the background. Once the program has jumped back to the task, it only
has to wait the remaining time before continuing.
5 f
i Interrupts for MOVIDRIVE® A and B
Hz
P Hz
5.5.1 Example
A WAIT 1000 ms command in task 1 is interrupted after 500 ms. If the processing of task
1 is resumed after 175 ms, the remaining runtime is 325 ms.
5.6 Interrupts for MOVIDRIVE® A and B

The following interrupts can be used in MOVIDRIVE® A units:
• Timer0 overflow (H489) interrupt Priority = 1 (lowest priority)
• Touch probe DI02 interrupt Priority = 2
• Error interrupt Priority = 3 (highest priority)
Task 1 is interrupted each time. In theory, a timer0, a touch probe and an error interrupt
can be active at the same time. An interrupt assigned a higher priority can interrupt the
processing of another interrupt. The DISABLE argument deactivates all interrupts. (see
_SetInterrupt or SETINT)
5.6.1 Interrupt activation

Compiler: _SetInterrupt(event ,myfunction );
Activates an interrupt. When the event event occurs, the function myfunction is per-
formed instead of task 1.
Assembler: SETINT event, Mxx
Activates an interrupt. When the event event occurs, the commands from label Mxx are
performed instead of task 1.
5.6.2 Error interrupt

The entire interrupt routine is run through once if an error occurs. After one run-through,
an Assembler command from task 1 is processed before the system checks whether the
error still occurs. If the error is still present, the interrupt routine is processed again. To
remain in the interrupt routine until the error is no longer present, the routine must con-
tain a loop that fulfills this condition.
Depending on the fault response set in parameter group 83x or using the command
_FaultReaction or SETFR, the program acts as follows:
• No interrupt is triggered for a specific fault if the fault response of this fault is set to
NO RESPONSE.
• If the fault response of a fault xy is set to "... and warning", task 1 is continued from
the same place once the fault has been reset.
• If the fault response of a fault xy is set to "... and fault", IPOS is restarted once the
fault has been reset and the variables are reinitialized with the values from the
EEPROM. Note: In this case, you can store important variable values protected
against power failure with the MEM or MOVILINK command before resetting the
error. In doing so, note that the number of permissible write accesses must not be
exceeded (see MEM or _Memorize() ).
f 5
Interrupts for MOVIDRIVE® A and B i
Hz
P Hz
Sample fnErrorInterrupt()
{
H2++;
while( !(StatusWord & 0b10))
{
//only leave while-loop when drive is fault-free
H1++;
}
}
main()
{
_SetInterrupt(SI_ERROR, fnErrorInterrupt);
while(1)
{
H0++;
}
}
H0 is incremented as long as the inverter is functioning correctly. If a fault occurs, H2 is
increased by one and H1 is incremented until the inverter functions correctly. Depending
on the fault response set, the system either continues processing with the current values
in task 1, or IPOS is restarted using the values from the EEPROM.
5.6.3 Touch probe DI02 interrupt

The entire interrupt routine is run through once if the touch probe has been released with
the command _TouchProbe (condition) or TOUCHP and the edge condition is fulfilled.
Then processing for task 1 continues. The interrupt routine is only called a second time
when the touch probe is released again and the condition is fulfilled. (See also the com-
mand _TouchProbe or TOUCHP).
Sample fnTouchInterrupt()
{
H0++;
}
/*=============================================
Main function (IPOS initial function)
===============================================*/
main()
{
_SetInterrupt( SI_TOUCHP1,fnTouchInterrupt); //Act. interrupt routine
TouchProbe( TP_EN1 );
while (1) {H1 = H1 +1;}
}
H0 is increased by 1 once.
If the touch probe command is also called in the while loop or in the fnTouchInterrupt,
the interrupt would respond to all changes in edge signal on DI02.
Typical applications for the touch probe are: Relative positioning for de-stacking equip-
ment or register loop control for processes with a continuous material flow.
5 f
i Interrupts for MOVIDRIVE® A and B
Hz
P Hz
5.6.4 Timer0 interrupt

The entire interrupt routine is run through once when the timer has elapsed (=0). After
one run-through, an Assembler command from task 1 is processed before the system
checks whether the time = 0. Once the condition is fulfilled, processing branches back
to the interrupt routine.
The cycle time can be set in variable H485 T0_Reload to trigger a timer0 interrupt at
equal intervals. This cycle time is used to reload the timer0 automatically when it occurs
in the interrupt routine
INFORMATION
Since the timer0 counts backwards, the interrupt condition would be fulfilled perma-
nently if T0_Reload = 0 and the value of the timer has not been changed in the inter-
rupt routine.
This results in the following options:

• If a program section is to be processed at equal intervals with the timer0 interrupt,
the timer0 must be reloaded with the T0_Reload, for example.
• If a program section is to be run through once with the timer0 interrupt at a defined
time after IPOS has been started, the timer0 must be set to -1 in the interrupt.
Sample fnTimerInterrupt()
{
H0 = H0 +1;
T0_Reload = 10000; //Reload timer 0 automatically with 10 s
_SetInterrupt( SI_TIMER0,fnTimerInterrupt); // Activate interrupt
}
main()
{
while (1) {H1 = H1 +1;}
}
H0 is increased by 1 every 10 s.
f 5
Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B i
Hz
P Hz
5.7 Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B

All interrupts in MOVIDRIVE® B units are the same as those used in MOVIDRIVE® A
(see section "Task Management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B"), plus 4 additional variable
interrupts.
The interrupts for specific variable values can, for example, respond to
• A quantity value
• All timers 0, 1 and 2
• The fact that an axis position of its own a or different axis has been reached
• A change in an I/O signal
• A certain inverter status (H473)
• New data that is to be received or sent by the SBus
5.7.1 Calling up the variable interrupt

Compiler: _SetVarInterrupt(pData ,myfunction);
Activates a variable interrupt with the data structure as of the variable pData, which runs
the myfunction function, when the interrupt event occurs.
Assembler: VARINT Hxx, Mxx
Activates a variable interrupt with the data structure as of variable Hxx, which performs
the commands as of the Mxx label, when the interrupt event occurs.
The following properties and functions of the variable interrupt can be defined in the data
structure (see also the command _SetVarInterrupt or VARINT):
• The task to be interrupted - task 2 or task 3
• Sequential number of the interrupt (0... 3)
• Reference variable and the value to be compared with each other
• Type of the mathematical comparison (==, <, edge...)
• Processing time: either as long as the condition is fulfilled or once each time the
condition is fulfilled (edge-triggered)
• Priority of the interrupt
• Value of the reference variable used to trigger the interrupt
5 f
i Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
The data structure of the command is described in the system function (Compiler –
functions / Assembler – commands).
The behavior of the interrupt can by adapted dynamically during runtime, by either
• Changing the data structure and then calling the command again (necessary if, for
example, the CompVar value used for the comparison changes) or
• calling the command with a different data structure but with the same value in
variable H+1 (IntNum).
5.7.2 IPOS access to the internal interrupt control

Information as to whether a variable interrupt has been requested can be seen in the
IPOSplus® program in the variable uVarEventRequest (H530 bit 0 to 3). These "Request"
bits can also be written in the IPOSplus® program.
uVarEventRequest H530.0 Request for variable interrupt 0
In this way, for example, the request bit can be set for test purposes during initial startup
up regardless of the actual interrupt condition and a variable interrupt can be triggered
(as long as the corresponding variable interrupt has been activated beforehand).
A variable interrupt can be used to configure time-controlled program processing, for ex-
ample, the cyclical calculation of acceleration from a speed.
In addition, when a high-priority variable interrupt is being processing, you can delete a
pending, lower-priority interrupt by deleting the corresponding request bit.
Sample The transport axis of a filling machine should head for a metering unit using DO01 when
it moves past the position 5° on the machine. The output should be deactivated 200 ms
later irrespective of the speed and axis position.
f 5
Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B i
Hz
P Hz
Example solved in Required parameter settings

the Compiler
P620 = IPOS output, P960 = for example SHORT
/*===========================================
IPOS source file
============================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
// necessary parameter settings:

// P620 = IPOS output, P960 = for example SHORT
VARINT hOPENvalve, hCLOSEvalve;
fnTask3()
{ //Task 3 is only needed to activate VarInt.
H1 = H1;
//dummy command
}
fnOPENvalve()
{ //Switch on metering unit
Timer_2 = 0;
//Reset timer 2 to 0
hCLOSEvalve.Mode = 2;
//Activate stop-IRQ
_SetVarInterrupt( hCLOSEvalve,fnCLOSEvalve );
_BitSet( StdOutpIPOS, 1 );
//Set DO01
}
fnCLOSEvalve()
{ //Switch off metering unit
_BitClear( StdOutpIPOS, 1 );
//Delete DO01
hCLOSEvalve.Mode = 0;
//Deactivate stop-IRQ
_SetVarInterrupt( hCLOSEvalve,fnCLOSEvalve );
}
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{ //Initialization part
hOPENvalve.Control = 2; //Interrupt task3
hOPENvalve.IntNum =0;
//continuous no.
hOPENvalve.SrcVar = numof ( ModActPos ); //Modulo motor encoder
hOPENvalve.CompVar = 910;
// 5° on the machine = 5° x 910/65536

hOPENvalve.Mode = 12; // once when >= 5°
hOPENvalve.Priority = 6; // middle priority
hCLOSEvalve.Control = 2;
//Interrupt task3
hCLOSEvalve.IntNum = 1; //continuous no.
hCLOSEvalve.pSrcVar = numof ( Timer_2 ) ; //Timer 2
hCLOSEvalve.CompVar = 200; //deactivate after 200 ms
hCLOSEvalve.Mode = 0; //Deactivate timer-IR first
hCLOSEvalve.Priority = 7;
5 f
i Variable interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B
Hz
P Hz
// Activate interrupt routine and task3

_SetTask(ST3_START, fnTask3);
_SetVarInterrupt( hOPENvalve,fnOPENvalve );
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{ //cyclical program section ...
} //End while (1)
} //End main()
Example solved in Necessary parameter settings:

the Assembler
P620 = IPOS output, P960 = for example SHORT
474256139
Position Detection and Positioning kVA n
Encoder evaluation
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6 Position Detection and Positioning

6.1 Encoder evaluation
MOVIDRIVE® offers various options for positioning:
• external encoders
• Motor encoder (incremental encoder/resolver)
• Hiperface® encoder (absolute encoder)
• SSI absolute encoder
The values are provided in system variables for processing.
The connections for the motor encoder (X15) and external encoder (X14) are in the con-
trol electronics MxV..., MxS... und MCH... . The control electronics MxF does not have
these connections. The connection for the SSI absolute encoder is on the DIP11 option
card (X62).
All connected encoders are always evaluated regardless of the operating mode (P700).
Operating modes with positioning (VFC-n-CTRL & IPOS, CFC & IPOS, SERVO & IPOS)
always require a motor encoder at X15.
Absolute encoder on DIP11 Hiperface® encoder / incre- Incremental encoder /
P941: Absolute encoder (DIP) mental encoder simulation / Resolver / Hiperface® encoder
Encoder type
incremental encoder P941: Motor encoder (X15)
P941: External encoder (X14)
Connection X62/DIP11 X14/basic unit X15/basic unit
Actual value on variable H509 / ACTPOS. ABS / H510 / ACTPOS. EXT / H511 / ACTPOS. MOT /
ActPos_Abs ActPos_Ext ActPos_Mot
Resolution Absolute position after conver- Actual encoder resolution (with Always 4096 inc./motor revolu-
sion with: 4-fold evaluation) after conver- tion, regardless of the actual
Encoder scaling (P955), sion with: encoder resolution
Zero offset (P954), Encoder scaling ext. encoder
(P944)
Position offset (P953),
Counting direction (P951).
Edge at DI02 H503 / TP. POS1ABS / H506 / TP. POS1EXT / H507 / TP. POS1MOT /
TpPos1_Abs TpPos1_Ext TpPos1_Mot
Touch
Edge at DI03 H502 / TP. POS2ABS / H504 / TP. POS2EXT / H505 / TP. POS2MOT /
probe
TpPos2_Abs TpPos2_Ext TpPos2_Mot
Max. delay time 1 ms < 100 µs < 100 µs
kVA n Position Detection and Positioning
6 f
Motor encoder (X15)
i
Hz
P Hz
The position values are always available for IPOSplus® control in the variables H509 to
H511. Even if positioning was performed without IPOSplus®, impulse encoders con-
nected to X14 and X15 can be recorded and further processed in the IPOSplus® pro-
gram. The system variables H570 ... H573 can be used to activate zero pulse counters
for motor encoder X15 and external encoder X14 in order to record the number of zero
pulses. A motor encoder must be used for positioning with the IPOSplus® commands
(GO...). The motor encoder supplies MOVIDRIVE® with a high-quality speed signal.
6.2 Motor encoder (X15)

You can only use the IPOSplus® positioning control when a motor encoder is connected
to X15 and an operating mode ".. & IPOS" is set in P700 Operating mode 1. P941
Source actual position determines which position measurement is used for positioning.
The travel commands of IPOSplus® control (GO commands) refer to the position infor-
mation of the encoder entered in P941 Source actual position.
6.3 Encoder combinations

Direct position control with motor encoder
vmax amax • An incremental encoder / resolver / Hiperface® encoder (X15)

must be installed on the motor.
• In IPOSplus®, positioning commands, for example, "GOA ..."
+ + are performed with reference to the actual source position
PG PC nC (here, motor encoder X15).
- -
Pact nact vmax = maximum speed
M amax = maximum acceleration
PG = Profile generator
474539019 Pact = Actual position of the motor encoder
PC = Position controller
nact = Actual speed
nC = Speed controller
Direct speed control with external encoder and motor encoder

• An incremental encoder / resolver / Hiperface® encoder (X15)
vmax amax X14 EXT is always required on the motor for speed feedback.
• Slip or mechanical play (gear unit backlash) between the
- motor encoder and the external encoder is compensated
+ automatically.
PG + PC nC
- • In IPOSplus®, positioning commands, for example, "GOA ..."
nact are performed with reference to P941 actual source position
M (here, external encoder X14).
• The dynamic response that can be achieved depends on the
474540555 properties and the mechanical installation of the external
encoder as well as the position resolution.
• see section "IPOSplus® with Options" / "External encoder"
vmax = maximum speed
amax = maximum acceleration
nact = Actual speed
EXT = external encoder
Encoder combinations
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Direct position control with absolute encoder and motor encoder

• Direct position control in IPOSplus® by means of the SSI
vmax amax DIP ABS absolute encoder connected via DIP11.
• An incremental encoder / resolver / Hiperface® (X15) is
- always required on the motor for speed feedback.
IPOS + • Slip or mechanical play (gear unit backlash) between the
PG + PC nC
- incremental encoder /resolver / Hiperface® of the motor and
nact the absolute encoder is compensated automatically.
M • In IPOSplus®, positioning commands, for example, "GOA ..."
are performed with reference to the actual source position
474542091 (here, absolute encoder DIP).
• The dynamic response that can be achieved depends on the
properties and the installation of the absolute encoder as well
as the position resolution.
• refer to the manual "Positioning with Absolute Encoder
DIP11A"
nact = Actual speed
ABS = absolute encoder
IPOS = IPOSplus® program
Position control with incremental encoder on the motor,

Processing the absolute encoder position in the IPOSplus® program
• Position control is performed in IPOSplus® using the motor
SV DIP ABS encoder connected to X15.
vmax amax • An incremental encoder / resolver is always required on the
motor for speed feedback.
• The high dynamic response of the inverter can be used
O + + directly for positioning.
PG PC nC • The position information of the absolute encoder is mapped
- -
Pact nact automatically in an IPOSplus® variable and can be processed
using program control.
M • Using the DIP11 in this way means that reference travel is
unnecessary.
474543627 • refer to the manual "Positioning with Absolute Encoder DIP11"
Pact = Actual position of the motor encoder
nact = Actual speed
SV = System variable
6 f
Encoder combinations
i
Hz
P Hz
Position control with motor encoder,

Processing the second encoder in the IPOSplus® program as master encoder
• Position control is performed in IPOSplus® using the motor
X14 EXT encoder connected to X15.
• An encoder is always required on the motor for speed
feedback.
• The high dynamic response of the inverter can be used
SV DIP ABS directly for positioning.
vmax amax • The position information of the second encoder is mapped
automatically in an IPOSplus® variable and can be processed
O + + • This design is used when the inverter runs in relation to a
PG PC nC
- - second encoder (for example, synchronous angel or
Pact nact electronic cam)
M vmax = maximum speed
474583563
Pact = Actual position of the motor encoder
nact = Actual speed
EXT = external encoder
Processing the absolute encoder position in the IPOSplus® program

• The position information of the absolute encoder is mapped
SV DIP ABS automatically in an IPOSplus® variable and can be processed
• The DIP11 or a HIPERFACE® encoder on X14 can be used in
particular to replace applications in which positioning usually
nthres takes place using rapid speed/creep speed by means of
O
several proximity switches.
• An incremental encoder^/resolver on the motor for speed
feedback is not required, you can use a standard
M asynchronous motor. The operating mode "... & IPOS" is not
required.
474585099 • Refer to the manual "Positioning with Absolute Encoder
DIP11" The application module "Absolute positioning" is
available in SHELL to perform this type of positioning task.
nthres = Setpoint speed
External encoder (X14)
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.4 External encoder (X14)

The following encoders can be connected to the MOVIDRIVE®A and B drive inverters
on X14. To find out which encoder type your unit supports, refer to the system manual
or the operating instructions.
• Hiperface® encoder type AS1H, ES1H or AV1H (only MOVIDRIVE® B or MCH)
• sin/cos encoder type ES1S, ES2S or EV1S (only MOVIDRIVE® B or MCH)
• 5 V TTL sensor with DC 24 V voltage supply type ES1R, ES2R or EV1R
• 5 V TTL sensor with DC 5 V voltage supply type ES1T, ES2T or EV1T via option
DWI11
6.4.1 Positioning on external encoder (X14)

It makes sense to use an external encoder for positioning to compensate any connection
subject to slip or play between the drive and distance (for example, due to slipping
wheels or tooth backlash) or any mechanical play in gear unit backlash.
Table 1: Evaluation of the pulses of the external encoder
Incoming pulses (example) 2048 2048 1024 1024
Quadruple evaluation (fixed) 8192 8192 4096 4096
Scaling external encoder P944 (can be set) x1 x8 x1 x2
Changing counter reading H510 ACTPOS. EXT 8192 65536 4096 8192
per encoder revolution
Once the control voltage has been switched on, if an AS1H or AV1H is used the absolute
value of this encoder is used as the actual position value of the external encoder H510.
For all other encoder types, H510 = 0 increments. The external encoder can be refer-
enced as the motor encoder (see the chapter "Reference Travel").
6.4.2 Slip compensation with external encoder

A trolley on wheels is run on rails. The carriage is moved by powering the wheels with a
gearmotor. The connection between the wheels and the rails is non-positive. This
causes slip between the rotational movement of the wheel and the resulting translational
movement of the carriage.
This means, for positioning using motor control it is essential that the position of the car-
riage is detected.
To do so, at startup the ratio of the increments of the motor encoder must be set to the
increments of the synchronous encoder. A description of these parameters with exam-
ples, and the procedure for setting them can be found in the descriptions of parameters
P944, P943 and P942 in the section "IPOS Parameters."
6 f
i
Hz
P Hz
The following block circuit diagram applies:

P941
H511
Pact
P942
P943
EXT H510
P944
476710667
Px = Non-linearized position value of encoder

Pact = Actual position value for ramp generator and position controller
P941 = Actual position source
P942 = Encoder factor numerator
P943 = Encoder factor denominator
P944 = Encoder scaling external encoder
H510 = External encoder with actual value on variable
H511 = Motor encoder with actual value on variable
Set the following parameters for the external encoder:

Table 2: Parameter settings for the trolley
Num- Designation Function Setting Range
ber
P944 Encoder Multiplies the encoder Highest value that is smaller than the Fixed: 1, 2,
scaling ext. signals with the set value ratio between the resolution of the 4, 8, 16, 32,
encoder motor encoder and the external 64
encoder.
Example: Motor encoder: 4096 Inc. /
ext. encoder 800 inc. = 5.12. Value:
4.
P943 Encoder fac- Denominator to deter- Number of increments (in H511, to max. 32767
tor denomi- mine the ratio between read ACTPOS. MOT) for a certain
nator the motor encoder and distance s.
the ext. encoder.
P942 Encoder fac- Numerator to determine Number of increments (in H510, to max. 32767
tor numerator the ratio between the read the ACTPOS. EXT) for a certain
motor encoder and the distance s, as for P943.
ext. encoder.
P941 Source Actual position value for Ext. encoder X14 (Selection)
actual posi- IPOSplus® position con-
tion troller
P945 Synchro- Selects encoder type Depends on the encoder that is con- TTL
nous nected. SIN/COS
encoder type
HIPER-
(X14)
FACE
P946 Synchro- Inversion of the direction Set so that the counting direction of NORMAL
nous of rotation of the encoder the motor encoder = counting direc- INVERTED
encoder tion of the external encoder.
counting
direction
(X14)
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
The calculation of P210 (P gain hold controller) is optimized for P941 = motor encoder
at start up. If you use an external encoder or absolute encoder, the parameter may
have to be set to a lower value.
The following applies for position detection with an external encoder on X14:
• Variable H510 shows the actual position of the position control ACTPOS. EXT
• Variable H506 shows the touch probe position 1 TP. POS1EXT
• Variable H504 shows the touch probe position 2 TP. POS2EXT
The variables are always evaluated with parameter P944.
6 f
SSI absolute encoder (DIP)
i
Hz
P Hz
6.5 SSI absolute encoder (DIP)

6.5.1 Startup
The drive must be started up in conjunction with the MOVIDRIVE® drive inverter as de-
scribed in the MOVIDRIVE® system manual. It must be possible to move the drive using
a suitable setpoint and control signal source.
Furthermore, you must ensure that the following installations are correct and used as
specified:
• Installation of the DIP11A DIP11B
• Cabling
• Terminal assignment
• Safety cut-outs
Refer to the "MOVIDRIVE ® MDX 61B DIP11B/DEH21B absolute encoder cards" man-
ual
There is no need to activate the factory settings. If you call up a factory setting, the
MOVIDRIVE® parameters will be reset to the default values. This also affects the termi-
nal assignment, which must be altered to the required settings if necessary.
INFORMATION
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio guides you through the startup procedure for the abso-
lute encoder option. Various dialog boxes prompt you to make the necessary entries
and take the required actions.
• Start MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio and mark the unit.
• Open the context menu and select the command [Startup]/[DIP startup].
• Follow the instructions of the startup wizard.
Once startup with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio has been completed, you only have to
specify the "Actual position source" parameter.
After the DIP startup, the motor encoder and the DIP encoder are referenced during the
reference travel irrespective of the setting of parameter "Actual position source" P941.
If the DIP encoder has been set manually, the reference travel only references the motor
encoder, also irrespective of the setting of P941
Alternatively, you can perform startup for the DIP11 option for the absolute encoder
step-by-step as described below.
6.5.2 1. Select encoder type P950

In P950 Encoder type, select the encoder you are using. The encoder systems sup-
ported are listed in the description of P950.
The connected type can be selected from the list of possible encoders. You must check
whether other encoders are suitable and released for use by SEW-EURODRIVE.
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.5.3 2. Set direction of rotation of the motor P35_

Move the drive in the positive direction (defined according to application) at low speed.
If the actual position P003 or H511 counts upwards, you do not have to change para-
meter P350 "Change direction of rotation" (use MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio or DBG11B
to display the actual position). Change P350 if the actual position counts downwards.
This adapts the counting direction of the motor encoder to suit the application.
6.5.4 3. Set counting direction P951 for the SSI absolute encoder
Move the drive in the positive direction (defined according to application) at low speed.
If the absolute encoder position (H509 ACTPOS. ABS) counts upwards, you do not have
to change parameter P951 "Counting direction". If the absolute encoder position counts
downwards, P951 must be inverted.
6.5.5 4. Set encoder scaling P955

This parameter is irrelevant unless there is a motor encoder (speed control) present.
The position information from the absolute encoder is multiplied by this value. The pa-
rameter is set so the travel information ratio between the motor encoder and the abso-
lute encoder is as close to "1" as possible.
First, set the parameter to 1. Note down the values of variables H509 (ACTPOS. ABS)
and H511 (ACTPOS. MOT). Move the drive by at least 1 motor revolution. Determine
the difference between the noted and the current values of the variables and calculate
the quotient.
ACTPOS. ABS H509 old H509 new H509 difference
Noted value
ACTPOS. MOT H511 old H511 new H511 difference
Noted value
The quotient Q results from the H511 difference divided by the H509 difference.
Q = (H511 old - H511 new)/(H509 old - H509 new)
Set ENCODER SCALING ( P955) to the value closest to the calculated quotient Q, pre-
ferably to the lower of the closest values.
If the quotient is greater than 80, positioning using the absolute encoder can only be per-
formed with reduced dynamic properties.
INFORMATION
During project planning, ensure that the encoder ratio does not exceed 1:10.
6.5.6 5. Set position offset P953

The position offset (P953) only has to be set on incremental encoders. For other enco-
ders, its should be set to 0.
Proceed as described for P953 in the chapter "IPOS Parameters".
6 f
i
Hz
P Hz
6.5.7 6. Set Zero offset P954

Zero offset is used for assigning the value you want to a specific position. Enter the pa-
rameter as described for P954 in the chapter "IPOS Parameters".
6.5.8 7. Set encoder factors P942 and P943

The parameters are used for internal adaptation of the speed control and for monitoring
functions in the DIP11.
Practically, this adapts the physical quantity, a mechanical ratio between the motor en-
coder and external encoder and the mechanical feedrate constant (for example, for ex-
ternal incremental linear encoders).
The following diagram shows the connection between the parameters and variables.
P941
H511
Pact
P942
P943
ABS P954
DIP H509
P955 P953
476717707
Px = Non-linearized position value of encoder

Pabs = Actual position value for ramp generator and position controller
P942 = Encoder factor numerator
P943 = Encoder factor denominator
P953 = Position offset
P954 = Zero offset
P955 = Encoder scaling
H509 = External encoder with actual value on variable
H511 = Motor encoder with actual value on variable
To find out how to determine encoder factors, refer to the parameter descriptions for
P942/P943.
6.5.9 8. Set P941 actual position source

This parameter determines which position encoder is used for position control, provided
that an ”... & IPOS" operating mode has been set in P700 ”Operating mode".
There are positioning commands in the IPOSplus® program to control the motor con-
nected to MOVIDRIVE®. Set the Source actual position to "Absolute encoder DIP" if the
motor is to be positioned using the absolute encoder.
INFORMATION
The circuit gain for position control of IPOSplus®, parameter P910 "Gain X controller"
was preset during startup of the speed control loop. This presetting means positioning
control is performed with the motor encoder. The difference in encoder resolution or
the time characteristics of the absolute encoder (e.g. laser distance measuring instru-
ment) may require a lower value setting.
Referencing
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Set a maximum of half the value of the calculated preset value. If P955 is ≥ 32, only enter
a quarter of the calculated preset value. Start an IPOSplus® program with a positioning
operation between two valid points at moderate speed. Reduce or increase parameter
P910 "Gain X controller" step-by-step until the best movement and positioning charac-
teristics have been set. If P955 is set to a high value, it may be necessary that values in
P910 are < 1.
The position value provided by the absolute encoder is available in variable H509 (ACT-
POS.ABS). The position value can be processed with the internal IPOSplus® control
even without direct positioning.
6.6 Referencing
For applications using absolute positioning commands, you must define the reference
point (machine zero). Depending on the encoder type, this setting must either be made
at initial startup (absolute encoder) or each time the machine is switched on again (all
other encoders).
MOVIDRIVE® supports 9 types of reference travel that can be set via P903 Reference
travel type, P904 Reference travel to zero pulse and the arguments of the IPOSplus®
command _Go0 ( ... ); or GO0 ... and that result from the reasonable combination
of the following characteristics:
• Encoder is set without reference travel (no reference travel)
• Search direction is set (= direction of movement at start of reference travel)
• Referencing is set to the hardware limit switches
• Referencing is set to zero impulse (only possible in external encoders when the
resolution < 5000 inc./revolution)
• Referencing is set to reference cam
If referencing is set to the hardware limit switches and/or the reference cam, these must
be set as binary inputs.
Parameter P941 Source actual position is used to define which encoder is used for ref-
erence travel.
Once the drive is enabled, reference travel is started using one of the following methods:
• Via a positive edge on binary input P600 ... P606 or P610 ... P617 that is set to the
function REF.-FAHRT START
• via the IPOSplus® command _Go0 ( ... ); or GO0 ...
The display changes to "c" - REFERENCE MODE.
Stop ramp P136 is always used for acceleration during the reference travel. Reference
travel types with reference cam or limit switch, accelerate to P901 reference speed 1
and then search for the condition for the end of the reference travel with P902 reference
speed 2. Reference type 0, uses P902 Reference speed 2 right away.
6 f
Referencing
i
Hz
P Hz
If a hardware limit switch is reached during reference travel with type 1 or type 2 and the
reference point has not yet been found, the drive turns and continues reference travel in
the other direction.
Once the drive has found the reference point, the following functions are performed:
• The drive stops and switches internally from speed to position control.
• Bit 20 "IPOS Referenced" in H473 StatusWord is set and a binary input, with the
parameter "IPOS REFERENCE", is set.
• Reference offset P900 is transmitted to the actual position value. If the modulo
function is deactivated (P960 = OFF), this is the variable of the encoder H509 - H511
selected in P941. If the modulo function is activated, it is the variable H455
ModActPos.
As of this point, the following formula applies for the machine zero:
Machine zero = reference point + reference offset
The status "referenced" is reset when the inverter is switched off or if error messages
relating to the position measuring system occur (exception: for Hiperface® encoders,
see the note below).
For advanced users, MOVIDRIVE® offers the option of setting an absolute encoder for
which a new encoder offset is calculated and described at the reference point when the
drive is not enabled and when it is in the safe stop status, for example. It is also possible
to evaluate distance coded encoder systems using complex IPOSplus® programming. If
you require support in performing either of these operations, contact SEW service per-
sonnel.
INFORMATION
For Hiperface® and SSI absolute encoders, the status "referenced" is always set and
is only reset during reference travel.
INFORMATION
The drive reacts differently when the controller inhibit is set during reference travel, de-
pending on how reference travel was started.
• If reference travel was started via a positive edge at binary input REF.TRAVEL
START or via the non-wait IPOS command _Go0( ._NW_.. ); or
GO0...,NW,..., the reference travel is not continued if the controller inhibit is
reset. To start travel, a positive edge must be set at the input REF. TRAVEL
START.
• If reference travel was started via the wait IPOS command _Go0( ._W_.. ); or
GO0...,W,..., the error message F39 reference travel is generated.
Referencing
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
When deciding whether to reference to the reference cam or zero pulse, note the follow-
ing points:
• The zero pulse moves when the motor is replaced.
• The reference cam could become inaccurate as a result of age, wear or switching
hysteresis.
• If the reference point is determined using the zero pulse and reference cam, and the
zero pulse is located exactly at the end of the reference cam, the switching transition
of the reference cam may be detected before or after the zero pulse (switching
hysteresis). The result may be a reference position which varies by a motor
revolution from one time to the next. The situation can be remedied by shifting the
reference cam (by about half a motor revolution).
• Unidirectional drives can only be referenced using a reference cam. Also note that
there is no defined distance between the reference cam and zero pulse of the
encoder for non-integer ratios. This means that in this case only the end of the
reference cam can be selected as the reference point.
• The length of the reference cam and the reference speeds must be selected so the
drive can reliably decelerate to the slower reference speed (reference speed 2) on
the reference cam. The end of the reference cam or the closest zero pulse of the
encoder system can be used as reference point.
• The zero pulse can only be used as a reference point when the encoder has a zero
pulse, the zero track is connected to the inverter and the PPR count < 5000 inc./
revolution.
INFORMATION
In case of reference travel of a drive system with absolute encoder (Hiperface® or
DIP), the position offset will be recalculated and overwritten by the reference travel
P905 Hiperface® offset X14 / P947 Hiperface® offset X15 or DIP offset P953 Position
offset, depending on the source set for the actual position.
INFORMATION
If you change P350/P351 reverse direction of rotation, you have to change these pa-
rameters prior to the reference offset or perform the reference offset again after
changing the parameters, because this change affects the actual position of the axis.
6 f
Referencing
i
Hz
P Hz
The following explains the different types of reference travel with different starting points
in the drive using travel diagrams.
Explanation of the reference travel type diagrams
• nRef1 =Reference speed 1
• nRef2 =Reference speed 2
• Starting point of the drive
– [1] Between the reference cam and the right hardware limit switch
– [2] On the reference cam
– [3] Between the reference cam and the left hardware limit switch
• LHWLS = CCW hardware limit switch
• RHWLS = CW hardware limit switch
• CAM = Reference cam
• RefCAM = Reference position cam: Movement to this position takes place when the
argument of the GO0 reference travel command contains CAM.
• RefZP = Reference position zero pulse: Movement to this position takes place when
the argument of the GO0 reference travel command contains ZP.
• RefOffCAM = Reference offset for reference travel with reference position cam CAM
• RefOffZP = Reference Offset for reference travel with zero pulse ZP
• MZP = Machine zero
Referencing
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.6.1 Type 0: Reference travel to zero pulse

The reference position is the first zero pulse CCW of the starting position of reference
travel.
A reference cam is not required. Only P902 Reference speed 2 is used for reference
travel.
If reference travel is started via the positive edge at the "REF.TRAVEL START" input,
P904 Reference travel to zero pulse should be set to YES.
If the reference travel is started via the IPOSplus® command Go0, the argument "ZP"
should be set, P904 is irrelevant.
If P904 = NO in the first case, or if the argument "CAM" is used in the second case, the
drive behaves like with type 5 and sets the current position to the reference reference
position.
[3]
nRef1 [2]
[2]
[1]
1
nRef2
RefOffCAM
f
RefOffZP
Z
MZP
Z RefZP X
LHWLS RHWLS
WLS
476740875
6.6.2 Type 1: CCW end of the reference cam

The reference position is the left end of the reference cam or the first zero pulse to the
left after the end of the reference cam.
One of the binary inputs P600 ... 606 must be set to "REFERENCE CAM".
Reference travel starts in a CCW direction; P901 Reference speed 1 is used up to the
first positive edge of the reference cam, then P902 Reference speed 2 is used.
If reference travel is started via the positive edge on the "REF.TRAVEL START" input,
the drive is either referenced to the falling edge of the reference cam or to the zero pulse
after the falling edge of the reference cam, depending on the setting in P904 Refe-
rencing to zero pulse.
6 f
Referencing
i
Hz
P Hz
If reference travel is started with the IPOSplus® command Go0, the drive is referenced
to the falling edge of the reference cam or to the zero pulse after the falling edge of the
reference cam, depending on whether the argument "ZP" or "CAM" is set.
[3] [2] [1]

nRef1
nRef2
RefOffCAM
f
RefOffZP
Z
MZP
Z RefZP RefCAM
C
LHWLS CAM RHWLS

WLS
476742795
6.6.3 Type 2: CW end of the reference cam

The reference position is the right end of the reference cam or the first zero pulse to the
right after the end of the reference cam.
One of the binary inputs P600 ... 606 must be set to "REFERENCE CAM".
The reference travel starts in a CW direction; P901 Reference speed 1 is used up to the
first positive edge of the reference cam, then P902 Reference speed 2 is used.
after the falling edge of the reference cam, depending on the setting in P904 Referenc-
ing to zero pulse.
[3] [2] [1]

nRef1
nRef2
RefOffCAM
f
RefOffZP
e
RefCAM
C RefZP MZP
ZP
LHWLS CAM RHWL

RHWLS
476744331
Referencing
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.6.4 Type 3: CW limit switch

The reference position is the first zero pulse to the left of the CW limit switch.
The setting "Left end of the CW limit switch" is not important because after reference
travel, the drive could be located in the switch hysteresis of the limit switch and the error
"29 Limit switch reached" could occur sporadically once the reference travel is complete.
A reference cam is not required.
Reference travel starts in a CW direction. P901 Reference speed 1 is used up to the fall-
ing edge of the CW limit switch, then P902 Reference speed 2 is used.
If the reference travel is started via the IPOSplus® command Go0, you have to set the
argument "ZP".
[2] [1]
nRef1 [3]
nRef2
RefOffZP
R Z
MZP
Z Ref
RefZP
LHWLS RHWL
RHWLS
476758667
6.6.5 Type 4: CCW limit switch

The reference point is the first zero pulse to the right of the CCW limit switch.
The setting "Right end of the CW limit switch" is not important because after reference
travel, the drive could be located in the switch hysteresis of the limit switch and the error
"29 Limit switch reached" could occur sporadically once the reference travel is complete.
A reference cam is not required.
Reference travel starts in a CCW direction; P901 Reference speed 1 is used up to the
falling edge of the CCW limit switch, then P902 Reference speed 2 is used.
6 f
Referencing
i
Hz
P Hz
If the reference travel is started via the IPOSplus® command Go0, you have to set the
argument "ZP".
[3] [2]
nRef1 [1]
nRef2
RefOffZP
e P
RefZP MZP
Z
LHWLS RHWL
RHWLS
476760203
6.6.6 Type 5: No reference travel

The reference position is the current position. The arguments in the IPOSplus® com-
mand Go0"ZP" or "CAM" and P904 have no effect.
It makes sense to use this type of reference travel with absolute encoders and for drives
that are to be referenced at standstill. For example, the position of a feed axis can be
set to zero when the drive is at a standstill. In this way, the machine operator can tell
where the drive is located within each feed movement..
[3]
nRef1 [ ]
[2]
[1]
nRef2
RefOffZP
Z
MZP
Z X
LHWLS RHWLS
WLS
476761739
6.6.7 Type 6: Reference cam flush with CW limit switch

The reference position is the left end of the reference cam or the first zero pulse to the
left after the end of the reference cam.
One of the binary inputs P600 ... 606 must be set to "REFERENCE CAM". The reference
travel starts in CW direction with P901 reference speed 1 until the first positive edge of
the reference cam is reached. Then P902 reference speed 2 is used. As opposed to type
1, the drive starts in CW direction and reverses at the reference cam.
Referencing
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
The reference cam must start just before or in line with the CW hardware limit switch and
must project into the limit switch. This ensures that no contact is made with the hardware
limit switch during reference travel.
[3] [2]
nRef1
nRef2
RefOffCAM
f
RefOffZP
Z
MZP
Z RefZP RefCAM
fCAM
C
LHWLS CAM RHWLS

WLS
476763275
6.6.8 Type 7: Reference cam flush with CCW limit switch

The reference position is the right end of the reference cam or the first zero pulse to the
right after the end of the reference cam.
One of the binary inputs P600 ... 606 must be set to "REFERENCE CAM". The reference
travel starts in CW direction with P901 reference speed 1 until the first positive edge of
the reference cam is reached. Then P902 reference speed 2 is used. As opposed to type
2, the drive starts in CW direction and reverses at the reference cam.
6 f
Referencing
i
Hz
P Hz
The reference cam must start just before or in line with the CCW hardware limit switch
and must project into the limit switch. This ensures that no contact is made with the hard-
ware limit switch during reference travel.
[2
[2] [1]
nRef1
nRef2
RefOffCAM
f
RefOffZP
e
RefCAM
C RefZP MZP
Z
LHWLS CAM RHWLS

WLS
476764811
6.6.9 Type 8: Without enable

The reference position is the current position. The arguments in the IPOSplus® com-
mand Go0"ZP" or "CAM" and P904 have no effect.
It makes sense to use this type of reference travel with absolute encoders and for drives
that are to be referenced at standstill. For example, the position of a feed axis can be
set to zero when the drive is at a standstill. In this way, the machine operator can tell
where the drive is located within each feed movement.
[3]
nRef1 [ ]
[2]
[1]
nRef2
RefOffZP
Z
MZP
Z X
LHWLS RHWLS
WLS
476761739
In contrast to type 5, type 8 reference travel can also be performed when the system
status is not set to "A".
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.7 Modulo function

6.7.1 Introduction
The modulo function can be activated for endless unidirectional rotary applications such
as, for example, rotary tables or transport chains. This ensures that all position data in
the range 0 to (modulo value – 1 incr.) is displayed. When the modulo value defined by
the user (for example, 100 mm or 360°) is exceeded, the modulo position value is reset
to zero.
It is also possible to use the incremental value of the encoder selected in P941 for posi-
tioning and only to activate the modulo function in the background, for example, for
counting the revolutions of the output.
The modulo function has the following features:
• Position specification in output units. This can be used to specify a 360° turntable
rotation directly without having to convert it into IPOSplus® encoder increments as in
the past. For example:
– Turntable rotation 360° = modulo value = 216 increments.
– Distance to be covered in one machine cycle = modulo value = 216 increments
(rotary table with 4 stations: 1 cycle = 90° = modulo value).
• Permanently accurate positioning without long-term drift or positioning errors, even
for non-integer gear unit reduction ratios, as long as the project planning guidelines
are adhered to.
• Previous solutions involved mounting an external synchronous encoder or using a
digital input to register the zero cross-over, which meant additional programming in
IPOSplus®.
• Absolute position specification over several revolutions.
• Specification of a travel strategy: The position setpoint can be reached either via the
shortest route, or from CW or CCW.
Endless positioning in combination with absolute encoder evaluation via DIP11 is
available as of firmware version 14 (822 890 6.14) (fault F92 DIP work area no longer
occurs when the modulo function is activated).
INFORMATION
Depending on the system, the gear unit and, if necessary, any additional gears must
be simulated via the number of teeth. Ask the manufacturer of your gear unit for the
exact number of teeth. Do not accept the ratio from the nameplate. Furthermore, the
maximum target position that can be represented is determined when the gear unit is
selected. This value must not be exceeded. This must be taken into account in the
project planning phase (see the Project Planning section).
6 f
Modulo function
i
Hz
P Hz
6.7.2 Operating principle

When the modulo function is active, position setpoints are expressed in output units
rather than in increments on the motor shaft.
Examples of output units (GM = motor encoder / GS = synchronous encoder):
• Turntable applications with the output unit 360° correspond to one turntable rotation.
476886155
• Conveyor chain with a carrier spacing as output unit.
476887691
The mechanism of the application is simulated during startup. You have to specify the
exact number of teeth of the gear unit and the additional gear if required. This informa-
tion is represented in the following SHELL parameters:
• Modulo numerator and denominator P961/P962
• Modulo encoder resolution P963
The user can use the following IPOSplus® system variables to specify target positions in
output units for the MOVIDRIVE® system software:
• Modulo target position H454 to describe the target position
• Actual modulo position of the output H455 for reading the actual position
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
The actual position H455 is calculated according to the following block diagram:
ABS
DIP H509 P941 H453

Bit 1
MODULO
1
P961
EXT H510 P962 H455
P963 0
H456 16
MOT H511 2
P961 x P963
476895243

P961 = Modulo numerator
P962 = Modulo denominator
P963 = Modulo encoder resolution
H509 = Current actual position, absolute encoder
H510 = Current actual position, external encoder
H511 = Current actual position, motor encoder
H453 = Modulo control
H455 = Actual modulo position, output
H456 = Modulo numerator
INFORMATION
If the drive is to be positioned to the target position in the modulo range, the drive start
positioning when the target position is written to variable H454 MOD.TAGPOS. GO
commands refer to the IPOSplus® encoder and cannot be used for modulo positioning.
INFORMATION
The following examples use the modulo value 360°. It is also possible to scale to a
different physical value other than a modulo value.
6 f
Modulo function
i
Hz
P Hz
The diagram below shows the relationship between the current position of the IPOSplus®
encoder, for example, the motor encoder H511 and the actual position in the modulo
representation. The actual modulo position always moves within the output unit, for ex-
ample, from 0° (= 0 increments) to 360° (= 216 increments).
H455 ModActPos
477219595
A new target position is specified by writing the IPOSplus® variable H454 MODTAGPOS
in 32-bit format.
The system software differentiates between 2 forms of representation, which can be set
in H453, bit 1:
• 360° = 16 bit (referred to below as "216/360°" ) standard setting: In this case, the
higher value bit range can be used for specifying whole number 360° rotations.
• 360° = 32 bit (referred to below as "232/360°" ) standard setting: This notation should
be avoided due to the restriction on the maximum range of representation. If used,
the product of modulo numerator and modulo encoder resolution corresponds to one
360° revolution.
Sample position selection in output units (in hexadecimal format):

Representation of several integral revolutions
H454 MODTAGPOS = k × 360° + 0 ... 360° = k × 216 + 0 ... (216 -1)
Representation of one integral revolution
H454 MODTAGPOS = 0 ... 360°
Target position in output unit [ ° ] Realization via IPOSplus® variable H454 MOD.TAGPOS
360° 0001 0000
3 × 360° 0003 0000
180° 0000 8000
270° 0000 C000
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.7.3 Travel strategies

When the modulo function is activated, a number of travel strategies can be used for po-
sitioning. The travel strategy for referencing is dependent on this setting.
Referencing Reference travel is started in the same way as for referencing without the modulo
function. When the modulo function is activated, the H455 MOD.ACTPOS variable is
referenced.
If a reference offset is specified in P900, it is interpreted as being in the output unit
scaling (216 = 360°).
Once reference travel is complete, the current target position H454 MOD.ACTPOS is
set to the actual value MOD.ACTPOS (see section "Referencing").
ACTPOS.MOT H511 is not referenced.
Positioning The travel strategy for positioning is selected via the SHELL parameter 960 Modulo
function. The modes can be changed using an IPOSplus® program with the MOVILINK
command (see section "User interface"). The examples refer to the selected resolution
(216/360°).
A motor encoder has been entered as the IPOSplus® encoder (P941 Source actual po-
sition = MOTOR ENC. (X15)).
"Short distance" Modulo mode "Short distance" (P960 = SHORT) – standard setting
Starting from the current actual position H455 MOD.ACTPOS, the system calculates the
shortest route to the required target position H454 MOD.TAGPOS. The direction of ro-
tation is selected on the basis of the shortest route.
Target position that can be represented:
H454 MOD.TAGPOS = k × 360° + 0 ... 360° = k × 216 + 0 ... (216 - 1)
477225739
1. Actual position prior to positioning Modulo actual position

2. Definition of target position Modulo target position
3. Actual position after positioning Modulo actual position
6 f
Modulo function
i
Hz
P Hz
Modulo short route (note: when MOD.TAGPOS = 120° the axis only moves in a coun-
terclockwise direction when the drive is positioned at least 1 increment CCW of 300°,
since 300° + 180° = 120° and 300° 180° = 120°).
Therefore, to position an axis that is at 0°, 1 revolution in a clockwise direction, H454
must be set to 0x 10000. To move this axis 1 revolution CCW, H454 must be set to 0x
FFFF0000.
"CW" Modulo mode "CW" (P960 = CW)

The drive moves from the current actual position H455 MOD.ACTPOS clockwise to the
target position H454 MOD.TAGPOS.
H454 MOD.TAGPOS = k × 360° + 0 ... 360° = k × 216 + 0 ... (216 - 1)
Only positive values are permitted in the high part. If this condition is not met and the
sign bit 232 is set, the drive inverter displays the fault status (IPOSplus® program error).
477230091
1. Actual position prior to positioning Modulo actual position

2. Definition of target position Modulo target position
3. Actual position after positioning Modulo actual position
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
"CCW" Modulo mode "CCW" (P960=CCW)

The drive moves from the current actual position H455 MOD.ACTPOS counter-clock-
wise to the target position H454 MOD.TAGPOS.
H454 MOD.TAGPOS = - k × 360° + 0 ... 360° = - k × 216 + 0 ... (216 - 1)
Only negative values are permitted in the high part. If this condition is not met and the
sign bit 232 is not set, the drive inverter displays the fault status (IPOSplus® program
error).
477247627
Parameters and Parameters and variables for the modulo function

variables
See sections "IPOSplus® Parameters" and "System Variables".
Parameter no. Name
P 960, Index 8835 Modulo control
P 961, Index 8836 Modulo numerator
P 962, Index 8837 Modulo denominator
P 963, Index 8838 Modulo encoder resolution
INFORMATION
To use the modulo function, the peripheral condition of the product of modulo encoder
resolution and modulo numerator < 231 must be fulfilled.
Variable no. Name

H453 MODULOCTRL
H454 MOD.TAGPOS
H455 MOD.ACTPOS
H456 MODCOUNT
6 f
Modulo function
i
Hz
P Hz
6.7.4 Project planning
Definition of drive unit

• Gear unit and the additional gear make up the output unit 360°
• Determine the maximum target position in "Number of drive units"
• Determine 16 bit or resolution (encoder x modulo numerator) for 360°
↓
Determining the SHELL modulo parameters
• Modulo function P960 (select travel strategy)
• Modulo numerator P961
• Modulo denominator P962
• Modulo encoder resolution P963
Resources for determining the number of teeth in the gear unit:
• SEW Technical Manual
• SEW Wingear program to reduce the numerator/denominator factors
↓
Modulo range of representation and maximum output position
• Condition for the range of representation: Modulo encoder resolution x modulo numerator < 231
• Condition for maximum output position: = 231 / (modulo encoder resolution × modulo numerator)
If this condition is not met, it can lead to positioning errors!
↓
Realization in the IPOSplus® program
• Specify setpoint position with the H454 ModTagPos variable: MOD.TAGPOS = k × 360° + 0 ... 360° = k
× 216 + 0 ... (216 - 1)
• Read off the actual position in the H455 ModActPos variable: MOD.ACTPOS = ... + 0 ... 360° = ... + 0
... (216 - 1)
The system software reads the target position specified in ModActPos and then sets the high word
to 0.
The actual position ModuloActPos always moves between 0° and 360°!
6.7.5 Project planning examples

Chain conveyor Step 1: Defining the output unit
The positions for a chain conveyor are specified in output units. A 360° rotation at the
gear unit output corresponds to the modulo output unit of 360°.
Step 2: Determining the SHELL parameters

Technical data
Gear unit type KA47B
Output speed [rpm] 19
Motor speed [rpm] 2000
Gear unit reduction ratio i 104.37
Motor type DY71S
SEW employees can read off the number of teeth in the gear unit from the SEW Tech-
nical Manual (DriveNet) or from the electronic nameplate (only for Hiperface®).
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
In this example, the following numbers of teeth were ascertained:

Z1 = 17 / Z2 = 74 / Z3 = 8 / Z4 = 33 / Z5 = 16 / Z6 = 93
477251979
The following calculations must be performed to determine the SHELL parameters

modulo numerator, modulo denominator and modulo encoder resolution:
MN
= iG × i AG
MD
MN Z2 + Z 4 + Z6
=
MD Z1 + Z3 + Z5
MN 227106 113553
= =
MD 2176 1088
MN = Modulo numerator
MD = Modulo denominator
iG = i gear unit
iAG = i additional gear
The numerator and denominator were reduced in the above example (happens auto-
matically with the Wingear program).
This results in the following input values for the SHELL parameters:
• Modulo numerator = 113553
• Modulo denominator = 1088
• Modulo encoder resolution = 4096
Step 3: Modulo range of representation and maximum target position

Check the modulo range of representation:
The product of the modulo encoder resolution and modulo numerator must be < 231
(decimal 2147483648).
Modulo numerator x modulo encoder resolution = 113553 × 4096 = 465113088
=> The condition has been met, the target position can be represented.
Check the maximum target position:
231 231 231

TPmax = = = = 4 .6
M 360° MN × MER 113553 × 4096
TPmax = maximum target position

M = Modulo
MN = Modulo numerator
MER = Modulo encoder resolution
The maximum target position corresponds to 4.6 output revolutions.
6 f
Modulo function
i
Hz
P Hz
Chain conveyor Step 1: Defining the output unit

with carrier
Now, the previous example shall be extended:
A gear wheel is mounted to the gear unit that drives a chain. There are 35 chain links
between each carrier.
Step 2: Determining the SHELL parameters
Technical data
Gear unit type KA47B
Output speed [rpm] 19
Motor speed [rpm] 2000
Gear unit reduction ratio i 104.37
Motor type DY71S
477253515
Number of teeth of the additional gear chain sprocket: ZAG1 = 5

Carrier spacing in chain links: ZAG2 = 36
i additional gear = 5/36
MN
= iG × i AG
MD
MN Z2 + Z4 + Z6 Z AG 2
= ×
MD Z1 + Z3 + Z5 Z AG 1
MN 1021977
=
MD 1360
Modulo numerator = 1021977

Modulo denominator = 1360
Modulo encoder resolution = 4096
Modulo function
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Step 3: Modulo range of representation and maximum target position

Check the modulo range of representation:
The product of the modulo encoder resolution and modulo numerator must be < 231
(decimal 2 147 483 648).
Modulo numerator x modulo encoder resolution = 1021977 × 4096 = 4 186 017 792
The condition has not been met, the required target position cannot be represented. This
application would result in positioning errors. The system sets the +/- bit when a value
is specified, for example, a target position of 180°; the drive is positioned incorrectly.
Solution: Select a gear unit with a different ratio.
The target position that can be represented can be increased by selecting another gear
unit with different division factors for the number of teeth (i.e. parts of the numbers of
teeth would cancel one another out in the calculation).
6.7.6 Frequently asked questions

• Is there a complete program to use with the modulo function?
• Yes, the "Modulo Positioning" application module with optional control via fieldbus
or hardware terminal.
• Why is it recommended to set P960 to SHORT?
• The travel strategy is adhered to strictly when the target position is set during
standstill. If the drive is set to P960 = CW, for example, when the target position
is set, only one increment CW away, the drive moves through a complete rotation.
• Why does positioning not start once the target position has been sent?
• The drive must be started in the "... & IPOS" operating mode.
• A travel strategy must be selected via SHELL P960.
• Before setting the H454 ModTagPos IPOSplus® variable, the drive inverter must
be in the status A "Technology option".
• Can the target position be written cyclically?
• For targets in the range 0° to 359,999° or 0 increments ... 65535 increments: Yes.
• If target positions ≥ 360° are written cyclically, this causes "Endless positioning".
• Can incremental positioning be performed if the modulo function is activated?
• Yes, but to avoid unwanted "Cross effects", modulo positioning should be
switched off in the SHELL parameter 960.
• After the reference travel, only the IPOSplus® variable H455 MOD.ACTPOS is set
to 0, NOT the incremental actual position ACTPOS.MOT in variable H511.
• What causes the error IPOS-ILOOP F10?
• The interpreter of the IPOS program detects a command with invalid operands.
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
• How can positioning be continued once the enable has been revoked?
• Set the bits H453.0 (ModuloCtrl variable and TargetReset_Off bit).
• How does the axis act when the _AxisStop( AS_PSTOP ) command is activated
during positioning?
• The drive waits at the positioning ramp; the actual position is displayed when the
axis stops. To continue positioning, the target position must be given a new value
(for example, change the increment value by 1 bit). Instead of using the
_AxisStop( AS_PSTOP ) command, use _AxisStop( AS_RSTOP ). In this case,
the target position would be stored when the H453.0 bits (ModuloCtrl variable and
TargetReset_Off bit) were activated.
6.8 Cam controllers

You can use cam controllers to set or reset outputs depending on the position of a drive.
This function lets you control additional actuators, such as pneumatic cylinders, start a
second axis (e.g. for rounding the path contour in a xy portal) or monitor two axes in the
same operating range for collision.
Each MOVIDRIVE® comes equipped with a standard cam controller with one output. A
new output is formed every time the command is processed in the IPOSplus® program.
An unlimited number of outputs is theoretically possible, but the number of outputs is
practically limited by the IPOSplus® program length and the acceptable execution time.
New MOVIDRIVE® units (MDx_A / MCV / MCS / MCF as of version .14, MCH as of ver-
sion .13 and MDx_B) and the technology options have an expanded cam controller with
eight outputs that is cyclically calculated in the background by the firmware.
You initialize a cam controller in the drive and evaluate the status of the cams with the
GETSYS command.
The GETSYS command accesses a data structure. The bit with the highest value of the
first variable in this data structure decides which cam controller the GETSYS command
refers to (Bit 31 = 0: Standard cam control with bit 31 = 1: Expanded cam control).
If both cam controllers are available in the unit on site, SEW recommends to initially use
the expanded cam control. It is also possible to use both cam controllers at the same
time. The outputs of both cam controllers can be issued on the same binary output word
by issuing the outputs of the standard cam controller in the lower 2 bits and the outputs
of the expanded cam controller in the higher 4 bits, shifted two places to the left.
INFORMATION
If the output bit of a cam is copied to a binary terminal output, the output is set 1 ms
later, as with all bits that are copied to outputs in IPOSplus®.
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
6.8.1 Standard cam controller

Characteristics of • It is available with encoder for all operating modes.
the standard cam
• Per declaration and request of a data structure, one output with delay compensation
controller
is set or reset depending on the four position windows (defined by a CCW and CW
limit value).
• The limits of the positioning window can be altered during the execution time and will
be taken into consideration with the next GETSYS command. This option makes it
possible to use other cam areas for the return travel in case of a reversing axis.
• The cam output can be assigned to any bit of a variable.
• An unlimited number of outputs is theoretically possible, but the number of outputs is
practically limited by the IPOSplus® program length and the acceptable execution
time.
• A new output will be formed with the GETSYS command, regardless of whether the
drive is referenced or not.
• The GETSYS command initializes the function and forms the new status of the
output a single time once the command is given. The command must be activated
every time a new status is required in the IPOSplus® program – the new generation
of the cam output depends on the program cycle time.
• The reference value can be set, typical reference sizes are:
– H511 - Current actual position, motor encoder
– H510 - Current actual position, external encoder
– H509 - current actual position, SSI absolute encoder (DIP11A option)
– H455 - Current actual position, motor encoder in modulo format
– H376 - Current actual position, master value (only for the technology functions
electronic cam or internal synchronous operation)
• The cam outputs keep their values in between the GETSYS commands and are only
deleted after a reset.
• If the cam function is activated n times per 1 ms, n cam outputs can be generated
(e.g. in a quick task, such as task 3 in MOVIDRIVE® B, which can process several
IPOSplus® commands per 1 ms). Since MOVIDRIVE® generates a new position
value every 1 ms, all of the commands processed during the 1 ms period operate with
the same position value.
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
Startup of the cam Compiler: _GetSys(Cam1 ,GS_CAM );

controller
initializes the cam controller and generates the status of an output with the data structure
as of the variable cam1
Assembler: GETSYS Hxx = CAM
initializes the cam controller and generates the status of an output with the data structure
as of the variable Hxx
Data structure of
the standard cam
Variable Symbolic name of the Brief description
controller element in the SEW
standard structure
H+0 GSCAM.SourceVar Number of the reference variable for the cam calculation, typical
reference variables are:
• H511 (Actual position, motor encoder)
• H510 (Actual position, SSI encoder)
• H509 (Actual position, external encoder)
• H455 (Actual position, motor encoder in modulo format)
e.g. H+0 = 511 for reference size H511, bit 31 of the variable must
be 0!
H+1 GSCAM.DbPreCtrl Delay time compensation in 0.1 ms to compensate the delay time
of an actuator connected to the inverter. The output is preset,
depending on the rate of change of the reference variable value, in
such a way that the output is switched in advance by this time inter-
val.
H+2 GSCAM.DestVar Number of variables in which the output will be set or reset
H+3 GSCAM.BitPosition Position of the bit in variable H+2; if the cam output is assigned to a
unit output (e.g. H481), this binary output is to be reserved with
P620 – P639 as an IPOSplus® output.
H+4 GSCAM.BitValue Polarity of the output, 0 = bit set, if the reference variable H+0 has
been set within the position window H+6 to H+13 1 = bit set, if refer-
ence variable H+0 outside the position window H+6 to H+13
H+5 GSCAM.NumOfCam Number of the position windows defined in H+6 to H+13; the left
limit value must always be smaller than the right one. If a modulo
axis requires a position window that exceeds the 360° - 0° limit,
then this range will have to be divided into two position windows.
This process lets the operator set three related ranges for this out-
put.
H+6 GSCAM.PosL1 CCW limit value of the first position window.
H+7 GSCAM.PosR1 CW limit value of the first position window
H+8 GSCAM.PosL2 CCW limit value of the second position window
H+9 GSCAM.PosR2 CW limit value of the second position window
H+10 GSCAM.PosL3 CCW limit value of the third position window
H+11 GSCAM.PosR3 CW limit value of the third position window
H+12 GSCAM.PosL4 CCW limit value of the fourth position window
H+13 GSCAM.PosR4 CW limit value of the fourth position window
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Example A travel drive has a travel range of ten motor revolutions.

An output is to be set when the drive is in the first and in the last motor revolution or in
a range of +/- 10° around the center of the travel range. A second output is to be set
when the drive is in the second revolution.
3600° / 40960 Inc
3240° / 36864 Inc
720° / 8192 Inc
360° / 4096 Inc
t
1
H481.1
0
t
1
H481.2
0
t
477561867
Required parame- P620 = IPOSplus® output

ter settings
P621 = IPOSplus® output
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
Example solved in /*=============================================

the Compiler IPOS source file
===============================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
//Declaration
GSCAM Cam1, Cam2; //Declaration of cam outputs 1 and 2
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
°°Cam1.SourceVar = numof(ActPos_Mot); // Reference size motor encoder
Cam1.DbPreCtrl = 0; // no delay time compensation
Cam1.DestVar = numof(StdOutpIPOS); // Output onf Do01 (H481.1)
°°Cam1.BitPosition = 1;
°°Cam1.BitValue = 0; // Output = 1, if value in window
Cam1.NumOfCam = 3; // Number of windows
Cam1.PosL1 = 0; // 1st window, left limit value
° Cam1.PosR1 = 4096; // 1st window, right limit value
° Cam1.PosL2 = 20366; // 2nd window, left limit value
° Cam1.PosR2 = 20594; // 2nd window, right limit value
° Cam1.PosL3 = 36864; // 3rd window, left limit value
°Cam1.PosR3 = 40960; // 3rd window, right limit value
°°Cam2.SourceVar = numof(ActPos_Mot); // Reference size motor encoder
Cam2.DbPreCtrl = 0; // no delay time compensation
° Cam2.DestVar = numof(StdOutpIPOS); // Output onf Do02 (H481.2)
°°Cam2.BitPosition = 2;
°°Cam2.BitValue = 0; // Output = 1, if value in window
Cam2.NumOfCam = 1; // Number of windows
° Cam2.PosL1 = 4096; // 1st window, left limit value
° Cam2.PosR1 = 8192; // 1st window, right limit value
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
_GetSys(Cam1 ,GS_CAM ); // Form output of first cam
_GetSys(Cam2 ,GS_CAM ); // Form output of second cam
}
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Example solved in (The SET command is not necessary and serves demonstrative purposes only)
the Assembler
477809419
6.8.2 Expanded cam controller

Characteristics of • Is available as of MDx_A / MCV / MCS / MCFsoftware version .14, MCH as of
the expanded cam software version .13 and MDx_B.
controller
• Is available for CFC or Servo operating modes with technology options.
• Eight outputs (cam bits) are available.
• Up to four position windows and a delay time compensation can be defined for each
output (corresponds to four cams on a mechanical cam disk).
• The outputs 1-4 are processed every 1 ms; outputs 5-8 every 4 ms.
• The GETSYS command initializes and starts the function. The cams are generated
with the fixed time interval in the background and do not depend on the cycle time of
the IPOSplus® program. Assign useful values to the data structures prior to their first
invocation.
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
• Any changes in the data structure will be adopted every 1 ms. This step changes the
limits of a position window during the execution time; these will be considered during
the next processing cycle of the cam. This option makes it possible to use other cam
areas for the return travel in case of a reversing axis.
• All outputs can be stored contiguously from any bit of a variable.
• It is possible to set outputs, i.e. to fix their setting to 1 or 0 in the program.
• The reference value can be set, typical reference sizes are:
– H511 - Current actual position, motor encoder
– H510 - Current actual position, external encoder
– H509 - Current actual position, SSI absolute encoder (DIP11A option)
– H455 - Current actual position, motor encoder in modulo format
– H376 - Current actual position, master value (only for the technology functions
electronic cam or internal synchronous operation)
• You can stop the expanded cam function by calling up GETSYS with bit 31 = 0. This
step stops processing in the firmware and the function no longer requires any
processor capacity. If, however, the CamState is assigned 0x8000 0000, the cam
function will also be stopped but runs in the background without setting any outputs.
Starting the Compiler: _GetSys(CamArray ,GS_CAM );

expanded cam Initializes the cam controller and generates the status of all outputs with the data struc-
control
ture as of the variable CamArray
Assembler: GETSYS Hxx = CAM
Initializes the cam controller and generates the status of all outputs with the data struc-
ture as of the variable Hxx
Data structure of The expanded cam function is configured with the help of two data structures, i.e. the
the expanded cam CamControl structure and the CamOutput structure.
control
• The CamControl structure controls the global behavior of the expanded cam
function.
• The CamOutput structure is used to define an output (output of the cam disk) and
may be required up to eight times.
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
SEW standard
structure
Variable Name Description
GSCAM_EXT
H+0 CamState Bit 31 must always be set, otherwise processing in the firmware stops.
• 0x8000 0000 = function inactive, no new cam outputs will be gener-
ated, set outputs will be retained and only deleted after a reset or
voltage off/on.
• 0x8000 0001 = function active, but all cam outputs will be turned off.
• 0x8000 0002 = function active, if drive is referenced (H473, Bit20
=1)
• 0x8000 0003 = function active even without referenced drive
H+1 CamReserved1 Reserved
H+2 CamOutShiftLeft Shifts the internal data buffer of the outputs by n digits to the left prior to
writing to the target variable H+6.
NOTICE: The shifting process will delete the information of the upper
outputs. This means that if the shift factor is 3, the upper 3 outputs with
4 ms cycle time are no longer available, and the 4 outputs with 1 ms
cycle time are assigned to bits 3 - 6 and the output with 4 ms cycle time
is assigned to bit 7.
H+3 CamForceOn Mask to force mandatory outputs. The mask takes effect on the internal
data buffer prior to shifting with H+2 (NOT on the target variable defined
with H+6)
H+4 CamForceOff Mask to force deletion of outputs. The mask takes effect on the internal
data buffer prior to shifting with H+2 (NOT on the target variable defined
with H+6)
CamForceOff dominates CamForceOn
H+5 CamSource Bit 31 switches between preset reference variables and an indicator to
a random reference variable.
Bit 31= 0:
• 0 = encoder X15 (motor encoder, H511)
• 1 = encoder X14 (external encoder, H510)
• 2 = encoder H509 (absolute encoder DIP11A)
• 3 = virtual encoder
• all following values are reserved!
Bit 31= 1:
CamSource includes a pointer to one IPOSplus® variable +231
H+6 CamDestination Pointer to target variable.
The bits not used in the target variables are available for other functions
(if you shift the outputs by four to the left with Shift Left, it frees up bits
0-3, bits 4-7 are available for the cam functions and bits 8-31 are avail-
able for any assignment.
If the cam outputs are assigned to unit outputs (e.g. H481), you will
have to reserve these binary outputs with P620 - P639 as IPOS out-
puts. The bits not used in this word are available for other outputs.
H+7 CamOutputs Number of outputs (max. 8)
H+8 CamData 1 Pointer to first CamOutput structure (first output)
... ...
H+15 CamData 8 Pointer to last CamOutput structure (eighth output)
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
CAM_EXT_OUT
H+0 DeadTime Delay time compensation for this channel (-500 ms..0..+500 ms) to
compensate the delay time of an actuator connected to the inverter.
The output is preset, depending on the rate of change of the reference
variable value, in such a way that the output is switched in advance by
this time interval.
H+1 CamAreas Number of position windows for this channel (1 ... 4); the CCW limit
value must always be lower than the CW limit value. If a modulo axis
requires a position window that exceeds the 360° - 0° limit, then this
area will have to be divided into two position windows. This process lets
the operator set three related ranges for this output.
H+2 LeftLimit1 CCW limit, window 1
H+3 RightLimit1 CW limit, window 1
... ... ...
H+8 LeftLimit4 CCW limit, window 4
H+9 RightLimit4 CW limit, window 4
Function chart of
the expanded cam
CAM CONTROL
control
CamState == 3 CamForceOff Bit 2n
CamSource >=1
DRIVE REF CamForceOn Bit 2n
CAM_EXT_OUT 8 CamOutputs 8
CAM_EXT_OUT ... CamOutputs ...
DEAD TIME
LIMITS 1 ... 4 INT CAM 1 & >=1 & INT OUT 1
CamOut
ShiftLeft
Hxxx
477814283
INT CAM 1: Internal cam signal 1

INT OUT 1: Internal output signal 1
Hxxx: Output variable defined with CamDestination
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Example A modulo rotary table has two processing stations installed 180° apart from each other.
It is driven by a gear unit with a ratio of 1:5. An output is to be set when the drive is in
the +/-5° range of the stations.
(Comment: an active modulo function will resolve a full load rotation of 360° with 65536
increments see modulo function)
360°
65536 Inc 360°
355° 5°
64626 Inc 910 Inc
180°
0°
185° 175°
33678 Inc 31858 Inc
1
180°
32768 Inc 0
477818635
Required parame- P620 = IPOSplus® output

ter settings
P960 = e.g. SHORT
P961 = 5
P962 = 1
P963 = 4096
6 f
Cam controllers
i
Hz
P Hz
Example solved in /*
the Compiler ======================================================================
Program frame for applications with expanded cam function
======================================================================
*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
// Variable structure for the cam controller defined externally in *.h
#include <camdef.h>
CamStructure CamData0;
ControlStructure MyCamControl;
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
MyCamControl.CamControl=0x80000002; // exp. function active
MyCamControl.CamOutShiftLeft=1;
MyCamControl.CamForceOn=//Mandatory activation of mask
MyCamControl.CamForceOff=0; // Mask: Mandatory deactivation of outputs
MyCamControl.CamSource=numof(ModActPos) ¦ (1<<31);
// Actual position value in modulo format
MyCamControl.CamDestination=481; // Basic unit outputs
MyCamControl.CamOutputs=1; // Number of cam discs (max. 8)
MyCamControl.CamDataStr0=numof(CamData0);
// Start of the cam structure 1 (output bit 0)
CamData0.DeadTime=0;
CamData0.CamAreas=3; // 3 cam ranges due to modulo overflow in the win-
dow
°°CamData0.LeftLimit1= 64626; °°°// 355° at load = 360° x 64626/65536
°°CamData0.RightLimit1= 65536; °°°// 360° at load
°°CamData0.LeftLimit2= 0; // 0° at load
CamData0.RightLimit2= 910; // 5° at load
CamData0.LeftLimit3= 31858; // 175° at load
CamData0.RightLimit3= 33678; // 185° at load
CamData0.LeftLimit4= 0; // not used
CamData0.RightLimit4= 0; // not used
_Go0( GO0_U_W_ZP );
_GetSys( MyCamControl.CamControl ,GS_CAM );
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
}
}
Cam controllers
f 6
i
Hz
P Hz
Example solved in
the Assembler
477835787
kVA n Position Detection via Binary Inputs
7 f
Types of built-in encoders
i
Hz
P Hz
7 Position Detection via Binary Inputs

7.1 Types of built-in encoders
For asynchronous AC motors, SEW-EURODRIVE offers a position detection with a sim-
ple incremental encoder (without position control). Those are built-in encoders.
The following table illustrates recommended encoders for the respective products:
Encoder Unit
MOVIDRIVE® B MOVITRAC® B MQx module
EI7C X
EI76 X X
EI72
EI71
ES16 X
NV26 (proximity sensor) X
• You may also use a different encoder, but observe the following information:
INFORMATION
If the resolution is too high, the encoder might not be evaluated correctly at nominal
speed.
• Select an encoder with a resolution that suits the pulse frequency of the inverter.
• Observe the technical data of the built-in encoders in "Drive Engineering, Practical
Implementation – Encoder systems" and the technical data of the binary inputs
(counter input).
7.2 Principle of the position detection

The track signals are transmitted to 2 binary inputs of your inverter and evaluated with-
out encoder option. Index 8845 was implemented in order to activate the "Position de-
tection".
Index 8845 has the following assignment:
• Position detection deactivated: 8845 = "0"
• Position detection activated: 8845 = "1"
You can set index 8845 in an IPOSplus® program with the MOVILINK command.
The following table illustrates the processing of the actual position in the IPOSplus® pro-
gram:
Processing of the actual position in the IPOSplus® program
• The actual position of the built-in encoder is mapped
automatically in the IPOSplus® variable H511 and can be
SV M processed using program control.
• The built-in encoder can be used in particular for applications
in which positioning usually takes place using rapid speed/
creep speed by means of several proximity switches.
• The encoder cannot be used for motor control (operating
IPOS
O
mode "…&n-control").
• The encoder cannot be used for direct position control
(operating mode "…& IPOS").
• The "Simple Positioning" application module in MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio can be used for simple positioning tasks with
2211727115 MOVITRAC® B.
Position Detection via Binary Inputs kVA n
f 7
Position detection with MOVIDRIVE® B i
Hz
P Hz
7.3 Position detection with MOVIDRIVE® B

For MOVIDRIVE® B, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the EI76 built-in encoder.
The binary inputs (counter inputs) of the MOVIDRIVE® B have the following technical
data:
Binary inputs
Encoder signals (2 tracks) Track A and track B
Phase position 90° ± 20°
Mark space ratio 1:1 ±20%
Max. pulse frequency 350 Hz
Connection of track A MOVIDRIVE® B: Terminal X13:3 (DI02)
Connection of track B MOVIDRIVE® B: Terminal X13:4 (DI03)
Reference potential DCOM
Simple positioning with MOVIDRIVE® B requires the inverter to be in one of the following
operating modes:
• VFC (without feedback)
• V/f characteristic curve
7 f
i Position detection with MOVITRAC® B
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
If MOVIDRIVE® B is equipped with an encoder option, it is not possible to evaluate the
track signals of the binary inputs (counter inputs).
• Use the MOVIDRIVE® B without encoder option.
Proceed as follows to use a built-in encoder:
1. Connect the encoder to the digital inputs of the MOVIDRIVE® B via terminals X13:3
(DI02) and X13:4 (DI03).
2. Set the following parameters (indexes):
• P601 binary inputs DI02 to "IPOS input" (Index 8336 to "16")
• P602 binary inputs DI03 to "IPOS input" (Index 8337 to "16")
3. Set index 8845 to "1" to activate the simple positioning.
The position is determined in the IPOS variable H511 (ActPos_Mot) and is always "0"
when the line voltage is switched on.
A reference travel can only be performed by an IPOSplus® program.
7.4 Position detection with MOVITRAC® B

The binary inputs (counter inputs) of the MOVITRAC® B have the following technical
data:
Binary inputs
Max. pulse frequency 120 kHz
Connection of track A MOVITRAC® B: Terminal X12:5 (DI04)
Connection of track B MOVITRAC® B: Terminal X12:4 (DI03)
Reference potential GND to PE potential
For MOVITRAC® B, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the EI7C built-in encoder.

1. Connect the encoder to the digital inputs of the MOVITRAC® B via terminals X12:5
(DI04) and X12:4 (DI03).
• P602 binary input DI03 to "IPOS input" (Index 8338 to "16"),
• P603 binary input DI04 to "IPOS input" (Index 8339 to "16"),
3. Set index 8845 to "1" to activate the simple positioning.
INFORMATION
If you intend to use an application module for positioning, refer to the "MOVITRAC® B
Simple Positioning Application Module" manual.
Position detection with MQx
f 7
i
Hz
P Hz
7.5 Position detection with MQx

7.5.1 Proximity sensor evaluation
The MQx modules allow simple positioning based on the NV2 proximity sensor system.
The two proximity sensors send 24 pieces of angle information per revolution. These are
counted by MQx and stored in the IPOSplus® variable H511 (ActPos_Mot) as a position-
ing value. This allows the position to be processed in IPOSplus®, which enables, for ex-
ample, the drive to be stopped at a specified position. Creep speed must be used to
reach the exact position. Position control is not available.
INFORMATION
Only one MOVIMOT® can be connected to the MQx fieldbus interface for proximity
sensor evaluation. Only the Movcom command can be used to control the
MOVIMOT®.
7.5.2 DI0 and DI1 terminal assignments

The proximity sensor evaluation is activated by setting the parameters for the two digital
inputs DI0 and DI1 (P600 und P608) to "MQX ENCODER IN". The parameter settings
can be changed using the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio interface or in the initialization
section of IPOSplus®. IPOSplus® can address any MQx parameters at address 253 using
the Movilink command. The indices of the inputs are 8844dec for DI0 (P608) and 8335dec
for DI1 (P600). Two write accesses are used to transfer the value 32 to the two indices.
The inputs are filtered according to the factory setting with 4 ms. The terminal assign-
ment "MQX ENCODER IN" switches this filter for the proximity sensor evaluation off.
480483467
7 f
i
Hz
P Hz
7.5.3 Position detection with built-in encoder

The binary inputs (counter inputs) of the MQx have the following technical data:
Binary inputs
Max. pulse frequency 4 kHz
Connection of track A DI0
Connection of track B DI1
For MQx, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the EI76 built-in encoder.

1. Connect the encoder to the digital inputs of the MQx module. Use inputs DI0 and DI1.
• P608 binary input DI03 to "MQX ENCODER IN" (Index 8844 to "32"),
• P600 binary input DI11 to "MQX ENCODER IN" (Index 8335 to "32"),
7.5.4 Encoder monitoring

The two encoder cables are checked for wire breaks. The cables are only monitored
when MOVIMOT® is enabled. If a signal in at least one of the encoder cables does not
change for 1 s, a wire break is detected and displayed by fault 14. MOVIMOT® stops
and can only be started again when the MQx has been reset. During this process, the
current position is lost and the system must be referenced again. Encoder monitoring
can be switched on or off using parameter P504 (Encoder monitoring for motor).
7.5.5 Storing the actual position

When a MOVILINK command contacts address 253, the actual position can be stored
at any time in a variable in the range H0 ... H127 in a non-volatile memory. We recom-
mend you save the position each time the drive moves to a new actual position. This
ensures that you do not have to perform reference travel when you restart the unit.
Referencing is, however, still required if the MQx voltage is disconnected during a posi-
tioning operation. The module is designed to cope with 10 billion write cycles.

f 7
i
Hz
P Hz
7.5.6 Counter
The MQx modules have a counter that can be connected to either DI0 or DI1. The pos-
itive edges are counted to a maximum input frequency of 4 kHz. You must change the
setting of the corresponding input to "MQX ENCODER IN" to activate the counter func-
tion. This setting switches off the input filter automatically. As a result, the input signal
for the counter must be fault-free and bounce-free. The value of the counter is written to
variable H511.
INFORMATION
If both the inputs DI0 and DI1 are set to "MQX ENCODER IN", the proximity sensor
evaluation is activated automatically and the counter function is switched off.
7.5.7 Connecting the built-in encoders

The cabling of the built-in encoders can be checked using the LEDs of the MQx. When
a motor turns slowly, the LEDs at inputs DI0 and DI1 flash.
Connecting the To connect the NV26 built-in encoders (proximity sensors), refer to the "Drive System
NV26 proximity for Decentralized Installation – PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors" manual.
sensor
Two simple 4-pole, shielded sensor cables with plug and M12 socket are required for
connection. The cable connects the NV26 proximity sensors to DI0 and DI1 of the bus
module.
We recommend you use metal M12 plug and sockets and connect the shielding at both
ends.
MOVIMOT® MQ..
NV26
480466315
If the MQx interface counts the motor position in H511 in the wrong direction, the M12
plugs at inputs DI0 and DI1 must be exchanged.
Connecting the To connect the EI76 and ES16 built-in encoders, refer to the "Drive System for
EI76, ES16 incre- Decentralized Installation – PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors" manual.
mental encoder

kVA n IPOSplus® and Fieldbus
8 f
Introduction
i
Hz
P Hz
8 IPOSplus® and Fieldbus

8.1 Introduction
Cyclical process data and acyclical parameters are exchanged between a PLC and
input/output signal stations via fieldbus, SBus or RS-485.
For information on the supported communication interfaces, refer to the respective sys-
tem manual.
For a more detailed description of the communication interfaces, refer to the "Commu-
nication and Fieldbus Unit Profile" manual and the manuals for the individual fieldbuses.
To control the MOVIDRIVE® unit via fieldbus, you usually have to change the following
parameters:
• P100 Setpoint source = e.g fieldbus, if setpoints are to be sent via fieldbus
• P101 Control signal source = fieldbus, if control words are to be sent via fieldbus
• P870-875 process data configuration: Specifies the data to be exchanged via the bus
The IPOSplus® program code is generally the same for fieldbuses; that is, it is identical
for INTERBUS and PROFIBUS.
A number of program examples displaying the connection between IPOSplus® and the
fieldbus are included in the "Communication and Fieldbus Unit Profile" manual.
Parameters P870 ... P877 can be used to set up to 3 process data words in both direc-
tions without an IPOSplus® program. Depending on the fieldbus it might be possible to
exchange more process data words.
All words as of the 4th word are assigned the designation IPOSplus® PI DATA or
IPOSplus® PO DATA Process data assigned these designations are not interpreted di-
rectly by the inverter. However, all process data can be accessed via the data structures
of the GETSYS or SETSYS command.
Process data assignment with 3 words:
477958795

IPOSplus® and Fieldbus
kVA n
Binary inputs and outputs
f 8
i
Hz
P Hz
8.2 Binary inputs and outputs

If neither a DIO nor DIP is inserted in MOVIDRIVE®, the bits in control word 2 / status
word 2 can be addressed in the IPOSplus® program as follows:
• Directly with the symbolic names DI10 ... DI17 or DO10 ... DO17
• Read indirectly with GETSYS and written with SETSYS
In this case, they can be described as binary inputs and outputs simulated via virtual ter-
minals. The meaning of the terminals can be set via parameters P610 ... P617 or
P630...P637.
8.2.1 Fieldbus interface, DIO and DIP

If a DIO or DIP is inserted in MOVIDRIVE®, the organization of the terminal assignment
moves as described for the affected system variables (see below), and the process data
can only be accessed via GETSYS and SETSYS:
Unit Outputs Inputs
®
MOVIDRIVE A H481 StdOutpIPOS H483 InpLevel
H480 OptOutpIPOS
H482 OutpLevel (read only)
MOVIDRIVE® B H481 StdOutpIPOS H520 InpLevel
H480 OptOutpIPOS
H521 OutpLevel (read only)
8.3 Cyclical process data

Cyclical process data is read and written in a time slice of 5 ms.
8.3.1 Cyclical preset process data

If a value, for example, SPEED is set in the parameters P870 ... P875, the process data
item is linked directly with an internal value.
The drive receives a double word as a position setpoint. MOVIDRIVE® copies this value
to variable H499 SetpPosBus and, if P916 ramp type is set to BUSRAMP, it automati-
cally uses this value as the position setpoint. If P916 Ramp type = LINEAR, SINE,
SQUARED or JERK LIMITED, the setpoint can be further processed in the user program
or copied directly to a target position H492 TargetPos or H454 ModTagPos using one
of the following commands.
• TargetPos = SetpPosBus; (Compiler)
• SET H492 = H499 (Assembler)
INFORMATION
The double word with the actual position value that is sent from the drive to the PLC
in the example is always the position from H509 ... H511 of the encoder selected in
P941 Source actual position.

8 f
Cyclical process data
i
Hz
P Hz
8.3.2 Cyclical user-specific process data

Users have the option of choosing the description of the cyclical process data them-
selves. To do so, assign the parameter setting PO data for the output data or PI data for
the input data in the process data configuration. In this case, process output data is not
evaluated directly by MOVIDRIVE® but must be copied to the IPOSplus® variables using
the commands GETSYS (PO data) or SETSYS (PI data). The variables are decoded in
the IPOSplus® program. In this way, the user can, for example, transfer position setpoints
in user units (for example, motor revolutions) by multiplying or dividing the value trans-
mitted by the fieldbus before it is used for positioning.
Example Six process data items with user-specific description should be transferred
(P870-877 = IPOS PI-DATA or IPOS PO_DATA). At output word 2, 3, the PLC transfers
the position setpoint to the drive, at input word 3, the drive sends the drives sends the
actual position in modulo format 1/10° (0.0° ... 360.0).
Compiler
#include <const.h>
// Process data data structures
GSPODATA10 tPA; //Output data (PLC -> Drive)
SSPIDATA10 tPE; //Input data (Drive -> PLC)
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
// Initialize fieldbus variables for Getsys and Setsys commands
tPA.BusType = GS_BT_FBUS;
//Process data operation via fieldbus interface see above
tPA.Len = tPE.Len = 6; //PD length 6 words
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
// Import PO data
_GetSys( tPA, GS_PODATA );
// Copy double word 2,3 to modulo target position
ModTagPos = (tPA.PO3 & 0xFFFF) + (tPA.PO2 & 0xFFFF)<<16; //PO2,PO3
// .....
//Regenerate process input data and send to PLC
tPE.PI3 = 3600* ModActPos/ 65536; //Actual position in 1/10 degree
at word 3
_SetSys( SS_PIDATA, tPE ); //Send PD
} //End while (1)
} // Ende main=========================================================

IPOSplus® and Fieldbus
kVA n
Acyclical communication
f 8
i
Hz
P Hz
Assembler
SET H320 = 3
SET H332 = 6
SET H321 = 6
M1 :GETSYS H320 = PO-DATA
SET H300 = H324
AND H300 & FFFF hex
SET H301 = H323
AND H301 & FFFF hex
ADD H300 + H301
SHL H300 << 16
SET H354 = H300
SET H300 = 3600
MUL H300 * H355
DIV H300 / 65536
SET H335 = H300
SETSYS PI-DATA = H332
JMP UNCONDITIONED , M1
8.4 Acyclical communication

For each fieldbus, MOVIDRIVE® supports the option to read and write all parameters,
variables, cam disks and the IPOSplus® program via acyclical communication (also re-
ferred to as parameter channel or parameter service). An IPOSplus® program or param-
eter settings are not required.
Data in the inverter is accessed via index addressing. For the index of a parameter, refer
to the parameter list or press CTRL-F1 in the input field of the parameter.
The index of a H-variable is the number of the variable plus 11000 (for example, H34
has the index 11034).
With MOVIDRIVE® B, for example, a parameter service is processed in a 5-ms time
slice.
8.5 Special features of communication via SBus

If you use the SBus instead of a fieldbus as the data source for control and setpoint val-
ues, the same functionality is available as for the fieldbus, but cyclical process data is
read or written in a time slice of 1 ms.
Furthermore, it is possible to receive or send additional cyclical or acyclical messages
via an SBus with an IPOSplus® program. For more information, see MOVILINK and
SCOM in the sections "Compiler Functions" and "Assembler Commands".

8 f
Special features of communication via RS-485
i
Hz
P Hz
8.6 Special features of communication via RS-485

With MOVIDRIVE® and MOVITRAC® B, due to the low transmission speed, you should
limit the use of the RS-485 interface to acyclical (parameter) communication.
8.7 Fieldbus control words and fieldbus status words

For detailed information regarding the control and status word, refer to section "SEW
unit profile" in the "Communication and fieldbus unit profile" manual.

IPOSplus® and Synchronized Motion
kVA n
Introduction
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
9 IPOSplus® and Synchronized Motion

9.1 Introduction
MOVIDRIVE® and MOVITRAC® B allow for master-slave operation.
Further, you can synchronize several MOVIDRIVE® units more exactly, for example, for
applications with the following functions:
• Mechanical axes run by several drives (for example, gantries, multiple column
hoists). Note: For more project planning information in this case, refer to the
"MOVIDIRVE® – Multi-Motor Drives" manual).
• Speed or position of a slave axis is derived from the position of a master axis
(electronic shaft, electronic cam).
MOVIDRIVE® offers preconfigured hardware and software functions for both applica-
tions that can be activated by the IPOSplus® user program. These are described in the
following sections.
9.2 Speed synchronization via master/slave function

Via parameters P750 and P751, you can activate a simple speed synchronization for
MOVIDRIVE® and MOVITRAC® B without an IPOSplus® program or a technology unit.
A typical application example is the synchronized operation of 2 conveyor belts. For
more information, refer to the system manual.
9.3 Synchronous operation with a DRS option card

INFORMATION
An IPOSplus® program is not required to use the synchronous operation card DRS11.
The DRS11 synchronous operation card allows for multiple axes to be operated at a
synchronous angle in relation to one another or with an adjustable proportional relation-
ship (electronic gear). The system differentiates between master and slave drives. The
master drive, used for positioning one or more slave drives, can also be an incremental
encoder. The slave drive(s) follow(s) the specified master positions.
The basis for synchronous operation is the continual comparison between master and
slave positions. The system determines the difference of the route information between
master and slave and stores this value in the form of incremental encoder signals in an
internal difference counter that cannot be accessed by the user. Binary signals, such as
"DRS SLAVE IN POS", "DRS LAG ERROR", "DRS PREWARNING" and "MASTER
STANDSTILL" are set depending on the basis of this difference. This counter is evalu-
ated depending on the operating mode. In synchronous operation, the internal differ-
ence counter is used to correct any angular offset between the slave and master to 0.
DRS is controlled using the variables H473, H476, H477 and H484 (see section "Over-
view of system variables"). The following section describes how the DRS can be ad-
dressed from the IPOSplus® program.
For more detailed information, refer to the "DRS11 Synchronous Operation Card" man-
ual.

kVA n IPOSplus® and Synchronized Motion
9 f
Synchronous operation with a DRS option card
i
Hz
P Hz
9.3.1 Activating and deactivating the free running function

The system variable H476 DRS CTRL can be used to set and reset the two program-
mable outputs of DRS11.
Free running function:
DRS11B
1 INØ..5
2
3
4
5
6
X40
DCOM
7
8 V024
9 OUTØ..1
10
11 DGND
- 1
X44
LED 2
H476: DRS_CTRL. DC 24 V V 3
Sync / OFF +
Bit 31 ... 15 14 13 12 11 10 ... 0
Sync
OFF
5
9
X41
6
1
5
9
X42
6
1
5
9
X43
6
1
478829067
Requirement DRS11 can be switched to the free running mode using IPOSplus® via a cable connected
from terminal X40:9 (OUTP0) to X40:1 (free mode)
Command Set OUTP0 and thus DRS input "Free-running": in free-running mode, the red LED on
sequence in the DRS card is lit.
Assembler
BSET H476.0 = 1
Switch back to the synchronous operation function: The red LED does not light up in
synchronous operation mode.
BCLR H476.0 = 0
Write to BCLR H476.0.
Command _BitSet( 476, 0 );

sequence in the _BitClear( 476, 0 );
Compiler

kVA n
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
9.3.2 Setting the zero pointfor DRS11B

The angular offset of DRS11 can be reset using IPOSplus® without an external signal.
The H484 CTRL. WORD system variable is used for this process.
The process of resetting the angular offset between the master and slave can be mon-
itored in the status LED of the DRS card.
Red = free running
Green = DRS not in position (angular offset is greater than P514)
Command BSET H484.22 = 1 Set DRS11 to "Set zero point"

sequence in
WAIT 15 ms DRS-specific waiting time of 15 ms
Assembler
BCLR H484.22 = 0 Reset function 'Set zero point'
Command _BitSet( 484,22 );

sequence in the _Wait( 15 );
Compiler
_BitClear( 484,22 );
Control example • The drive should be switched to Free running using input DI10. Inputs DI10 ... DI17
can be either physical terminals on DIO11A and DIP11A or virtual terminals in
fieldbus control word 2.
– DI10 = 1 Free running activated
– DI10 = 0 Free running mode deactivated; drive runs in synchronous operation
• The current angular offset is deleted via input DI11 (DRS Set zero point).

9 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Sample program
with IPOSplus® /*==================================================================
Compiler IPOS source file
==================================================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
/*----- Define inputs --------------------------------------*/
#define E_Free running DI10 // Input DI10
#define E_Set zero point DI11 // Input DI11
/*----- Define outputs --------------------------------------*/
#define A_DRS_OUTP0 0 // Output DRS X40:9
/*----- Define control bits in IPOS control word ---------------*/
#define _DRS_Set zero point 22 // Bit 22
*===================================================================
Subprograms
==================================================================*/
Free running_On()
{
/* Free running is activated over the external jumper between X40:9 and X40:0
by setting the output X40:9. */
_BitSet( DRS_Ctrl, A_DRS_OUTP0 );
}
/*================================================================*/
Free running_Off()
{
/* Free running is deactivated over the external jumper between X40:9 and X40:0
by deleting the output X40:9. */
}
/*================================================================*/
DRS_Zero point()
{
_BitSet( ControlWord, _DRS_SetZeroPoint );
// Set zero point via control word
_Wait( 15 ); // Response time in ms
_BitClear( ControlWord, _DRS_Set zero point ); // Delete bit
}
/*==================================================================
==================================================================*/
main()
{
if( E_Free running ) // E_FreeRunning input (here DI10)
Free running_On(); // Switches between
else // Free running and synchronous operation
°°Free running_Off();
if( E_Set zero point ) // The function "Set zero point"

DRS_zero point(); // is called
}

kVA n
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
9.3.3 Activating and deactivating the offset function

Via the system variable DRS CTRL. H476 you can set/reset the two programmable out-
puts of the DRS11.
Offset wiring example:
DRS11B
1 INØ..5
2
3
4
5
6
X40
7 DCOM
8 V024
9 OUTØ..1
10
11 DGND
- 1
X44
2
DC 24 V V 3
+
Sync
OFF
5
9
X41
6
1
5
9
X42
6
1
5
9
X43
6
1
478833419
Output X40:10 is set using the BSET H476.1 command. A signal is sent to X40:2 via a
jumper from X40:10 to X40:2, and the "Offset" function is activated.

9 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Requirement A position offset can be applied using IPOSplus® via a cable connection from terminal
X40:10 to X40:2 (Offset1).
Command Set the drive to the function "Offset1": Slave drive changes its position in relation to the
sequence in master to the value stored in offset1.
Assembler
BSET H476.1 = 1
Switch back to output terminal: The slave drive moves back to the previous position in
relation to the master.
BCLR H476.1 = 0
Write to BCLR H476.0.
Command _BitSet( 476, 1 );

sequence in the _BitClear( 476, 1 );
Compiler

kVA n
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
9.3.4 Switching between positioning and synchronous operation

The "Free running" function makes it possible for the drives to run separately at a con-
trolled speed. However, when this function is activated, the drive cannot move to a spec-
ified position using position control.
To perform this function, the operating mode Positioning (IPOSplus®) is required.
In the following sample program, the system can switch between the operating modes
Synchronous operation and Positioning via input terminal DI12.
In this context, note the following condition:
INFORMATION
The system can only change from synchronous operation to positioning in the
operating modes CFC or SERVO when the drive is in operation.
For the VFC operating modes, MOVIDRIVE® must be in the status Controller inhibit.
The following sample program looks at a switchover between the operating modes CFC
& IPOS and CFC & SYNC with SETSYS.
The following settings apply (terminal function via the IPOSplus® program determines
the parameter settings for all used inputs at the IPOS input):
• DI10 = 0 no free-running
• DI10 = 1 Free running, if operating mode CFC & SYNC is set
• DI11 = 0 no function
• DI11 = 1 Set DRS zero point (pulse)
• DI12 = 1 Positioning, operating mode CFC & IPOS
• DI12 = 0 Synchronous operation, operating mode CFC & SYNC
The operating modes can be changed using the command

_SetSys(SS_OPMODE, H)
In which the value of the H variable has the following meaning:
SS_OPMODE: Sets the operating mode
H = 11: Operating mode CFC (speed control)
H = 12: Operating mode CFC & torque control
H = 13: Operating mode CFC & IPOS (positioning)
H = 14: Operating mode CFC & synchronous running (DRS11A)
H = 16: Operating mode SERVO (speed control)

H = 17: Operating mode SERVO & torque control
H = 18: Operating mode SERVO & IPOS (positioning)
H = 19: Operating mode SERVO & synchronous running (DRS11A)

9 f
i
Hz
P Hz
/*====================================================================
IPOS source file
====================================================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
/*----- Define inputs ------------------------------------*/
#define E_Free running DI10 // Input DI10
#define E_Set zero point DI11 // Input DI11
#define E_Switch_Pos_Sync DI12 // Input to switch between
// Positioning and synchronous operation
// DI 12 = 1 Positioning /
// DI 12 = 0 Synchronous operation
/*----- Define outputs -------------------------------------*/
#define A_DRS_OUTP0 0 // Output DRS X40:9
/*----- Define control bits in IPOS control word ---------------*/
#define _Free running 1 // Bit 1
#define _DRS_Set zero point 22 // Bit 22
/*----- Define variables to switch between
/*----- Positioning and synchronous operation ---*/
#define operating mode H300
#define target position H0
#define CFC_and_IPOS 13 // Operating mode CFC & IPOS
#define CFC_and_SYNC 14 // Operating mode CFC & synchronous operation
/*==================================================================
Subprograms
==================================================================*/
Free running_On()
{
/* Free running is activated over the external jumper between X40:9 and X40:0
by setting the output X40:9. */
}
/*================================================================*/
Free running_Off()
{
/* Free running is deactivated over the external jumper between X40:9 and X40:0
by deleting the output X40:9. */
}
/*================================================================*/
DRS_Zero point()
{
_BitSet( ControlWord, _DRS_SetZeroPoint );
// Set zero point via control word
_Wait( 15 ); // Response time in ms
_BitClear( ControlWord, _DRS_Set zero point ); // Delete bit
}
/*=================================================================*/
Activate_synchronous operation()
{
Operating mode = CFC_and_SYNC;
_SetSys( SS_OPMODE,operating mode ); // Switch operating mode
DRS_zero point(); Delete quadrantal error
}
/*=================================================================*/
Activate_IPOS()
{
Operating mode = CFC_and_IPOS;
_SetSys( SS_OPMODE,operating mode );
}

kVA n
Synchronous operation with technology option "Internal synchronous opera-
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
/*===================================================================
===================================================================*/
main()
{
if( E_Free running )
°°Free running_On();
else
°°Free running_Off();
if( E_Set zero point )
°°DRS_Zero point();
if( E_Switch_Pos_Sync )
{
Activate_IPOS();
_GoAbs( GO_NOWAIT,target position );
}
else if( !E_Free running )
Activate_synchronous operation();
}
9.4 Synchronous operation with technology option "Internal synchronous opera-

tion"
Internal synchronous operation is a firmware solution used to operate several axes at
synchronous angles. This software solution simply requires pulses from a master unit.
This master source can either be the X14 input (physical master drive) or any IPOSplus®
variable (virtual master drive) (e.g. in conjunction with the SBus or a virtual encoder). As
of the MOVIDRIVE® B series, any source can be selected for the actual position of the
axis (absolute encoder, synchronous encoder or any IPOSplus® variable).
In this way, axes with slip can also be synchronized using internal synchronous opera-
tion. For MOVIDRIVE® A, only the motor encoder can be used as the actual source po-
sition.
Synchronous operation comprises various functions. One of the functions is that the
drive can be positioned according to a specified offset and startup cycle. An offset be-
tween the master and slave drive comes into effect after a specified number of master
increments.
The synchronization mechanism (time-controlled synchronization process), as seen
with the DRS11 synchronous operation card, is also implemented. A variation between
the angle of the slave drive and the master drive resulting from free running is reduced
to zero.
Synchronization can also be position-controlled. The slave drive moves at a synchro-
nous angle to the master drive following a specified number of master increments
(startup cycle process). In this type of startup, the slave drive moves with a quadratic
ramp.
9.4.1 Requirements
Synchronous operation has been designed for MOVIDRIVE® and places the following
requirements on the drive system:
• Encoder feedback
• DRS option cards not supported
• Operating mode: not V/f

9 f
Synchronous operation with technology option "Cam"
i
Hz
P Hz
• IPOSplus® variables H360 to H450 are reserved for synchronous operation and
should not be used in the application program see section "Overview of System
Variables (page 29)".
• Synchronous operation is controlled using IPOSplus® variables within an IPOSplus®
program. All states of synchronous operation can be viewed and set in the variable
range for synchronous operation from H360 to H450.
• ISYNC startup is supported by a graphical user interface.
• Slave is not subject to slip (only with MOVIDRIVE® A).
For more detailed information, refer to the "Internal Synchronous Operation (ISYNC)"
manual.
9.5 Synchronous operation with technology option "Cam"

A master movement is usually represented as a machine angle between 0 and 360 de-
grees. A number of curve points are defined with reference to this machine angle (the
"Movement plan"). These control points specify the position of the particular slave drive
with reference to the master.
The master drive can either be a physical drive or a virtual master encoder. The master
encoder can also be switched over using the synchronized system bus (SBus). The re-
lationship between the positions of the master drive and the slave drive is often specified
in a 2-dimensional graph. The position of the master drive is entered along the horizontal
axis and the position of the slave drive along the vertical axis. The range of positions
along the horizontal axis is referred to as the master cycle, the range of positions along
the vertical axis as the slave cycle.
Electronic cam:
Slave length
Slave
cycle
Master length
Startup cycle Master cycle Stop cycle

is completed once is continued cyclically is completed once
478837771
[1] Startup cycle is run through once [4] Slave cycle

[2] Master cycle is repeated cyclically s1 Master length
[3] Stop cycle is run through once s2 Slave length

kVA n
Synchronous operation with technology option "Cam"
f 9
i
Hz
P Hz
9.5.1 Requirements
The electronic cam option places the following requirements on the drive system:
• Encoder feedback
• Operating mode: "CFC" or "Servo" ... & IPOS
• IPOSplus® variables H360 to H450 are reserved for synchronous operation and
should not be used in the application program (see section 3.2 "Overview of System
Variables").
• Synchronous operation is controlled using IPOSplus® variables within an IPOSplus®
program. All states of the electronic cam can be viewed and set in the variable range
for synchronous operation from H370 to H450.
For more detailed information, refer to the Addendum to the "Electronic Cam" system
manual.
INFORMATION
If the movement plan contains a constant incline, phase-synchronous operation oc-
curs as a special case in the electronic cam.

kVA n IPOSplus® for MOVITRAC® B – Characteristics
10 f
Requirements
i
Hz
P Hz
10 IPOSplus® for MOVITRAC® B – Characteristics

10.1 Requirements
Units from the MOVITRAC® B series can be ordered as standard units or as technology
units. Unlike MOVIDRIVE® B, the standard unit must first be enabled for IPOSplus® be-
fore you can start programming.
Enabling IPOS plus® in the standard unit:
1. Open parameter tree
2. In the 'Unit functions/setup' parameter group, set 'IPOS enable' to ON.
769774603
Now you can program IPOSplus® as usual using Compiler or Assembler.
In the technology unit, IPOSplus® is enabled as standard.

IPOSplus® for MOVITRAC® B – Characteristics
kVA n
Functionality
f 10
i
Hz
P Hz
10.2 Functionality
In general, MOVITRAC® B IPOSplus® has the same functions as MOVIDRIVE® B in
VFC operating mode.
In addition there are the following restrictions:
• Restrictions regarding the range of commands with MOVIDRIVE® B
• The size of the IPOS program memory is 8kB, which is only 50% of the MOVIDRIVE®
B IPOSplus® program memory of 16 kB.
• Task 3 must not be used. The program code programmed in task 3 is not executed.
No feedback is given on this.
• Unsupported functions cause error 10 IPOS ILLOP.
The IPOS Compiler is not aware of these differences, i.e. the complete MOVIDRIVE®
B functionality is provided.
Refer to the following sections for a detailed description of the differences:

• Overview of commands for standard functions (page 205)
• Technical data (page 25) for MOVITRAC® B
• Position detection (page 98) with MOVITRAC® B

kVA n IPOSplus® for MQx – Characteristics
11 f
Introduction
i
Hz
P Hz
11 IPOSplus® for MQx – Characteristics

11.1 Introduction
In the same way as for MFx modules, modules of the MQx series allow a cost-effective
fieldbus interface to MOVIMOT® drives. In addition, the MQx modules are equipped with
control functions that help you determine how the drive responds to external input via
fieldbus and integrated I/Os.
This allows, for example, sensor signals to be processed directly at the fieldbus interface
or allows users to define their own communication profile via the fieldbus interface. The
NV26 proximity sensor provides you with a simple positioning system that can be inte-
grated in systems in conjunction with an MQx control program as standard components.
In principle, the same IPOSplus® program as used in MOVIDRIVE® A runs in the MQx
interface. However, full functionality cannot be realized in some cases. The following
section describes these differences.
• The parameter group P900 IPOSplus® parameters is not implemented for the MQx
interface.
• As with MOVIDRIVE® A, the MQx fieldbus interface provides two tasks with the same
command processing times for IPOSplus® commands.
• When using the IPOSplus® variable H511 (ActPos_Mot), the NV26 encoder does not
count 4096 inc./revolution but 24 inc./revolution.
• Not all IPOSplus® commands can be used.

IPOSplus® for MQx – Characteristics
kVA n
Starting the programming tool
f 11
i
Hz
P Hz
11.2 Starting the programming tool

You can access the fieldbus interface via the diagnostics and programming interface
(under the screw plug on the front) of the MQx modules.
• Connect the serial interface of your PC with the programming interface of the MQx.
Use the UWS21A. option.
480461579
• Start the required programming interface via MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.

Refer to section: "Step 1: starting IPOSplus® Compiler with
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio (page 143)"
11.3 Sequence control system

The following section lists all the IPOSplus® functions that can be used in the MQx. A
more detailed description of the commands can be found in the sections Compiler Func-
tions and Assembler Commands. For any additional information, refer to the online help
of the programming tool selected. There are no limitations compared to MOVIDRIVE®
A for loops and operators.
The fieldbus process data buffer can be accessed via the commands _GetSys and
_SetSys. The RS-485 interface for MOVIMOT® can be influenced via the _MovComm
commands.
11.4 Digital inputs and outputs

The DO0 and DO1 digital outputs of MQx (not available for MQx32) can be switched on
and off using the H481 StdOutpIPOS variable. To do so, the parameters P620 (DO1)
and P628 (DO0) must be set to IPOS Output.
H481
... 3 2 1 0
DO1 DO0
The MQx digital inputs can be read using the H483 InputLevel variable. DI4 and DI5 are
only available with MQx32. To be able to use the inputs as IPOSplus® inputs, you must
set them to IPOSplus® Input in parameter group 62.
H483
... 5 4 3 2 1 0
(DI5) (DI4) DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0

kVA n IPOSplus® for MQx – Characteristics
11 f
Values of the DIAG11 variable for the error IPOS ILLOP
i
P Hz
11.5 Values of the DIAG11 variable for the error IPOS ILLOP
An IPOS ILLOP error is generated as a general error message when an error occurs in
the IPOSplus® program.
An internal error number is sent to the diagnostic variable H469 (DIAG11) for detailed
error analysis. Every error that can occur is assigned its own error number. 999 means
that the function or an argument of the function is not supported by the MQx module.
The following error numbers can occur when using the MOVLNK and MOVCOM com-
mands.
DIAG11 Command Cause of error
500 MOVLNK MOVLNK command was called after cyclical communication was
started. MOVLINK is locked by the _MovCommOn command.
501 MOVLNK Number of variable H, from where the read data is stored or from
where the data to be written is obtained, does not lie in the valid
range (H0 ... H450).
502 MOVLNK Bus type is invalid. Only 2 = RS-485#2 permitted.
503 MOVLNK An invalid PDU type was entered in format. Only acyclical frames
(128 ... 134) are permitted.
504 MOVCOM _MovCommDef command was called after cyclical communication
was started. _MovCommDef is locked by MovComOn.
505 MOVCOM _MovCommDef command was called for the 9th time. Only 8 com-
munication relations are permitted.
506 MOVCOM Bus type is invalid. Only 2 = RS-485#2 permitted.
507 MOVCOM An invalid station address has been entered. Addresses 253 and
254 are not permitted (0 -252, 255).
508 MOVCOM An invalid PDU type was entered in format. Only cyclical frames are
permitted (0-6).
509 MOVCOM Number of variable H, from where the read data is stored or from
where the data to be written is obtained, does not lie in the valid
range (H0 ... H450).
511 MOVCOM Station does not support the PDU type entered in format.

P9xx IPOS Parameters kVA n
P90x IPOS reference travel
f 12
i
P Hz
12 P9xx IPOS Parameters

DANGER
Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
• Ensure that the motor cannot start unintentionally.
• Note that modifying these parameters without knowledge of the IPOSplus® program, which may be
active, can cause unexpected movements and place unwanted loads on the mechanical driveline. It is
essential that you are familiar with the IPOSplus® manual to make the setting for these parameters.
12.1 P90x IPOS reference travel

Reference travel is used to establish a machine zero to which all absolute positioning
commands refer. It is possible to select from various strategies, referred to as reference
travel strategies P903 Reference travel type (page 124). These strategies define appro-
priate travel modes, for example to search for a reference cam. Using the reference
point determined by reference travel, the machine zero point can be changed using
P900 Reference offset (page 123) according to the following equation:
The speeds of the travel movements required on the basis of the reference travel type
are set using P901 Reference speed 1 (page 124) and P902 Reference speed 2
(page 124).
Display range: Number of increments between leaving the reference cam and reaching
the zero pulse of the encoder set in P941.
The value is displayed after the reference travel. Ideally, it should be half the encoder
resolution (after quadruple evaluation). Relocate the cam if necessary.
12.1.1 P900 Reference offset

Setting range: –(231–1) – 0 – 231–1
Reference offset (zero offset) is used to determine the machine zero (origin). The follow-
ing applies:
The reference offset always refers to the encoder set via P941 Source actual position
(page 134).
This encoder can be a motor encoder, an external encoder or a DIP encoder. The cor-
responding actual positions are indicated by IPOSplus® variables.
• H509 Actual position DIP encoder
• H510 Actual position external encoder
• H511 Actual position motor encoder

kVA n P9xx IPOS Parameters
12 f
i
P Hz
Reference offset becomes active after reference travel has been completed success-
fully.
INFORMATION
In case of a reference travel of a drive system with absolute encoder (HIPERFACE® or
DIP), P905 Hiperface offset X15 (page 126) / P947 Hiperface offset X14 (page 136) or
DIP offset P953 Position offset (page 139) will be recalculated and overwritten by the
reference travel depending on the actual position source.
12.1.2 P901 Reference speed 1

Setting range: 0 – 200 – 6000 rpm
Reference speed 1 determines the travel speed for the first part of the reference travel.
Speed change always takes place via stop ramp t13. The search directions during ref-
erence travel are determined by the respective reference travel type. The speed is in ef-
fect until the reference cam has been reached.
12.1.3 P902 Reference speed 2

Reference speed 2 determines the travel speed for the second part of the reference
travel. Speed change always takes place via stop ramp t13. The search directions dur-
ing reference travel are determined by the respective reference travel type. The speed
is effective upon leaving the reference cam until reaching the first zero pulse.
12.1.4 P903 Reference travel type

Setting range: 0 – 8
The reference travel type specifies the reference travel strategy that is used to establish
the machine zero of a machine.
This setting also defines the search direction for the reference cam in the individual ref-
erencing phases.
Use parameter P904 Referencing to zero pulse (page 126) to determine if the reference
travel takes place to the edge change of the reference cam or the next zero pulse of the
encoder.
Prerequisite for execution of reference travel is a drive that is ready and enabled with
the exception of reference travel type 8.
There are also types available that can function without a reference cam.
• Type 0: CCW zero pulse
– First search direction is CCW.
– Reference position = Left zero pulse from current position
– Machine zero = reference position + reference offset
• Type 1: CW end of the reference cam
– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the left of the reference
cam
• Type 2: CW end of the reference cam

f 12
i
P Hz
– First search direction is CW.

– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the right of the reference
cam
• Type 3: CW limit switch
– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the left of the right limit
switch.
– Reference travel should take place to zero pulse.
• Type 4: CCW limit switch
– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the right of the left limit
switch.
– Reference travel should take place to zero pulse.
• Type 5: No reference travel
– Reference position = current position
– Machine zero = reference offset
• Type 6: Reference cam flush with CW limit switch
– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the left of the reference
cam
– Note: Reference cam and limit switches must be flush!
• Type 7: Reference cam flush with CCW limit switch
– Reference position = First zero pulse or falling edge to the right of the reference
cam
– Note: Reference cam and limit switches must be flush!
• Type 8: Without enable
Reference travel can take place when the drive is not enabled.
– Reference position = current position
– Machine zero = reference offset

12 f
i
P Hz
12.1.5 P904 Reference travel to zero pulse

Setting range: YES/NO
• YES: Reference travel takes place to the zero pulse of the selected IPOSplus®
encoder.
• NO: Reference travel takes place to the falling edge of the reference cam.
12.1.6 P905 Hiperface offset X15

Setting range: –(231 – 1) – 0 – 231 – 1
This parameter is used to specify the zero point of the motor encoder display.
Use this parameter to define the machine zero without reference travel. It adds or sub-
tracts the offset from the encoder value.
• P905 Hiperface offset X15 (page 126) has an effect on the actual position of the
motor encoder H511.
H511 = Encoder value – P905
• P947 Hiperface offset X14 (page 136) affects the actual position of the external
encoder H510.
The actual position is determined directly after the values have been entered. A
Hiperface® multi-turn encoder must be referenced once, a Hiperface® single-turn en-
coder must always be referenced.
Note:
When reference travel of a drive system takes place with a Hiperface® encoder, the Hip-
erface offsets (P905 or P947) are recalculated and overwritten due to the reference
travel depending on the set actual position source.
The following applies:
• P905 = Encoder value – P900
12.1.7 P906 Cam distance

Parameter P906 is a display parameter.
It shows the number of increments between leaving the reference cam and reaching the
zero pulse of the encoder set in P941. Ideally, the value should be half the encoder res-
olution (after quadruple evaluation). Relocate cam if necessary.
The value is displayed after the reference travel.

f 12
P91x IPOSplus® parameters i
P Hz
12.2 P91x IPOSplus® parameters

12.2.1 P910 Gain X controller
Setting range: 0,1 – 0,5 – 32
Setting value for the P controller of the position control loop in IPOSplus®. The value from
P210 P gain hold controller is adopted here in the default setting.
12.2.2 P911/912 Positioning ramp 1/2

Setting range: 0,01 – 1 – 20 s
Value set for the ramp used during the positioning operation. The same ramp (position-
ing ramp 1) is always used for acceleration and deceleration when the ramp type setting
is P916 Ramp function (page 128) SINE and SQUARED. With LINEAR ramp function,
deceleration will be set depending on P917 Ramp mode (page 130):
• P917 Ramp mode = Mode 1: Deceleration for travel to target position (spot braking)
only takes place with positioning ramp 2 (P912). Positioning ramp 1 (P911) is used
for all other positioning operations.
• P917 Ramp mode = Mode 2: Positioning ramp 2 (P912) is used for deceleration of
the travel speed during travel. Positioning ramp 1 (P911) is used for acceleration.
12.2.3 P913/P914 Travel speed CW/CCW

Specifies the speed used for positioning. The setting must be adjusted to the maximum
motor speed.
INFORMATION
P302 Maximum speed 1 / P312 Maximum speed 2 limits P913/P914; set P302 Maxi-
mum speed 1 / P312 Maximum speed 2 to a value (ca. 10%) greater than P913/P914
to prevent lag errors
12.2.4 P915 Velocity precontrol

Setting range: –199,99 – 0 – 100 – 199,99%
When the setting is 100%, the drive moves at an optimum speed with a linear speed pro-
file. If a value less than 100% is specified, a larger gap between position setpoint and
actual position occurs (lag distance) during a positioning operation. This results in a
"soft" run-in to the target position for the acceleration procedure.
INFORMATION
Parameter P915 is only in effect with the LINEAR and JERK LIMITED ramp types. The
function has no effect for the ramp types "SINE" and "SQUARED".

12 f
i P91x IPOSplus® parameters
P Hz
12.2.5 P916 Ramp type
This parameter specifies the type of the positioning ramp. This influences the speed or
acceleration characteristics during positioning.
INFORMATION
The following ramp types are not supported if P702 Motor category is set to "Linear":
• SPEED INTERPOLATION
• POSITION INTERPOLATION 12 BIT
• POSITION INTERPOLATION 16 BIT
Ramp type Positioning characteristics

LINEAR Time-optimal but block-shaped acceleration profile.
SQUARED Softer acceleration and higher torque demand than LINEAR.
Very soft acceleration profile, required torque higher than with
SINE
SQUARED acceleration profile.
Setting for operation of drive inverter with master controller. This control-
ler generates a cyclical position setpoint that is written directly to the
position controller. The ramp generator is deactivated. The position
BUS RAMP
specifications sent cyclically by the external controller are interpolated
linearly. For configuration, one process output data word must be set to
"position HIGH" and another one to "position LOW".
Jerk limitation is based on the principle of the linear ramp. For jerk limita-
tion, the torque and, therefore, the acceleration is trapezoidal to limit the
jolting action. Over time, jerk limitation builds up the torque in linear form
during acceleration until the maximum value is reached. In the same
way, the torque is reduced again over time in linear form to zero. This
JERK LIMITED
means that system vibrations can be virtually avoided. A setting range
can be selected from 0.005 ms to 2 ms (P933). The positioning time in
comparison to the linear ramp is extended by the set jerk time. The
acceleration and torque do not increase in comparison with the linear
ramp.
ELECTRONIC CAM Activating the technology function "Electronic cam".
I SYNCHRONOUS OPERA- Activating the technology function "Electronic cam".
TION
CROSS CUTTER Activating the technology function "Cross cutter".
SPEED INTERPOLATION The speed values sent cyclically by the external controller are interpo-
lated linearly.
• Speed specification via process data:
– Set P888 Synchronization time SBus to 5 ms or 10 ms
– Set the P100 Setpoint source to "SBus" or "Fieldbus"
– You have to set a process output data word to "Speed".
• Speed specification via SBus/SCOM object:

– Set P888 Synchronization time SBus to 1 ... 10 ms.
– Set the P100 Setpoint source to "BIPOL. FIXED SETPT".
– You must not set a process output data word to "Speed".
– Create a SCOM receive object (using the SCOM receive
command → IPOSplus® manual) with the target variable
SetpPosBus (H499).

f 12
P91x IPOSplus® parameters i
P Hz
Ramp type Positioning characteristics

POSITION INTERPOLATION The position specifications sent cyclically by the external controller are
12 BIT interpolated. Position resolution: 1 revolution corresponds to 4096 incre-
ments (12 bit).
• Position specification using process data:
– Set P100 Setpoint source to "SBus" or "Fieldbus"
– Set one process output data word to "position HIGH" and
another one to "position LOW".
• Position specification via SBus/SCOM object:

– Set P100 Setpoint source to "BIPOL. FIXED SETPT".
– Do not set a process output data word to "position HIGH" or
"position LOW".
– Create a SCOM receive object (using the SCOM receive
command → IPOSplus® manual) with the target variable
SetpPosBus (H499).
POSITION INTERPOLATION The position specifications sent cyclically by the external controller are
16 BIT interpolated. Position resolution: 1 revolution corresponds to 65536
increments (16 bit).
• Position specification using process data:
– Set P100 Setpoint source to "SBus" or "Fieldbus"
– Set one process output data word to "position HIGH" and
another one to "position LOW".
Important: Position resolution via PI data assignment is 4096
increments per revolution (= 12 bit).
IPOSplus® variable H508 provides the motor position, extended
to 16 bits.
The IPOSplus® variable ActPos_Mot (H511) has a position reso-
lution of 4096 increments per revolution (= 12 bit)
• Position specification via SBus/SCOM object:

– Set P100 Setpoint source to "BIPOL. FIXED SETPT".
– Do not set a process output data word to "position HIGH" or
"position LOW".
– Create a SCOM receive object (using the SCOM receive com-
mand → IPOSplus® manual) with the target variable SetPosBus
(H499).
Important: Position resolution via PI data assignment is 4096
increments per revolution (= 12 bit).
The position resolution of 4096 increments per revolution (= 12
bit) expanded to 16 bit is available on IPOSplus® variable H508.
The IPOSplus® variable ActPos_Mot (H511) has a position reso-
lution of 4096 increments per revolution (= 12 bit)
INFORMATION
Note the following for the POSITION "INTERPOLATION 16 BIT" ramp type:
• IPOS variable H508 is also used when S14 is set to ON.
IPOS variable H508 only provides meaningful values when
– DIP switch S14 = "ON" or
– P916 Ramp type = "Position interpolation 16 bit"

12 f
i P91x IPOSplus® parameters
P Hz
12.2.6 P917 Ramp mode

Setting range: MODE 1/MODE 2
This parameter determines the use of P912 Positioning ramp 2 with ramp type set to
LINEAR.
• P917 = MODE 1: Deceleration for travel to target position (spot braking) takes place
with P912 Positioning ramp 2. P911 positioning ramp 1 is used for all other
positioning operations. If position interpolation 12 bit or 16 bit is active, it runs in mode
1 without dead time compensation.
• P917 = MODE 2: Positioning ramp 2 is always used for deceleration if the travel
speed is changed during travel. P911 positioning ramp 1 is used for acceleration. If
position interpolation 12 bit or 16 bit is active, mode 2 activates a dead time
compensation.
12.2.7 P918 Bus setpoint source

In conjunction with EtherCAT, this parameter can be used to set the source for the set-
point in IPOSplus®. The preset value is H499.

P92x IPOS monitoring
f 12
i
P Hz
12.3 P92x IPOS monitoring

12.3.1 P920/P921 SW limit switch CW/CCW
Setting range: –(231 –1) – 0 – 231 –1
The software limit switches let the user limit the range in which travel commands are ac-
cepted. This is implemented via software. The limits of the movement range are speci-
fied using these two parameters (software limit switches). If P941 Source actual position
is set to motor encoder or external encoder, then these do not take effect until after per-
formance of a reference travel. If (page 134) is set to absolute encoder DIP, then these
are effective immediately without reference travel. If the software limit switches are in
effect, the system checks whether the target position H492 of the current travel com-
mand is beyond the software limit switches. If the target position is beyond the range
limited by the limit switches, the travel command will not be executed. The drive re-
sponds according to the fault response set in P838. If P838 error response SW limit
switch is set to "../warning" or ".../fault", then error message "A1.F78" (IPOS SW limit
switch) is generated. The software limit switches are only monitored in the "...& IPOS"
(P700) operating modes.
If P838 Fault response SW limit switch is set to ".../Fault", then a drive with incremental
encoder is no longer referenced after a fault reset whereas a drive with absolute encoder
is still referenced.
If the drive is not referenced, the software limit switches have no effect. They are only
activated again after the drive has been referenced.
If P838 Fault response SW limit switch is set to ".../Warning", the drive remains refer-
enced following a reset. The drive can move past the target specified due to the mass
moment of inertia of the machine or if the parameter settings are set incorrectly in the
controller. Software limit switches cannot prevent this from happening.
Deactivation: Set both parameter values to 0 for endless travel so that the software limit
switch function is deactivated.
12.3.2 P922 Position window

Setting range: 0 – 50 – 32 767 Inc
The parameter defines a distance range (position window) around the target position of
a travel or STOP command. The "Axis in position" = YES condition applies if a drive is
inside the position window around the current target position (H492). The "Axis in posi-
tion" information is used as a final condition for waiting positioning commands. It can be
used further as an output terminal function.
12.3.3 P923 Lag error window

Setting range: 0 – 5000 – 231 –1 Inc
The lag error window defines a permitted difference between the setpoint and actual po-
sition value. If the permitted value is exceeded, a lag error message or lag error re-
sponse will be triggered. You can set the responses with P834 Response to lag error.
Deactivation: Set value = 0 deactivates lag error monitoring
12.3.4 P924 Positioning interruption detection

Setting range: ON/OFF
This parameter determines whether the positioning process is monitored for interrup-
tions (enable signal revoked). The response is set in P839 Response to "Positioning in-
terruption.

12 f
i P93x IPOSplus® special functions
P Hz
12.4 P93x IPOSplus® special functions

12.4.1 P930 Override
The override function makes it possible to change the travel speed for positioning oper-
ations which is programmed in the IPOSplus® program. The speed can be altered within
the range from 0 to 150% of the specifically programmed speed. This requires an analog
input, with 0 to 150% corresponding to 0 – 10 V at the analog input. The maximum speed
value is limited by P302 Maximum speed 1 / P312 Maximum speed 2.
12.4.2 P931 IPOS CTRL.W Task 1

Setting range: STOP / START / HALT
IPOS CTRL.W Task 1 in the DBG60B keypad only, not in SHELL.
STOP: Task 1 of the IPOSplus® program is stopped.
START: Task 1 of the IPOSplus® program is started.
STOP: Tasks 1, 2 and 3 of the IPOSplus® program are stopped.
12.4.3 P932 IPOS CTRL.W Task 2

Display range: START/STOP
IPOS CTRL.W Task 2 in the DBG60B keypad only, not in SHELL.
Display parameter, cannot be set using DBG60B.
START = Task 2 of the IPOSplus® program is currently being processed.
STOP = Task 2 of the IPOSplus® program is stopped.
12.4.4 P933 Jerk time

Setting range: 0.005 – 2 s
The jerk time indicates the duration of the torque formation. The positioning time in com-
parison to the linear ramp is extended by the set jerk time.
The jerk time (0.005 ... 2 s) that has to be set for the function jerk limit. Please note that
P911 Positioning ramp 1 (page 127) / P912Positioning ramp 2 (page 127) are of a
greater or equal value.
P933 ≤ P911 & P912
If P933 > P911 & P912, torque formation still has a trapezoidal shape with the set jerk
time not being the time for the torque formation.
12.4.5 P938 Speed task 1

Setting range: 0 – 9 additional Assembler commands/ms
The standard setting for task 1 is 1 Assembler command/ms. The speed can be in-
creased by up to 9 additional Assembler commands/ms with P938. P938 and P939
share the resources for the speed increase; that is, task 1 and task 2 together can be
assigned a total of 9 additional Assembler commands/ms. Example:
Task 1 + 2 additional Assembler commands/ms = 3 Assembler commands/ms

f 12
P93x IPOSplus® special functions i
P Hz
12.4.6 P939 Speed task 2

Setting range: 0 – 9 additional Assembler commands/ms
The standard setting for task 2 is 2 Assembler commands/ms. The speed can be in-
creased by up to 9 additional Assembler commands/ms with P939. P938 and P939
share the resources for the speed increase; that is, task 1 and task 2 together can be
assigned a total of 9 additional Assembler commands/ms. Example:

12 f
i P94x IPOSplus® encoder
P Hz
12.5 P94x IPOSplus® encoder

12.5.1 P940 IPOS variable edit
IPOSplus® variables edit with DBG60B keypad only, not in SHELL.
IPOSplus® variables can be changed if P940 is set to "ON".
12.5.2 P941 Actual position source

Setting range: Motor encoder (X15) / Ext. Encoder (X14) absolute encoder (X62)
Defines the encoder to which IPOSplus® positions.
12.5.3 P942/P943 Encoder factor numerator/denominator

Setting range: 1 – 32767
First set the parameter P944 encoder scaling ext. encoder (page 135) orP955 encoder
scaling (page 139) (when using DIP11B or DEH21B option). Next, set P942/P943.
In the event of positioning to an external encoder (X14) or an absolute encoder (X62),
then these two parameters are used for adapting the resolution to the motor encoder
(X15).
Proceed as follows:
• Write down the values of variables H509 absolute position (H510 with external
encoder) and H511 Current motor position.
• Move the drive by about 30,000 increments (H511).
• Calculate the difference between the values you wrote down and the new values of
the variables:
– H509 new – H509 old = H509 difference
• The values must not differ by more than 32 767 (215 –1). If the values are greater,
divide both differentials by the same number to obtain correspondingly smaller
values. Alternatively, repeat the procedure with a shorter travel distance.
• Enter the result H511 difference in P942 Encoder factor nominator and H509 in P943
Encoder factor denominator.

f 12
P94x IPOSplus® encoder i
P Hz
12.5.4 P944 Encoder scaling ext. encoder

Setting range: x1 / x2 / x4 / x8 / x16 / x32 / x64
Before setting P944, make sure that P942 and P943 are set to "1".
The significance of the travel resolution of the motor encoder and external encoder is
adapted. The parameter is set so the travel information ratio between the motor encoder
and the external encoder is as close to "1" as possible. First set the parameter to "x1".
To do this, note the values in variables H510 and H511.
• Move the drive by about 1000 increments (H511).
• Calculate the difference between the values you wrote down and the current values:
• Calculate the quotient from H511 difference divided by H510 difference. Set the
parameter P944 Encoder scaling ext. to the value that is closest to the calculated
quotient.
.
Important: The encoder scaling directly affects the parameters P900 reference offset
(page 123), P942 encoder factor numerator (page 134) and P943 encoder factor de-
nominator (page 134) as well as the parameter group P92x IPOS monitoring. All posi-
tions of the IPOSplus® program have to be adjusted when using the external encoder.
The setting of all listed parameters has to be adjusted every time the encoder scaling is
changed.
The number of pulses detected at X14 is multiplied by P944 and then mapped to H510.
The external encoder must always provide fewer pulses than the motor encoder. If this
is not possible, contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
12.5.5 P945 Synchronous encoder type (X14)

Setting range: TTL / SIN/COS / HIPERFACE
Enter the used encoder type here. Possible encoder types are:
• TTL: Encoder with digital, rectangular output signal (TTL level 0 V, 5 V, with negated
tracks, encoder with signal level according to RS422
• SIN/COS: Encoder with analog, sine-shaped output signal (1 VSS)
• HIPERFACE®: Encoder with designation AV1H, AS1H, ES1H, EV1H
SEW encoder type Startup parameters encoder type / encoder PPR count
ES1S / ES2S / EV1S / EH1S SINE ENCODER / 1024
AV1Y SINE ENCODER / 512
ES1R / ES2R / EV1R / EH1R INCREM. ENCODER TTL / 1024
ES1T1) / ES2T1) /EV1T1) /EH1T1) INCREM. ENCODER TTL / 1024
AV1H / AS1H / ES1H / EV1H HIPERFACE®
1) via DWI11A only

12 f
i P94x IPOSplus® encoder
P Hz
12.5.6 P945 Synchronous encoder counting direction (X14)

Setting range: NORMAL/INVERTED
Defines the counting direction of the synchronous encoder. The setting must be made
so the counting direction of the motor encoder (X15) and the synchronous encoder
(X14) match.
12.5.7 P947 Hiperface offset X14

Setting range: –(231 – 1) – 0 – 231 – 1
This parameter is used to specify the zero point of the motor encoder display.
Use this parameter to define the machine zero without reference travel. It adds or sub-
tracts the offset from the encoder value.
• P905 Hiperface offset X15 (page 126) has an effect on the actual position of the
motor encoder H511.
• P947 Hiperface offset X14 (page 136) affects the actual position of the external
encoder H510.
The actual position is determined directly after the values have been entered. It does not
require prior reference travel.
Note:
When reference travel of a drive system takes place with a Hiperface® encoder, the
Hiperface® offsets (P905 or P947) are recalculated and overwritten due to the reference
travel depending on the set actual position source.
The following applies:

f 12
P94x IPOSplus® encoder i
P Hz
12.5.8 P948 Automatic encoder replacement detection

This parameter is only effective with Hiperface® encoders.
• ON: A replaced Hiperface® encoder is detected. Reference travel is required before
the "IPOS referenced" bit is set.
Note the following when operating a linear motor with AL1H motor encoder:
If the linear motor was commutated in the dialog "Encoder adjustment" during initial
startup, the "LSM commutated" bit will be cleared in the IPOS status word after en-
coder replacement. A new commutation travel must be triggered to enable the invert-
er. Doing so will reset the "LSM commutated" bit. Commutation travel is triggered
automatically if the "/CONTROLLER INHIBIT" terminal is set to "1" and no terminal
set to "Enable" receives a "1 signal". If a terminal set to "Enable" receives a "1 signal",
or if no terminal is set to "Enable", error message F81 will be issued.
For linear motors with AL1H motor encoder, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to set
parameter P948 to "OFF". After having replaced the encoder, test the drive system
with reduced velocity and force in jog mode.
• OFF: The Hiperface® encoder is always referenced. The "IPOS referenced" bit is set.
Note the following when operating a linear motor with AL1H motor encoder:
If the linear motor was commutated in the dialog "Encoder adjustment" during initial
startup, the "LSM commutated" bit will be maintained in the IPOS status word. The
drive system can be enabled immediately.
INFORMATION
If P948 is switched off and on again, the "IPOS referenced" bit is set to "0" once you
have restarted the MOVIDRIVE®.
Reference travel is necessary to rest the "IPOS referenced" bit to "1".

12 f
P95x absolute encoder (SSI)
i
P Hz
12.6 P95x absolute encoder (SSI)

The DIP parameters are described in detail in the "MOVIDRIVE® MDX61B Absolute En-
coder Card DIP11B/DEH21B" manual. The DIP11B option cannot be used with
MOVIDRIVE® MDX61B size 0.
12.6.1 P950 Encoder type

The absolute encoder connected to the DEH21B/DIP11B option (X62) is selected. At
present, encoders can be selected from the following list:
• VISOLUX EDM
• T&R CE65, CE58, CE100 MSSI
• T&R LE100, LE200
• T&R LA66K
• AV1Y/ROQ424
• STEGMANN AG100 MSSI
• SICK DME -3000-111
• STAHL WCS2-LS311
• STEGMANN AG626
• IVO GM401, GXMMW A202PA2
• STAHL WCS3
• LEUZE OMS1, OMS2
• T&R ZE 65M
• LEUZE BPS37
• SICK DME 5000-111
• POMUX KH53
• KÜBLER 9081
• LEUZE AMS200
• MTS TEMPOSONICS RP
• P+F AVM58X-1212
• Hübner HMG161 S24 H2048
• Balluf BTL5-S112B-M1500
• T&R LA41K
• Elgo LIMAX2
12.6.2 P951 Counting direction

Setting range: NORMAL/INVERTED
Defines the counting direction of the absolute encoder. The setting must be made so the
counting direction of the motor encoder (X15) and the absolute encoder (X62) match.

P95x absolute encoder (SSI)
f 12
i
P Hz
12.6.3 P952 Cycle frequency

Setting range: 1 – 200%
Defines the cycle frequency at which absolute encoder information is transmitted from
the encoder to the inverter. A cycle frequency of 100% corresponds to the nominal fre-
quency of the encoder in relation to a 100 m cable length.
12.6.4 P953 Position offset

Setting range: –(231 –1) – 0 – 231 –1
The position offset P953 only needs to be set on incremental encoders; it should be set
to 0 for other encoders.
Note: The position value will be recalculated and overwritten automatically after suc-
cessful completion of the reference travel.
12.6.5 P954 Zero offset

Setting range: –(231 –1) – 0 – 231 –1
Zero offset is used for assigning the value you want to a specific position. The range of
values can adopt positive or negative position values. The maximum valid parameter
must not be exceeded. The limit is determined by the range of values of the numerator
(231) and the range of values of the absolute encoder. Move the drive to a known posi-
tion. Read off the value of variable H509 ACT.POS.ABS and enter the following value
in parameter P954 Zero offset: P954 = Variable H509 – required value.
The required value is the display value you wish to have for the current position.
12.6.6 P955 Encoder scaling

Setting range: x1 / x2 / x4 / x8 / x16 / x32 / x64
Before setting P955, make sure that P942 and P943 are set to "1".
The significance of the travel resolution of the motor encoder and absolute encoder is
adapted. The parameter is set so the travel information ratio between the motor encoder
and the absolute encoder is as close to "1" as possible. First set the parameter to "x1".
To do this, note the values in variables H509 and H511.
• Move the drive by about 1000 increments (H511).
• Calculate the difference between the values you wrote down and the current values:
• Calculate the quotient from H511 difference divided by H509 difference. Set
parameter P955 Encoder scaling to the value that is closest to the calculated
quotient.
Important: Encoder scaling directly affects parameters P900 Reference offset
(page 123), P942 Encoder factor numerator (page 134), P943 Encoder factor denomi-
nator (page 134), P954 Zero offset (page 139) as well as the parameter group P92x
IPOS monitoring (page 131). All positions of the IPOSplus® program have to be adjusted
when using the external encoder. The setting of all listed parameters has to be adjusted
every time the encoder scaling is changed.
12.6.7 P956 CAN encoder baud rate

Setting range: 125 kbaud / 250 kbaud / 500 kbaud / 1 Mbaud

12 f
i P96x IPOSplus® modulo function
P Hz
Sets the baud rate of the connected CAN encoder.
12.7 P96x IPOSplus® modulo function

The IPOSplus® modulo function is used for endless positioning, for example with circular
indexing tables or chain conveyors. Refer to the IPOSplus® manual for detailed informa-
tion.
12.7.1 P960 Modulo function

Setting range: OFF / SHORT / CW / CCW
• OFF: The modulo function is deactivated.
• SHORT: The "short travel" modulo function is active. The drive moves from the actual
position to the target position taking the shortest possible route. Both directions of
rotation are possible.
• CW: The "CW" modulo function is active. The drives moves from its actual position
to the target position with a "CW" direction of rotation, even if this means moving a
longer distance. The "CCW" direction of rotation is not possible.
• CCW: The "CCW" modulo function is active. The drives moves from its actual
position to the target position with a "CCW" direction of rotation, even if this means
moving a longer distance. The "CW" direction of rotation is not possible.
12.7.2 P961 Modulo numerator

Setting range: 0 – 1 – 231 – 1
Simulation of the gear unit by entering the number of teeth of the gear unit and the ad-
ditional gear.
Modulo numerator = Numerator gear unit i x numerator additional gear i
12.7.3 P962 Modulo denominator

Setting range: 0 – 1 – 231 – 1
Simulation of the gear unit by entering the number of teeth of the gear unit and the ad-
ditional gear.
Modulo denominator = Denominator gear unit i x denominator additional gear i
12.7.4 P963 Modulo encoder resolution

Setting range: 0 – 4096 – 65535
Resolution of the selected IPOSplus® encoder system in increments.
The IPOSplus® encoder resolution for positioning to the motor encoder will be set to
4,096 increments (prerequisite is an encoder resolution of 512 to 2,048).

P97x IPOS synchronization
f 12
i
Hz
P Hz
12.8 P97x IPOS synchronization

12.8.1 P970 DPRAM synchronization
MOVIDRIVE® B allows for synchronized operation with option cards (e.g. DHP11B,
DFE24B).
ON: Synchronized operation with option card is activated.
Important: The inverters may either be synchronized by SBus1, SBus2 or by DPRAM.
The inverters must not be synchronized from several interfaces at the same time.
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to set P885/P895 to an identifier that is not used in the
entire CAN network. You need parameters P888 and P916 to implement synchroniza-
tion with interpolating setpoint processing.
OFF: Synchronized operation with the option card is not activated.
12.8.2 P971 Synchronization phase

Setting range: −2 – 0 – 2 ms
Time interval between clock signal and data transfer

kVA n Compiler – Editor
13 f
Technical features
i
Hz
P Hz
13 Compiler – Editor
13.1 Technical features
• Integrated IPOSplus® positioning and sequence control. IPOSplus® units do not
required any additional hardware.
• Program creation in a high-level language
• Symbolic variable names
• Option of writing program modules that can be used again in other projects
• Clear, modular and structured programming
• Various loop techniques
• Compiler control using preprocessor commands
• Standard structures
• User-defined structures
• Access to all system variables
• Standard functions
• Debugger for troubleshooting
• Extensive options for making comments
• Integrated in the Windows interface
• Integrated in the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software package

Compiler – Editor kVA n
First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
13.2 First steps

This description is intended to help you familiarize yourself with the programming of the
IPOSplus® Compiler as quickly as possible. You are given an introduction into the basic
functions of the Compiler by means of an example which is created and developed step-
by-step from one chapter to the next.
This introduction is based on the assumption that you are familiar with a conventional
Windows operating system and standard Office applications.
The introduction comprises the following 4 steps:
Step 1: Starting IPOSplus® Compiler with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio
This section illustrates the basic steps for starting the IPOSplus® Compiler via
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.
Step 2: Creating a new project
This section illustrates the IPOSplus® Compiler user interface provides information on
how to create a new IPOSplus® project.
Step 3: The first IPOSplus® program
This section is to assist you in creating your first IPOSplus® program.
Step 4: Compiling and starting the IPOSplus® program
In this chapter, you will compile the program you created in step 3, load it into
MOVIDRIVE® and run the program.
13.2.1 Step 1: Starting IPOSplus® Compiler with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio

Requirements The IPOSplus® Compiler is integrated in the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software pack-
age.
The following conditions have to be fulfilled before you can start the IPOSplus® Compiler
via MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio:
• MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio 5.40 or later is installed on your PC.
• The device you want to create an IPOSplus® program for is connected to your PC.
Use a suitable interface adapter.
MOVITOOLS® Proceed as follows to start MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio and create a project:

MotionStudio and 1. Start the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio from the Windows start menu via:
creating a project
[Start]/[Programs]/[SEW]/[MOVITOOLS-MotionStudio]/[MOVITOOLS-MotionStudio]
2. Create a project with a name and directory.

13 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
Establishing com- Proceed as follows to establish a communication with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio and
munication and scan your network:
scanning the net-
1. Set up a communication channel (e.g. "serial") to communicate with your units.
work
For a detailed description on how to configure a communication channel, refer to the
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio documentation (manual or online help).
2. Scan your network (unit scan). Press the [Start network scan] button [1] in the tool-
bar.
[1]
1132720523
Starting Proceed as follows to start the IPOSplus® Compiler via MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio:
IPOSplus®
1. Mark the device you want to start the IPOSplus® Compiler for.
Compiler
2. Right-click to open the context menu.
3. Start the IPOSplus® Compiler via the following menu item:
[Programming] / [IPOS Compiler] /
2123686283

First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
The IPOSplus® programming interface opens:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
482065675
[1] Menu bar

[2] Toolbar
[3] Project window
[4] Program window
[5] Status bar
13.2.2 Step 2: Creating a new project

To create a new project, choose [Project]/[Create new...] from the menu bar. Use the
following dialog window to specify the basic project properties:
482580363
The first line contains the name of the project. Give your project a unique name that you
will recognize again in the future.

13 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
The second line specifies the directory in which the project is to be saved. Choose the
directory using the [Browse] button. The directory must already exist.
If a subfolder with the name of the project is to be created in the specified path, you must
mark the "Create project subfolder" box. The project file is then stored in the subfolder.
The fourth line specifies the directory in which the Compiler is to search for the files.
These files are added to the source text files using an #include statement. The directory
created during the installation is entered here as a default, for example: c:\pro-
gramme\sew\movitools\projects\include.
Lines 5 and 6 specify the directories in which the MDX file (file with the IPOSplus® pro-
gram) and the list file (file with additional program information) are to be created. These
files are only created if you have checked the appropriate boxes under [Extras]/
[Settings]/[Compiler].
Once you have confirmed your entries by clicking [OK], the Compiler performs the fol-
lowing steps:
• It creates the folder Total in the specified directory (only if you selected the option
"Create project subfolder").
• It creates a project file with the name Total.icp in the Total folder.
• It closes the dialog box.
The project now appears as a hierarchical tree in the project window of the program win-
dow:
482803339
The next step is to create a new source text file and add it to the project. To do so,
choose [File]/[New]/[Source file...].
Confirm this dialog box with [Yes]. A new source file is added to the project. You are now
asked to enter a name for the new source file. Enter the name summe.ipc.

First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
When you click [Save] another window appears. You create the program structure here.
Defining the program structure
482809355
In the "main function" group, mark the "Initialization part" check box. Once you have left
the dialog box by confirming your entry with [OK], the "Main" function is automatically
generated with the initialization part. The source file now has the following content:
/*=============================================
IPOS source file
===============================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
}
The #include <constb.h> command for MOVIDRIVE® B inserts the header file,
which defines the arguments for all the system functions.
The #include <iob.h> command for MOVIDRIVE® B inserts a file containing the
definitions of the digital inputs and outputs. These constants and definitions can be ac-
cessed directly during programming.

13 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
The "Main" function contains an initialization part and the main program loop. This is a
correct program that could be run, but it does not, however, contain any functions.
The program window now looks as follows:
482850699
If you make changes to the source text, save the project using [File]/[Save All]. Close
the program by choosing [File]/[Exit].
13.2.3 Step 3: The first IPOSplus® program

This section is to assist you in creating your first IPOSplus® program.
Editing the Start the Compiler again. This time, the project and the summe.ipc file are loaded au-
IPOSplus® program tomatically as they were open when you exited the program.
To get to know all further functions of the IPOSplus® Compiler, you will now write a pro-
gram that adds together all the numbers from 1 to 100.
Rather than using the formula (n+1)×(n/2) for this, you should program a loop that adds
up the total by iteration.

First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
The program should, therefore, have the following structure:
483418763
"Changed" is displayed in the status bar. This means the program has been changed
compared with its status when last saved. Save the program. "Saved" is now displayed
in the status bar.
Syntax highlighting is used so that words with different meanings are shown in different
colors to give you a better overview. For example, all names that the Compiler recog-
nizes (key words) are shown in yellow. The system functions provided by the unit are
highlighted in blue.

13 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
You can use the insert tool while you are editing the program. Click the right mouse but-
ton to open the context menu containing the [Insert Instruction...] menu item. This menu
item allows you to call up the insert tool.
Calls insert tool
483423627
You can use the insert tool to select various C-constructions, system functions and pre-
defined structures. When you select a system function, you have to enter the arguments
of this function in the group box to the right of the window. Use [Add] to insert the rele-
vant command to the position where you have placed the cursor in the source text.
To insert the _Wait function, you must first select the _Wait function in the list of system
functions. The right-hand side of the window displays the arguments relating to the cor-
responding function. For our example, enter the value 5000 (stands for 5000 ms).
If you require additional information on a C construction or a system function, simply se-
lect the term in question in one of the two lists and press the <F1 key> or the [Help] but-
ton.
You can activate the help function from the source text by placing the cursor on the key
word _Wait and pressing the <F1> key.
INFORMATION
The Compiler is case sensitive, which means that there could be 2 different variables
for MYVAR and myvar.

First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
13.2.4 Step 4: Compiling and starting the IPOSplus® program

In this chapter, you will compile the program you created in step 3, load it into IPOSplus®
and run the program.
Compiling the pro- To generate a program in a form that the inverter can understand, the project must be
gram compiled. To do so, press the icon or choose [Project]/[Compile].
Message window displayed after compilation
483686539
The message window displayed above appears after the project has been compiled. If
the program does not contain any errors, it is assigned the status OK. The size of the
program is also important. It is specified as the length of the code words used in Assem-
bler code. This absolute number is also converted to a percentage that specifies how
much memory space is used in IPOSplus®.
The compilation process was successful for our program. The program is 29 IPOS
words in size; that is, it takes up 0.4 percent of the entire IPOSplus® memory capacity.
Close the window by choosing [OK].

13 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
Error messages As syntax errors can occur during programming, an error reporting system has been in-
during compilation tegrated in the IPOSplus® Compiler. If the program detects an error, it displays the line
in which the error occurs and generates a corresponding error message classifying the
error.
Observe the following example..
Change the FOR loop as follows:
while(1)
{
for (H1 = 0; H1 <= 100)
{
°°// Calculate sum
H2 = H2 + H1;
// Wait 5 s
_Wait( 5000 );
}
}
In this example, the third argument of the FOR loop is missing. When you compile the
system using the icon, the following message appears:
Error message during compilation
483692427
The status ERROR is output as an error has occurred. The line, error classification and
the error code are also displayed. Furthermore, the program line in the source file con-
taining the error is highlighted with a red bar.
Click the [OK] button and then rectify the error. The compilation process must be re-
peated again once you have rectified the error.
Rectify the error by correcting the FOR loop as follows:
while(1)
{
for (H1 = 0; H1 <= 100;H1++)
{
°°// Calculate sum
H2 = H2 + H1;
// Wait 5 s
_Wait( 5000 );
}
}

First steps
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
Loading the pro- As the next step, the program must be loaded into the inverter. To do so, press the
gram into the unit icon or choose [Project]/[Compile and download]. The program is compiled again and
loaded into the inverter once it has been compiled successfully.
The first program line in the "Main" function is marked with a light blue bar once the pro-
gram has been downloaded successfully. You can now start the program.
Starting and stop- You can start the program by clicking the icon. The program now runs in
ping the program MOVIDRIVE® and the START status is displayed in the toolbar.
Status START
483713291
At the same time, the light blue bar in the program is deleted.
You can see that the program is being processed. In this small test program, the variable
H2 is incremented in steps of 5 s.
To see this, open the variable window by choosing [Display]/[All Variables]. You can now
observe the variable H2.
Now we want to stop the program. This is done by pressing the icon . After this, the
first program line in the "Main" function is marked with a light blue bar.

13 f
i Settings for the IPOSplus® Compiler
Hz
P Hz
13.3 Settings for the IPOSplus® Compiler

You can make a number of settings for the entire Compiler. To do so, choose [Options]/
[Settings]. The following dialog box appears:
Editor settings
483719691
In the Editor settings, you can select the colors for the background and the text. In the
same way, settings can be made for the syntax highlighting colors, for displaying the
syntax of instructions and keywords in color.
In addition, the following settings can be made:
• Color syntax display: Activate and deactivate the syntax highlighting for instructions
and key words.
• Automatic indent: The cursor is indented automatically in line with the first character
of the previous line when you change to a new line by pressing the Enter key.
• Persistent blocks: Selected blocks remain marked until a new selection is made. If
this option is deactivated, the text block selection mark disappears when the cursor
is moved. Pressing a key causes the selected block to be replaced.
• Tab size: Number of characters by which the cursor is indented when the Tab key is
pressed.
• Font : Select the font by clicking the [Change...] button.
• Show debug tooltip: If the [Show debug tooltip] option is activated, the content of
variables is displayed directly in the Editor window when the cursor is placed on the
required variable.

f 13
Settings for the IPOSplus® Compiler i
Hz
P Hz
Compiler settings
483721227
You can make settings for the Compiler process on the Compiler tab page.
• Generate IPOS program file (*.MDX): An *.MDX file is generated during compilation.
The MDX file contains the Assembler code of the program in text form and can be
loaded into the inverter via SHELL (Copy unit data) or opened in the Assembler.
• Generate List File (*.LST): A list file is generated and saved during the compiling
process. It contains information on resource utilization and the program sequence.
• Save automatically before compiling: If this checkbox is selected, the source code is
saved automatically before the start of each compiling process.
• Do not test recursive function calls: If this checkbox is not selected, the Compiler
reports an error when it detects a recursive function call. If you want to permit
recursive function calls, you can deselect this checkbox. The Compiler only issues a
warning message.
• Download only possible in the status "No enable": If this checkbox is selected, an
IPOSplus® program can only be downloaded to the inverter when it has the status "No
enable".
INFORMATION
Uploaded programs created by the Compiler can be opened but not processed with
the Assembler.

13 f
i Settings for the IPOSplus® Compiler
Hz
P Hz
Directory settings:
483837963
In the IPOSplus® Compiler, a program can either be created as a project or as an indi-

vidual source file.
If the program is created as an individual source file, you must make the following set-
tings as shown in the window above:
In the [List File Output Directory] field, specify the folder in which the list file should be
saved if this function has been activated in the Compiler settings. You can search for
and select this directory by clicking the [Browse] button.
In the [MDX File Output Directory] field, specify the folder in which the MDX file should
be saved if this function has been activated in the Compiler settings. You can search for
and select this directory by clicking the [Browse] button.
The [#include Directives Directory] setting is made in the last line on this tab. This field
contains the details of the directory in which the header files linked with the #include
command are stored.
If an IPOSplus® program is created as a project, the settings in the [Directories] tab page
are not relevant.
Settings of the task interpreter steps:
483839499

Search function
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
On the [Run] tab, you can set the speed parameters for task 1 and task 2. These settings
are described in detail in section "Task Management and Interrupts / Tasks for
MOVIDRIVE® B".
13.4 Search function

Choose [Search]/[Search for...] from the menu bar. If you have marked a section of text,
this text will be used as the search string (in the following screen this is "H10"). The fol-
lowing window appears:
[Search] window:
484333835
Click the [Find Next] button to search for the next occurrence of the word in question.
Click [Cancel] to close the window again.
The same functionality is also available for the [Replace...] function in the [Search] menu
item in the menu bar.
[Replace] window:
484363787
The [Find Next] button can be used to search for the corresponding word, which can
then be replaced with another word using the [Replace] function. Click the [Replace All]
button to replace all strings matching the search term. Click [Cancel] to close this win-
dow.

13 f
Creating a new project
i
Hz
P Hz
13.5 Creating a new project

An IPOSplus® program consists of one or more source text modules. Each module is
stored in a separate file with the extension *.IPC. Information about the project is stored
in a project file with the extension *.ICP. This binary file is stored and administered by
the Compiler.
13.5.1 Project properties

Select [Project]/[Create new]. A dialog box appears: Enter the general project charac-
teristics here.
Project properties
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
484369163
[1] Name of the project.

[2] Directory of the project.
[3] Directory in which the project folder is created.
[4] Directory in which the files that are inserted using the #include instruction are stored.
[5] Output directory for MDX file (if activated).
[6] Output directory for list file (if activated).
Once you have confirmed your entries by pressing the [OK] button, the newly-created
project appears in the tree structure in the project window.
The root node is the project name. The nodes Source file(s) and Documents are
listed below the root node. The source modules (*.IPC files) are listed below the source
file(s).
All the source modules contained therein are compiled to form an IPOSplus® program.
Under the Documents node, you can attach any files required for documentation (for
example, Word documents) (right mouse click: "Add document to the project"). All files
in this node are excluded from the compilation process.

f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
In the next dialog box that appears, give the new source file a name. If you exit the box
by selecting [Save], another dialog box opens.
This dialog box can be used for defining a basic program structure which is displayed
as an empty program template in the Editor window.
Defining the program structure
484387339
13.5.2 Defining the program structure

Select the [Initialization part] check box if the main program is to contain an initialization
part in which, for example, variables are initialized.
Also, select the [Add] check box for task 2 / task 3 if a basic structure for task 2 / task 3
is to be created. In this case, it is also possible to enter the function name for task 2 /
task 3 which is then directly adopted in the basic structure. An initialization part is auto-
matically added to the basic structure if a task 2 / task 3 is added. This part contains the
command for starting task 2.
If an interrupt routine is to be programmed, its basic structure can also be created at this
stage. This structure is created by selecting the corresponding [Add] check box. Use the
[Interrupt Source] selection field to select whether it is to be an interrupt for an error,
timer or touch probe. The specified function name is adopted in the basic structure as
the name of the interrupt function. A statement line for activating the interrupt routine is
inserted in the initialization part.
Click the [OK] button to complete the process of selecting the program structure. If you
click the [Cancel] button to complete the selection process, the program displays an
empty editor window without a program structure. This is required, for example, for cre-
ating your own header file.

13 f
i
Hz
P Hz
For instance, if a structure with an initialization part and a task 2 is selected, in which
task 2 is to have the function name ”Monitoring", the resulting Editor window displays
the following program structure:
Compiler program:
484392715
INFORMATION
The IPOSplus® Compiler is case sensitive, which means that there could be 2 different
variables for MYVAR and myvar.
"ß" is not permitted.

Saving a project
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
You also have the option of adding an existing source file to a project. To do so, click
the right mouse button on the Source file root node and select [Add source file to
project] from the context menu that appears. The following dialog box appears.
484398091
The file type is preset to *.ipc. Files with the ending *.ipc indicate source files. Header
files with the ending *.h can also be selected and assigned to the project.
When a file is selected, it appears under the source file(s) root node and is assigned to
the project.
13.6 Saving a project

There are several options for saving a project and the corresponding source files.
• The complete project and all the source files in it can be saved by choosing [File]/
[Save All].
• If only changes made to the source file currently in process are to be saved, you can
do so by choosing [File] [Save] or the icon from the toolbar.
• Choose [File]/[Save As...] to save the source file active in the project window under
a different name.

13 f
Setting up a project management structure
i
Hz
P Hz
13.7 Setting up a project management structure

A project management structure allows you access to all data relating to a project. For
example, the following folder structure gives a clear overview:
Main project (e.g. machine or customer)
Complete documentation (documents for entire project)
Project (single inverter)
Documentation (documentation for the individual drive if it is not stored in the com-
plete documentation)
Source (all *.IPC files, all *.h files, including const.h)
Parameters (*.mdx file for unit exchange)
Measurements (Scope files)
Project (single inverter)
Documentation (documentation for the individual drive if it is not stored in the com-
plete documentation)
Source (all *.IPC files, all *.h files, including const.h)
Parameters (*.mdx file for unit exchange)
Measurements (Scope files)

Setting up a project management structure
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
Example:
Customer: Müller
Machine: Hoist station
MOVIDRIVE®: hoist axis, fork drive
Complete documentation
Hoist axis
Documentation
Source
Parameters
Measurements
Fork drive
Documentation
Source
Parameters
Measurements
A project management structure such as this permits anyone who has to familiarize
themselves with the machine or the program to obtain a rapid overview. Documentation
and source texts can be located quickly, making it easy to keep an overview. This facil-
itates easy maintenance of the software and the overall system.
The folders and subfolders can be created in the project management.

13 f
Opening a project
i
Hz
P Hz
13.8 Opening a project

If the Compiler is opened, the Editor is opened with the last source text to be processed
in the last project that was opened, as long as the IPOSplus® Compiler was exited when
the Editor window was open.
An existing project can also be opened by choosing [Project]/[Open].
You can search for the project file in the dialog box and open it using the [Open] button.
13.9 Handling projects with MOVIDRIVE® B

INFORMATION
MOVIDRIVE® B allows you to store an error-free, compliable project with all the ac-
companying files in MOVIDRIVE®.
The complete source code can be stored in MOVIDRIVE® and called up at any time.
13.9.1 Saving a project in the inverter

Choose [Project]/[Download] to save the current project and all the accompanying data,
including the project file itself, in the MOVIDRIVE® unit.
The project is compiled before it is downloaded. If the compilation process fails, the data
is not downloaded.
If the available memory space in the inverter is too small, an error message is generated
and the process is canceled.
INFORMATION
Downloading the project data does not automatically download the compiled
IPOSplus® program.

f 13
Handling projects with MOVIDRIVE® B i
Hz
P Hz
13.9.2 Loading a project from the inverter

Choose [Project]/[Upload...] to load a project stored in the inverter to the PC/laptop.
484532491
You can enter the name of the project folder in a dialog box. Select a target directory via
the [Browse] button.
If a project file with the same name already exists in the directory, the system asks
whether it should overwrite this file.
If there is no project data in the inverter, the process is canceled.
13.9.3 Calling up a project from the inverter

This function is used to update the project on the PC/laptop with the files from the in-
verter.
As opposed to [Project]/[Upload], this menu item loads the files stored in the inverter
memory and copies them to their original directories.
If a file with the same name already exists in the directory, the system asks whether it
should overwrite this file. The creation date is entered for both files to help identify them.
If there is no project data available, the process is canceled.

13 f
Compiling a project
i
Hz
P Hz
13.10 Compiling a project

To generate a program in a form that the inverter can understand, the project must be
compiled. If a project consists of several source files, all source files are compiled to an
IPOSplus® program during the compilation process.
Project compilation can be started by choosing [Project]/[Compile] or by clicking .
The file is also saved if the [Save automatically before Compiling] function has been ac-
tivated in the Compiler settings. In the same way, an IPOSplus® program file and listing
file is generated when these settings are activated for the Compiler.
Once the compiling process is complete, the following window appears:
Status window for compilation
484538891
• Status: Result of the compiling process: OK or ***ERROR***.

• File: Source file of the project in which the error was detected.
• Line: Program lines in which the error was detected.
• Class: Error class of the error.
• Code: Error code of the error.
The status window also contains information about the length of the generated program
code and the memory utilization in the inverter. The length of the program code is en-
tered as the number of the code words used in the Assembler code. This value is used
to calculate and display the memory utilization in percent.
Press the [OK] button to leave the status window. In case of an error, a red bar highlights
those lines in which the error occurs.
If several errors occur in one program only the first error is displayed in the status win-
dow. Once this error has been rectified, compile the project again and the next error will
be displayed in the status window.

Compiling and downloading
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
13.11 Compiling and downloading

Two basic steps are required to transfer the program to the inverter. First, the source
text must be compiled. Second, the program must be transferred to the inverter. Trigger
these two steps by choosing [Project]/[Compile + download]. The basic conditions for
compiling are the same in principle as those described in the previous section. However,
an explicit message only appears if an error occurs. You can tell when the Compile +
Download function has been successful because the first program line of the MAIN func-
tion is marked with a light blue bar at the end of the process.
13.12 Starting a program

A program can be started once it has been downloaded to the inverter. To do this, select
the [Start] menu command from the [Run] menu in the menu bar. Alternatively, you can
also press the icon in the toolbar. The light blue bar in the editor is deleted once the
program has been started. The display for the task status changes from PSTOP to
START.
Status displays for task 1 and task 2:
484635147
13.13 Stopping a program

Select the [Stop] menu command from the [Run] menu in the menu bar to stop the pro-
grams in task 1, task 2 and task 3. Alternatively, you can also press the icon in the
toolbar. The display for the task status in the tool bar changes from START to PSTOP.
13.14 Comparison with unit

There is a comparison function for comparing the content of the Editor window with the
program in the inverter. This function can be called up by selecting the [Compare with
inverter] menu item from the [Project] menu in the menu bar. You can also call the func-
tion by pressing the icon in the toolbar.

13 f
Debugger
i
Hz
P Hz
13.15 Debugger
The integrated debugger is a useful tool for working through a program for test purposes
or for troubleshooting in individual steps. To use the debugger, the program must be
transferred to the inverter. Three different functions are available for debugging.
Function Symbol Key Description
Execute to cur- <F4> Program is only processed up to the current cursor position.
sor
Single step <F7> The program line highlighted by the cursor is processed. If a function is
called, the program branches into this function.
Skip <F8> If the program lines highlighted by the cursor contain a function call,
the system does not branch to the function and the program line is
skipped.
Click the icon in the tool bar, function key F5 or the [Stop] menu command from the
[Run] menu in the menu bar can be used to stop and reset the program at any time dur-
ing debugging.
Click the icon in the tool bar, function key F9 or the [Start] menu command from the
[Run] menu in the menu bar can be used to start the program from the current cursor
position at any time during debugging.
While the program is running, you can interrupt it by pressing the Alt+F5 key combina-
tion or choosing [Run]/[Break]. The execution bar is now positioned at the command that
is to be executed next.
The program can also be interrupted by pressing the F4 key or choosing [Goto Cursor].
The program is stopped in the command line in which the cursor is positioned.

Variable window
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
13.16 Variable window

It is useful to open a Variable window so you can observe the contents of the variables
during debugging or normal running of the program.
The Variable window is called up by selecting [All Variables] from the [Display] menu in
the menu bar.
Displaying variables
485381387
All variables can be observed in the variable window using the scroll bar.
Another way to observe variables is to set up a watch window. Only selected variables
are displayed in the watch window. The fewer variables displayed at the same time, the
faster an individual value can be updated.
INFORMATION
The IPOS variables contained in the data backup of the device can also be displayed
in offline mode.
The non-volatile variables are displayed with their permanently stored value. The vol-
atile changes by the program code are not stored in the backup.

13 f
Variable window
i
Hz
P Hz
To set up a watch window choose [Display]/[Variable Watch]/[Edit Window...] from the

menu bar. The following window is displayed:
Selecting variables
485591563
Double click on the variable you want to display, or select a number of variables and
press [Add] to assign the required variables to the watch window. The selected variables
are displayed in a list to the right of the window. To remove a variable from the watch
window, you must highlight it in the list and press [Remove].
Displaying the selected variable:
485597579
The window looks the same as the complete variable window, but it only contains the
selected variables.
Variables can have symbolic identifiers assigned to them because standard variable
names (e.g. H1, H2, etc.) are hard to follow in big programs. These identifiers are also
displayed at this point.

Program information
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
The values of the variables can be displayed in different formats. You can select from
the following formats: signed decimal, hexadecimal, binary or ASCII. To change from
one format to another, first select the required variable by clicking it. Then call up a con-
text menu by pressing the right mouse button, and select the required format from there.
Changing the variable format:
485601931
Individual variables can also occur several times in the watch window. In this way, a vari-
able can be displayed in various formats at the same time.
13.17 Program information

The [Program Information] menu command is available in the [Display] menu in the
menu bar. If you select this menu item, the following window appears:
Program information
485608587
This program information refers to the program stored in the inverter. The size of the pro-
gram, creation date and name of the source file are displayed in this window. Click the
[Open File] button to display the source code for the program in the inverter in an Editor
window. This assumes that the name of the source file has not been changed and can
be located in the path that was used to transfer the program to the inverter.

13 f
Entering instructions
i
Hz
P Hz
13.18 Entering instructions

In principle it is possible to enter the entire source text of an IPOSplus® program by typing
it in using the keyboard. In this case, use the syntax based on the programming lan-
guage C. You can undo the last five entries by using the key combination [Ctrl + Z].
You can use the insert tool while you are editing the program. This can be called up by
pressing the right mouse button to open a context menu and then selecting [Insert In-
struction]. You can also call up the insert tool by pressing the icon in the toolbar.
Inserting an instruction:
485614475
You can use the insert tool to add C-constructions, system functions or predefined struc-
tures to the source text.
If you mark a C-construction or a standard structure, the text that will be inserted in the
source text appears in the lower section of the window. If you want to insert a system
function, you must also enter arguments of the function in the right-hand side of the win-
dow. Click the [Add] button to insert the selected function in the text where the cursor
was positioned when you called the insert tool.
An initialization section is added to the defined structure variable if you click [Initializing
Sequence]. To do so, the program must have been compiled at least once.

Comments
f 13
i
Hz
P Hz
13.19 Comments
Good use of comments makes it easier to read a program and also makes it possible
for someone who does not know the program to become familiar with it quickly.
A long comment, which may span several lines, for example, starts with '/*' and ends
with '*/'. A one line comment starts with '//' and does not need an end mark. A single line
comment can also be entered directly after a command line in the source text.
Comments
486824075

13 f
Overview of the icons
i
Hz
P Hz
13.20 Overview of the icons

Symbol Menu item Description
File → new Creates new source file
File → open Opens source file
File → save Saves source file
File → compile Compiles source file
File → compile + download Compiles source file and downloads it to inverter
File → compare with inverter Compares source file with the program in the inverter
Project → compile Compiles project
Project → compile + download Compiles project and downloads it to inverter
Program → compare with inverter Compares project with the program in the inverter
Run → start Starts the IPOSplus® program
Run → stop Stops the IPOSplus® program
Run → run to cursor Runs program to where the cursor is positioned
Run → single step Runs single step
Run → skip Skips an instruction (statement)
Edit → insert instruction Calls insert tool
File → print Prints source file
Help → user manual Open online help

Compiler – Programming kVA n
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
14 Compiler – Programming
The source text of a program written with the IPOSplus® Compiler is made up of various
parts. These must first be considered individually
/********************************************
File name: Program_structure.IPC
Date: 04.02.2002
Author: Thomas Ambrus
Comment with notes on the program
SEW-EURODRIVE Bruchsal
Technical Documentation
Brief description: Source code program struc-
ture
********************************************/ Program header with pre-processor state-
*/=========================================== ments and, if necessary, definition of the
IPOS Source File variable
===========================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
/*===========================================
Main Function (IPOS Entry Function)
===========================================*/ The main function contains the initializa-
main() tion part and the endless loop for task 1
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
// activate task 2 Initialization part
_SetTask2(T2_START, Monitor); // testing
/*-------------------------------------
Main Loop
--------------------------------------*/
Endless loop for task 1
while(1)
{
}
}
/*===========================================
Task2
===========================================*/ Task 2, endless loop is not required
Monitor()
{
}
/*===========================================
User function
===========================================*/
Reference_travel() Functions (subprograms) created by the
user, called up from task 1 and task2
{
}
Automatic_mode()
{
}
Manual_mode()
{
}

kVA n Compiler – Programming
14 f
Preprocessor
i
Hz
P Hz
14.1 Preprocessor
The IPOSplus® Compiler is a multi-pass Compiler that processes the source text in sev-
eral run-throughs. During the first run-through, the preprocessor processes the state-
ments – referred to below as directives – which are intended for it, tests the statements
for conditional compiling, deletes comments and finally creates a temporary file for the
Compiler. The preprocessor increases flexibility and productivity during programming in
the following areas:
• Integration of text from other files (header files) which contain prepared and/or user-
defined constants or source text functions.
• Definition of symbolic identifiers to improve the legibility of the source text.
• Definition of directives for conditional compiling to improve portability and simplify
test phases.
Each line starting with a # is treated as a preprocessor directive, unless the # is part of
a comment. Any blanks before or after the # character are ignored.
Preprocessor directives are generally written at the start of the source text. They can,
however, be located anywhere in the program. Depending on the function of the direc-
tives, they either apply as of the source text line in which they are located or for the entire
program regardless of their location.
14.2 Preprocessor statements

The comment lines in the program header are followed by the preprocessor statements.
A statement of this type is inserted as standard when you open a new Editor window.
The '#include <const.h>' statement integrates a header file called const.h when the
source text is compiled. This file has a fixed format and must not be modified. Neverthe-
less, we shall explain the function of a header file with reference to this file. An abbrevi-
ated form of the file is printed below as this is sufficient to demonstrate the main aspects.
/*=============================================
File name: Const.h
File version: 2.20
SEW Include-File for IPOSplus Compiler
Please do not modify this file!
(C) 1999 SEW-EURODRIVE

==============================================*/
#ifndef _CONST_H
#define _CONST_H
.
.
.
#define Scope474 H474
#define Scope475 H475
#define DRS_Ctrl H476
#define DRS_Status H477
#define AnaOutIPOS2 H478
#define AnaOutpIPOS H479
#define OptOutpIPOS H480
#define StdOutpIPOS H481
#define OutputLevel H482
#define InputLevel H483
#define ControlWord H484

Preprocessor statements
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
#define T0_Reload H485

#define Reserve4 H486
#define Timer_2 H487
#define WdogTimer H490
#define SetpointPos H491
#define TargetPos H492
#define PosWindow H493
#define LagWindow H494
#define LagDistance H495
#define SLS_right H496
#define SLS_left H497
#define RefOffset H498
#define SetpPosBus H499
#define TpPos2_Abs H502
#define TpPos1_Abs H503
#define TpPos2_Ext H504
#define TpPos2_Mot H505
#define TpPos1_Ext H506
#define TpPos1_Mot H507
#define ActPos_Abs H509
#define ActPos_Ext H510
#define ActPos_Mot H511
#endif
The actual structure of the header file starts with '#ifndef _CONST_H' after a general re-
mark section. This "#ifndef" instruction is at least always accompanied by an '#endif'.
You can find this '#endif' instruction in the last program line of the header file. The task
of this '#ifndef' and '#endif' construction is to prevent the file being linked more than
once.
The statements within this construction are only performed if a macro identifier, here
‘_CONST_H’, has not yet been defined (ifnot defined). A '#define _CONST_H' is posi-
tioned in the next line of the program to define this macro identifier. Therefore, if the
header file is processed during compilation by the '#include <const.h>' command, the
'#ifndef _CONST_H' query is initially answered in the affirmative because the
"_CONST_H" macro identifier has not yet been encountered. It is then identified imme-
diately with '#define _CONST_H'. Then, if the 'const.h' header file is linked elsewhere in
the program, the '_CONST_H' macro identifier has already been identified and the '#if-
ndef _CONST_H' query is answered in the negative. As a result, processing immedi-
ately jumps to the "#endif" statement. This prevents the file from being incorporated un-
necessarily more than once, which would lead to an error message.

14 f
#include
i
Hz
P Hz
In addition to the '#ifndef' statement, there is also the '#ifdef' (ifdefined) statement. This
statement does not have to be negated. An if-else construction is also possible. In this
case, this means that the part of the statement following the "#else" is processed if the
"#ifdef" or "#ifndef" query is not fulfilled. This results in the following possibilities:
#ifdef identifier_1 #ifndef identifier_2 #ifdef identifier_3
Program text_1 Program text_3 Program text_5
#else #else #endif
Program text_2 Program text_4
#endif #endif
Note that these preprocessor statements can also be used to good effect in the main
program, not just in header files. As a result, for example, parts of a program can be con-
verted specifically for a machine without having to make major changes to the source
text.
14.3 #include
This directive makes it possible to incorporate source texts from other files (header files)
into the source text file. Header files are usually used to define constants or macros that
are used several times so they are available in different projects. The syntax is:
#include <FileName>
FileName is the complete name of the file that is to be incorporated. It is enclosed by
pointed brackets. It is sufficient to state the file name without path information if the file
to be incorporated is located in the current folder
The file BEISPIEL.IPC contains the main program. The file CONST.H is a header file.
#include <CONST.H> #define MAXIMUM_SPEED 3000
H10 = MAXIMUM_SPEED;
The preprocessor replaces the #include directive with the
content of the CONST.H file:
#define MAXIMUM_SPEED 3000
H10 = MAXIMUM_SPEED
The result after macro expansion is as follows:
H10 = 3000;
The #include directives can also be used in nested structures, i.e. an included file can
itself contain an #include directive to include another file. Ensure that files do not set up
an include loop (they include themselves). This leads to a preprocessor error. We rec-
ommend avoiding nesting #include directives to keep the structure clearer.

Include folders
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
14.4 Include folders

There are various procedures depending on the folder in which the file to be included is
located.
1. If the path of the file to be included is set in the Folders tab in the Compiler settings,
then the statement is #include <FileName> where FileName is the name of the
header file.
2. If the file to be included is located in the current working folder, then the command is
#include 'FileName'. FileName is the name of the file to be incorporated.
3. The folder path must be specified if the file to be incorporated is located in a folder
other than those already stated here. For example, the statement for incorporating a
file called Test.h located in the root folder would be '#include "c:\Test.h"'.
The best place to put header files you have written yourself is in the current working
folder. This allows the program to be written irrespective of the folder path. There is no
need to make changes if the program is to be compiled in a different folder and the di-
rectory structure of the program is maintained. The program can be compiled immedi-
ately.
The setting for the Compiler would have to be changed in the first method, whilst the #in-
clude path would have to be edited in the program in the third method before the pro-
gram could be re-compiled.
INFORMATION
The system searches through the paths in the following sequence if all three methods
are mixed:
1. Direct path assignment in the #include statement (method 3)
2. Path assignment relative to the source file (method 2)
3. Path assignment in the #include directive of the settings dialog box.
14.5 #define
The '#define' directive was previously used for identifying a Macro identifier. However,
the basic function of the '#define' directive is to define a macro. Macros are used to re-
place symbols in the source text by strings. This mechanism makes it possible to formu-
late constants, variables, etc. symbolically. The Compiler only supports macros without
parameters. The syntax is:
#define MacroIdentifier <SymbolSequence>
Each occurrence of a "MacroIdentifier" in the source text following this directive is re-
placed by "SymbolSequence" (which may be empty). The MacroIdentifier is defined if
the SymbolSequence is empty; it does not have any other function. The symbol se-
quence must not exceed 75 characters.
In this way, a symbolic notation is assigned to the system variables in the header file.
Therefore, for example, variable H474 can be addressed using the symbolic name
'Scope474' or variable H484 using 'ControlWord' once the const.h header file has been
incorporated.

14 f
#undef
i
Hz
P Hz
Equally, the '#define' directive can be used to assign symbolic names to constant val-
ues. As a result, the line '#define MAX_SPEED 1500' makes it possible for
"MAX_SPEED" to be written in the source text rather than 1500. This makes it easier to
read the source text.
The following example illustrates this point:
#define setpoint H123
#define maximum 2000
setpoint = maximum; // in this line the macro def. "setpoint" and "maxi-
mum"
// are replaced, meaning: H123 = 2000;
After each macro expansion, the resulting text is examined again. This makes it possible
to use nested macros.
#define variable1 setpoint
#define minimum 20+H11
variable1 = minimum; // in this line the macro definition "variable1" is
// replaced by "setpoint", then "setpoint" is replaced by
// "H10", meaning: H10=20+H11;
INFORMATION
Ensure that a variable identified with #define has not been assigned two system vari-
ables by mistake.
INFORMATION
The compilation process cannot detect whether a variable is defined with the same
name as a structure. The inverter generates the error 10 IPOS-ILLOP.
Example:
#define position H2VARINT position;
14.6 #undef
This directive makes it possible to deactivate a macro that was previously created using
'#define...':
Syntax: #undef MacroIdentifier
The following example illustrates this point:

#define position 1000 // "position" is valid
H12=position; // meaning: H12=1000;
#undef position // "position" is not valid
H13=position; // macro definition "position" is not replaced,
// Compiler error occurs

#declare
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
Compiler error due to missing definition:
493925131
14.7 #declare
This directive allows IPOSplus® variables to be declared symbolically and relative to a
base variable. This facilitates the portability of source text modules as far as assigning
variable numbers is concerned, because the user only has to change the number of the
base variable in order to change all the variable numbers used in the source text.
In this way, it is easier to integrate preconfigured modules into your own source text pro-
vided that these modules have relative variable numbers.
Syntax: #declare IdentifierNew IdentifierOld : Offset
The following example illustrates this function:
#define basevariable H100
#declare setpoint basevariable:0

#declare actvalue basevariable:1
#declare i basevariable:5
The following variables are now available as symbolic variables: setpoint, actual value
and i. Furthermore, it also specifies that the IPOSplus® variables H100, H101 and H105
are assigned.
INFORMATION
A maximum of 600 #define and #declare directives can be used.
INFORMATION
The task of integrating modules is made easier by forming variable blocks using de-
clare directives. However, this remains quite difficult to handle because the user
needs to have an overview of which variables have been occupied and which are still
available. As a result, it is a good idea to use structures, SEW standard structures or
user-defined structures particularly when a fixed sequence of variables has to be pro-
vided (e.g. SETSYS, GETSYS, MOVLNK, and so on). All other variables should be
declared with the keywords long or initial long as described below since this leaves the
task of assigning variable numbers up to the Compiler.

14 f
SEW standard structures
i
Hz
P Hz
14.8 SEW standard structures

SEW standard structures provide ready-made structures for commands that are depen-
dent on structures.
The following table shows a list of the standard structures available for each specific
statement. For the corresponding elements, refer to the description of the respective
command, see section Standard functions (page 208).
Instruction type Standard structure
_GetSys GSAINPUT
GSAOUTPUT
GSCAM
GSCAM_EXT
CAM_EXT_OUT
GSPODATA3
GSACTSPEEDEXT
GSPODATA10
_MovCommDef (only for MQx) MOVCOM
MCPDATA
MCPARDATA
_MoviLink MOVLNK
MLDATA
_SBusCommDef SCREC
SCTRACYCL
SCTRCYCL
_SetSys SSPOSRAMP
SSPOSSPEED
SSPIDATA3
SSPIDATA10
These standard structures are used as follows. First, a variable is declared as the struc-
ture variable in the declaration part. Then the elements of the structure are addressed
as explained in the following example. The structure is addressed within the command
by using the name of the structure variable without additions.
// Declare
SSPOSSPEED rapid speed, slow speed;
// Initiate
rapid_speed.cw = 14000; // rapid speed cw 1400 rpm
rapid_speed.ccw = 12500; // rapid speed ccw 1250 rpm
slow_speed.cw = 3000; // slow speed cw 300 rpm
slow_speed.ccw = 4500; // slow speed ccw 450 rpm
// set rapid speed

_SetSys( SS_POSSPEED,rapid speed );
// set slow speed

_SetSys( SS_POSSPEED,slow speed );

SEW standard structures
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
The insert tool can be used for support when declaring and initializing standard struc-
tures. The cursor must be positioned in the Editor window at the place where the decla-
ration for the structure variables is to be inserted. Call up the insert tool by clicking the
right mouse button. A context menu opens: Choose the menu item [Insert Instruction].
You can also call up the insert tool by pressing the icon in the toolbar or by choosing
[Edit]/[Insert Instruction] from the menu bar. Select the predefined structure and change
the name of the variable in the editing window of the input help. If several structure vari-
ables are declared from the same structure type, separate them with a comma.
Once all structure variables have been declared they must be initialized depending on
the specific application. The insert tool can also be used for this process. Place the cur-
sor in the Editor window at the place where the initialization sequence should be added.
Compile the program and then call the insert tool. Press [Initializing Sequence]. An ini-
tialization block is created for each structure variable that has been declared.
Inserting an instruction:
493929483

14 f
User-defined structures
i
Hz
P Hz
14.9 User-defined structures

Users can define their own structures in addition to the SEW standard structures. First
of all, the structure must be created. This is done in the declaration part of the program.
The 'typedef struct' keyword is used for this. This can be explained by taking an example
which creates a position table.
// Define user structure
typedef struct
{
long pos1;
long pos2;
long pos3;
long pos4;
long pos5;
} table;
This creates a structure with the name table. You can now use this structure as ex-
plained for the standard structures. The next step is to declare a variable as the structure
variable.
// Declare structuretable postable;
Now the variable PosTable has been declared as a structure variable of the structure
type table. The next step is to access the elements. The table must be initialized to do
so.
// Initiate
postable.pos1 = 100000;
The following is a general description of the procedure for setting up a user structure:
typedef struct
{
Type Identifier1;
Type Identifier2;
...
Type IdentifierN;
} Structure name;
StructureName VariableName;
VariableName.Identifier1 = ...;
VariableName.Identifier2 = ...;
VariableName.IdentifierN = ...;
The insert tool can also be used for user-defined structures. To do so, from the Pre-de-
fined Structures window of the insert help choose ’typedef struct (user defined)’. Now
you can change the name of the elements and the structure.

User-defined structures
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
Once you have inserted the structure, a declaration line is added to the Editor window
that declares the structure variables of this structure type. This line must still be edited
in the Editor. Additional elements can be added within the structure type in the same
way. Once the entries have been compiled, an initialization sequence can be activated
using the insert tool. Before doing so, the cursor must be positioned in the Editor at the
place where the initialization sequence is to be inserted.
Structures:
493933835

14 f
long
i
Hz
P Hz
14.10 long
As an alternative to assigning variables using #define, the key word long can be used to
declare an individual variable. In this case, the variable number is assigned by the Com-
piler during compilation.
The key word long initiates a declaration of one or more global variables. The following
example shows how to use the key word.
The syntax of a declaration of one or more global variables is as follows:
long Identifier1 [, Identifier n] ;
Example:
long setpoint,actual_value;
During compilation, the symbolic variables setpoint and actual value are assigned an
IPOSplus® variable. The user always accesses the variable by using the symbolic name.
14.11 initial long

'initial long' is available as another key word. 'initial long' declares a variable that is then
stored in the variable range from H0 to H127 during compiling. This means the variable
is stored in the variable range that is not lost when there is a power failure.
Example:
initial long start position, end position;
INFORMATION
The legibility of the program text is significantly enhanced if all constants are written
in capitals (e.g. SECOND, MAXIMUM, etc.) and variables are written in upper/lower
case (e.g. SpeedSetpoint, PositionCW, etc.).

#pragma
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
14.12 #pragma
The #pragma directive can be used to influence the variable range occupied by the key
words 'long' and 'initial long'.
Syntax: #pragma Directive Parameter1 Parameter2 ...
The Compiler supports the following #pragma directives:

#pragma list Causes the source text lines to be included in the resulting IPOSplus®
program as comments.
#pragma var Hmin Hmax Instructs the Compiler to use IPOSplus® variables Hmin through Hmax
as auxiliary variables for calculating expressions. Hmax must be
greater than Hmin. An error message is output if the programmer uses
the same variables in the program. Experience shows that the Com-
piler needs about 10 auxiliary variables.
The Compiler uses variables H400 through H419 if this directive is not
specified explicitly.
#pragma globals Hmin Hmax Instructs the Compiler to assign a variable number from the variable
range Hmin to Hmax to the variables declared with the long key word.
The user is responsible for avoiding overlaps when linking variable
names with symbols using #define.
The Compiler uses variables H420 through H449 if this directive is not
specified explicitly.
#pragma initials Hmin Hmax Instructs the Compiler to assign the numbers Hmin through Hmax to
the global variables declared with the initial key word. Initial variables
are variables H0 to H127 which are stored when the power is switched
off. Exception: H0 to H15 for MDS, MDV, MCS, MCV with cam disk.
The Compiler uses variables H0 to H127 if this directive is not explicitly
specified.
INFORMATION
Since the variable range H360 to H450 for the technology options "Synchronous" op-
eration and "Cam Disk" is assigned other system variables, we recommend that you
always assign the auxiliary and global variables with the #pragma directive in a differ-
ent range.
Example:
#pragma var 350 365
#pragma globals 130 160
#pragma initials 10 30
long pos speed cw, pos speed ccw;

initial long start position, end position;
These lines cause the Compiler to use the IPOSplus® variables from H350 onwards as
auxiliary variables. The variables PosSpeedCW and PosSpeedCCW that are declared
with the 'long' key word are now stored in the IPOSplus® variables between H130 and
H160 because of the #pragma globals 130 160 command line. The variables StartPosi-
tion and EndPosition that are declared with the 'initial long' key word are now stored in
the IPOSplus® variables between H10 and H30 because of the #pragma initials 10 30
command line. Since they are therefore also in the variable range from H0 to H127,
these variables can also be stored in the non-volatile memory.
INFORMATION
The variable numbers are used without the preceding letter H when they are used
within the #pragma directives.

14 f
Explanation of const.h and io.h / constb.h and iob.h
i
Hz
P Hz
14.13 Explanation of const.h and io.h / constb.h and iob.h

The const.h header file defines many useful identifiers. As far as beginners are con-
cerned, only the symbolic names of the system variables are of importance initially. The
other identifiers are important for expert users who no longer use the insert tool. This
section contains the definitions of arguments for calling the standard functions.
Both the header file io.h and the file const.h are predefined files that cannot be changed.
The file is printed out below:
/*=============================================
File name: Io.h
File version: 2.01
Definition of bitmasks for digital in- and outputs
Please do not modify this file!
(C) 1999 SEW-EURODRIVE

==============================================*/
#ifndef _IO_H
#define _IO_H
#define DI00 (H483 & 0b1)

#define DI01 (H483 & 0b10)
#define DI02 (H483 & 0b100)
#define DI03 (H483 & 0b1000)
#define DI04 (H483 & 0b10000)
#define DI05 (H483 & 0b100000)
#define DI10 (H483 & 0b1000000)
#define DI11 (H483 & 0b10000000)
#define DI12 (H483 & 0b100000000)
#define DI13 (H483 & 0b1000000000)
#define DI14 (H483 & 0b10000000000)
#define DI15 (H483 & 0b100000000000)
#define DI16 (H483 & 0b1000000000000)
#define DI17 (H483 & 0b10000000000000)
#define DB00 (H482 & 0b1)

#define DO01 (H482 & 0b10)
#define DO02 (H482 & 0b100)
#define DO10 (H482 & 0b1000)
#define DO11 (H482 & 0b10000)
#define DO12 (H482 & 0b100000)
#define DO13 (H482 & 0b1000000)
#define DO14 (H482 & 0b10000000)
#define DO15 (H482 & 0b100000000)
#define DO16 (H482 & 0b1000000000)
#define DO17 (H482 & 0b10000000000)
#endif

Explanation of const.h and io.h / constb.h and iob.h
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
The io.h header file defines macros that make it easier to query terminal levels. The fol-
lowing example illustrates this point.
if( DI00 )
{
H1 = 1; // execute command block, if terminal DI00 has NOT level 0
}
else
{
H1 = 0; // execute command block, if terminal DI00 has level 0
}
The if statement queries terminal DI00, the /CONTROLLER INHIBIT terminal. If the ar-
gument of the if statement is zero, then the statements in the else part are processed
(assuming there is an else part). In this case, IPOSplus® variable H1 is set to zero or one
depending on the input level of terminal DI00. Note that it is impossible to query when
the terminal is set to 1 (DI00 == 1) because the macro supplies a binary evaluation. In
practical terms, it is possible to query for zero (DI00 == 0) or not equal to zero (DI00 != 0).
This program extract can be made clearer using the commands which have already
been explained. This is done by introducing additional symbolic identifiers.
#define controller_inhibit H1
#define HI 1
#define LO 0
if( DI00 )
{
controller_inhibit = 1; // execute command block, if terminal DI00 has NOT
//level 0
}
else
{
controller_inhibit = 0; // execute command block, if terminal DI00 has
//level 0
}
The following appears in the variable window:
499400587
INFORMATION
Note that the io.h header file must be linked using the #include io.h command line be-
fore it can be used.

14 f
Identifiers
i
Hz
P Hz
14.14 Identifiers
Although we have already used identifiers several times, this section provides additional
information about them. An identifier is understood to be the name that can be adopted
by a Macro identifier (Define section), a symbolic variable name or a function name.
Only letters, numbers and an underscore can be used in an identifier, and the identifier
must start with a letter or an underscore.
An identifier can be up to 32 characters in length.
The following identifiers are valid: The following names are not identifiers:
TerminalX13_4 TerminalX13.4
Setpoint1 Setpoint 1
_Control_word 1st setpoint
1_Input
My function
ThisIdentifierNameIsMuchTooLong
INFORMATION
The IPOSplus® Compiler is case-sensitive.
14.15 Constants
The IPOSplus® Compiler supports various types of constants which are differentiated in
the source text by their specific notation. Representation in different formats can im-
prove the legibility of the source text depending on how they are used.
The formats decimal, hexadecimal or binary are possible forms of representation.
Hexadecimal constants start with the '0x' string, binary constants with the '0b' string.
Here are a few examples:
Decimal constants Hexadecimal constants Binary constants
123 0x23 =35 dec 0b000100 = 4 dec
-50 0xabc = 2748 dec 0b10 = 2 dec
030 0xFFFFFFFF = -1 dec 0b11111111 = 255 dec

f 14
IPOSplus® variables in the Compiler i
Hz
P Hz
14.16 IPOSplus® variables in the Compiler

The IPOSplus® variables are practically an element of the language and are not allowed
to be declared explicitly. They all have the same data type (32 bit with sign) and are valid
globally throughout the entire source text. The following line is present implicitly in each
module:
long H0, H1, H2, H3, ... , H1023.
To identify variables symbolically, the #define or #declare directives can be used to de-
fine a symbolic name.
14.16.1 Example
#define TESTVAR1 H73 //H73 has the symbolic name "TESTVAR1"
H73 is then assigned the value 134 in the program from one of 3 assignments:
TESTVAR1 = 134;
TESTVAR1 = 0x86;
TESTVAR1 = 0b10000110;
14.17 Declaration of global variables

Another option is to declare global variables with the long key word as already explained
above. The Compiler then automatically defines the numbers of the variables (see
#pragma). The variable numbers are assigned in ascending order according to where
the variable declarations occur in the source text. A declaration starts with the key word
long, followed by the list of symbolic identifiers separated by commas. The declaration
ends with a semicolon. The declaration can be spread over several source text lines.
A global variable can be declared anywhere in the program, provided it is outside of
blocks (generally functions). For reasons of clarity, variables should be declared at the
start of the source text module. A global variable must also be declared before it is used.
Examples:
long a, b; // Variables are available in the range

long this_is_a_variable;// defined for global variables
long c, d;
The Compiler assigns variables H420 to H424 to the identifiers a, b, this_is_a_variable,

c and d. In the following example, the '#pragma globals' directive instructs the Compiler
to assign variables H150 to H160 to the identifiers.

long a, b;
long this_is_a_variable;
long c, d;

14 f
Indirect addressing – pointer
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
Multiple declarations of global variables are not allowed:
long a, b, c;
long d, a;
It is a good idea to use the option of defining global variables when the number of the
variable is not important for the application. This is usually the case because the vari-
ables are accessed continually by symbols. Furthermore, global variable declaration un-
derlines the modularity and makes it easier to reuse modules. Standard or user-defined
structures can be used as a recourse if variable groups are required, e.g. for system
functions.
For a description of the system variables H473 to H511, refer to the section "Overview
of the System Variables". A list of system variables and their symbolic identifiers is given
in the appendix.
14.18 Indirect addressing – pointer

The designations *H0 to *H511 are also allowed as variable names in order to make use
of the possibility of accessing variables indirectly (SET [H] = H) from IPOSplus®. These
names can be used on both the right and left sides of assignments or in expressions,
such as H0 to H511. In this case, however, the Compiler inserts the indirect commands.
Example for using indirect variables:
H2 = 5;
H3 = 6;
H5 = 7;
H6 = 3;
H1 = *H2 + *H3;
Variable H1 is assigned the value 10 because the value 7 is accessed indirectly via *H2
(see H5) and the value 3 is accessed indirectly via *H3 (see H6).

numof()
f 14
i
Hz
P Hz
14.19 numof()
The key word numof() returns the number of a variable. The identifier of a direct or sym-
bolic variable is given as the argument. The argument is not allowed to be a composite
expression.

#declare setpoint2 setpoint:1
H1 = numof(H7);
H2 = numof (setpoint);
H3 = numof (setpoint2);
These program lines supply the IPOSplus® variables with the following values:
H1 = 7
H2 = 200
H3 = 201
INFORMATION
The following program lines are not permitted:
#define Setpoint H10+H30

#define Var1 H200
H1 = numof(*H1);
H1 = numof(H1 + H4);
H1 = numof(H3 + 6);
H1 = numof(Setpoint);
H1 = numof(Var1:1);

kVA n Compiler – Operators
15 f
Order of priority of operators
i
Hz
P Hz
15 Compiler – Operators
Operators are used to link identifiers to one another and to statements in order to per-
form certain operations. The IPOSplus® Compiler provides operators for performing ar-
ithmetical operations, bit operations, assignment operations or comparison operations.
Operators are divided into various categories and have a specified order of priority. The
order of priority determines the order in which the operators are executed within a state-
ment. The following table lists all the operators supported by the IPOSplus® Compiler by
order of priority.
15.1 Order of priority of operators

Category Operator Description
1. () Brackets
2. Unary ! Logical negation
~ (NOT) bit-by-bit complement
+ Unary plus
- Unary minus
++ Pre or post-incrementing
-- Pre or post-decrementing
3. Multiplicative * Multiplication
/ Integer division
% Modulo remainder
4. Additive + Binary plus
- Binary minus
5. Shift << Shift left
>> Shift right
6. Relational < Less than
<= Less than or equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
7. Equality == Equal to
!= Not equal to
8. & Bit-by-bit AND
9. ^ Bit-by-bit XOR
10. ¦ Bit-by-bit OR
11. && Logical AND
12. ¦¦ Logical OR
13. Conditional ?: Ternary operators, see section "Ternary Operators"
14. Assignment = Simple assignment
*= Assign product
/= Assign quotient
%= Assign remainder
+= Assign sum
-= Assign difference
&= Assign bit-by-bit AND
^= Assign bit-by-bit XOR
¦= Assign bit-by-bit OR
<<= Assign shift left
>>= Assign shift right
15. Comma , Evaluate

Compiler – Operators kVA n
Unary operators
f 15
i
Hz
P Hz
Category 1 has the highest priority, category 2 (unary operators) has the second highest
priority, etc. The comma operator has the lowest priority.
Operators in the same category have the same ranking.
The unary operators (category 2), conditional operators (category 13) and assignment
operators (category 14) assign from right to left; all others assign from left to right.
The operator for multiplication (*) is ranked before the operator for addition (+), so mul-
tiplication is performed before addition in the following statement:
H1 = 3 * 7 + 2 * 4;
H1 is assigned the value 29.

Brackets have to be used if the addition is to be performed before the multiplication:
H1 = 3 * ( 7 + 2 ) * 4;
H1 is assigned the value 108 (from 3 * 9 * 4).
INFORMATION
The sequence can be forced by brackets to ensure the sequence of operations is as
you require it. Nested brackets are permitted. Superfluous brackets have no effect on
the program function.
15.2 Unary operators

Unary operators are operators positioned before or after an operand and only influence
this operand.
H1 = -H2; // The unary minus operator (-) forms the value of H2 with a changed sign
H1 = ~H2; // The unary complement operator (~) forms the bit-by-bit complement of H2
++H3 //, the pre-increment operator (++) increases the value of H3 by one

kVA n Compiler – Operators
15 f
Binary operators
i
Hz
P Hz
15.3 Binary operators

These operators link two operands together and are located between two operands.
15.3.1 Example
H1 = H2; // The binary assignment operator (=) assigns variable H1 the value of H2
H1 = H2 - 3; // The binary minus operator (-) forms the difference between H2 and 3
Combined assignment operators lead to an abbreviated notation. Although they make it

more difficult to read a program, they are mentioned for the sake of completeness. The
operation is performed in the example with H1 = 2 (0b10) and H2 =3 (0b11).
Operator Operation Example Corresponds to Example H1
=
= Simple assignment H1 = H2; H1 = H2; 3
*= Assign product H1 *= H2; H1 = H1 * H2; 6
/= Assign quotient H1 /= H2; H1 = H1/H2; 0
%= Assign remainder H1%= H2: H1 = H1% H2; 2
+= Assign sum H1 += H2; H1 = H1 + H2; 5
-= Assign difference H1 -= H2; H1 = H1 - H2; -1
&= Assign bit-by-bit AND H1 &= H2; H1 = H1 & H2; 0b10
^= Assign bit-by-bit XOR H1 ^= H2; H1 = H1 ^ H2; 0b01
¦= Assign bit-by-bit OR H1 ¦= H2; H1 = H1 ¦ H2; 0b11
<<= Assign shift left H1 <<= H2; H1 = H1 << H2; 0b1000
>>= Assign arithmetical shift right H1 >>= H2; H1 = H1 >> H2; 0b0
15.4 Ternary operators

The IPOSplus® Compiler only recognizes one operator that links together three oper-
ands: The conditional operator. Its form is as follows:
a ? b : c means: If a then b, otherwise c
where a is a logical expression and b and c are expressions.
15.4.1 Example
H1 = H2 == 3 ? H3 : H4; // If H2 equals 3, H1 is assigned the value of
H3,
// otherwise it is assigned the value H4
The example is the abbreviated notation of:

if (H2 == 3)
H1 = H3;
else
H1 = H4;
Where possible, the ternary operator should not be used due to the illegibility of the
source code.

Compiler – Constructions kVA n
if...else
f 16
i
Hz
P Hz
16 Compiler – Constructions
The IPOSplus® Compiler provides constructions that are also available in other high-
level languages.
The following constructions are available:
• if...else
• for
• while
• do...while
• switch...case...default
These are supplemented by statements such as 'continue' and 'break', which are used
as control elements within these constructions.
16.1 if...else
16.1.1 Syntax
if ( expression )// Instructionelse// Instruction
The key words if and else control the program flow depending on whether the expres-
sion following the key word if returns the value TRUE (not equal to zero) or FALSE
(equal to zero). The else branch is optional. It is performed if the expression returns the
value FALSE. In a special case, a statement can also be a block in which several state-
ments can be specified. In this case, the statement block must be enclosed by curly
brackets ( {statement block} ).
Without else branch With else branch With block as if branch With block as else branch
if ( H1 == 3 ) if ( H1 == 3 ) if ( H1 > 3 ) if ( H1 > 3 )
H2 = 10; H2 = 10; { H2 = 9;
else H2 = 10; else
H2 = 8; H3 = 11; {
} H2 = 10;
H3 = 11;
}
The expression may also be composed of several conditions which are logically inter-
linked. Consequently, logical AND ( && ) and logical OR ( ¦¦ ) are available as logic op-
erations.
INFORMATION
Potential problem: A ; (semicolon) at the end of an if statement always makes the con-
dition true.
Example
if ( ( H1 >= 3 ) && ( H1 <= 12 ) )
H2 = 10;
Variable H2 is set to the value 10 if H1 is greater than or equal to 3 and is also less than
or equal to 12. In other words: H2 is set to the value 10 if the value of H1 is between 3
and 12.
The internal brackets are not necessary, but they increase the legibility of the program.

kVA n Compiler – Constructions
16 f
for
i
Hz
P Hz
Example
if ( H1 < 2 ¦¦ H1 > 14 )
H2 = 10;
Variable H2 is set to the value 10 if H1 is less than 2 or greater than 14. In other words:
H2 is set to the value 10 if the value of H1 is not between 2 and 14.
16.2 for
16.2.1 Syntax
for ( Expression1 ; Expression2 ; Expression3 )
// Statement
The for statement can be used to construct program loops that should be exited after a
specified number of repetitions. The meanings of the three expressions are as follows:
Expression1 is executed once at the start of the for loop. This is where the run variables
are initialized. Expression2 determines when the loop is broken off. The loop is broken
off if the expression returns the logical value FALSE (or equal to zero). Expression3 is
processed after the statement has been executed. As a rule, it is used for altering the
run variables. The statement forms the body of the loop which may consist of one state-
ment or a statement block.
Example
H1 = 20;
for ( H0 = 0; H0 < 10; ++H0 )
H1 = H1 + 2;
H0 is set to zero at the start. Then a check is performed to see whether H0 has reached
the value 10. If this is not the case, then the statement is processed. In this example,
therefore, H1 is increased by 2. The run variable H0 is then increased by one. Next, the
check whether H0 has reached the value 10 is repeated, etc.
At the end of the loop, the value of H0 is 10 and that of H1 is 40 because the loop is
performed 10 times (loop counter H0 runs from 0 to 9 and then is canceled).
Example of a
statement block
H1 = 20;
H2 = 0;
for ( H0 = 0; H0 < 10; ++H0 )
{
H1 = H1 + 2;
++H2;
}
Whereas variable H1 is increased by 2 each time the loop runs through, variable H2 is
only increased by 1 (++H2 means pre-increment).
If a continue statement is processed within the statement block, this means the program
jumps to the end of the statement block and then processes expression3, which triggers
a check to determine whether the condition in the for statement is performed for a new
loop cycle.

while
f 16
i
Hz
P Hz
Example
H1 = 20;
H2 = 0;
for ( H0 = 0; H0 < 10; ++H0 )
{
H1 = H1 + 2;
if ( H1 > 32 )
continue;
++H2;
}
The if query with the continue statement means variable H2 is no longer incremented as
soon as H1 is greater than 32. This means when the loop is finished, the value of vari-
able H1 is 40 and that of H2 is 6.
If a break statement is processed in the statement block, this means the program exits
the for loop at that point. The loop is no longer continued.
Example
H1 = 20;
H2 = 0;
for ( H0 = 0; H0 < 10; ++H0 )
{
H1 = H1 + 2;
if ( H1 > 32 )
break;
++H2;
}
The if query with the break statement means that the loop is exited as soon as H1 is
greater than 32. This means that when the loop is exited, the value of variable H1 is 34
and that of H2 is 6.
16.3 while
16.3.1 Syntax
: while ( expression )
// Statement
The while statement is a conditional loop which performs the statement for as long as
the value of the expression is TRUE (not equal to zero). The statement is never per-
formed if the expression never has the value TRUE. The expression is always pro-
cessed before the statement.
The statement can also be a statement block in which several statements can be spec-
ified.
The expression can also be made up of several logically interlinked conditions.
Example
H2 = 0;
H1 = 10;
while ( H1 > 5 )
{
H2 = H2 + 1;
--H1;
}

16 f
do...while
i
Hz
P Hz
The statements within the block are carried out as long as H1 is greater than 5. H2 gets
the value 5 when the loop breaks off.
As in the for loop, it is also possible to use the break and continue statements here. The
break statement once again causes the while loop to be exited. The continue statement
results in a jump to the end of the statement block followed by repeating the check of
the expression to see whether the loop will be processed again.
Example
H1 = 0;
while ( H1 < 20 )
{
++H1;
if ( H1 > 10 )
continue;
H2 = H2 + 2;
}
As long as H1 is less than or equal to 10, H2 is increased by 2. If the value of H1 is

greater than 10, processing jumps to the end of the while loop at which point the condi-
tion for running through the loop again is tested. H2 is not changed any further during
addition loop cycles. If the value of H1 is 20, the loop is exited.
Example
H1 = 0;
while(1)
{
++H1;
if ( H1 == 20 )
break;
if ( H1 > 10 )
continue;
H2 = H2 + 2;
}
This example has the same effect as the one shown previously. The "endless" loop is
left using the break statement if H1 equals 20.
This is an endless loop, which can be created using the following construction:
while(1)
// Statement
This is because expression 1 always returns the value TRUE.

Task1 typically runs in an endless loop of this kind.
16.4 do...while
16.4.1 Syntax
do
// Loop statement
while ( Expression );
The do statement is a conditional loop in which the break condition is checked at the end
of the loop. As a result, this loop with the do statement always performs at least one it-
eration (at least one run-through).

do...while
f 16
i
Hz
P Hz
First, the statement is performed. As a statement block, it may also contain several
statements. This is followed by the test of whether the expression has the value TRUE
(not equal to zero) or FALSE (equal to zero). If the value is TRUE, the statement is per-
formed again, otherwise the loop is exited.
The expression can also be made up of several logically interlinked conditions.
In contrast to the while loop, the statement is always performed at least once in the do
while loop.
INFORMATION
Potential problem: The while (...); line always ends with a semicolon.
Example
H2 = 0;
H1 = 10;
do
{
H2 = H2 +1;
H1 = H1 -1;
} while ( H1 > 5 );
The statements within the block are carried out as long as H1 is greater than 5. H2 gets
the value 4 when the loop breaks off.
If the expression always remains TRUE, the result is an endless loop:
do
H2 = H2 +3;
while ( 1 );
In this case, the expression has the value 1, which means that the loop is never broken.
This loop can be broken off using the break statement.
H2 = 0;
do
{
H2 = H2 +3;
if ( H2 > 20 )
break;
} while ( 1 );
In this example, the do loop is broken off using the break statement if the value of the
IPOSplus® variable H2 is greater than 20.

16 f
switch...case...default
i
Hz
P Hz
A continue statement is also possible. It causes the program to skip to the end of the
statement block and then to check the expression.
H2 = 0;
do
{
H2 = H2 +3;
if ( H2 > 20 )
break;
if ( H2 > 10 )
continue;
++H0;
} while ( 1 );
In this example, the incrementation of the IPOSplus® variable H0 stops as soon as the
value of the IPOSplus® variable H2 is greater than 10.
16.5 switch...case...default
16.5.1 Syntax
switch ( Expression )
{
case Wert 1:// statement 1
break;
case Wert 2:// statement 2
break;
.
.
default:// Statement n
}
The switch statement makes it possible to create multiple program branches depending
on the value of an expression.
If Expression has the value 1, Statement 1 is performed, if Expression has the value 2,
Statement 2 is performed, etc. If none of the values following 'case' corresponds with
'Expression,' the default statement – if programmed – is executed (Statement n).
INFORMATION
Statements 1, 2,..., n are normally sequences of statements which end with a break
statement. If the sequence of statements does not end with a break statement, all sub-
sequent case branches are performed until a break statement is encountered. The
value is then no longer compared with the expression.
Statements 1, 2,..., n can also be function calls. For example, a jump distributor can be
set up.
Value 1, Value 2, Value n must be constants or constant expressions. No variables are
permitted here.

return
f 16
i
Hz
P Hz
The default branch must – if available – be the last line in a switch statement.
switch ( H1 )
{
case 1: ++H2;
break;
case 2: ++H3;
break;
default: ++H4;
break;
}
This program extract increments IPOSplus® variable H2 if the value of IPOSplus® vari-
able H1 is 1. If its value is 2, then the IPOSplus® variable H3 is incremented. IPOSplus®
variable H1 is incremented given any other value of IPOSplus® variable H4.
The following variant is also possible:
switch ( H1 )
{
case 1:
case 2: ++H3;
break;
default: ++H4;
break;
}
This program extract increments IPOSplus® variable H3 if the value of IPOSplus® vari-
able H1 is 1 or 2. IPOSplus® variable H1 is incremented given any other value of
IPOSplus® variable H4.
16.6 return
The key word return ends the processing of a function and returns to the command
following the function call. The return statement makes it possible to end functions
prematurely, for example, to increase the clarity of a C program. However, using this
statement too often can have the opposite effect. The following applies: a function
should contain as few exit points as possible.
The following example shows two coding possibilities for achieving the same result. The
example on the left uses the return statement to exit the function prematurely,
whereas the example on the right does not use return.
Function () Function ()
{ {
// Leave function when H1 is 5 // Skip statement when H1 = 5
if ( H1 == 5 ) if (H1 != 5)
return; {
H2=3; H2=3;
} }
}

kVA n Compiler – Functions
17 f
User-defined functions
i
Hz
P Hz
17 Compiler – Functions
17.1 User-defined functions
The user can program functions (subprograms). Used-defined functions cannot be
called when function arguments are transferred. However, this is also unnecessary be-
cause all variables are global and cannot be encapsulated with local variables. The
structure of a function is as follows:
FunctionName()
{
// Statements
}
The function prototypes in the program header do not have to be defined, in contrast to
ANSI-C.
Once the function has been performed, the line following the function call is processed.
A function can be exited prematurely using the return statement. In this case, program
processing is continued with the line following the function call.
Using the return statement can increase the clarity of a program structure. However,
using this statement too often can have the opposite effect. The following applies: a
function should contain as few exit points as possible.
SampleFunction()
{
// Leave function when H1 is 5
if ( H1 == 5 )
return;
H2=3;
}
INFORMATION
A user-defined function cannot be called from several tasks.

Compiler – Functions kVA n
Overview of commands for standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
17.2 Overview of commands for standard functions

A large part of the IPOSplus® machine commands that are familiar from the IPOSplus®
Assembler language are reproduced in the IPOSplus® Compiler's high-level language in
the form of certain syntactical constructions. For example, arithmetic commands (ADD,
SUB, etc.) are created by appropriate operators (+, -, etc.) or set commands (SET...) are
replaced by the assignment operator (=). However, there are also commands with no
equivalent in the programming language. These commands (GOA, BSET, etc.) are re-
produced using functions that form part of the Compiler and are therefore described as
standard functions, in contrast to user-defined functions.
The parameters of the IPOSplus® machine commands become function arguments of
the standard functions. The names of all standard functions start with an underscore (_)
so it is easier to distinguish them from user functions in the source text.
The constants specified as an argument in many functions are defined in the header file
CONSTB.H (MOVIDRIVE® B). If you want to use your own names instead, you can de-
fine them using the #define directive.
The following tables list the standard functions and the unit-specific availability.
17.2.1 Standard bit functions

Command Function Availability Reference
MOVIDRIVE® B MOVITRAC® B MQx

_BitClear Deletes a bit within a variable X X X (page 209)
_BitMove Copies a bit in one variable to a bit X X X (page 209)
in another variable.
_BitMoveNeg Copies a bit in one variable to a bit X X X (page 209)
in another variable and negates it.
_BitSet Sets a bit within a variable X X X (page 210)

17 f
i
Hz
P Hz
17.2.2 Standard communication functions

_MoviLink Process and/or parameter data observe the unit-specific command structure (page 222)
exchange via RS-485 or system
bus.
_MovCommDef Process data transfer via RS-485 - - X (page 227)
(Especially with MQx MOVIMOT®).
_MovCommOn Start of process data transfer via - - X (page 229)
RS-485.
_SBusCommDef Definition of process data exchange X X - (page 230)
via system bus.
_SBusCommOn Start of process data transfer via X X - (page 234)
system bus.
_SBusCommState Start of process data transfer via X (X) - (page 234)
system bus.
17.2.3 Standard positioning functions

_Go0 Performs reference travel X - - (page 217)
_GoAbs Absolute positioning X - - (page 218)
_GoRel Relative positioning X - - (page 219)
17.2.4 Standard program functions

_InputCall Calls a defined function when spe- X X X (page 220)
cific selected bits are set or deleted
at the input terminals.
_Nop No operation X X X (page 229)
_SystemCall Calls a defined function when the X X - (page 241)
system even occurs.
_SetTask Defines a function as task 2 or task X only for task 2 - (page 238)
3 and starts or stops it.
_SetTask2 Defines a function as task 2 and X X X (page 239)
starts or stops it.
_Wait Waits for a specified period X X X (page 243)
_WaitInput Waits until a certain level is present X X X (page 243)
at certain input terminals.
_WaitSystem Waits until a system event occurs. X X - (page 244)

f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
17.2.5 Standard setting functions

_Copy Block-by-block, consistent copying X X X (page 210)
of variables.
_GetSys Reads an internal system value. observe the unit-specific command structure (page 211)
_SetInterrupt Defines a function as interrupt rou- X X X (page 235)
tine and activates or deactivates it.
_SetVarInterrupt Defines a function as variable rou- X - - (page 240)
tine and activates or deactivates it
(only MOVIDRIVE® B).
_SetSys Sets an internal system value. observe the unit-specific command structure (page 236)
17.2.6 Special standard unit functions

_AxisStop The drive is stopped. X - - (page 208)
_FaultReaction Sets the fault response to a selected X X - (page 210)
fault.
_Memorize Saves or loads variables or X X X (page 221)
IPOSplus® program.
_TouchProbe Enables or locks a touch probe X - X (page 242)
input.
_WdOn Sets the Watchdog timer to a spe- X X X (page 245)
cific value.
_WdOff Turns the Watchdog off. X X X (page 244)

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
17.3 Standard functions

This chapter lists the standard functions in alphabetical order. This makes it easier to
find the standard function you are looking for.
17.3.1 _AxisStop
Syntax _AxisStop( typ )
Description The drive axis is stopped when the IPOSplus® control word is written. A restart must be
carried out by the enable function via the IPOSplus® control word. The argument can be
used to specify the type of axis stop, or the deactivation of the lock can be specified via
the IPOSplus® control word.
Argument type
AS_RSTOP Braking with the P136 rapid stop ramp, followed by the status "No enable". The last target
position (H492) to have been transmitted is retained. Inhibit via control word (command
ASTOP (IPOS ENABLE) is required before the subsequent travel command). The brake is
applied if the brake function is activated. The message "In position" is set.
AS_HCTRL Braking with the ramp of the basic unit P131/P133 followed by position control. The last tar-
get position to have been transmitted is retained. Inhibit via control word (the ASTOP (IPOS
ENABLE) command is required before the subsequent travel command). The brake is not
applied if the brake function is activated.
AS_PSTOP Positioning stop with positioning ramp P911/P912 and calculated "STOP" target position
(only possible in the positioning mode), followed by position control. The last target position
(H492) to have been transmitted is overwritten by the stop position. No inhibit via control
word (no ASTOP (IPOS ENABLE) command required before the subsequent travel com-
mand). The brake is not applied if the brake function is activated.
Note: Since the actual position is used as the setpoint position at standstill, the command
cannot be processed cyclically. This is the case in axes with process forces or hoists
because otherwise the axis drifts slowly out of position.
Note: "AS_PSTOP" is not completed in the event of a fault. The program stops.
AS_ENABLE The inhibit is revoked using the IPOSplus® control word.
INFORMATION
Since the actual position is used as the setpoint position at standstill, the argument
AS_PSTOP cannot be processed cyclically. This is the case in axes with process
forces or hoists because otherwise the axis drifts slowly out of position.
Example main()
{
_GoAbs( GO_NOWAIT,3000 ); // Start movement job
_AxisStop( AS_PSTOP ); // Cancel movement
// Statements during standstill
_AxisStop( AS_ENABLE ); // Revoke inhibit
_GoAbs( GO_NOWAIT,3000 ); // Send new movement job
}

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
17.3.2 _BitClear
Syntax _BitClear( H, bit )
Description _BitClear sets the bit within variable H to zero.
Key points H Variable name

bit Constant expression for bit position
Example main()
{
_BitClear( H100, 3 ); // deletes bit 3 in H100
}
17.3.3 _BitMove
Syntax _BitMove( H2 , bit2, H1, bit1 )
Description Copies the bit with the number bit1 in IPOSplus® variable H1 to the bit with the number
bit2 in IPOSplus® variable h2. All bits of H1 and all other bits of H2 remain unchanged.
The bit positions of a variable are numbered 0 to 31. The least significant bit has the
number 0.
Key points h2 Name of the target variable

bit2 Number of the target bit
h1 Name of the source variable
bit1 Number of the source bit
Example main()
{
_BitMove( H1, 3,H2, 4 ); // copies H1.3 = H2.4
_BitMove( H1, 1,H1, 0 ); // copies H1.1 = H1.0
}
17.3.4 _BitMoveNeg
Syntax _BitMoveNeg( H2 , bit2, H1, bit1 )
Description Copies the bit with the number bit1 in IPOSplus® variable H1 to the bit with the number
bit2 in IPOSplus® variable H2. The bit is negated during this process. All bits of H1 and
all other bits of H2 remain unchanged. The bit positions of a variable are numbered 0 to
31. The least significant bit has the number 0.
Key points h2 Name of the target variable

bit2 Number of the target bit
h1 Name of the source variable
bit1 Number of the source bit

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Example main()
{
_BitMoveNeg( H1, 3,H2, 4 ); // copies H1.3 = NOT (H2.4)
_BitMoveNeg( H1, 1,H1, 0 ); // copies H1.1 = NOT (H1.0)
}
17.3.5 _BitSet
Syntax _BitSet( H, bit )
Description Within the IPOSplus® variable h, _BitSet sets the bit with the number bit to one.
Key points H Variable name

bit Constant expression with the number of the bit to be set
Example main()
{
_BitSet( H100, 3 ); // sets bit 3 in H100
}
17.3.6 _Copy
Syntax _Copy( H2 , H1, no.)
Description Copies the number (no.) of consecutive variables as a variable block. H1 specifies the
name of the first source variable, H2 the name of the first target variable. A maximum of
10 variables can be copied.
Key points H2 Name of the first target variable

H1 Name of the first source variable
no Constant expression for the number of IPOSplus® variables to copy
Example main()
{
_Copy( H1,H5, 3 ); // copy H1 = H5, H2 = H6, H3 = H7
}
17.3.7 _FaultReaction
Syntax _FaultReaction( fnr, r )
Description This command can be used to program the system response to a unit fault. As such, the
command must be carried out before the fault occurs. The argument specifies the fault
and the corresponding response if this fault occurs.
All fault responses in the fault list in the operating instructions or the system manual that
have a dot in column P can be programmed as fault responses.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Key points fnr Constant expression for the number of the fault (see list of faults in the operating
instructions)
r Constant expression for a fault response that can adopt the following values:
FR_NORESP: No response; error is not displayed.
FR_DISPLAY: Error is only displayed; unit continues to run.
FR_SWOFF_F: Output stage inhibit and unit inhibit. Reset required.
FR_ESTOP_F: Stop via emergency stop ramp with unit inhibit. Reset required.
FR_RSTOP_F: Stop via rapid stop ramp with unit inhibit. Reset required.
FR_SWOFF_W: Output stage inhibit without unit inhibit. Reset re-enables the unit.
FR_ESTOP_W: Stop via emergency stop ramp without unit inhibit. Reset re-enables the unit.
FR_RSTOP_W: Stop via rapid stop ramp without unit inhibit. Reset re-enables the unit.
FR_SWOFF_F / FR_ESTOP_F / FR_RSTOP_F: Unit is reinitialized, i.e. IPOSplus® is re-

started.
FR_SWOFF_W / FR_ESTOP_W / FR_STOP_W: Unit is not reinitialized, i.e IPOSplus®
continues to run.
Example main()
{
_FaultReaction( 26,FR_SWOFF_F ); // Emergency stop / Malfunction with
ext. fault
}
17.3.8 _GetSys
Syntax _GetSys( H, sys )
Description Loads the value of an internal system value in one or more IPOSplus® variables.
Key points H Name of the target variable or target structure

sys Expression that designates the system value. sys can adopt one of the following
values:
GS_ACTCUR: Active current in 0.1% rated unit current
GS_ACTSPEED: actual speed in 0.1 rpm
GS_SPSPEED: Setpoint speed in 0.1 rpm
GS_ERROR: Error code according to the "Error messages and list of errors" table in the system manual
GS_SYSSTATE: Value of the 7-segment display in accordance with the table "Operating mode display" in
the system manual
GS_ACTPOS: Actual position depending on the encoder selected in P941 H509, H510 or H511
GS_SPPOS: Setpoint position H491
GS_TPOS: Target position of the profile generator
GS_INPUTS: Binary inputs H483 (MOVIDRIVE® A) / H520 (MOVIDRIVE® B) of the basic unit and options
GS_SYSSTATE: Identical to status word 1 of the fieldbus unit profile (fault code and operating status)
GS_OUTPUTS: Binary outputs H482 basic unit and options
GS_IxT: Unit utilization in 0.1% rated unit current
GS_ACTPOS / GS_SPPOS / GS_TPOS: Resolution depends on the encoder selected in P941:
– Motor encoder: 4096 Inc./revolution
– External encoder X14: Encoder resolution × P944
– DIP (SSI encoder): Encoder resolution × P955

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
GS_ANINPUTS: Voltage value / current value of the analog inputs 1 and 2

Voltage input: -10 V ... 0 ... +10 V = -10000 ... 0 ... 10000
Current input: 0 ... 20 mA = 0 ... 5000 / 4 ... 20 mA = 1000 ... 5000
– H + 0 = Analog input 1
Only for MOVITRAC® B:
GS_ANINPUTS:
– H + 1 = Potentiometer of FBG11B
GS_ANINPUTS3:
– H + 1 = Potentiometer of FBG11B
– H + 2 = Analog input 2 (FIO11B option)
The attribute GS_ANINPUTS3 of the command _GetSys generates an "Error 10 IPOS ILLOP"
in MOVIDRIVE® B.
GS_CAM: Used to implement a cam controller

– With the GETSYS command, a standard cam controller with 4 outputs can be used per drive. For
MOVIDRIVE® units, you can use an expanded cam controller with 8 outputs.
– Hxx is the first variable of a data structure (CamControl or GS_CAM). The bit with the highest
significance (bit 31) is used in Hxx to decide which cam controller the GETSYS command refers to.
– Bit 31 = 0: Standard cam controller. The GETSYS command activates the cam controller. The cams are
formed once when the GETSYS command is processed. If the cam controller is to work cyclically, the
command must be called up cyclically.
– Bit 31 = 1: Extended cam controller with technology option. The GETSYS command activates the cam
controller, the cams are formed cyclically in the background.
– For more information on the cam controllers and the data structure, refer to section "Cam controllers" in
chapter "Position Detection and Positioning".
GS_ANOUTPUTS: Analog outputs optional, with -10 V ... 0 ... +10 V = -10000 ... 0 ... 10000.
– h = Analog output 1
– h + 1 = Analog output 2
GS_TIMER0: Counter value of TIMER 0 H489 in ms
GS_TIMER1: Counter value of TIMER 1 H488 in ms
GS_PODATA: Reads the PO data buffer. Regardless of the number of PO data items, 2 PO data items or 10
PO data items are read (data sent from the master to the unit).
– H + 0: Bus type
0 = reserved
1 = S0 (RS485 #1)
2 = S1 (RS485 #2)
3 = Fieldbus
4 = reserved
5 = SBus
8 = SBus 2 (only MOVIDRIVE® B)
– H + 1 = Number of PO data items
– H + 2 = PO1
– H + 3 = PO2
– H + 4 = PO3
– H + 5 = PO4
– H + 6 = PO5
– H + 7 = PO6
– H + 8 = PO7
– H + 9 = PO8
– H + 10 = PO9
– H + 11 = PO10
GS_DCVOLT: DC link voltage [V]
GS_RELTORQUE: Relative torque. The value is available in the operating modes CFC... and SERVO... .
GS_RELTORQUEVFC: The relative torque is the display value based on the rated unit current for the torque
at the motor output shaft in 0.1% rated unit current. The absolute torque can be calculated from this value
using the following formula:
Mabs = Mrel × IN × MN / 1000 / IQN
Mabs = absolute torque
IN = Rated unit current
Mrel = relative torque based on 0,1% IN
MN = Rated torque of the motor [Nm]
IQN = Rated Q current [A] for selected connection type. The value is available in the operating modes CFC
and SERVO / VFC1, VFC1 & hoist, VFC1 & DC braking and VFC1 & flying start.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
GS_ACTSPEEDEXT: Actual speed of the external encoder (X14)

– H = Time base, average value filter for speed detection of external encoder.
Setting range: 5 ms ... 31 ms
– H + 1 = Encoder type
– 0 = Encoder X14,
– 1 = DIP encoder
– H + 2 = Numerator for the user scaling value range: -215 ... 0 ... +(215 - 1)
– H +3 = Denominator for the user scaling value range: 1 ... (215 - 1)
– H + 4 = DPointer, pointer to the result variable H", where H" = result; unit: [nX14] = (Inc/Time base)
Example: Enter the speed in arcs per hour. A structure GS_ACTSPEEDEXT gLAActSpeed; has been
defined for this process.
gLAActSpeed.TimeBase = 30; // Average value filter 30 ms
gLAActSpeed.EncType = 0; // Encoder is connected to X14
gLAActSpeed.Numerator = 11250; // Conversion into arcs per hour 11250 / 384
gLAActSpeed.Denominator = 384; // = (1000 ms x 60 s x 60 min) / (Inc. x Time
base)
gLAActSpeed.DPointer = numof(hArcsPerHour); // -11250 negated representation
_GetSys(gLAActSpeed,GS_ACTSPEEDEXT);
SPEEDMONITOR
Numerator value of the speed monitoring
The GETSYS command can be used as a prewarning for speed monitoring. Speed monitoring is triggered
when the current is at the current limit for the number of seconds specified in P501. For example, if P501 =
200 ms, the GETSYS command can be used to query the numerator value. The travel speed is reduced
after 50 ms. In this way, return travel can be made at rapid speed and, when under load, the speed can be
reduced automatically by the inverter.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
The following standard SEW structures are available for the _SetSys statement:
Instruction type Standard structure Elements Brief description
_GetSys GSAINPUT Input1 Voltage value of analog input 1
Input2 Voltage value of analog input 2
GSAOUTPUT Output1 Voltage value for optional analog output 1
Output2 Voltage value for optional analog output 2
GSCAM SourceVar Number of the variable on which the command is exe-
cuted
DbPreCtrl Delay time feedforward in 0.1 ms
DestVar Number of the variable which is to receive the result
BitPosition Bit position in the result variable
BitValue Polarity in the result variable
NumOfCam Number of cam blocks (max. 4)
PosL1 CCW limit value of cam block 1
PosR1 CW limit value of cam block 1
GSCAM_EXT CamControl Bit 31 must always be set.
0x8000 0000 = function inactive, no new cam outputs will
be generated, set outputs will be retained and deleted
after a reset or voltage off/on only.
0x8000 0001 = function active internally, but all cam out-
puts will be turned off
0x8000 0002 = function active if drive is referenced
(H473, Bit20 =1)
0x8000 0003 = function active even without referenced
drive
CamReserved1 Reserved
CamOutShiftLeft Shifts the internal data buffer of the outputs by n digits to
the left before writing to the target variable CamDestina-
tion.
Note: The shifting process will delete the information of
the upper outputs. This means that if the shift factor is 3,
the upper 3 outputs with 4 ms cycle time are no longer
available, and the 4 outputs with 1 ms cycle time are
assigned to bits 3-6 and the output with 4 ms cycle time is
assigned to bit 7.
CamForceOn Mask to set mandatory outputs; the mask affects the inter-
nal data buffer prior to shifting with CamOutShiftLeft (NOT
the target variable defined with CamDestination)
CamForceOff Mask to delete mandatory outputs; the mask affects the
internal data buffer prior to shifting with CamOutShiftLeft
(NOT the target variable defined with CamDestination)
CamForceOff dominates CamForceOn

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz

CamSource Bit 31 switches between preset reference variables and
an indicator to a random reference variable.
Bit 31 = 0:
• 0 = encoder X15 (motor encoder, H511)
• 1 = encoder X14 (external encoder, H510)
• 2 = encoder H509 (absolute encoder DIP11)
• 3 = virtual encoder
• all following values are reserved!
Bit 31 = 1:
CamSource includes a pointer to one IPOSplus® variable
+231
CamDestination Pointer to target variable.
The bits not used in the target variables are available for
other functions (if you shift the outputs by four to the left
with Shift Left, it frees up bits 0-3, bits 4-7 are available for
the cam functions and bits 8-31 are available for any
assignment.
If the cam outputs are assigned to unit outputs (e.g.
H481), you have to reserve these binary outputs with
P620 - P639 as IPOSplus® outputs. The bits not used in
this word are available for other outputs.
CamOutputs Number of outputs (max. 8)
CamData 1 Pointer to first CamOutput structure (first output)
...
CamData 8 Pointer to last CamOutput structure (eighth output)
CAM_EXT_OUT DeadTime Delay time compensation for this channel (-500
ms..0..+500 ms) to compensate the delay time of an actu-
ator connected to the inverter. The output is preset,
depending on the rate of change of the reference variable
value, in such a way that the output is switched in
advance by this time interval.
CamAreas Number of the position windows for this channel (1 ... 4);
the left limit value must always be smaller than the right
one. If a modulo axis requires a position window that
exceeds the 360° - 0° limit, then this range will have to be
divided into two position windows. This process lets the
operator set three related ranges for this output.
LeftLimit1 CCW limit, window 1
RightLimit1 CW limit, window 1
... ...
LeftLimit4 CCW limit, window 4
RightLimit4 CW limit, window 4
GSPODATA3 Bus types 0 = reserved
1 = S0 (RS485 #1)
2 = S1 (RS485 #2)
3 = Fieldbus
4 = reserved
5 = SBus
8 = SBus 2
Len Number of process output data items
PO1 Process output data 1

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz

GSACTSPEEDEXT TimeBase Cycle time for speed detection of external encoder, setting
range: 5 ms ... 31 ms
EncType 0 = encoder X14,1 = DIP encoder
Numerator Numerator for user scaling
Value range: -215 ... 0 ... +(215 -1)
Denominator Denominator for user scaling
Value range: 1 ... +(215 -1)
DPointer Pointer to result variable H"
GSPODATA10 Bus types 0 = reserved
1 = S0 (RS485 #1)
2 = S1 (RS485 #2)
3 = Fieldbus
4 = reserved
5 = SBus
8 = SBus 2
Len Number of process output data items
Unit-specific characteristics:
Element Unit-specific characteristics
MOVIDRIVE® B MOVITRAC® B
BusType (H+0) GS_BT_S0 (RS485 at XT) only
GS_BT_S1 (RS485 at X13) GS_BT_S1 (RS485 at FSC/FIO11B)
GS_BT_FBUS=3 (fieldbus option) GS_BT_SBUS1 (SBus at FSC/FIO21B)
GS_BT_SBUS1 (SBus at X12)
GS_BT_SBUS2 (via DFC11B)

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Example #include <const.h>
GSAINPUT Ain;
main()
{
_GetSys( Ain,GS_ANINPUTS ); // Read analog inputs into structure Ain
}
17.3.9 _Go0
Syntax _Go0( type )
Description This command triggers reference travel of the axis. The argument defines the type of
the reference travel. Reference travel is set with P903 and can only be changed there.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Key points type Expression for setting the travel type during reference travel. type can adopt one
of the following values:
GO0_C_W_ZP
GO0_U_W_ZP
GO0_C_NW_ZP
GO0_U_NW_ZP
GO0_C_W_CAM
GO0_U_W_CAM
GO0_C_NW_CAM
GO0_U_NW_CAM
GO0_RESET
The meaning of the individual letters is as follows:

C (Conditional) = Reference travel only if reference travel has not yet been performed
U (Unconditional) = Always referenced, regardless of whether the axis is already referenced or not
W (Wait) = Waits in this statement line until reference travel performed
NW (NoWait) = Process the next statement line during reference travel (recommendation)
ZP (Zero Pulse) = Reference travel to zero pulse
CAM = Reference travel to the reference cam
RESET = Reference travel which has started is interrupted and the call is reset. An axis
which has been referenced is now de-referenced.
INFORMATION
ZP and CAM have no effect if reference travel type P903 is set to 0, 5 or 8. If reference
travel type P903 is set to type 3 or 4, CAM cannot be set.
Example main()
{
_Go0( GO0_C_W_ZP ); // reference waiting for zero pulse
}
17.3.10 _GoAbs
INFORMATION
If the modulo function is used for positioning, the commands GOA and GOR cannot
be used. The target position is written directly to H454.
Syntax _GoAbs ( type, pos )
Description Absolute positioning to the position specified.

The message "IPOS in position" is updated within a GOA or GOR command; that is, the
message can be queried directly in the next program line.
Key points type Expression for the type of movement command. type can adopt one of the follow-
ing values:
GO_NOWAIT: No wait, resumes processing of the program in the next statement line immediately after
sending the movement command (recommendation)
GO_WAIT: Waits in this statement line until travel is completed
pos Contains the absolute target position; the following can stand for pos:
Constant expression for target position
Name of a variable containing the target position
Pointer to a variable containing the distance (indirect addressing).

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Parameter settings for all positioning commands

Parameters Explanation
P913/P914 Travel speeds (can be changed in the program using SETSYS).
P911/P912 Positioning ramps (acceleration) (can be changed in the program using SETSYS).
P915/P203 Precontrol that can be used to influence the jerk.
P933 Jerk limitation (only with MOVIDRIVE® B).
P916 Ramp type.
P917 Ramp mode.
Example // Standard structures for speed and ramp

SSPOSSPEED tPosSpeed;
SSPOSRAMP tPosRamp;
main()
{
// Set speed and ramp
tPosSpeed.CW = tPosSpeed.CCW = 1000 * 10; // Speed 1000 rpm
tPosRamp.Up = tPosRamp.Down = 1000; // Ramp is based on 3000
rpm
_SetSys (SS_POSRAMP, tPosRamp);
_SetSys (SS_POSSPEED, tPosSpeed);

// If the speed and ramp are not changed in the program,
// the values in SHELL apply / see the table
_GoRel (GO_WAIT, 3000); // Moves to position 3000

Inc.
}
17.3.11 _GoRel
INFORMATION
be used. The target position is written directly to H454.
Syntax _GoRel( type, pos )
Description Relative positioning to a distance based on the current position.

Key points type Expression for the type of movement command. type can adopt one of the follow-
ing values:
GO_NOWAIT: No wait, resumes processing of the program in the next statement line immediately after
sending the movement command (recommendation)
GO_WAIT: Waits in this statement line until travel is completed
pos Contains the relative distance; the following can stand for pos:
Constant expression for distance
Name of a variable containing the distance
Pointer to a variable containing the distance (indirect addressing),

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Example // Standard structures for speed and ramp

SSPOSRAMP tPosRamp;
main()
{
tPosSpeed.CW = tPosSpeed.CCW = 1000 * 10; // Speed 1000 rpm
tPosRamp.Up = tPosRamp.Down = 1000; // Ramp is based on 3000
rpm

// If the speed and ramp are not changed in the program,
// the values in SHELL apply / see the table
_GoRel (GO_WAIT, 3000); // Moves to position 3000

Inc.
}
17.3.12 _InputCall
Syntax _InputCall ( level, mask, function name )
Description The function is used for calling up a user-defined function depending on the level pres-
ent at the input terminals. The name of the function, the required polarity of the input
level and the relevant terminals are specified as arguments. The event function is called
up when all input terminals marked with a one in mask have a "1" level (level = IC_HIGH)
or "0" level (level = IC_LOW).
Key points level Constant expression which specifies the signal level for which terminals are to
be tested. This expression can adopt one of the following values:
IC_HIGH: HIGH level ("1" level)
IC_LOW: LOW level ("0" level)
mask Constant binary expression which specifies the terminals to be tested.

The bits in the expression have the following meaning
Bit 0: DI00, mask = 0b1
Bit 3: DI03, mask = 0b1000
Bit 4: DI04, mask = 0b10000
Bit 5: DI05, mask = 0b100000
Bit 6: DI10, mask = 0b1000000
Bit 7: DI11, mask = 0b10000000
Bit 8: DI12, mask = 0b100000000
Bit 9: DI13, mask = 0b1000000000
Bit 10: DI14, mask = 0b10000000000
Bit 11: DI15, mask = 0b100000000000
Bit 12: DI16, mask = 0b1000000000000
Bit 13: DI17, mask = 0b10000000000000
Bit 14-31: Reserved
An input combination can be selected by setting the appropriate bits in the mask to 1.
For example, to query DI00 and DI03, mask must be: 0b1001

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
function name Name of the event function. (Important: In contrast to a function call,
only the name of the function without () is specified here)
Example #include <constb.h>
#define DI02 0b100 // DI02 = 0b100
TerminalIsOne ()
{
// Statements of the event function
}
main()
{
while(1)
{
// Main program loop task 1
_InputCall( IC_HIGH,DI02,TerminalIsOne );
// if terminal DI02 == HIGH ("1"), call the function
}
}
17.3.13 _Memorize
INFORMATION
If you use the command in a fast task, you have to set a _Wait command of at least 1
ms after the _Memorize command.
Syntax _Memorize ( action )
Description Enables IPOSplus® programs and/or variables to be saved or loaded in or from the non-
volatile memory (EEPROM) on the unit. The action is specified via the argument.
Key points action Constant expression for action. action can adopt one of the following values:
MEM_NOP: No data is saved
MEM_STALL: Saves program and variables
MEM_LDALL: Loads program and variables
MEM_STPRG: Saves program only
MEM_LDPRG: Loads program only
MEM_STDATA: Saves variables only
MEM_LDDATA: Loads variables only
INFORMATION
When using the _Memorize() command with MOVIDRIVE® A and MC07B, note that
variables stored in the non-volatile memory (H0 – 127) and all parameters are not writ-
ten cyclically. This is because the number of storage operations with the storage me-
dium EEPROM is restricted to 105 storage operations.
This restriction does not apply to MOVIDRIVE® B.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Example main()
{
_Memorize( MEM_STDATA ); // Save variables H0 ... H127 to EEPROM
}
17.3.14 _MoviLink
Syntax _MoviLink ( H )
Description The MOVLNK command allows extensive changes to be made to the inverter parame-
ters and any other units which may be connected via the system bus or the RS-485. To
ensure the safety of people and systems, take particular care when changing the in-
verter parameters. In all cases, higher-level safety precautions must be able to intervene
to counteract any possible programming errors.
When the command is called, MOVLNK reads and writes process data, variables or pa-
rameters from one unit to another once, or reads or writes variables or parameters within
a unit once.
The parameters are read/written using index addressing. For the corresponding index
number, refer to the system manual and the parameter list. You can also display the
index numbers in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio by placing the mouse on the edit box or
display field of the respective parameter (tooltip).
An SBus or RS-485 interface can be used for communication between 2 units.
MOVILINK can be used in a unit, for example, to save the variable of a quantity counter
protected against power outage without using the MEM command to save the entire
power-outage proof range. Process data cannot be exchanged within one unit using the
MOVILINK command.
Using the index access via MOVILINK, user-defined inverter values that cannot be ac-
cessed with GETSYS/SETSYS can also be written/read from IPOSplus®. In this way, for
example, the inverter can set the parameters itself in the initialization section.
Before the command is called, initialize the variables that the command uses (command
structure). The beginning of this command structure is transferred to the command as
an argument. The data structure contains the data to be written or read.
Set the parameters for communication in the sender (master) and receiver (slave). The
MOVILINK command is only called in the sender (master).

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Key points H Start variable of the command structure

The command structure is set up as follows:
H + 0: Bus type (communication interface)
H + 1: Address (target address)
H + 2: Format (process and/or parameter data)
H + 3: Service (read/write service)
H + 4: Index (number of the parameter to be modified or read, see parameter index directory)
H + 5: DPointer (Number of the variable H" from which the read data is stored or from where the data to be
written is obtained. This means it is the first variable number of the data structure.)
– H" + 0: Contains the data for the parameter write services
– H" + 1: Contains the data that is read by a parameter service
– H" + 2: PO1 data of process data exchange
– H" + 5: PI1 data of process data exchange
H + 6: Result (Contains the error code after the parameter service has been executed, or contains zero if
there was no error.)
The following standard SEW structures are available for the _MoviLink statement:
Instruction type Standard Elements Brief description
structure
_MoviLink MOVLNK BusType (H+0) Possible bus types:
ML_BT_S0 = 1 (RS485 #1)
ML_BT_S1 = 2 (RS485 #2)
ML_BT_SBUS1 = ML_BT_SBUS = 5
ML_BT_SBUS2 = 8
Address (H+1) 0...99: Single address
100...199: Group address
253: Address of the inverter
254: Point-to-point connection
255: Broadcast
If an SBus group address (e.g. 43) is addressed, the offset 100 must be
added. In this case 143.
Format (H+2) Specification of the process (PD) and parameter (PARAM) channels for
data transfer:
//MoviLink Cyclic Frame Types //Acyclic
ML_FT_PAR1 = 0: PARAM+1PD ML_CFT_PAR1 = 128
ML_FT_1 = 1: 1PD ML_CFT_1 = 129
ML_FT_2 = 3: 2PD ML_CFT_2 = 131
ML_FT_3 = 5: 3PD ML_CFT_3 = 133
ML_FT_PAR = 6: Parameter (without ML_CFT_PAR = 134
PD)
Service (H+3) Communication service for parameters
ML_S_RD = 1: Read service
ML_S_WR = 2: Write to non-volatile memory
ML_S_WRV = 3: Writing without saving
Index (H+4) Index number of the parameter to be modified or read (see parameter
index directory)
The subindex must be entered in the index element on bits 23-16 (least
significant byte of the high word).
Calculation: H+4 or
MOVILNK.Index = Index + (SubIndex << 16);
DPointer (H+5) Number of the variable from which the read data is stored or from which
the data to be written is obtained (structure MLDATA)
Result (H+6) Contains the error code after the service has been performed or contains
zero if there was no error (see "Parameterization Return Codes" in the
"Communication and Fieldbus Unit Profile" manual with "parameter list").

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz

structure
MLDATA WritePar (H"+0) Parameter that is sent for write services
ReadPar (H"+1) Parameter that is sent for read services
PO1 (H"+2) Process output data 1
PI1 (H"+5) Process input data 1
The following table shows the elements with unit-specific characteristics.


BusType (H+0) only only only
ML_BT_S1 (RS485 at X13) ML_BT_S1 (RS485 at FSC/FIO11B) ML_BT_S1 (RS485 to MOVIMOT®)
ML_BT_SBUS1 (SBUS at X12) ML_BT_SBUS1 (SBUS at FSC/FIO21B)
ML_BT_SBUS2 (via DFC11B)
Format (H+2) no limitation no limitation only
ML_CFT_2 (2PD acyclical)
ML_CFT_PAR2 (Param + 2PD acycli-
cal)
ML_CFT_3 (3PD acyclical)
ML_CFT_PAR3 (Param + 3PD
acyclical)
ML_CFT_PAR (Param acycl
ical)
cyclical frame types are possible but
_MovCommDef is recommended.
INFORMATION
The element DPointer in the MOVLNK structure must be initialized with the first vari-
able number of the data structure that contains the communication data.
If this data is contained in a structure with the name bus data (declaration line ML-
DATA bus data), the initialization line within the MOVLNK structure must read as fol-
lows for the DPointer element:
***.DPointer = numof(Bus data);
MOVLNK is a wait command. The next command is only processed when the MOV-
LNK command has been executed.
If two or more MOVLNK commands are called cyclically, these must be processed in
one task. This process is mainly carried out for MOVIDRIVE® B in task 2 or task 3.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 1 #include <constb.h>
MOVLNK ml;
MLDATA mld;
main()
{
while(1)
{
// Initialize structure ml
ml.BusType = ML_BT_S1; // RS-485 #2
ml.Address = 1;
ml.Format = ML_FT_PAR2; // 2 PD with parameter
ml.Service = ML_S_RD; // Read
ml.Index = 8300+(0<<16); // Index of the inverter status (8300.0)
ml.DPointer = numof(mld); // Target structure
_MoviLink( ml ); // actual command call

}
}
Other examples For further examples regarding the _MoviLink command, refer to the following sec-
tions:
• Reading an internal unit parameter (page 253)
• Writing a variable via SBus (page 254)
• Reading a parameter via SBus (page 255)
Parameter set- Addressing via RS-485: No settings required.

tings for the sender
Addressing via SBus:
(master)
Parameters Address Explanation
P816 The baud rate depends on the length of the bus cable and must be the same
for the sender and the receiver.
INFORMATION
With RS485 networks, there must only be one master.
In SBus (CAN) networks, there may be several active masters, see also
_SBusCommDef command. (page 230)

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Parameter set- Data exchange via parameter channel

tings for the
Addressing via RS-485 (P810 ... P812)
receiver
P810 0 ... 99 Individual addressing (sender address)
P811 101 ... 199 Group addressing (multicast), the sender can write to all receivers with the
same group address at the same time
P812 Timeout monitoring function (deactivated if set to 0 ms or 650 ms)
Addressing via SBus P88_ and P89_

P881/P891 0 ... 63 Single addressing
P882/P892 0 ... 631) Group addressing (multicast), the sender can write to all receivers with the
same group address at the same time
P883/P893 Timeout monitoring function (deactivated if set to 0 ms or 650 ms)
P884/P894 The baud rate depends on the length of the bus cable and must be the same
for the sender and the receiver.
1) When using the group address, increase the input value for the target address by 100.
Parameter P880/P890 SBus protocol must be set to "MoviLink".

SBus terminating resistors must be switched on or connected in the first and last sta-
tions.
Data exchange via process data channel

Serial communication must be set in accordance with the tables above (addressing via
RS-485/SBus) for the process data exchange. The following additional settings are re-
quired to use the process data:
Parameters Explanation
P100 Set setpoint source to "RS-485" or "SBus" (only if you want to use setpoint specification via
process data communication)
P101 Set control source to "RS-485" or "SBus"
P870...876 Process data description (see detailed description in the "Communication and fieldbus unit
profile" manual).
Parameter P880/P890 SBus protocol must be set to "MoviLink".
INFORMATION
It is important when using the MOVLNK command that the permanently saved vari-
ables (H0...127) and all parameters are not written cyclically with communication ser-
vice = 2 (non-volatile) because the number of save processes for the used memory
medium is limited.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
With MOVIDRIVE® B and MOVITRAC® B, the timeout monitoring is checked for tele-
grams received within the defined timeout interval.
With MOVIMOT®, the timeout monitoring is activated with the first received cyclic
frames (ML_FT... at the sender). Acyclical communication deactivates the timeout
monitoring of MOVIMOT®.
Once cyclical communication has been started with the _MovCommOn command,
only the _MoviLink command to address 253 (internal) is possible. When using the
_MoviLink command, other units can no longer be accessed.
17.3.15 _MovCommDef
The _MovCommDef command can only be used with MQx modules.
Syntax _MovCommDef(H)
Description The MovComm commands enable cyclical data exchange between MQx and usually up
to 4 MOVIMOT® units via the RS-485 interface with the MOVILINK profile.
_MovCommDef is used to set up a communication connection with MOVIMOT® by set-
ting parameters such as the unit address, for example. _MovCommOn is used to start
cyclical communication. Thereafter, the cyclical communication runs in the background,
irrespective of the current command processing in the IPOSplus® program. A copy of the
exchanged process data is available in the IPOSplus® variables and can be read and
written there. Cyclical communication stops when the IPOSplus® program is stopped.
Up to 8 communication links are permitted. Note that the number of communication links
has a very powerful influence on the bus cycle time of the RS-485 and therefore also on
the response time of the MOVIMOT® unit. Approximately 20 ms bus cycle time must be
taken into account per communication link or station. The prerequisite for achieving the
20 ms bus cycle time per station is fault-free cabling of the RS-485. If a timeout occurs
during cyclical communication, this is displayed in fault 91 Gateway Sysfault. When a
feedback signal is received from MOVIMOT®, the error message is revoked automati-
cally.
Enter all information required to execute a command into a data structure in the variable
area with a user program. The start of this variable structure is the argument for the com-
mand. The variable is defined by the MOVCOM variable name; and has the following
structure.
BusType (H+0) Bus type (interface)
ML_BT_S1 = 2 (RS485 to MOVIMOT®)
Address (H+1) Individual address or group address for the MOVIMOT®to be addressed
0 ... 99 single addressing
100 ... 199 group addressing
255 broadcast
Format (H+2) Entry of process data for data transfer
3 = 2 process data words cyclically (for MOVIMOT®) = ML_FT_2
Pd Pointer (H+3) Number of the variable H" in which the process data is stored or from which
the data to be written is obtained.
(The data structure for H" is described in detail below.)
Para Pointer (H+4) Number of the variable H' in which the parameter data is stored or from
which the data to be written is obtained.
MOVIMOT® does not support this function.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
A variable structure containing the process data is defined in the Compiler by the MCP-
DATA variable name;:
Data structure for H":
H"+0 Contains the error code after connection, or zero if there was no error 0x05000002 indicates
the connection has timed out.
H"+1 PO1 data of process data exchange
H"+2 PI1 data of process data exchange
The process data is coded according to MOVILINK.

A variable structure containing the parameter data is defined in the Compiler by the MC-
PARADATA variable name;:
H*+0 Contains the error code after the parameter service has been performed, or contains zero if
there was no error The errors are coded according to MOVILINK.
H*+1 0: No action or parameter data exchange is complete.
1: Start of the parameter data exchange
H*+2 ML_S_RD = 1: Read service
ML_S_WR = 2: Write with storage in non-volatile memory
H*+3 Index number of parameter to be revised or read
H*+4 Read data after read service. Data to be written in case of a write service.
Proceed as follows when making parameter settings:

1. Entry of service, index and data
2. Start the parameter setting process by setting StartPar to 1.
3. Wait for the service to be performed; end is indicated when StartPar is set to 0.
4. Evaluate ParaResult. If an error has occurred, the data value is invalid. If no error
occurred, the service was successful.
Argument H First variable of the variable structure
Example See the function _MovCommOn (page 229)

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
17.3.16 _MovCommOn
The _MovCommOn command can only be used with MQx modules.
Syntax _MovCommOn()
Description The command starts cyclical communication, communication links set up using Mov-
CommDef are activated. As of this point, no MovCommDef command is permitted.
Equally, no MOVILINK command to address ≠ 253 (internal) can be used.
Key points None
Example /*=============================================
IPOS Source File
===============================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
#pragma initials 0 127

#pragma var 301 400
MOVCOM mc1; // control values for communication link to MOVIMOT

MCPDATA mcpd1; // process data exchange with MOVIMOT
MCPARADATA mcpara; // parameter data exchange with MOVIMOT (not used)
/*=============================================
Main Function (IPOS Entry Function)
===============================================*/
main()
{
// Initialization ===========================
// fill control structure for communication link to MOVIMOT
mc1.BusType = ML_BT_S1; // communication via RS-485 to MOVIMOT
mc1.Address = 1; // MOVIMOT address 1
mc1.Format = ML_FT_3; // PDU type: 3 process data words cyclic
mc1.PdPointer = numof(mcpd1); // pointer to process data block
mc1.ParaPointer = numof(mcpara1); // pointer to parameter data block
_MovCommDef( mc1 );
_MovCommOn( );
while( )
{
}
}
17.3.17 _Nop
Syntax _Nop()
Description No operation is performed. This command can be used, for example, to achieve wait
times on the basis of the command cycle time.
Argument The command does not have an argument.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Example main()
{
_Nop( );
}
17.3.18 _SBusCommDef
Syntax _SBusCommDef( object type, H)
Description This statement sets up a data object for cyclical or acyclical data transfer. This object
can be used to transfer up to 2 variables (8 bytes) via the system bus. The data object
is written to a variable structure, the initial variable of which is specified in h. The cyclical
data transmission must be started via function SBusCommOn () or SBusCommState
(action) (see the following pages). The type of the data object is specified in objecttype.
Key points objecttype Expression that can adopt one of the following values:
SCD_REC: Receive
SCD_TRCYCL: Cyclical send
SCD_TRACYCL: Acyclical send
H First variable in the variable structure

Corresponding data structures have been defined for the individual object types.
SCD_REC Initializes a data object that receives the data. A maximum of 32 variables can be set up.
The object has the following structure:
H+0: Object number
H+1: Number of data bytes and data format
H+2: Number of the variable H" from which point the received data is stored
SCD_TRCYCL Initializes a data object, whose data is transmitted cyclically. .

H+0: Object number
H+1: Cycle time ms
H+2: Offset time ms
H+4: Number of the variable H" where the data to be transmitted starts
H+5: Result of the SCOM command

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
SCD_TRACYCL Initializes a data object, whose data is transmitted immediately once.

H+0: Object number
H+2: Number of the variable H" where the data to be sent begins
H+3: Status of the transmission command
INFORMATION
Prior to transmitting acyclical telegrams, the SBus must also be activated with
_SBusCommOn or _SBusCommState.
MOVIDRIVE® B: The IPOSplus® program waits at this command until the message
has been sent, but for a maximum of 10 ms. Users can only monitor whether the tele-
gram has been sent correctly by evaluating the state (H+3) or the expected response.
The following standard SEW structures are available for the _SBusCommDef state-
ment:
structure
_SBusCommDef SCREC ObjectNo (H+0) Object number CAN Identifier (e.g. 1024)
Format (H+1) Data format
DPointer (H+2) Number of the variable H" from which point the
received data is stored
There must be 2 variables (H" and H"+1)
reserved for the reception of up to 8 bytes of
data.
SCTRCYCL ObjectNo (H+0) Object number (e.g. without CANopen profile as
of 1024
CycleTime Cycle time [ms]
(H+1)
Offset (H+2) Offset time [ms]
Format (H+3) Number of data bytes and data format
DPointer (H+4) Number of the variable H" where the data to be
sent begins
Result (H+5) Status of the transmission command:
≥0 Free bus capacity in % (calculated value of
this unit)
-1 Incorrect cycle time
-2 Too many objects set up
-3 Bus overload
-5 Wrong object number
-6 Wrong length
SCTRACYCL ObjectNo (H+0) Object number (e.g. without CANopen profile as
of 1024
Format (H+1) Number of data bytes and data format
DPointer (H+2) Number of the variable H" where the data to be
sent begins
Result (H+3) Status of the transmission command:
0 = Ready
1 = Transmitting
2 = Transmission successful
10 = Transmission error

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
If objects defined via SCREC are received via SBus1 or SBus2, this is signaled in the
corresponding system variables H522 and H523, see System variable overview
(page 29).
Bit 24 of the ObjectNo defines whether the data are transmitted or received with the CAN
identifier (bit 0 ... 10) via SBus1 or SBus2:
Bit 24 = 0: SBus1 (.ObjectNo = CAN_ID + SCD_SBUS1)
Bit 24 = 1: SBus2 (.ObjectNo = CAN_ID + SCD_SBUS2); only MDX B with DFC11B
Unit-specific characteristics:
MOVIDRIVE® B MOVITRAC® B
CycleTime (H+1) Valid cycle times1): Valid cycle times:
- 1, 2 ... 9 ms, number of objects 15 1 ... 255 ms, granularity 1 ms, number of
- 10, 20, ... 65530 ms objects 16
Offset (H+2) Valid offset times: Valid offset times:

- 0, 1, 2 ... 8 ms for cycle times < 10 0 ... 255 ms, granularity 1 ms
ms The following must apply:
- 0, 10, 20, ... 65530 ms for cycle Offset time + cycle time ≤ 255
times ≥ 10 ms
1) The cycle time must always exceed the longest offset time.
Number of data bytes and data formats:

Bit Value Function
0 ... 3 0 ... 8 Number of data bytes
4 ... 7 -- Reserved
8 0 MOTOROLA format
1 INTEL format
9 ... 31 -- Reserved
Comparison of MOTOROLA and INTEL format:

MOTOROLA format INTEL format
CAN byte 3210 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Variable H"+1 H" H" H"+1
Var. byte 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
Observe the following rules when selecting the object number CAN Identifier:
1. In the entire SBus network, an object number can only be set up for transmission
once.
2. Within a unit, an object number may only be set up once; either to be sent or re-
ceived once.
In particular during further data exchange between the slaves, you must ensure that
the total calculated bus utilization does not exceed 70%.
The bus utilization is calculated in bits per second using the formula:
Number of telegrams × bits/telegram × 1/cycle time
For example, 2 messages with 100 bits in 1 ms cycle = 200000 bits/s = 200 kBaud
This results in the following bus load percentage in reference to the selected baud rate.
For example, 200 kBaud / 500 kBaud = 40% < 70%
For points 1 and 2, note that the unit firmware reserves its own object numbers automat-
ically:
• The object number entered in parameters P885/P895 for SBus synchronization.
• The following object numbers are used for communication via the MOVILINK profile
depending on the SBus address in parameter P881/P891 and the SBus group
address in parameter P882/P892:
– 8 × SBus address + 3 for process output data
– 8 × SBus address + 4 for process input data
– 8 × SBus address + 5 for synchronous process output data
– 8 × SBus address + 3 + 512 for parameter request service
– 8 × SBus address + 4 + 512 for parameter response service
– 8 × SBus group address + 6 for group process data
– 8 × SBus group address + 6 + 512 for group parameter request
For communication via the CANopen profile, the object numbers (identifiers) defined in
DS301 by CANopen will be used.

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
Example See _SBusCommStat
17.3.19 _SBusCommOn
Syntax _SBusCommOn()
Description In MOVIDRIVE® B, the command has been replaced by _SBusCommState. However,

due to downward compatibility, it can still be used.
This statement triggers the reception of data and the cyclical transmission of previously
defined data objects. The data objects are initialized using the SBusCommDef function
with the arguments SCD_TRCYCL and SCD_REC.
INFORMATION
This command only activates SBus 1, not SBus 2
Example See section "Compiler – Examples".
17.3.20 _SBusCommState
Syntax _SBusCommState ( action )
Description This statement initializes the CAN interface, starts or stops the data reception and the
acyclic transmission of predefined data objects via SBus 1 or SBus 2. The data objects
re initialized via the SBussCommDef function.
Regardless of the value for "action", with MOVITRAC® B, the _SBusCommState com-
mand ( action ) always has the same effect as _SBusCommOn (page 234).
Key points action can adopt one of the following values:

Value Argument Meaning
0 SCS_STARTALL Starts cyclical communication synchronously from
SBus 1 and SBus 2.
1 SCS_STOPALL Stop cyclical communication synchronously from SBus
1 and SBus 2.
2 SCS_START1 Starts cyclical communication from SBus 1.
3 SCS_STOP1 Stops cyclical communication from SBus 1.
4 SCS_START2 Starts cyclical communication from SBus 2.
5 SCS_STOP2 Stops cyclical communication from SBus 2.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
#define DATA H20

#declare DATE DATA:0
#define INTEL 0x100

#define NUM_BYTES 4
SCTRCYCL Obj1;
main()
{
Obj1.ObjectNo = 1090;
Obj1.CycleTime = 10;
Obj1.Offset = 0;
Obj1.Format = INTEL ¦ ANZ_BYTES // Set high und low byte
Obj1.DPointer = numof(DATA);
DATUM = 0;
_SBusCommDef( SCD_TRCYCL,Obj1 ); // Send obj1 cyclically

_SBusCommState( SCS_START1 ); // Start of the transmission for SBus1
while(1)
{
// Main program task 1
}
}
17.3.21 _SetInterrupt
Syntax _SetInterrupt( event , function name)
Description The function is used for specifying a user-defined function as an interrupt routine. The
name of the function is given as an argument. An interrupt may be triggered by various
events. The required event is given as an argument.
Key points event Constant expression that can adopt one of the following values:
SI_DISABLE: Interrupt is inhibited
SI_ERROR: Triggers an interrupt in case of a system error
SI_TIMER0: Triggers an interrupt when Timer0 is exceeded
SI_TOUCHP1: Initiates an interrupt in case of an edge change on a touch probe terminal if touch probe
was activated
function name Name of the interrupt function. (Important: In contrast to a function

call, only the name of the function without () is specified here.)

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
T0Interrupt ()
{
// Statements of the interrupt routine for timer 0
}
main()
{
// Inform system of TO interrupt and start
_SetInterrupt( SI_TIMER0,T0Interrupt );
while(1)
{
}
}
17.3.22 _SetSys
Syntax _SetSys( sys , H)
Description Sets the value of an internal system value with the value of an IPOSplus® variable.
Key points H Name of source variable

sys Constant expression that designates the system value. sys can adopt one of the
following values:
SS_N11: Internal fixed setpoint n11
Note:
The new fixed setpoint is only certain to have been adopted after 5 ms. You may want to delay program pro-
cessing after a _SetSys command by 5 ms with a _Wait command.
If the fixed setpoint value exceeds the permitted range, the algebraic sign changes.
SS_PIDATA: Updates PI data1)
– H = Number of PI data items
– H + 1 = PI data 1
– H + 2 = PI data 2
– H + 3 = PI data 3
SS_OPMODE: Sets the operating mode
– H = 11: CFC (speed control)
– H = 12: CFC & torque control
– H = 13: CFC & IPOS (positioning)
– H = 14: CFC & synchronous operation (DRS11)
– H = 16: SERVO (speed control)
– H = 17: SERVO & torque control
– H = 18: SERVO & IPOS (positioning)
– H = 19: SERVO & synchronous operation (DRS11)
SS_IMAX: Setting the torque limit by setting parameter P304 torque limit (only CFC or SERVO);
Scale unit: 0.1%
SS_POSRAMP: Positioning ramps; unit: 1 ms
– H = Positioning ramp 1
– H + 1 = Positioning ramp 2
SS_POSSPEED: Positioning speed; unit: 0.1 rpm
– H = Speed CW
– H + 1 = Speed CCW
SS_OVERRIDE: Switch override on/off
– H = 0 -> off
– H = 1 -> on

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
SS_BRAKE: Switching the brake function on/off

– H = 0 -> off
– H = 1 -> on
SS_RAMPTYPE: Specify positioning ramp type (changes P916)
– H = 0 -> linear
– H = 1 -> sine
– H = 2 -> square
– H = 3 -> bus ramp
– H = 4 -> jerk limited
– H = 5 -> cam disk
– H = 6 -> internal synchronous operation
SS_RESET: Resets the system error with the error number in variable H
– H = Variable with the error number
SS_ACTPOS: Setting the actual position
– H = Position value
SS_SPLINE:
Internal drive calculation of an analytical cam disk. Currently, the function is only available in MCH in SD ver-
sion 0C or MDxB SD -0C/5C.
The spline calculation is initialized via the system function after up to 20 curve points (x-y = value pairs, x =
master position, y = slave position) have been specified in a master encoder range. The calculation is then
started using H+0 SplineMode and either a complete cam disk or one segment of a selected cam disk is
filled. Currently, a spline 0 procedure (for optimum running) and a spline 1 procedure (for section-by-section
movements and straight sections) are available. The calculation is complete after ≤ 200 ms.
– H+0 = SplineMode: (Value range: 0 ... 3)
• = 0: Interpolation not active, or calculation is finished
• = 1: Start interpolation, enter interpolated values from index 0 starting with the electronic cam (in
ascending order, from index 0 to 512).
• = 2: Start interpolation, enter interpolated values from index 512 starting with the electronic cam (in
descending order, from index 512 to 0).
• = 3: Preparatory parameter calculation for interpolation concluded; start entering interpolated values
in the electronic cam.
– H+1 = SplineModeControl: Reserved
– H+2 = SplineDest: (Value range: 0 ... 5)
Number of the electronic cam in which the interpolated values are to be entered.
– H+3 = SplineNUser: (Value range: 2 ... 20)
Number of curve points to be used for interpolation and the calculation process (bit 0 ... bit 4 = number of
curve points, bit 7 = 0: spline 0, bit 7 = 1: spline 1)
– H+4 = SplineX0User: (Only a value >= 0 can be entered here!)
Enter the curve point no. of the X axis (master).
– H+5 = SplineY0User: (Value range: long = -231 ... 0 ... (231 -1))
Y value (= position value) of the 1st curve point; when ACTPOSSCALE ≠ 0, the scaled value must be
entered in the structure
– ...
– H+42 = SplineX19User: (Only a value <= 512 can be entered here!)
Enter the curve point no. of the X axis (master).
Y value of the 20th curve point; when ACTPOSSCALE ≠ 0, the scaled value must be entered in the
structure
SS_MULTIAXIS: Total drive calculation of a trajectory
Only available on request. See also the addendum to the operating instructions "Special design SK-0C for
MCH or MDxB: Calculated Curves with MCH".
1) Applies if parameter P101 is set to "RS485", "Fieldbus" or "SBus".

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
The following standard SEW structures are available for the _SetSys statement:
_SetSys SSPOSRAMP Up Acceleration positioning ramp (ms)
Down Deceleration positioning ramp (ms)
SSPOSSPEED CW Positioning speed CW (0.1 rpm)
CCW Positioning speed CCW (0.1 rpm)
SSPIDATA31) Len Number of the process input data to be transmitted
PI1 Process input data 1
SSPIDATA101) Len Number of the process input data to be transmitted
Example main()
{
// Set the speed control operating mode
H0 = 11;
_SetSys( SS_OPMODE,H0 );
}
17.3.23 _SetTask
Syntax _SetTask ( control word, function name )
Description This function is used to determine a user-defined function as a task and to start or stop
this task. The name of the function and the control word are given as arguments.
Argument control word Constant expression that can adopt one of the following values:
MOVIDRIVE® B MOVIDRIVE® A
ST2_STOP: Stop task 2 T2_START: Start task 2
ST2_START: Start task 2 T2_STOP: Stop task 2
ST3_STOP: Stop task 3
ST3_START: Start task 3
function name Name of the task function.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
MyTask3 ()
{
// Statements of task 3
}
main()
{
// Inform system of task 3 and start
_SetTask ( ST3_START,MyTask3 );
while(1)
{
// Main program
}
}
17.3.24 _SetTask2
Syntax _SetTask2( control word, function name )
Description This function is used to determine a user-defined function as task 2 and to start or stop
this task. The name of the function and the control word are given as arguments. The
control word and start address are both set to 0 when the power is switched on, i.e.
Task2 is deactivated.
In MOVIDRIVE® B, the command has been replaced by _SetTask. However, due to
downward compatibility, it is still available with MOVIDRIVE® B.
Key points control word Constant expression that can adopt one of the following values:
T2_STOP: Stop task 2
T2_START: Start task 2
function name Name of the Task2 function. (Important: In contrast to a function call,
only the name of the function without () is specified here.)
MeineTask2 ()
{
// Statements of task 2
}
main()
{
// Inform system of task 2 and start
_SetTask2( T2_START,MyTask2 );
while(1)
{
// Main program
}
}

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
17.3.25 _SetVarInterrupt
Syntax _SetVarInterrupt ( h1 , function name )
Description This command is not available in MOVIDRIVE® A, only as of MOVIDRIVE® B.

The command activates a variable interrupt with the data structure as of variable H1. If
the condition for the interrupt is fulfilled, the "function name" function is performed. The
event for the interrupt is the comparison with a variable value (see H+4). If the data
structure has been initialized, during run time the behavior of the interrupt can be dy-
namically adapted to a complete VarInterrupt using an IPOSplus® command.
Note: The data from the data structure is only transferred when the command
_SetVarInterrupt ( H1 , function name ) is called (data consistency). An
exception is the variable pSourceVar.
Example: If the value from the data structure Hx+3 CompareVar is changed, for exam-
ple, the value is only taken into account with the command _SetVarInterrupt ( H1
, function name ).
Key points H1 First variable of a data structure (see table H+0)

function name Name of the interrupt function. In contrast to a function call, only the
name of the function without () is specified here.
Data structure of the variable interrupt:
Variable VARINT element Description
structure
H+0 Control 0: All VarInterrupt = OFF/Reset
1: Interrupt task 2
2: Interrupt task 3
H+1 IntNum 0 ... 3: Defines a sequential number of the VarInterrupt.
An interrupt with the number x, which has already been activated, can
be reactivated during the program run time with another data structure
using the command call _SetVarInterrupt ( H1 , function
name ) when the same interrupt number is specified in the new data
structure at the position H+1.
This feature is not available for the task 1 interrupts.
H+2 SrcVar Number of the reference variable whose value is compared with the
comparison value.
H+3 CompVar Comparison value or mask used to compare the value of the H+2 refer-
ence variable.

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz

structure
H+4 Mode 0: No interrupt event. This can be used to deactivate this one interrupt
without deactivating them all.
1: One of the bits of the reference variable, masked out using the Com-
pVar mask, has changed its status:
([*SrcVar(t) ^ *SrcVar(t-T)] & CompVar) != 0
2:As long as the value of the reference variable is equal to the compar-
ison value
(*SrcVar == CompVar)
3:As long as the value of the reference variable is not equal to the com-
parison value
(*SrcVar != CompVar)
4:As long as the value of the reference variable is greater than or equal
to the comparison value
(*SrcVar >= CompVar)
5:As long as the value of the reference variable is less than or equal to
the comparison value
(*SrcVar <= CompVar)
6: Value of the reference variable AND the comparison value is not 0
((*SrcVar & CompVar) != 0)
7: Value of the reference variable AND the comparison value is 0
((*SrcVar & CompVar) == 0)
8: Positive edge of the bit masked out by CompVar
9: Negative edge of the bit masked out by CompVar
10: As 2; however, interrupt is only processed once each time the con-
dition is fulfilled (edge triggered)
H+5 Priority Priority of the interrupt (1 ... 10); task 2 and task 3 are both assigned
the priority 0.
H+6 IntEvent Process image of the reference variable from *SourceVar to the time of
the interrupt.
Example See "Task Management and Interrupts / Variable Interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B".
17.3.26 _SystemCall
Syntax _SystemCall( event, function name)
Description The function is used to call a user-defined function when a system-controlled even oc-
curs. The name of the function and the required event are given as arguments.
Key points event Constant expression that specifies when the function name is called. This
expression can adopt one of the following values:
SC_UC: Unconditional
SC_N0: When the speed is zero
SC_N: When the speed is not zero
SC_NOTPOS: If not in position
SC_TP1: If there is an edge change at touch probe terminal DI02
SC_NTP1: If there is no edge change at touch probe terminal DI02
function name Name of the event function. (Important: In contrast to a function call,
only the name of the function without () is specified here.)

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
SpeedZero () // Event function

{
// Statements of the event function
}
main()
{
while(1)
{
_SystemCall( SC_N0,SpeedZero );
// if speed == zero, call function
}
}
17.3.27 _TouchProbe
Syntax _TouchProbe( action )
Description Enables or locks a touch probe input. Touch probe inputs are the input terminals DI02
and DI03.
It takes 100 µs to store the touch probe positions, regardless of ongoing program pro-
cessing. The terminal level must have been altered for at least 200 µs to be detected
reliably. The argument can be used to select the edge change that causes a touch
probe.
If an edge change occurs on the enabled input, the current actual positions are saved in
specified IPOSplus® system variables. To take another measurement, the touch probe
must be enabled again.
The touch probe positions are stored in the following variables:
Encoder Encoder position Position of touch Position of touch
probe 1 (DI02) probe 2 (DI03)
Motor encoder X15 H511 ActPos_Mot H507 TpPos1_Mot H505 TpPos2_Mot
External encoder X14 H510 ActPos_Ext H506 TpPos1_Ext H504 TpPos2_Ext
Absolute encoder X62 H509 ActPos_Abs H503 TpPos1_Abs H502 TpPos2_Abs
Virtual encoder (only for H376 H501 TpPos1_VE H500 TpPos2_VE
MOVIDRIVE® B)
Key points action can adopt one of the following values:

TP_EN1: Enables the touch probe input DI02
TP_DIS1: Inhibits the touch probe input DI02
TP_EN2: Enables the touch probe input DI03
TP_DIS2: Inhibits the touch probe input DI03
TP_EN1_HI: Enables the touch probe input DI02 with rising edge
TP_EN1_LO: Enables the touch probe input DI02 with falling edge
TP_EN2_HI: Enables the touch probe input DI03 with rising edge
TP_EN2_LO: Enables the touch probe input DI03 with falling edge

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
Example main()
{
_TouchProbe( TP_EN1 ); // Enables the touch probe input DI02
}
17.3.28 _Wait
Syntax _Wait( time )
Description Waits for the period (in milliseconds (ms)) specified in a constant.
Key points time Constant that specifies the wait time in milliseconds; no variable possible.
INFORMATION
If the waiting time is to be variable, you will have to initialize a timer (H487 ...H489)
instead of a WAIT command and program a loop until the timer has expired.
Example Timer_0 = 20000; // start value 20 s

while( Timer_0 ){} // wait 20 s
17.3.29 _WaitInput
Syntax _WaitInput ( level, mask )
Description The function waits until a specific level is present at specific input terminals. The re-
quired polarity of the input level and the relevant terminals are given as arguments. The
function waits until all input terminals marked with a one in mask have a "1" level or a
"0" level.
Key points level Constant expression that specifies which signal level the terminals should be
tested for. It can adopt one of the following values:
1: HIGH level ("1" level)
0: LOW level ("0" level)
mask Constant binary expression which specifies the terminals to be tested. The bits
in the expression have the following meaning
Bit 3: DI03, mask = 0b1000
Bit 4: DI04, mask = 0b10000
Bit 5: DI05, mask = 0b100000
Bit 6: DI10, mask = 0b1000000
Bit 7: DI11, mask = 0b10000000
Bit 8: DI12, mask = 0b100000000
Bit 9: DI13, mask = 0b1000000000
Bit 10: DI14, mask = 0b10000000000
Bit 11: DI15, mask = 0b100000000000
Bit 12: DI16, mask = 0b1000000000000
Bit 13: DI17, mask = 0b10000000000000
Bit 14-31: Reserved

17 f
Standard functions
i
Hz
P Hz
An input combination can be selected by setting the appropriate bits in the mask to 1.
For example, to query DI00 and DI03, mask must be: 0b1001
main()
{
_WaitInput( 1,0b100 );
// as long as terminal DI02 == HIGH ("1"), wait
}
17.3.30 _WaitSystem
Syntax _WaitSystem( event )
Description The function waits for as long as a system-related event is present. The required event
is given as an argument.
Key points event Constant expression that specifies when the function waits. This expression
can adopt one of the following values:
SC_UC: Unconditional
SC_N0: When the speed is zero
SC_N: When the speed is not zero
SC_NOTPOS: If not in position
Example main()
{
_WaitSystem( SC_N0 ); // as long as speed == zero, wait
}
17.3.31 _WdOff
Syntax _WdOff()
Description The watchdog is switched off.
Example main()
{
WdOFF();
}

Standard functions
f 17
i
Hz
P Hz
17.3.32 _WdOn
Syntax _WdOn( time )
Description Sets the value of the watchdog counter to the value specified in 'time.' If the watchdog
timer elapses, task 1 and task 2 are stopped and an error message is issued. The ap-
plication has to prevent the watchdog timer from running down by cyclically resetting the
counter. The counter value has to last at least as long as one main program cycle.
Key points time Watchdog counter value in milliseconds (ms).
Example #define WD_TIME 1000
main()
{
while(1)
{
/*
Perform statements in the loop
The total run time of the statements in the loop
must not be longer than 1000 ms to prevent
the watchdog from running down.
*/
_WdOn( WD_ZEIT ); // Retrigger WD every 1000 ms

}
}

kVA n Compiler – Examples
18 f
Setting bits and output terminals
i
Hz
P Hz
18 Compiler – Examples
18.1 Setting bits and output terminals
There are two ways of setting individual bits in variables:
1. The _BitSet ( Hx, y ) function sets bit y in variable x to one.
2. The bit-by-bit OR operation Hx ¦ K sets those bits in variable x to one which are also
set to one in constant K.
In both cases, the legibility of the program can be improved if the bit position or the con-
stant is defined symbolically. Bit setting functions are mainly used for setting binary unit
outputs. Therefore, in the following example, variable H481 (StdOutpIPOS) will be used
as the target variable of the operation. Variable H480 (OptOutpIPOS) would be used ac-
cordingly to address the outputs of the option. In the example, the output terminal DO02
of the basic unit is to be set.
Using _BitSet() Using the OR operation
#include <const.h> #include <const.h>
#include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A #include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
#include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B #include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B
main() main()
{ {
_BitSet( StdOutpIPOS, 2 ); StdOutpIPOS ¦= DO02;
} }
The source text can be simplified even further if symbolic designators are used for the
corresponding statements as well as the variables and constants:
Using _BitSet():
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
#include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B
#define SetDO02 _BitSet( StdOutpIPOS, 2);
main()
{
Set DO02
}
If several outputs are to be set at the same time, then you can either call the _BitSet()
function several times in succession or use the bit-by-bit OR logic operation for this. In
the second case, one statement will suffice. This reduces the amount of code and thus
also has a positive effect on the program run time.
The following example uses the OR operation to set DO01 and DO02 at the same time.
Using the OR operation:

#include <const.h>
main()
{
StdOutpIPOS ¦= DO01 ¦ DO02;
}

Compiler – Examples kVA n
Clearing bits and output terminals
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.2 Clearing bits and output terminals

There are two ways to clear individual bits in variables:
1. The _BitClear ( Hx, y ) function clears bit y in variable x.
2. The bit-by-bit AND operation Hx & K sets those bits in variable x to one that are also
set to one in constant K.
In both cases, the legibility of the program can be improved if the bit position or the con-
stant is defined symbolically. Bit clearing functions are mainly used to reset binary unit
outputs. Therefore, in the following example, variable H481 (StdOutpIPOS) will be used
as the target variable of the operation. Variable H480 (OptOutpIPOS) would be used ac-
cordingly to address the outputs of the option. In the example, the output terminal DO02
of the basic unit is to be set to zero.
Using _BitClear() Using the AND operation
#include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A #include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
#include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B #include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B
main() main()
{ {
_BitClear( StdOutpIPOS, 2 ); StdOutpIPOS &= ~DO02;
} /*The operator "~" causes bit-by-
bit
negation of DO02. Thus all the bits
of DO02 are 1 except for bit 2 */
}
If several outputs are to be reset at the same time, then you can either call the
_BitClear() function several times in succession or use the bit-by-bit AND logic opera-
tion. In the second case, one statement will suffice. This reduces the amount of code
and thus also has a positive effect on the program run time.
The following example uses the AND operation to clear DO01 and DO02 at the same
time.
Using the AND operation:
#include <const.h>
main()
{
StdOutpIPOS &= ~DO01 & ~DO02;
}

18 f
Querying bits and input terminals
i
Hz
P Hz
18.3 Querying bits and input terminals

To query what level a certain input terminal has, a bit must be tested with a variable. The
variable is either H483 (InputLevel), which contains the levels of the binary inputs, or a
variable h of your choice which contains the levels after the _GetSys() function has been
performed.
18.3.1 Testing single bits

To test a bit in a variable, perform an AND operation using a constant in which the bit to
be tested is set to one.
If the result is zero, then the bit to be tested is also zero and thus the input terminal level
is low. If the result is not zero, then the bit is one.
The following example sets H10 to 1 if binary input DI03 is set to one.
Testing individual bit using H483 Testing individual bit using _GetSys()
#include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A #define INPUTS H1
#include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B #include <io.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
main() #include <iob.h> // MOVIDRIVE B
{ main()
if(( InputLevel & DI03 ) != 0) {
{ _GetSys( INPUTS, GS_INPUTS );
H10 = 1; if(( INPUTS & DI03 ) != 0)
} {
} H10 = 1;
}
}
18.3.2 Testing several bits

In order to test several bits of a variable for a certain state, you have use an AND oper-
ation to mask the bits to be tested and compare the result with a constant that corre-
sponds to the bit pattern to be tested.
The following example sets H10 to 1 if there is a 1 at DI01 and a 0 at DI03.
#include <const.h>
#define DI03 0b1000
#define DI01 0b0010
main()
{
if(( InputLevel & (DI03 ¦ DI01)) == 0b0010)
{
H10 = 1;
}
}

Querying an edge
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.4 Querying an edge

18.4.1 Example 1
In addition to the level of an input terminal, the rising and falling edge can also be queries
and evaluated. In the following sample programs, output DO02 is toggled to DI02 for a
positive or negative edge.
Positive edge query
#include <const.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
// Variables for edge generation

long lDI02RisingEdge,
lDI02LastState,
lDO02State,
lInputLevel;
main()
{
while(1)
{
// Read DI02
lInputLevel = (InputLevel & 0x00000004);
// Generate edge DI02

lDI02RisingEdge = lInputLevel && (lDI02LastState);
lDI02LastState = lInputLevel;
if(lDI02RisingEdge)
lDO02State = (!lDO02State)
// Set output DO02

if (lDO02State)
else
}
}

18 f
Querying an edge
i
Hz
P Hz
Negative edge query

#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
// Variables for edge generation

long lDI02FallingEdge,
lDI02LastState,
lDO02State,
lInputLevel;
main()
{
while(1)
{
// Read DI02

lDI02FallingEdge = !lInputLevel && (lDI02LastState);
if(lDI02FallingEdge)
lDO02State = (!lDO02State)
// Set output DO02

if (lDO02State)
else
}
}
INFORMATION
For When querying an edge, make sure to always use an auxiliary variable lInput-
Level that stores the state of the input terminal instead of using the input terminal it-
self to create the edge.
// Read DI02

Edge change at DI02 lDI02FallingEdge = !lInputLevel && (!DI02LastState);
If the input terminal was used instead of the lInputLevel auxiliary variable, the edge at
the input terminal could change at the point when the IPOSplus® program is between the
two program lines required for edge creation. This would mean that the edge change
would not be detected at the input terminal.
Also note that the edge of an input terminal can only be queried in the task in which the
edge was created. If this is not the case, if the individual tasks are not synchronous, the
edge may not be detected or it may be interpreted incorrectly.
If the edge of an input terminal is required in several tasks, the edge must be created
separately in each task.

Querying an edge
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.4.2 Example 2
In example 2, the program section within the if query is processed depending on the ris-
ing edge at DI02.
/*=============================================
IPOS source file
===============================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
long BinInputsNew, BinInputsOld;
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
// Reading binary inputs
_GetSys( BinInputsNew,GS_INPUTS );
// Querying an edge
if( (BinInputsNew & 0x4) && !(BinInputsOld & 0x4) ) // rising edge DI02
{
// program statement is located here
}
// Saving input states

BinInputsOld = BinInputsNew;
}
}

18 f
Value of a number
i
Hz
P Hz
18.5 Value of a number

The following sample program demonstrates how the IPOSplus® Compiler can be used
to create the absolute value of a number.
In task 1 a revision program is running that moves the drive relatively 400000 increments
CW and 400000 increments CCW.
In task 2 the actual speed is read and the amount of the actual speed is created. The
amount is stored in the variable lActSpeedAbsolute.
#include <constb.h> // MOVIDRIVE A
#define SEKUNDE 1000
SSPOSSPEED tSpeed;
long lActSpeed, lActSpeedAbsolute;
/*===================================
Task 2
===================================*/
Task2()
{
_GetSys( lActSpeed,GS_ACTSPEED );
// Calculate absolute speed value

if( lActSpeed < 0 )
lActSpeedAbsolute = -lActSpeed;
else
lActSpeedAbsolute = lActSpeed;
}
main()
{
// Initialization =================
// Positioning speed 500 rpm
tSpeed.CW = tSpeed.CCW = 5000;
_SetSys( SS_POSSPEED,tSpeed );
// Activate Task 2
_SetTask2( T2_START,Task2 );
// Main program loop ==============

while(1)
{
_GoRel( GO_WAIT,400000 );
_Wait( SEKUNDE );
_GoRel( GO_WAIT,-400000 );
_Wait( SEKUNDE );
}
}

MoviLink command
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.6 MoviLink command

The _MoviLink command exchanges data or parameters between units via SBus or
RS-485. It is also possible to read or change internal unit parameters.
The following three examples are to illustrate the function of the _MoviLink command:
• Reading an internal unit parameter: The set reference travel type is read via
_MoviLink.
• Writing a variable via SBus: If a MOVIDRIVE® unit is connected via SBus, variable
H200 is written depending on the status of the binary input DI17.
• Reading a parameter via SBus: The process data configuration of the inverter
connected by SBus is read with the address 10.
18.6.1 Reading an internal unit parameter

/*=========================================
Type of reference travel actually entered
in P903 is read in task 1 and written to
variable lRefType.
=========================================*/
/*=========================================
IPOS Source file
=========================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
// Definition of MOVLNK structures

MOVLNK tRefType;
MLDATA tData;
// Definition of Variables
long lRefType;
/*=========================================
Main program
=========================================*/
main()
{
// Initialization of MoviLink for bus transfer
tRefType.BusType = ML_BT_S1;
tRefType.Address = 253 // own inverter
tRefType.Format = ML_FT_PAR; // only parameters
tRefType.Service = ML_S_RD; // read
tRefType.Index = 8626; // P903 RefType
tRefType.DPointer = numof(tData); // data buffer
// Main program loop

while(1)
{
// Read type of reference travel
_MoviLink( tRefType );
lRefType = tData.ReadPar;
}
}

18 f
MoviLink command
i
Hz
P Hz
18.6.2 Writing a variable via SBus
/*=========================================
Variable H200 of inverter connected via
SBus is written depending on DI17 in task 1:
DI17 = 0 -> -1000
DI17 = 1 -> 1000
=========================================*/
/*=========================================
IPOS Source file
=========================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>

MOVLNK tBus;
MLDATA tBusData;
/*=========================================
Main program
=========================================*/
main()
{
tBus.BusType = ML_BT_SBUS1; // bus type SBus1
tBus.Address = 10; // SBus address 10
tBus.Service = ML_S_WRV; // write volatile
tBus.Index = 11200; // variable H200
tBus.DPointer = numof(tBusData); // data buffer

while(1)
{
if( DI17 )
{
tBusData.WritePar = 1000;
_MoviLink( tBus );
}
else
{
tBusData.WritePar = -1000;
_MoviLink( tBus );
}
}
}

MoviLink command
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.6.3 Reading a parameter via SBus
/*=========================================
Process data configuration of inverter
connected via SBus is written to variable
lPDData in task 1.
The received values correspond to the
following process data configuration:
0 = PARAM + 1PD
1 = 1PD
2 = PARAM + 2PD
3 = 2PD
4 = PARAM + 3PD
5 = 3PD
6 = PARAM + 6PD
7 = 6PD
8 = PARAM + 10PD
9 = 10PD
=========================================*/
/*=========================================
IPOS Source file
=========================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>

MOVLNK tPD;
MLDATA tData;
// Definition of variables
long lPDData;
/*=========================================
Main program
=========================================*/
main()
{
tPD.BusType = ML_BT_SBUS; // bus type SBus
tPD.Address = 10; // SBus address 10
tPD.Format = ML_FT_PAR; // only parameters
tPD.Service = ML_S_RD; // read
tPD.Index = 8451; // P090 PD data config
tPD.DPointer = numof(tData); // data buffer

while(1)
{
// Read PD configuration
_MoviLink( tPD );
lPDData = tData.ReadPar;
}
}

18 f
SCOM communication
i
Hz
P Hz
18.7 SCOM communication

The following example shows a program that sends two variables cyclically every 10 ms
via SBus. Another program receives the data that is sent.
With the _SBusCommDef command, you set up a data object for cyclical data transmis-
sion. The send object is described in the variable structure tBusTr, the receive object
is described in TBusRec.
In order to start the cyclical data transmission, you have to call up the _SBusCommOn
function for MOVIDRIVE® A and the _SBusCommState function for MOVIDRIVE® B.
18.7.1 Receiver
The receiver obtains the data from the SBus and stores it in the variables H305 and
H306.
/*=========================================
Get data object 1025 from SBus and store
the data in variable H305 and H306.
SHELL settings:
P813 SBus Address -> 2
P816 SBus Baudrate -> 500 kBaud
=========================================*/
/*=========================================
IPOS Source file
=========================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
// Definition of SCOM structures

SCREC tBusRec;
#define Data_Var1x H305
#define Data_Var2x H306
/*=========================================
Main program
=========================================*/
main()
{
// Initialization of SCOM transfer object
tBusRec.ObjectNo = 1060; // object number
tBusRec.Format = 8; // 8 byte
tBusRec.Dpointer = numof(Data_Var1x); // data buffer
// Start SCOM
_SBusCommDef( SCD_REC,tBusRec );
_SBusCommState( SCS_START1 ); // Start cyclic communication MOVIDRIVE B
// _SBusCommOn( ); // Start cyclic communication MOVIDRIVE A

while(1)
{
}
}

SCOM communication
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.7.2 Sender
The variables H208 and H209 are transmitted cyclically every 10 ms to another inverter.
The values of H208 and H209 can be changed using input DI17.
DI17 = 0: H208 = 111111 / H209 = 222222
DI17 = 1: H208 = 222222 / H209 = 444444
Task 2 is not implemented in this sample program.
/*=========================================
Variables H208 and H209 are sent cyclic
every 10 ms to another inverter via SBus.
The values of H208 and H209 can be altered
with input DI17.
DI17 = 0: H208 = 111111 / H209 = 222222
DI17 = 1: H208 = 222222 / H209 = 444444
SHELL settings:
P813 SBus Address -> 1
P816 SBus Baudrate -> 500 kBaud
=========================================*/
/*=========================================
IPOS Source file
=========================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
// Definition of SCOM structures

SCTRCYCL tBusTr;
#define Data_Var1 H208
#define Data_Var2 H209
/*=========================================
Main program
=========================================*/
main()
{
// Initialization of SCOM transfer object
tBusTr.ObjectNo = 1025; // object number
tBusTr.CycleTime = 10; // cycle time
tBusTr.Offset = 0; // offset
tBusTr.Format = 8; // 8 byte
tBusTr.DPointer = numof(Data_Var1); // data buffer
tBusTr.Result = 1111; // default value for control
// Initialize variables
Data_Var1 = 111111;
Data_Var2 = 222222;
// Start SCOM
_SBusCommDef( SCD_TRCYCL,tBusTr );
_SBusCommState( SCS_START1 ); // Start cyclic communication MOVIDRIVE B
// _SBusCommOn( ); // Start cyclic communication MOVIDRIVE A

18 f
Touch probe interrupt processing
i
Hz
P Hz

while(1)
{
if( DI17 )
{
Data_Var1 = 222222;
Data_Var2 = 444444;
}
else
Data_Var1 = 111111;
{
Data_Var2 = 222222;
}
}
}
18.8 Touch probe interrupt processing

Crates are transported to a filling station on a timing belt. A proximity sensor (DI02) de-
tects when the next crate arrives. This triggers an interrupt and the belt moves a speci-
fied remaining distance. The crate is then positioned directly under the filling station.
Once the crate has been filled a new cycle is started.
Input DI10 must be active during the entire cycle. If DI10 = 0, the timing belt stops sub-
ject to position control. When the drive is restarted (DI10 = 1) it completes the cycle.
The position values, ramp and speed are entered in the variables H11 ... H14.
H11 TP_Max_Pos Maximum target position if the touch probe input is not attenuated
H12 TP_Pos Remaining travel after the touch probe input has been attenuated.
H13 Speed Positioning speed in rpm.
H14 Ramp Positioning ramp in ms.

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
Timing belt with proximity sensor:

FS
DI10 = 1 PW TP_Max_Pos
TP
TP_Pos PTP
PD
SEW SEW
X13:3 / DIO2
506321163
PD: Pulse direction TP: TP event

DI10 = 1: Start TP_Pos: Remaining travel
PW: Pulse width PTP: Position after TP event
FS: Filling station X13:3/DI02: proximity switch
TP_Max_Pos: Maximum target position SEW: Crate on conveyor belt
/
*==============================================================================
Description:
A machine cycle is started via input DI10. The target position is the
current motor position (H511) plus TP_Max_Pos (H11). If the touch probe input
DI02
is not attenuated, the drive moves to this target position. If DI02 is attenu-
ated, a
new target position is calculated. The new target position is calculated from
the motor position
during the touch probe event TpPos1_Mot (H507) plus the remaining distance
TP_Pos (H12).
Settings in SHELL :
P601 Binary input DI02 IPOS input
P610 Binary input DI10 IPOS input
P700 Operating mode ... & IPOS
=============================================================================*/
#include <const.h>
#include <io.h>
#define CALCTARGET 0
#define BUSSY 1
#define STOP_AKTIV 2
#define State H10
#define TP_Max_Pos H11
#define TP_Pos H12
#define Speed H13
#define Ramp H14
#define h473_ipos_in_position (StatusWord & 0x00080000) //StatusWord & BIT19
long lPosition;

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
SSPOSRAMP tPosRamp;
/*=============================================
Interruptroutine Touchprobe
===============================================*/
Touchprobe()
{
lPosition = TpPos1_Mot + TP_Pos; //calculate new target position
_TouchProbe( TP_DIS1 ); //Deactivate touch probe
}
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
//Initialization
State = 0;
// Initialization of the interrupt routine for touch probe input DI02
_SetInterrupt( SI_TOUCHP1,Touchprobe );
//Main program loop
while(1)
{
tPosSpeed.CW = tPosSpeed.CCW = Speed *10; // Speed
tPosRamp.Up = tPosRamp.Down = Ramp; // Ramp
switch(State)
{
case CALCTARGET: if(DI10)
{
lPosition = ActPos_Mot + TP_Max_Pos;
_TouchProbe( TP_EN1_HI );
// Activate rising edge
State = BUSSY;
}
break;
case BUSSY: _GoAbs( GO_NOWAIT,lPosition );
// _Go command to position
if(h473_ipos_in_position && !DI10)
// Axis in position and DI10 = 0
State = CALCTARGET; // Calculate new target position
if (!h473_ipos_in_position && !DI10)
// Positioning cancelled by DI10 = 0
{
_AxisStop(AS_PSTOP);
State = STOP_AKTIV;
}
break;
case STOP_AKTIV: if(DI10) // DI10 = 1 --> Continue positioning
break;
State = BUSSY;
default: break;
}//switch(State)
}// while (1)
}// main

State machine, fieldbus control with emergency mode
f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.9 State machine, fieldbus control with emergency mode

A drive is to be controlled via the fieldbus in normal mode. However, in the event of a
bus fault, manual operation via terminal and analog value should be possible. Further,
provisions have to be made for a mixed mode (fieldbus setpoint + analog setpoint). The
operating mode is set using input terminals DI10 and DI11. The selected operating
mode is to be displayed on outputs DO10 and DO11. The following operating modes
should be provided:
INFORMATION
Use "IPOS" to assign PO data and base the control word on the ControlWord H484,
otherwise there will be a problem in mode 2 if the bus fails.
The following status chart shows the transitions between the operating modes:
Chart of mode statuses:
01
Mode 0 Mode 1
00
01
00 01
00
11 10
10
11
10
Mode 3 Mode 2
11
506325259

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
/*===================================================
Operating mode is selected with input terminals
DI10 and DI11 and indicated at the outputs
DO10 and DO11.
The following operating modes are possible:
Mode 0: Control and setpoint via field bus
Mode 1: Control via field bus, setpoint added to
analog value 1
Mode 2: Control via terminals, setpoint analog 1
Mode 3: reserved
SHELL settings:
P100 Setpoint source: BIPOL./FIX.SETPT
P101 Control signal source: TERMINALS
P600 ... P604 Binary input DI01 ... DI05: NO FUNCTION
P610 / P611 Binary input DI10 / DI11: IPOS INPUT
P630 / P631 Binary output DO10 / DO11: IPOS OUTPUT
P700 Operating mode 1: ... & IPOS
P870 ... P872 Setpoint description PO1 ... PO3: IPOS PO-DATA
P873 ... P875 Actual value description PI1 ... PI3: IPOS PI-DATA
P876 PO data enable: ON
===================================================*/
/*===================================================
IPOS Source file
===================================================*/
#include <constb.h>
#include <iob.h>
// Definition of structures
GSPODATA3 busdata; //structure for fieldbus process data
GSAINPUT analog; //structure for analog values
#define modeselect ((InputLevel > > 6) & 0x00000003)
#define setfixedsetpoint _SetSys( SS_N11,speed )
#define activatefixedsetpoint _BitSet( ControlWord, 4 )
#define deactivatefixedsetpoint _BitClear( ControlWord, 4 )
#define enable _BitClear( ControlWord, 1 )
#define rapidstop _BitSet( ControlWord, 1 )
// Declaration of variables
long mode, speed, offset;

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
/*===================================================
Main program
===================================================*/
main()
{
// Initialization =================================
// Initialize data structure bus data
busdata.BusType = 3; //bus type fieldbus
busdata.Len = 3;
busdata.PO1 = 0;
busdata.PO2 = 0;
busdata.PO3 = 0;
// Activate task 2
_SetTask2( T2_START,buscontrol );
// Main program loop ==============================

while(1)
{
}
}
/*===================================================
Task 2
===================================================*/
buscontrol()
{
_GetSys( busdata,GS_PODATA ); //get bus data
mode = modeselect; //read terminals for mode select
OptOutpIPOS = ((OutputLevel > > 3) & 0xFFFFFFFC) ¦ mode; //output mode
switch( mode )
{
case 0: mode_0();
break;
case 1: mode_1();
break;
case 2: mode_2();
break;
case 3: mode_3();
break;
}
}

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
/*===================================================
Functions
===================================================*/
mode_0()
{
if( busdata.PO1 == 6 )
enable;
else
rapidstop;
speed = busdata.PO2;
setfixedsetpoint;
activatefixedsetpoint;
}
mode_1()
{
if( busdata.PO1 == 6 )
enable;
else
rapidstop;
_GetSys( analog,GS_ANINPUTS );
offset = (analog.Input1 + 15) / 10;
speed = busdata.PO2 + offset;
setfixedsetpoint;
activatefixedsetpoint;
}
mode_2()
{
enable;
deactivatefixedsetpoint;
}
mode_3()
{
rapidstop;
}

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
18.9.1 Mode 0
Control and setpoint only via fieldbus
Control is performed exclusively via the fieldbus. A reduced control word (0 = rapid stop,
6 = enable) is also to be used. The setpoint is specified in bipolar terms via the fieldbus
(-1500 rpm ... +1500 rpm).
18.9.2 Mode 1
Control via fieldbus, setpoint = fieldbus setpoint + analog setpoint
Control is performed exclusively via the fieldbus. A reduced control word (0 = rapid stop,
6 = enable) is also to be used. The setpoint is the sum of the fieldbus setpoint
(bipolar –1500 rpm ... +1500 rpm) and the analog setpoint (–10 V ... +10 V = –1500 rpm
... +1500 rpm).
18.9.3 Mode 2
Control and setpoint via terminal or analog value.
The fieldbus is disabled.
18.9.4 Mode 3
Reserved
A rapid stop is performed until the mode is in use.

18 f
Compiler programming frame
i
Hz
P Hz
18.10 Compiler programming frame

The following sample program can be used as the basic frame when creating an
IPOSplus® program. It includes a state machine with four operating modes:
• DISABLE: No operating mode is selected
• JOGGING: Jog mode
• HOMING: Reference travel
• POSITIONING: Positioning mode
/*========================================================================
Name: Basic_program
Version: 03/07/21 (Y/M/D)
Function: Basic frame for an IPOS program with state machine
with entry and exit functions for control via
fieldbus or RS485 monitor with 3 I/O process data words
Settings required in SHELL:

---------------------------------------------------------------
P100 = P101 = RS485 for simulation with bus monitor,
= comment FIELDBUS and "#define" for "//constants" for operation with fieldbus ???
P6xx = no functions, exception, e.g. P602 = REFERENCE CAM per reference travel type
P700 = xxx & IPOS
P870 = CONTROL WORD 2
P871 = IPOS PO DATA
P872 = IPOS PO DATA
P873 = STATUS WORD 1
P874 = IPOS PI DATA
P875 = IPOS PI DATA
P916 = e.g. to LINEAR
P960 = OFF (replace if <> OFF: ActPos_Mot => ModActPos and TargetPos => ModTagPos
Drive control via PLC / bus monitor (process output data)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/DI00 = CONTROLLER INHIBIT
1. word = Control word 2

2. word = jog/positioning speed [1/10 rpm]
3. word = target position
Assignment of control word 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Controller inhibit/Enable
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Enable/Rapid stop
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Enable/stop
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Hold control
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Integrator switchover
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Parameter set switchover
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Fault reset
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Start reference travel
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Jog +
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Jog -
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Operating mode bit 0, 01 = Jog, 10 = Referencing 11 = Automatic
¦ ¦ ¦ Operating mode bit 1

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
Drive feedback to PLC/bus monitor (process input data)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. word = status word, user-specific
2. word = actual speed [1/10 rpm]
3. word = actual position in incr. (only low word)
Assignment of status word, user-specific
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ not assigned
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ inverter ready
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ IPOS reference (drive referenced)
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Target position reached
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Brake released
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Fault
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ Acknowledge operating mode bit 0, 01 = Jog, 10 = Referencing 11 = Automatic
¦ ¦ ¦ Acknowledge operating mode bit 1 (note: AKTIVE BA is acknowledged.)
Brief intorduction to using the bus monitor:
1.) Start bus monitor in MOVITOOLS MotionStudio
2.) Click the button Set PO data
3.) In the left-hand field, click on the tab pages PO1, PO2, PO3 and enter the setpoints
4.) click the "send" button
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is sample software, the functionality is NOT guaranteed.
Users accept that in using the sample software they do so at their own risk. SEW does not guarantee
any specific performance.
=============================================================================*/
#include <const.h> //Default path: c:\program files\sew\movitools\projects\include
#include <io.h> //Integrate names of system variables and constants
//Define variable ranges
#pragma var H128 H149 // (Default range for Compiler aux.variables H400 H419)
#pragma globals H380 H449 // (Default range for global long variables H420 H449)
#pragma initials H0 H127 // (Default range for initials H0 H127)
#pragma list // Assembler code with comments
// Constants
#define MY_PD_LENGTH 3 //3 Fieldbus with process data
//#define MY_FBUS_TYPE GS_BT_FBUS //GetSys to "Fieldbus" during operation
#define MY_FBUS_TYPE GS_BT_S0 //for bus monitor GetSys to "RS485"
#define MY_HALT 13 //Position "Stop" in IPOS control word H484
// Bit masks
#define MY_OP_MODE 0x18 //virtual inputs DI13/14, InputLevel Bit 9/10
#define MY_READY_TO_RUN (StatusWord & 0x4) //Ready from H473
#define MY_NO_ERROR (StatusWord & 0x2) //1 = no fault, 0 = fault from H473
#define MY_IN_POSITION (StatusWord & 0x80000) //IPOS drive has reached target position
#define MY_REFERENCED (StatusWord & 0x100000) //Drive referenced
#define MY_START_HOMING (lPA_ControlWordHigh & 0x1) //virt. terminal DI10 start reference travel
#define MY_START_POSITIONING (lPA_ControlWordHigh & 0x1) //virt. terminal DI10 start positioning
#define MY_JOG_PLUS (lPA_ControlWordHigh & 0x2) //virt. terminal DI11 jog mode +
#define MY_JOG_MINUS (lPA_ControlWordHigh & 0x4) //virt. terminal DI12 jog mode -
// Variables for setpoint/actual values, fieldbus control/status word
long lPA_ControlWordHigh; // Bits 8-15 of fieldbus control word 2
// =DI10 - DI17 of the virtual terminals = bits 6-13 in InputLevel (!!!)
SSPOSSPEED tPosVelocities; //Data structure for positioning speeds
long lPE_StatusWord; // User status word, bit 8-15 of the fieldbus status word
// =DO10 - DO17 of the virtual terminals = Bit 0-7 in OptOutpIPOS (!!!)
long lActPosition, // Actual position in incr
lScalingNumerator, // Numerator for scaling the position
lScalingDenominator, // Denominator for scaling the position
lActVelocity; // Actual speed in 1/10 rpm

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
// Variables for controlling operating modes

long lOpMode; //Operating mode currently selected
long lGlobalStateMachine; //Status of the global state machine
#define DISABLE 0 //global state machine: Status DISABLE
#define JOGGING 1 //global state machine: Status JOGGING
#define HOMING 2 //global state machine: Status HOMING
#define POSITIONING 3 //global state machine: Status POSITIONING
long lSubStateHoming; //Substatus in main status "Homing"
#define HOMING_STOPPED 0
#define HOMING_STARTED 1
#define HOMING_READY 2
long lSubStatePositioning; //Substatus in main status "Positioning"
#define POSITIONING_STOPPED 0
#define POSITIONING_STARTED 1
// general variables
long lDriveState; //Inverter status, corresponds to the 7-segment display of MDx
long lErrorCode; //Error code
// Process data data structures
GSPODATA10 tPA; //Output data (PLC -> Drive)
SSPIDATA10 tPE; //Input data (Drive -> PLC)
/*=============================================
===============================================*/
main()
{
_WdOn( 5000 ); //Activate watchdog => in the event of error code 41
while (!MY_READY_TO_RUN)
{ //max. 5000 ms wait until the inverter firmware is fully started up
}
_WdOff( ); //Deactivate Watchdog startup
/*-------------------------------------
Initialization
--------------------------------------*/
// Initialize main state

lGlobalStateMachine = 0;
// Initialize scaling for the position

lScalingNumerator = 1;
lScalingDenominator = 1;
// Initialize fieldbus variables for Getsys and Setsys commands

tPA.BusType = MY_FBUS_TYPE; //Process data operation via source see above
tPA.Len = tPE.Len = MY_PD_LENGTH; //PD length see above
// Activate task2
_SetTask2(T2_START, fnTask2); //To debug task 2, add inverse slashes here and delete them below

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
/*-------------------------------------
Main program loop
--------------------------------------*/
while(1)
{
//Process main state machine
switch (lGlobalStateMachine)
{
// Either no operating mode has been selected, or a selection is not possible
case DISABLE:
break;
// "Jog" mode
case JOGGING: fnJogging();
break;
// "Referencing" mode
case HOMING:fnHoming();
break;
// "Positioning" mode
case POSITIONING: fnPositioning();
break;
//Programming error - invalid status
default: _AxisStop(AS_PSTOP);
lGlobalStateMachine = lOpMode = -1;
break;
} // End switch (lGlobalStateMachine)
} //End while (1)
} // End main

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
/*=============================================
= Function: fnJogMode()
= Jog axis. With 2 inputs, the axis can be moved to the right and to the left.
= If the jog mode is not set, the drive remains in hold control. If the jog mode is activated when
the drive is released
= the main state machine would spring to state 99.
===============================================*/
fnJogging()
{
// Instructions for entering the main state "Jogging"
// Acknowledge mode
_BitSet(lPE_StatusWord,11);
_BitClear(lPE_StatusWord,12);
// cyclical processing as long as the main state is set to "Jogging"

do
{
// Import PO data
_GetSys( tPA.BusType ,GS_PODATA );
if (MY_JOG_PLUS&&(!MY_JOG_MINUS))
{
tPosVelocities.CW = tPosVelocities.CCW = tPA.PO2;
_SetSys( SS_POSSPEED, tPosVelocities );
TargetPos = ActPos_Mot + 409600;
}
if (MY_JOG_MINUS&&(!MY_JOG_PLUS))
{
TargetPos = ActPos_Mot - 409600;
}
if ((MY_JOG_MINUS && MY_JOG_PLUS)¦¦((!MY_JOG_MINUS)&&(!MY_JOG_PLUS)))

} while (lGlobalStateMachine==JOGGING);
// Instructions for leaving the main state "Jogging"

// Stopping the drive
// Clear mode
}// end fnJogging()

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
/*=============================================
= Function: fnHoming()
= Axis reference travel
= Parameters of the group 97x are effective
= A positive edge on REF-START starts a new reference travel
===============================================*/
fnHoming()
{
// Instructions for entering the main state "Homing"
// Define substate
lSubStateHoming = HOMING_STOPPED;
// Acknowledge mode
// cyclical processing as long as the main state is set to "Homing"

do
{
// Import PO data
switch (lSubStateHoming)
{
case HOMING_STOPPED: if (MY_START_HOMING)
{
_Go0(GO0_U_NW_CAM);
lSubStateHoming = HOMING_STARTED;
}
break;
case HOMING_STARTED: if (!MY_START_HOMING)
{
_Go0(GO0_RESET);
}
if (MY_REFERENCED)
{
lSubStateHoming = HOMING_READY;
}
break;
case HOMING_READY: if (!MY_START_HOMING)
{
}
break;
}
} while (lGlobalStateMachine==HOMING);
// Instructions for leaving the main state "Homing"
if (lSubStateHoming==HOMING_STARTED)
{
_Go0(GO0_RESET);
}
// Clear mode
}// End fnHoming

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
/*=============================================
= Function: fnPositioning()
= Positioning
===============================================*/
fnPositioning()
{
// Instructions for entering the main state "Positioning"
// Define substate
lSubStatePositioning = POSITIONING_STOPPED;
// Acknowledge mode
// cyclical processing as long as the main state is set to "Positioning"

do
{
// Import PO data
switch (lSubStatePositioning)
{
case POSITIONING_STOPPED: if (MY_START_POSITIONING)
{
TargetPos = (lScalingNumerator * tPA.PO3)
/ lScalingDenominator;
lSubStatePositioning = POSITIONING_STARTED;
}
break;
case POSITIONING_STARTED: if (MY_START_POSITIONING)
{
TargetPos = (lScalingNumerator * tPA.PO3)
/ lScalingDenominator;
}
else
{
lSubStatePositioning = POSITIONING_STOPPED;
}
break;
}
}while (lGlobalStateMachine==POSITIONING);
// Instructions for leaving the main state "Positioning"

if (lSubStatePositioning==POSITIONING_STARTED)
// Clear mode
}// End fnPositioning()

f 18
i
Hz
P Hz
/*=============================================
= Function: fnTask2()
= For time-critical program sections that can run asynchronously
= from task one
=
===============================================*/
fnTask2()
{
// Read inverter state

_GetSys( lDriveState,GS_SYSSTATE );
// Read error number
_GetSys( lErrorCode,GS_ERROR );
// Import PO data
// Create branch distributor/ Select operating mode

// Virtual fieldbus terminal can only be used if a DIO or DIP is not inserted
// in this case, use "lPA_ControlWordHigh = tPA.PI1 > > 8;"
// otherwise "lPA_ControlWordHigh = InputLevel > > 9;" //Move Bit0 to Bit 0
lPA_ControlWordHigh = tPA.PO1 > > 8; //Move Bit8 to Bit 0
lOpMode = (lPA_ControlWordHigh & MY_OP_MODE )> > 3; //Bit 3,4 = Operating mode
// Create status transitions

switch (lGlobalStateMachine)
{
// Either no operating mode has been selected, or a selection is not possible
case DISABLE: if (lDriveState> =0xA)
{
if (lOpMode==JOGGING)
lGlobalStateMachine = JOGGING;
if (lOpMode==HOMING)
lGlobalStateMachine = HOMING;
if (lOpMode==POSITIONING)
lGlobalStateMachine = POSITIONING;
}
break;
// "Jog" mode
case JOGGING: if (lDriveState> =0xA)
{
if (lOpMode==DISABLE)
lGlobalStateMachine = DISABLE;
}
else
break;

18 f
i
Hz
P Hz
// "Referencing" mode
case HOMING: if (lDriveState> =0xA)
{
}
else
break;
// "Positioning" mode
case POSITIONING:if ((lDriveState> =0xA)&&(MY_REFERENCED))
{
}
else
break;
//Programming error - invalid status
default: _AxisStop(AS_PSTOP);
lGlobalStateMachine = lOpMode = -1;
break;
}// End switch (lGlobalStateMachine)
//Regenerate process input data and send to PLC

fnBuildStatusWord(); //Create status word
_GetSys(lActVelocity,GS_ACTSPEED); //Read actual speed

tPE.PI2 = lActVelocity; // Output actual speed
lActPosition = ActPos_Mot; // Actual position

tPE.PI3 = (lScalingDenominator * lActPosition) / lScalingNumerator; //Actual position
_SetSys(SS_PIDATA, tPE.Len); //Send PD

}
/*=============================================
= Function: fnBuildStatusWord()
= Here, bit 0-7 of the status word is generated
= if an error occurs, the other outputs are
= replaced by the error code.
===============================================*/
fnBuildStatusWord()
{
_BitMove(lPE_StatusWord,1, StatusWord,2); //Inverter ready
_BitMove(lPE_StatusWord,2, StatusWord,20); //IPOS referenced
_BitMove(lPE_StatusWord,3, StatusWord,19); //Target position reached
_BitMoveNeg(lPE_StatusWord,4, StatusWord,1); //Error
if ( !MY_NO_ERROR )
{ // if an error occurs, overwrite the status bits of the operating modes with the error code
lPE_StatusWord = lPE_StatusWord & (lErrorCode << 8);

}
tPE.PI1 = lPE_StatusWord ;
}//end fnBuildStatusWord()

Compiler – Error Messages kVA n
f 19
i
Hz
P Hz
19 Compiler – Error Messages

The source text errors that are recognized by the pre-processor and the Compiler are
divided into error classes and error codes.
Error class Error code Possible cause
STATEMENT NOT FOUND Statements missing from body of loop
SEMICOLON Semicolon missing after statement
CONDITIONAL COLON Colon ":" missing from conditional statement
BLOCK END Block without closing bracket " }"
BREAK SEMICOLON Semicolon ";" missing after break
CASE ILLEGAL TYPE Case must be followed by constant
COLON Case constant must be followed by colon
DEFAULT Default branch contains error(s) or is in wrong position
COMPILER Error text Internal system error (contact SEW)
CONTINUE SEMICOLON Semicolon ";" missing after continue
DECLARE IDENTIFIER Identifier after #declare is invalid
NO VARIABLE #declare must describe a variable
TOO MANY #DEFINE Number of #define exceeds resources
DEFINE IDENTIFIER Identifier after #define is invalid
SYMBOL SEQUENCE Symbol sequence after #define is invalid
TOO MANY #define Number of #define exceeds resources
DO WHILE while is missing after do statement
OPEN BRACKET Open round bracket "(" missing after while
CLOSE BRACKET Close round bracket ")" missing after while
SEMICOLON Semicolon ";" missing after while
FACTOR CLOSE BRACKET Close bracket ")" missing after expression in brackets
FCT.CALL CLOSE BRACKET Close bracket ")" missing after function name
NUMBER ARGS The number of arguments is incorrect
FOR OPEN BRACKET Open round bracket "(" missing after for
SEMICOLON Semicolon ";" missing between for expressions
CLOSE BRACKET Close round bracket ")" missing after for
FUNCTION OPEN BRACKET Round bracket(s) missing for function declaration.
CLOSE BRACKET
IDENTIFIER NOT FOUND Unknown identifier
IF OPEN BRACKET Open round bracket "(" missing after if
CLOSE BRACKET Close round bracket ")" missing after if
CONSTANT ILLEGAL TYPE Syntax of dec., binary or hex constant is incorrect
PRAGMA IDENTIFIER Invalid keyword after #pragma
VARIABLE RANGE Variable range is not permitted
PREPROCESSOR NO VARIABLE Variable name must follow numof
TOO MANY #include Too many #include directives nested
SOURCE TEXT TOO Source text exceeds maximum permitted length
LONG Invalid header file name
HEADER FILE NAME File cannot be opened
OPEN FILE Unexpected file end reached
CLOSE FILE Source text row too long
LINES TOO LONG
RETURN SEMICOLON Semicolon ";" missing after return
SWITCH OPEN BRACKET No open round bracket "(" after switch or open bracket
CLOSE BRACKET "{" missing from block
Close round bracket ")" missing after switch and close
brackets "}" missing after block
UNDEF IDENTIFIER Identifier after #undef is invalid
WHILE OPEN BRACKET Open round bracket "(" missing after while
CLOSE BRACKET Close round bracket ")" missing after while

kVA n Assembler – Introduction
20 f
Setting the user travel units
i
Hz
P Hz
20 Assembler – Introduction
20.1 Setting the user travel units
In the program header of the Assembler, the travel distance factors "NUMERATOR",
"DENOMINATOR" and "UNIT" can be entered to determine the user travel unit (e.g.
mm, rev.).
20.1.1 Travel distance factors NUMERATOR/DENOMINATOR

IPOSplus® always operates with 4096 increments/motor revolution The user may wish
to program travel commands in user units other than increments/motor revolution (e.g.
mm, revs.). In this case, the "NUMERATOR" and "DENOMINATOR" travel distance fac-
tors must be set as described below. Exceptions to this are travel commands with vari-
ables as their argument. These can only be specified in increments/motor revolution.
The conversion is carried out as follows:
NUMERA-
TOR
Increments = · User travel unit
DENOMI-
NATOR

Assembler – Introduction kVA n
f 20
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
If the numerator or denominator are non-integer values, the conversion can be made
more accurate if both numerator and denominator are multiplied by the same expan-
sion factor (e.g. 10, 100, 1000, etc.). Doing so will not limit the travel range.
Travel distance Number of increments the motor moves to travel a defined distance.
factor NUMERA-
Setting range: 0 ..... 1 ..... 231 - 1
TOR
Travel distance Defined travel distance in user travel units.

factor DENOMINA-
Setting range: 0 ..... 1 ..... 231 - 1
TOR
Example 12376 increments correspond to 120 mm. NUMERATOR = 12376, DENOMINATOR =

120, UNIT = mm.
Example The following three examples will demonstrate how the travel factors numerator/denom-
inator of a linear unit are set for position specification:
• Example A: Position specification in mm for the linear axis
• Example B: Position specification in increments
• Example C: Position specification in output revolutions
Mechanical structure of the linear unit
d = 100 mm x [mm]
M i=4
511398411
Example A: mm The defined distance to be calculated is one revolution of the driven gear.
• Travel distance factor NUMERATOR = Increments/motor revolution × gear ratio i =
4096 × 4 = 16384
• Travel distance factor DENOMINATOR = Output diameter × π = 314.15926
The travel distance factor DENOMINATOR is not a whole number, so the accuracy of
the conversion can be increased by using an expansion factor. The expansion factor
should be as high as possible, however, the result must not exceed the setting range
(expansion factor e.g. 100 000).
• Travel distance factor NUMERATOR = 16384 × 100000 = 1638400000
• Travel distance factor DENOMINATOR = 314.15926 × 100000 = 31415926
INFORMATION
Since π is not a finite number, the target position specification will always contain er-
rors.

20 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Example B: Incre- • Travel distance factor NUMERATOR = 1

ments
• Travel distance factor DENOMINATOR = 1
Example C: Out- • Travel distance factor NUMERATOR = Increments/motor revolution × gear ratio i =
put revolutions 4096 × 4 = 16384
Practical informa- Practical information for determining the travel distance factor during startup.
tion
e.g. setting the user travel units in mm.
1. Set both the travel distance factors NUMERATOR and DENOMINATOR to the value
1 (→ user travel units = increments).
2. Optional number of user travel units (increments), e.g. 100 000 increments.
3. Measure the covered distance in point 2 of the plant e.g.:
• Starting position = 1000 mm
• Target position = 1453 mm
• Distance covered = 453 mm
4. Enter the travel distance factors in the program header of the Assembler:
• Travel distance factor NUMERATOR = 100 000
20.1.2 UNIT
All travel distance entries are displayed with a unit in the program window.
This unit can be entered in the program header for UNIT. It can be up to five characters
in length.
INFORMATION
This is a merely symbolic entry that does not affect the functionality of the drive

First steps
f 20
i
Hz
P Hz
20.2 First steps

20.2.1 Starting the IPOSplus® Assembler
The IPOSplus® Assembler is started from the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.
• Start the IPOSplus® Assembler just like you would start the IPOSplus® Compiler.
Refer to section: "Step 1: Starting the IPOSplus® Compiler with MOVITOOLS
MotionStudio® (page 143)"
The following program interface is displayed when you start the IPOSplus® Assembler.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
511471115
[1] Menu bar

[2] Toolbar
[3] Program window
[4] Variable window
[5] Status bar

20 f
First steps
i
Hz
P Hz
20.2.2 Creating a new program

To familiarize yourself with the IPOSplus® Assembler you will write your first program to
increment a variable from 0 to 99 in steps of 500 ms.
511514635
Assembler commands are entered using the insert tool. To open the dialog box of the
insert tool, click the icon .
511519755
To insert the first Assembler command in the program, in the [main menu] window, click
on [Set commands] and choose "SET H = K" from the window on the right.
In the lower section of the dialog box, enter the jump label of the command line, the tar-
get variable and the value (constant) to which the variable should be set. Click on [OK]
to close the insert tool and insert the command in the program.

First steps
f 20
i
Hz
P Hz
Now use the insert tool to insert the remaining commands in the program. The following
table lists the parameters for all the program commands. If you need information on a
command, highlight it and press the <F1> key.
Command Label Target Condition Constant Destination
SET 1 200 0
JMP 2 200 > 99 1
ADD 200 1
WAIT 500
JMP UNCONDI- 2
TIONED
20.2.3 Compiling and starting the program

To generate an Assembler program in a form that the inverter can understand, the
source code must be compiled.
To do so, choose [Program]/[Compile] or click on the icon in the toolbar.
If the program is compiled successfully, this information is displayed in the status bar.
511550475
As the next step, the compiled program must be loaded into the inverter. To do so,
choose [Program]/[Compile + download] or click on the icon in the toolbar.
The status bar shows whether the program has been downloaded successfully.
511552011
plus®
The IPOS program is now stored in the unit's non-volatile memory.
IPOSplus® programs can also be downloaded from one MOVIDRIVE® to another
MOVIDRIVE® using a DBG60B/DBG11B keypad. This is done using parameters P807
(Copy MDX -> DBG) and P806 (Copy DBG -> MDX).
A program can be started once it has been downloaded to the inverter. Choose [Run]/
[Start]. Alternatively, you can click on the icon in the toolbar. Once the program has
been started, a green arrow (program pointer) is displayed in the project window to high-
light the program line currently being processed. The display in the toolbar changes from
PSTOP to START.
To stop the programs in task 1, task 2 and task 3, choose [Run]/[Stop] from the menu
bar. Alternatively, you can click on the icon in the toolbar. Once the program has been
stopped (all tasks), the program pointer turns red and remains in the first command line
of task 1. The status display for the program sequence in the tool bar changes from
START to PSTOP.

kVA n Assembler – Editor
21 f
i
Hz
P Hz
21 Assembler – Editor
The Editor is displayed after the IPOSplus® Assembler has been started:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
511872523
[1] Menu bar [4] Variable window

[2] Toolbar [5] Status bar
[3] Program window
The status bar shows whether the unit is online or offline. It also displays the program
memory content as a percentage and the number of program lines selected.
There are three input fields under the toolbar:
• Numerator
• Denominator
• Unit
Position setpoints can be scaled using the numerator/denominator ratio, which means
that they can be specified in units defined by the user. Positions specified via variables
cannot be scaled using this ratio.

Assembler – Editor kVA n
Example
f 21
i
Hz
P Hz
21.1 Example
The encoder of a motor supplies 4096 increments per revolution. There is a spindle on
the motor with a slope of 10 mm/revolution that moves a trolley horizontally.
The user wants to specify the positions to which the drive is to move in mm.
In this case, set the numerator and denominator as follows.
• Numerator: 4096
• Denominator: 10
• Unit: mm
When you insert a positioning command, you can now enter the required position in mm,
as long as the value is a constant.
The operating states of the user programs task 1, task 2 and task 3 are:
• START (program is running)
• PSTOP (Program stopped);
• BREAK (program is only processed up to the marked line)
• STEP (program is processed line-by-line by pressing the F7 key).
21.2 Creating programs

21.2.1 Inserting command lines
Open the insert tool by clicking the icon, by pressing the <Ins> key or by choosing
[Edit]/[Insert command...] from the menu bar.
511877899
All commands available in IPOSplus® can be selected in the insert tool.

21 f
Compiling and downloading
i
Hz
P Hz
When you select a command, an input screen appears in which you have to enter the
arguments available for the selected function. Once you have entered all the arguments,
press [OK] to insert the command in the program.
You can use the <Del> key to remove selected command lines from the program.
In the same way, you can insert entire command blocks by highlighting the required sec-
tion with the mouse and choosing [Edit]/[Copy] and [Edit]/[Insert] or delete them by
choosing [Edit]/[Cut].
You can change an inserted command by double-clicking the command line in the proj-
ect window or by choosing [Edit]/[Edit command...] from the menu bar.
Save the compiled Assembler program by choosing [File]/[Save...].
511934475
In MOVIDRIVE® A, Assembler programs are saved with the extension *.MDX. In

MOVIDRIVE® B they are saved with the extension *.AS0. In the dialog box, enter the
name and directory of the Assembler program.
INFORMATION
MDX files created using the Assembler only contain program code and no parame-
ters.
MDX files, created for storing parameters using SHELL, contain both parameters and
program code.
Therefore, you must be careful when overwriting existing MDX files.
21.3 Compiling and downloading

To generate an Assembler program in a form that the inverter can understand, the
source code must be compiled.
To do so, choose [Program]/[Compile] or click on the icon in the toolbar.
If the program is compiled successfully, this information is displayed in the status bar.
511940235
As the next step, the compiled program must be loaded into the inverter. To do so,
choose [Program]/[Compile + download] or click on the icon in the toolbar.

Starting/stopping programs
f 21
i
Hz
P Hz
The status bar shows whether the program has been downloaded successfully.
512034955
The IPOSplus® program is now stored in the unit's non-volatile memory.

IPOSplus® programs can also be downloaded from one MOVIDRIVE® to another
MOVIDRIVE® using a DBG keypad. This is done using parameters P807 (Copy MDX -
> DBG) and P806 (Copy DBG -> MDX).
21.4 Starting/stopping programs

A program can be started once it has been downloaded to the inverter. Choose [Run]/
[Start] or the. icon in the toolbar. Once the program has been started, a green arrow
(program pointer) is displayed in the project window to highlight the program line to be
processed. The display in the toolbar changes from PSTOP to START.
To stop the programs in task 1, task 2 and task 3, choose [Run]/[Stop] or the icon in
the toolbar. Once the program has been stopped the program pointer turns red and re-
mains in the first command line. The status display for task 1, task 2, and task 3 in the
toolbar changes from START to PSTOP.
21.4.1 Variable window

All variables and their content are displayed in the variable window. Double-click on a
variable to change the contact of the variable directly using the keyboard. Press the
Enter key to adopt the new value.
21.5 File/unit comparison

Use the comparison function of the IPOSplus® Assembler to compare an Assembler pro-
gram loaded in the Editor window with a program loaded in the inverter.
To call the comparison function, choose [Program]/[Compare with inverter] or click on
the icon in the toolbar.
If the programs match, the dialog box on the left below will be displayed. If the programs
do not match, the dialog box on the right will be displayed.
512040331
21.6 Debugger
The integrated debugger is a tool used to run through a program in single step mode.
Once the program has been downloaded to the inverter, you can choose from three
functions.

21 f
Debugger
i
Hz
P Hz
21.6.1 Execute to cursor

Choose [Run]/[Run to cursor] or the icon in the toolbar to run the program up to the
current cursor position.
21.6.2 Single step

Choose [Run]/[Single step] or the icon in the toolbar to process the program line in
which the cursor is currently positioned.
Choose [Run]/[Skip] or the icon in the toolbar to skip the program line in which the
cursor is currently positioned. The cursor jumps to the next program line. This function
is helpful if you want to skip function calls in a program for test purposes.
You can start the program by clicking the icon in the tool bar, function key F5 or the
[Stop] menu command from the [Run] menu in the menu bar can be used to stop and
reset the program at any time during debugging.
Click the icon from the toolbar or choose [Run]/[Start] form the menu bar to start the
program from the current cursor position at any time during the debugging process.
You can interrupt a running program by pressing [Alt+F5]. The execution bar is now po-
sitioned at the command that is to be executed next.
The program can also be interrupted by pressing the F4 key [Run to cursor]. The pro-
gram is stopped in the command line in which the cursor is positioned.

Loading the program from the inverter
f 21
i
Hz
P Hz
21.7 Loading the program from the inverter

In the IPOSplus® Assembler you have the option of uploading a program stored in the
inverter. To do so, choose [Program]/[Upload] or click on the icon in the toolbar. The
upload process deletes the previous Assembler program that you had open.
Remark lines are not saved in the inverter and as a result are lost during the upload pro-
cess.
21.8 Overview of the icons

The functions that can be called up from the tool bar are listed below:
Symbol Menu item Description
File -> open Opens a program
File -> save Saves a program
Program -> compile Compiles a Program
Program -> Compile + download Compiles a program and downloads it into

the inverter
Program -> Upload Uploads a program from the inverter
Program -> compare with unit Compares program in the editor with the
program in the inverter
Run -> Start Starts the IPOSplus® program
Run -> stop Stops the IPOSplus® program
Run -> run to cursor Runs program to where the cursor is posi-
tioned
Run -> single step Runs single step
Run -> skip Skips an instruction (statement)
Edit -> Insert command Calls insert tool
File -> Print Prints a program
Help -> user manual Open online help

kVA n Assembler – Programming
22 f
Basics
i
Hz
P Hz
22 Assembler – Programming
22.1 Basics
The IPOSplus® Assembler is part of the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio program package.
The Assembler program is entered over a number of screens.
22.1.1 Program header

For user programs in which positioning commands are used, enter the user travel units
in the program header.
22.1.2 Task 1 / Task 2 / Task 3

The IPOSplus® positioning and sequence control system allows a user program to be
spilt into 3 subroutines (task 1 / task 2 / task 3) which can run in parallel and indepen-
dently of one another.
22.1.3 Comments
Like command lines, you can insert comments anywhere in the user program.
Remarks can only be saved on the PC; they are not transferred when the program is
downloaded to the inverter.
22.1.4 Program branches

Program branches are possible with jump flags (M...) in conjunction with jump com-
mands (JMP... M...). Jump flags can be inserted before any command line.
22.1.5 Subroutine system

Subroutines can be called with a CALL command (CALL M...). The corresponding jump
flags (M...) are inserted before the first command of the subroutine. A subroutine ends
with a return command (RET). The return command causes program processing to jump
back to the line below the CALL command. The following program lines will then be pro-
cessed. Nested subroutines are possible; but a maximum of 16 layers should not be ex-
ceeded.
INFORMATION
Do not exit subroutines by jumping to a main program or another subroutine. If a sub-
routine is to be exited conditionally, this must be done by jumping to the end (RET) of
the subroutine.

Assembler – Programming kVA n
Basics
f 22
i
Hz
P Hz
22.1.6 Program loops

Program loops consist of a loop start (LOOPB) and a loop end (LOOPE). The number
of loop cycles is determined in the argument of the LOOP command. Nested loops are
possible; but a maximum of 16 layers should not be exceeded.
INFORMATION
Do not exit program loops with a jump command. Jump commands are allowed within
a program loop.
22.1.7 Positioning commands

The IPOSplus® positioning enables you to perform point-to-point positioning with
MOVIDRIVE® and MOVIDRIVE®compact drives.
22.1.8 Binary/analog inputs/outputs

Binary and analog inputs/outputs are processed with variables. Furthermore, binary in-
puts can be evaluated directly using a jump command.
22.1.9 Access to system values/parameters

The drive parameters listed in the section "IPOSplus® Parameters" as arguments for the
GETSYS and SETSYS commands are referred to below as system values. These sys-
tem values can be used as follows:
• Read with the GETSYS command, e.g. active current and actual speed.
• Reading via PO data items.
• Writing with the SETSYS command, e.g. fixed setpoint.
• Writing fieldbus data via PI data items.
• System values can also be read and written using the system variables H458 ... H511
for MOVIDRIVE® A / H458 ... H560 for MOVIDRIVE® B.
• The MOVLNK command enables you to change all parameters of the directly
connected inverter or to exchange parameters with other inverters via RS-485.
• The MOVLNK command enables you to change all parameters of the MQX and
MOVIMOT® or to exchange parameters with other inverters via SBus or RS-485.

22 f
Basics
i
Hz
P Hz
22.1.10 Variables
All variables (H0 - H1023) can be read and written. The variables have a value range
from -231 ... +231 - 1. If the variables H0 ... H127 are entered in the variable list or written
in the IPOSplus® program with the "MEM" command, they are stored in a non-volatile
memory as soon as they are entered. Variables H458 – H511 contain frequently used
unit values which are updated cyclically (every 1 ms). These variables are referred to
below as system variables and are explained in more detail in section "Overview of Sys-
tem Variables".
INFORMATION
Be careful when writing system variables! The effects are described in the section
"IPOSplus® with Options".
22.1.11 Program line

Command syntax:
<M:xx> <Com- <Argument 1> <Operator> <Argument 2> <M:yy>
mand>
Jump destination label; only used with
jump commands
Second argument; not used in all com-
mands
Operator (only used in arithmetic com-
mands)
First argument; used in all commands
Command; defines the operation to be

performed; used in every command line
Jump address label; can be inserted in
every command line
The write command for variables and indices distinguishes between non-volatile and
volatile storage. The variables H0 ... H127 can be written and stored using both func-
tions; H128 ... H511 can only be stored in the volatile memory.
Variables H0 ... H127 are always stored in the non-volatile memory via MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio and the keypad. The SET statement of a value for a variable in an
IPOSplus® program is always stored in the volatile memory. To store the current status
in the non-volatile memory, the command MEM must be performed in the IPOSplus® pro-
gram.
INFORMATION
When using the MEM command note that the variables stored in the non-volatile mem-
ory (H0 – 127) and all parameters are not written cyclically. This is because the num-
ber of storage operations with the storage medium EEPROM is restricted to 105 stor-
age operations.

Binary inputs/outputs
f 22
i
Hz
P Hz
22.2 Binary inputs/outputs

22.2.1 Binary inputs
Direct query The terminal level of binary inputs can be queried in the IPOSplus® program using jump
commands. To do so, in the input screen select the terminal level (HI/LO) that should
lead to the jump command being performed. Terminals that are to be used for this func-
tion must be identified with a "1" in the terminal mask. All defined terminals must have
the selected terminal level to fulfill the jump condition for the jump command.
Mxx: JMP HI/LO I 00 00000000 000000 Mxx
Jump destina-
tion
DI00
MOVITRAC® 07 only
has the terminals
DI05 DI01 ... DI05
DI10 MQX only has the

terminals DI00/DI01
DI17 or DI02/DI03
Level
Example Jump to label 20 if the inputs DI03 and DI04 have a high signal (1), otherwise the next
command line is processed:
512410763

22 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Query via system The terminal level of the binary inputs in the basic unit and any installed option are rep-
variable resented cyclically in the system variables H483 INPUT LVL (MOVIDRIVE® A) / H520
INPUT LVL B (MOVIDRIVE® B). In the process, the bits of the H483 system variable
are each assigned to one hardware input.
The assignment of the H483 system variables for MOVIDRIVE® A / H520 for
MOVIDRIVE® B to the binary input terminals in described in the section "IPOSplus® Vari-
ables / Overview of the system variables".
The binary inputs in the IPOSplus® program can be queried using the value of the vari-
ables H483/H520. This is useful for querying inputs to be used to transfer a binary-
coded, for example, for selecting a table position.
Table 3: Example of transmitting a binary-coded value via input terminals of MOVIDRIVE® A
Example: Reading inputs Unit's binary inputs
Terminal designation DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
Significance 25 24 23 22 21 20
Terminal level 1 0 0 0 1 1
Evaluation 1 × 25 0 × 24 0 × 23 0 × 22 1 × 21 1 × 20
Variable value H4831) 32 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 2 + 1 = 35
1) If all DIO11A/DIP11A input terminals and control word 2 are set to level "0".
Binary terminals represented with the higher value bits of variables H483/H520 can also
be queried using a combination of the BMOV and JMP commands. This is the case
when two options are installed at the same time with terminal expansion.

f 22
i
Hz
P Hz
22.2.2 Binary outputs

Reading binary The terminal level of the binary inputs in the basic unit and any installed option are rep-
outputs resented cyclically in the system variables H482 OUTPUT LVL (MOVIDRIVE® A) / H521
OUTPUT LVL B (MOVIDRIVE® B). In the process, the bits of the H482 system variable
are each assigned to one hardware output.
The individual terminal levels of binary outputs can be evaluated with the BMOV com-
mand in the IPOSplus® program. The BMOV command copies a bit from system variable
H482 (OUTPUT LVL) / H521 (OUTPUT LVL B) to any bit position (significance) of an-
other variable. The terminal level of output DO02 is queried using the following sample
program. To do this, bit 1 of system variable H482 is copied to bit 0 (significance 20) of
H200. This makes it easy to query (0 or 1) the terminal level with a JMP command.
SET H200 = 0
BMOV H200.0 = H482.1
JMP H200 == 1 ,Mxx
Alternatively, one or more terminal levels of the binary outputs can be filtered using a
logical operation with the system variables H 482 (OUTPUT LVL) / H521 (OUTPUT LVL
B). The terminal level of output DO02 is queried using the following sample program:
M1 : SET H200 = 2
AND H200 & H482
JMP H200 == 2 ,M1
The result of the AND operation is written to the first variable, that is H200. Therefore,
the first argument must be a variable.
AND operation of H200 and H482
H200 = 2 00000000010 (= DO01)
H482 = 11011100110 (= current status of the binary outputs)
Result 00000000010 (= the jump is performed, as H200 = 2)
Setting the binary To set the outputs, the binary outputs (parameters 620/621 (MOVIDRIVE® A), 620
outputs ... 626 (MOVIDRIVE® B), 630 ... 637) must be set to "IPOS OUTPUT".
Digital outputs are set using the system variables:
• H 480 (OPT. OUT IP) for option DIO11 / DIP11 (DO10 ... DO17)
• H 481 (STD. OUT IP) for the basic unit (DO01 / DO02 (MOVIDRIVE® A) DO01 ...
DO05 (MOVIDRIVE® B); DB00 is set to "/Brake". The brake is controlled directly by
the firmware. As a result, the output cannot be written.)

22 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Setting individual The BSET and BCLR commands are used for setting/resetting individual outputs. To
outputs do so, the bit number corresponding to the terminal must be entered as an operand in
the command mask. In the following example, output DO01 should be set to "1":
512416139
Overview of commands and parameters for setting/resetting binary outputs:

Table 4: Commands for setting binary outputs
Unit Output Setting (1-level) Resetting (0-level) Parameter at "IPOS output"
MOVIDRIVE® A Set to "/Brake", i.e. cannot be
DB00 - - programmed. Controlled by the
MOVIDRIVE® B firmware.
MOVIDRIVE® A DO01 BSET H481.1 = 1 BCLR H481.1 = 0 P620
MOVIDRIVE® B DO02 BSET H481.2 = 1 BCLR H481.2 = 0 P621
DO03 BSET H481.3 = 1 BCLR H483.1 = 0 P622
MOVIDRIVE® B DO04 BSET H481.4 = 1 BCLR H481.4 = 0 P623
DO05 BSET H481.5 = 1 BCLR H481.5 = 0 P624
DO10 BSET H480.0 = 1 BCLR H480.0 = 0 P630
Option ... ... ... ...
DO17 BSET H480.7 = 1 BCLR H480.7 = 0 P637

f 22
i
Hz
P Hz
Setting several It is possible to set several binary outputs at the same time, e.g. to output a binary coded
outputs table position number. This is done by writing the decimal value of the table position
number to system variables H480 or H481.
Table 5: Assigning system variable H480/H481 to binary output terminals
Binary outputs Binary outputs DIO11A/DIP11A option H480 Binary outputs of
basic unit
Terminal des. DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10 DO02 DO01 DB00
Bits of the system 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 0
variables
Significance 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 22 21 20
Example Output table position number 11 via DIO11 ("11" requires 3 outputs; that is, outputs
DO10, DO11 und DO13):
SET H480 = 11
All binary outputs are reset by setting the system variables H480 and H481 to "0".
This only makes sense if all outputs are set as IPOSplus® outputs. Outputs with other
parameter settings are written by the firmware and should not be modified.
SET H480 = 0 Reset the outputs of option DIO11 or DIP11
SET H481 = 0 Reset the outputs of the basic unit

22 f
Analog inputs/outputs
i
Hz
P Hz
22.3 Analog inputs/outputs

Table 6: Overview of the analog inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs Inputs Outputs
Basic unit Option DIO11 option
Input/output AI1 AI2 AO1 AO2
Terminal designation AI11 AI12 AGND AI21 AI22 AGND AOV1 AOC1 AGND AOV2 AOC2 AGND
The analog inputs are differential inputs. The inputs/outputs can be used optionally as
either voltage or current inputs/outputs.
Table 7: Assigning value ranges to variable values
Input/output Value range Variable value
Output - 10 ... 0 ... + 10 V - 10 000 ... 0 ... + 10 000
0 ... + 10 V 0 ... + 10 000
0 ... + 20 mA 0 ... + 10 000
4 ... + 20 mA 0 ... + 10 000
Input - 10 ... 0 ... + 10 V - 10 000 ... 0 ... + 10 000
0 ... + 10 V 0 ... + 10 000
0 ... + 20 mA 0 ... + 5 000
4 ... + 20 mA 1000 ... + 5 000
Assignment of value range / variable value for analog outputs is only valid if the scaling
factor of the parameter P110 is set to 1.
22.3.1 Reading analog inputs/outputs

The status of the analog inputs/outputs of the basic unit and the DIO11 terminal expan-
sion board can be written to variables of your choice using the GETSYS command. First
enter the variable into the GETSYS command, followed by the system value (here: AN-
ALOG INPUTS or ANALOG OUTPUTS).
The first input/output is written to the variable entered in the GETSYS command (Hxxx)
whilst the second is written to the subsequent variable (Hxxx + 1).
Example Command GETSYS H310 = ANALOG INPUTS

H310 contains the value of the analog input AI1
H311 contains the value of the analog input AI2
22.3.2 Setting analog outputs
INFORMATION
Prerequisite for setting: The corresponding analog output (P640 and P643) must be
set to "IPOS OUTPUT".
The analog outputs are set using the H479 (ANA.OUT IP) and H478 (ANA.OUT IP2)
system variables.
Command SET H479 = K (K = any constant within the aforementioned value range)
SET H479 describes analog output 1
SET H478 describes analog output 2

Assembler – Commands kVA n
General information
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23 Assembler – Commands
23.1 General information
• The result of the calculation operation is always assigned to the left-hand argument
(always a variable). The second argument (variable or constant) always remains
unchanged. The result of a mathematical operation is always a whole number.
• The bit instances in the variables and constants have the numbers 0 ... 31. The least
significant bit has the number 0.
23.2 Overview of commands

23.2.1 Arithmetic commands
This program group lists all arithmetic and logical commands.
Command Key points Description see
ADD H+H Arithmetical addition ADD
H+K (page 302)
AND H&H Logical AND AND

H&K (page 304)
ASHR H = H (Arithmetic >>) H Arithmetic shift to the right ASHR

ARITHMETIC SHIFT H = H (Arithmetic >>) K (page 306)
RIGHT
DIV H/H Division DIV
DIVISION H/K (page 303)
MOD H mod H Modulo / Division remainder MOD

MODULO H mod K (page 304)
MUL H*H Multiplication MUL
MULTIPLY H*K (page 303)
NOT H = NOT(H) Bit-by-bit negation NOT

(page 303)
OR H¦H Logical OR OR
H¦K (page 304)
SHL H = H << K Bit-by-bit shift to the left SHL

SHIFT LEFT H = H << H (page 305)
SHR H = H >> H Bit-by-bit shift to the right SHR

SHIFT RIGHT H = H >> K (page 306)
SUB H-H Arithmetical subtraction SUB
SUBTRACT H-K (page 302)
XOR H XOR H Exclusive OR XOR

EXCLUSIVE OR H XOR K (page 305)

kVA n Assembler – Commands
23 f
Overview of commands
i
Hz
P Hz
23.2.2 Bit commands

Commands for changing individual bits within a variable. These are:
• Setting/clearing/moving bits
Command Key points Description See
BCLR H.Bit = 0 Clear bit BCLR
BIT CLEAR (page 307)
BMOV H.Bit = H.Bit Copy bit BMOV

BIT MOVE (page 307)
BMOVN H.Bit = NOT (H.Bit) Copy bit and negate. BMOVN

BIT MOVE NEGATE (page 308)
BSET H.Bit = 1 Set bit BSET

BIT SET (page 307)
23.2.3 Communication commands

Commands for data exchange from/to other units via interfaces.
Command Function Availability1) Reference
MDX B MC07B MQx
MOVLNK Acyclic process and/or parameter X X X MOVLNK
data exchange via RS-485 or sys- (page 309)
tem bus.
MOVCOM Cyclical process data transfer via - - X MOVCOM
RS-485 with MQx for MOVIMOT®. (page 314)
MOVON Start of cyclical process data - - X MOVON
transfer via RS-485. (page 315)
SCOM Cyclical or acyclical process data X X - SCOM
exchange via system bus. (page 316)
SCOMON Start of cyclical process data X X - SCOMON
exchange via system bus. (page 321)
SCOMST Start of cyclical transfer for X (X) - SCOMST
MOVIDRIVE® B. (page 322)
1) Observe the unit-specific command structure

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.2.4 Positioning commands

Commands for drive positioning:
• Reference travel
• Absolute/relative/touch probe positioning
Command Description See
GO0 Performs reference travel GO0
GO POSITION 0 (page 323)
GOA Absolute positioning, variable GOA

GO ABSOLUTE Absolute positioning, constant (page 325)
Absolute positioning, variable, indirect
GOR Relative positioning, variable GOR
GO RELATIVE Relative positioning, constant (page 325)
Relative positioning, variable, indirect
23.2.5 Program commands

Commands for program control. These are:
• Loop commands
• Subroutine calls
• Task 2 control
• Program branching commands
• Wait commands
CALL Calls a subroutine CALL
(page 329)
END Textual end. END
(page 329)
JMP Jump, input terminal JMP
JUMP Jump, H <=> 0. (page 330)
Jump, H <=> H.
Jump, H <=> K.
System conditioned jump.
LOOPB Program loop, begin LOOPB
LOOP BEGIN (page 332)
LOOPE Program loop, end LOOPE

LOOP END (page 332)
NOP No operation NOP

NO OPERATION (page 333)
REM Comments REM

REMARK (page 333)
RET End of a subroutine RET

RETURN (page 333)
TASK2 Sets the start address of task 2 TASK2

(page 334)
WAIT Waits for a specified period WAIT
(page 335)

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
23.2.6 Set commands

Commands for:
• Setting variables
• Error responses
• Loading system values to variables
• Writing system values to system variables
• Initializing interrupt routines
Command Description/arguments See
COPY Block-by-block copying of variables COPY
(page 336)
GETSYS H = System value GETSYS
GET SYSTEM (page 336)
VALUE
SET H=H SET
H=K (page 339)
SETFR Set fault response SETFR

SET FAULT (page 339)
REACTION
SETI [H] = H SETI
SET INDIRECT H = [H] (page 339)
SETINT Sets start address of the interrupt routine SETINT

SET INTERRUPT (page 339)
SETSYS System value = H SETSYS

SET SYSTEM (page 344)
VALUE
VARINT Sets start address and data structure for variable interrupt VARINT
(page 347)
23.2.7 Special unit commands

Commands for:
• Stopping the axis
• Storing variables and programs in non-volatile memory in the unit
• Switching touch probe on/off
• Controlling the watchdog
ASTOP Stops axis ASTOP
AXIS STOP (page 349)
MEM Saves and loads IPOSplus® program and variables. MEM
MEMORIZE (page 349)
TOUCHP Touch probe command TOUCHP

TOUCH PROBE (page 350)
WDOFF Switches off the watchdog WDOFF

WATCHDOG OFF (page 353)
WDON Calls the watchdog in time intervals WDON
WATCHDOG ON (page 353)

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.2.8 Comparison commands

Commands for comparing variables and constants.
Command Key points See
ANDL H = H && H ANDL
LOGICAL AND (page 358)
CPEQ H = H == H CPEQ
COMPARE EQUAL H = H == K (page 355)
CPGE H = H >= K CPGE

COMPARE H = H >= H (page 355)
GREATER OR
EQUAL
CPGT H=H>H CPGT
COMPARE H=H>K (page 356)
GREATER THAN
CPLE H = H <= H CPLE
COMPARE LESS OR H = H <= K (page 356)
EQUAL
CPLT H=H<H CPLT
COMPARE LESS H=H<K (page 357)
THAN
CPNE H = H != H CPNE
COMPARE NOT H = H != K (page 357)
EQUAL
NOTL H = NOT(H) NOTL
LOGICAL NOT (page 359)
ORL H = H ¦¦ H ORL
LOGICAL OR (page 358)

23 f
Arithmetic commands
i
Hz
P Hz
23.3 Arithmetic commands

23.3.1 Fundamental operations ADD / SUB / MUL / DIV
The four basic arithmetical functions are performed taking account of signs. They can
also be performed with variables H and constants K. The 1st argument is always a vari-
able H, the 2nd argument can either be a second variable H or a constant K.
ADD The ADD command adds a variable to a constant and a variable (observing the signs).
Command structure Mxxx: Label (optional)
Mxxx ADD X1 + X2 X1: Variable (summand and sum)
X2: Variable or constant (summand)
ADD HXX + HYY Variable HXX is the sum of variables HXX and HYY.
ADD HXX + K Variable HXX is the sum of variables HXX and a constant K.
Example 1 SET H01 = 100ADD H01 + H01
After the ADD command, H01 = 200.
Example 2 SET H01 = 100ADD H01 + 1
After the ADD command, H01 = 101.
Example 3 SET H01 = 2000000000SET [0x77359400][0x77359400][0
H02 = 2000000000ADD H01 + xEE6B2800]
H02
The number range has been exceeded.
After addition, H01 has the value -294967296.
Note If the number range is exceeded during addition, the result is incorrect.
There is no error message.
SUB/SUBTRACT The SUB command subtracts a variable or constant from a variable (observing the
signs).
Mxxx SUB X1 - X2 X1: Variable (minuend and difference)
X2: Variable or constant (subtrahend)
SUB HXX - HYY Variable HXX is the result of the subtraction of variables HXX and HYY.
SUB HXX - K Variable HXX is the result of the subtraction of variables HXX and a con-
stant K.
Example 1 SET H01 = -10SET H02 = +50SUB H01 - H02
After the SUB command, H01 = -60.
Example 2 SET H01 = +50SET H02 = - [0x00000032][0x80000030][0
2147483600SUB H01 - H02 x80000002]
The number range has been exceeded. After subtraction, H01 has the
value -2147483646.
Note If the number range is exceeded during subtraction, the result is incorrect.
There is no error message.

Arithmetic commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
MUL/MULTIPLY The MUL command multiplies a variable with a constant or a variable (observing the
signs).
Mxxx MUL X1 * X2 X1: Variable (factor and product)
X2: Variable or constant (factor)
MUL HXX * HYY Variable HXX is the result of the multiplication of variables HXX and HYY.
MUL HXX * K Variable HXX is the result of the multiplication of variable HXX and a con-
stant K.
Example 1 SET H01 = -3MUL H01 * 50
After the MUL command, H01 = -150.
Example 2 SET H01 = +50000SET H02 = [0x0000C350][0x0000C350][0
+50000MUL H01 * H02 x9502F900]
The number range has been exceeded. After multiplication, H01 has the
value -1794967296.
Note If the number range is exceeded during multiplication, the result is incor-
rect. There is no error message.
DIV/DIVISION The DIV command divides a variable by a variable or a constant (observing the signs).
The result is the predecimal number of the quotient.
Mxxx DIV X1/X2 X1: Variable (dividend and quotient)
X2: Variable or constant (divisor)
DIV HXX/HYY Variable HXX is the result of the division of variables HXX and HYY.
DIV HXX/K Variable HXX is the result of the division of variables HXX and a constant
K.
Example SET H01 = -13SET H02 = +3DIV H01/H02
After the DIV command, H01 = -4.
Note Division by zero leads to an undefined result. There is no error message.
23.3.2 Auxiliary arithmetic functions NOT/MOD

NOT The command negates the entire content of a variable bit-by-bit.
Mxxx NOT X1 = NOT (X2) X1: Variable (Result of the operation)
X2: Variable (output value)
NOT HXX = NOT (HYY) Variable HXX negates the variable HYY bit-by-bit. In this way, the hexa-
decimal sum of HXX and HYY = 0xFFFFFFFF.
Example SET H02 = +1NOT H01 = NOT [0x00000001][0xFFFFFFFE]
(H02)
After the NOT command, H01 = -2.

23 f
Arithmetic commands
i
Hz
P Hz
MOD/MODULO The command supplies the integer remainder when a variable has been divided by a
variable or a constant. The sign of the result is the same as the sign of the first variable.
Mxxx MOD X1 mod X2 X1: Variable (dividend and remainder of division)
X2: Variable or constant (divisor)
MOD HXX mod HYY Variable HXX is the integer remainder after division of variables HXX and
HYY.
MOD HXX mod K Variable HXX is the integer remainder after division of variable HXX and a
constant K.
Example 1 SET H01 = -17SET H02 = - SET H01 = -17SET H02 =
5MOD H01 mod H02 +5MOD H01 mod H02
After the MOD command, H01 = -2.
Example 2 SET H01 = +17SET H02 = SET H01 = +17SET H02 = -
+5MOD H01 mod H02 5MOD H01 mod H02
After the MOD command, H01 = +2.
23.3.3 Logical operations AND/OR/XOR

AND The AND command performs a bit-by-bit AND operation between a variable and a sec-
ond variable or a hexadecimal constant.
Mxxx AND X1 & X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
X2: Variable or constant (output value)
AND HXX & HYY Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit AND operation of variables HXX and HYY.
AND HXX & K Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit AND operation of variable HXX and a con-
stant K.
Example 1 SET H01 = 12SET H02 = 5AND [0b0000000000001100][0b000
H01 & H02 0000000000101][0b000000000
0000100]
After the AND command, H01 = 4.
Example 2 The position within a motor revolution is to be determined from the posi-
tion of the motor encoder.
SET H01 = H511AND H01 & 0xFFF
After the AND command, H01 has a value between 0 and 4095.
OR The OR command performs a bit-by-bit OR operation between a variable and a second

variable or a hexadecimal constant.
Mxxx OR X1 ¦ X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
OR HXX ¦ HYY Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit OR operation of variables HXX and HYY.
OR HXX ¦ K Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit OR operation of variable HXX and a constant
K.
Example SET H01 = 12SET H02 = 1OR [0b0000000000001100][0b000
H01 ¦ H02 0000000000001][0b000000000
0001101]
After the OR command, H01 = 13.

Arithmetic commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
XOR The XOR command performs a bit-by-bit XOR operation between a variable and a sec-
ond variable or a hexadecimal constant.
Mxxx XOR X1 XOR X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
XOR HXX XOR HYY Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit XOR operation of variables HXX and HYY.
XOR HXX XOR K Variable HXX is the bit-by-bit XOR operation of variable HXX and a con-
stant K.
Example SET H01 = 65535XOR H01 XOR [0x00000FFF][0x0000FF0F]
F0F0 hex
After the XOR command, H01 = 0xFF0F.
23.3.4 SHIFT commands SHL/SHR/ASHR

SHIFT commands are used to move the content of a variable bit-by-bit. All variable bits
are given a new significance. The number of places to be shifted is specified in the 2nd
argument.
SHL/SHIFT LEFT The SHL command moves the content of a variable to the left by the number of bits
specified in a variable or constant. Zeros are moved along from the right.
Mxxx SHL X1 << X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
X2: Variable or constant (number of shift operations)
SHL HXX << HYY In variable HXX the bits are shifted HYY places to the left.
SHL HXX << K In variable HXX the bits are shifted by K places to the left.
Example 1 SET H01 = 31SET H02 = 1SHL [0b0000000000011111][0b000
H01 << H02 0000000111110]
After the SHL command, H01 = 62.
Example 2 A certain binary significance is assigned to the output terminals of the
basic unit and the DIO11A option. To use outputs DO10 ... DO13 for table
positioning in a useful manner (4 entries = 0 ... 15 positions), shift the sig-
nificance of the outputs so that the terminal with the lowest value DO10
receives the significance 20.
SET H01 = 15SET H02 = 6SHL [0b0000000000001111][0b000
H01 << H02 0001111000000]

23 f
Arithmetic commands
i
Hz
P Hz
SHR/SHIFT The SHR command moves the content of a variable to the right by the number of bits
RIGHT specified in a variable or constant. Zeros are moved along from the left.
Mxxx SHR X1 >> X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
SHR HXX >> HYY In variable HXX the bits are shifted HYY places to the right.
SHR HXX >> K In variable HXX the bits are shifted K places to the right.
Example 1 SET H01 = 62SET H02 = 1SHR [0b0000000000111110][0b000
H01 > > H02 0000000011111]
After the SHR command, H01 = 31.
Example 2 A certain binary significance is assigned to the input terminals of the basic
unit and the DIO11A option. To use inputs DI10 ... DI13 for table position-
ing in a useful manner (4 entries = 0 ... 15 positions), shift the significance
of the inputs so that the terminal with the lowest value DI10 receives the
significance 20.
SET H01 = 960SET H02 = [0b0000001111000000][0b000
6SHR H01 > > H02 0000000001111]
ASHR/ARITHME- The ASHR command shifts the content of a variable to the right by the number of bits
TIC SHIFT RIGHT specified in a variable or constant. Either zeros or ones are shifted along from the left,
depending on the sign of the original value. This ensures that a negative sign is kept dur-
ing shift operations.
For positive numbers, the command supplies the predecimal number of the division X1/
X2. For negative numbers, the command supplies the predecimal number of the division
X1/X2 - 1.
Mxxx ASHR X1 >> X2 X1: Variable (result and output value)
ASHR HXX >> HYY In variable HXX the bits are shifted HYY places to the right.
ASHR HXX >> K In variable HXX the bits are shifted K places to the right.
Example 1 SET H01 = 7ASHR H01 > > 2 [0b0000000000000111][0b000
0000000000001]
After the SHR command, H01 = 1.
Example 2 SET H01 = -7ASHR H01 > > 2 [0b1111111111111001][0b111
1111111111110]
After the ASHR command, H01 = -2.

Bit commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.4 Bit commands

23.4.1 Bit commands BSET/BCLR/BMOV/BMOVN
BSET/BIT SET The BSET command sets a bit within a variable to 1. The bit places in the variable have
the numbers 0 ... 31. The least significant bit has the number 0.
For example, if a bit is set in the system variable H481 STD.OUT IP, a binary output can
be set directly. You must set the output to IPOS OUTPUT in parameters P62x in SHELL
beforehand.
Mxxx BSET HX1.X2 = 1 X1: Target variable
X2: Bit position in a target variable
BSET HXX.YY = 1 In variable HXX, bit YY is set to 1.
Example SHELL: P621 = IPOS OUTPUT
BSET H481.2 = 1
After the BSET command has been performed, the 3rd bit is set in variable
H481 and output DO02.
Note If the output is reserved for a different function (for example, P621 =
MOTOR STANDSTILL), the bit is set in H481, but not the binary output.
BCLR/BIT CLEAR The BCLEAR command sets a bit within a variable to 0. The bit places in the variable
have the numbers 0 ... 31. The least significant bit has the number 0.
For example, if a bit is cleared in the system variable H481 STD.OUT IP, it resets a bi-
nary output directly. You must set the output to IPOS OUTPUT in parameters P62x in
SHELL beforehand.
Mxxx BCLEAR HX1.X2 = 1 X1: Target variable
X2: Bit position in a target variable
BCLEAR HXX.YY = 0 In variable HXX, bit YY is set to 0.
Example SHELL: P621 = IPOS OUTPUT
BCLEAR H481.2 = 0
After the BCLEAR command has been performed, the 3rd bit is cleared in
variable H481 and output DO02.
Note If the output is reserved for a different function (for example, P621 =
MOTOR STANDSTILL), the bit is cleared in H481, but not the binary out-
put.
BMOV/BIT MOVE The BMOV command copies a bit from one variable in a bit in another variable. The bit
places of a variable have the numbers 0 ... 31. The least significant bit has the number 0.
Mxxx BMOV HX1.X2 = X1: Target variable
HX3.X4 X2: Bit position in a target variable
X3: Source variable
X4: Bit position in a source variable
BMOV HXX.YY = HZZ.AA In variable HXX, the bit YY is set to the value of bit AA of the variable HZZ.
Example 1 BMOV H2.4 = H7.5
The command copies bit 5 of variable H7 into bit 4 of variable H2.
Example 2 SET H200 = 0BMOV H200.0 = H473.20JMP H200 == 1 M01
The program jumps to the label M01 when the drive is referenced (H473
STAT. WORD).

23 f
Bit commands
i
Hz
P Hz
BMOVN/BIT The BMOVN command copies a bit from one variable to a bit in another variable, negat-
MOVE NEGATE ing it in the process. The bit places of a variable have the numbers 0 ... 31. The least
significant bit has the number 0.
Mxxx BMOVN HX1.X2 = X1: Target variable
HX3.X4 X2: Bit position in a target variable
X3: Source variable
X4: Bit position in a source variable
BMOVN HXX.YY = HZZ.AA In variable HXX, the bit YY is set to the negated value of bit AA of the vari-
able HZZ.
Example 1 BMOVN H2.4 = H7.5
The command copies the negated bit 5 of variable H7 into bit 4 of variable
H2.
Example 1 SET H200 = 0BMOV H200.0 = H473.20JMP H200 == 1 M01
The program jumps to the label M01 when reference travel has not yet
been performed for the drive (H473 STAT. WORD).

Communication commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.5 Communication commands

23.5.1 MOVLNK
Description, see _MoviLink (page 222)
Command struc-
ture
Instruction Standard structure Elements Brief description
type
_MoviLink MOVLNK BusType (H+0) Possible bus types:
ML_BT_S0 = 1 (RS485 #1)
ML_BT_S1 = 2 (RS485 #2)
ML_BT_SBUS1 = ML_BT_SBUS = 5
ML_BT_SBUS2 = 8
Address (H+1) 0...99: Single address
100...199: Group address
253: Address of the inverter
254: Point-to-point connection
255: Broadcast
If an SBus group address (e.g. 43) is addressed, the offset 100
must be added. In this case 143.
Format (H+2) Specification of the process (PD) and parameter (PARAM) chan-
nels for data transfer:
//MoviLink Cyclic Frame Types //Acyclic
ML_FT_1 = 1: 1PD ML_CFT_1 = 129
ML_FT_2 = 3: 2PD ML_CFT_2 = 131
ML_FT_3 = 5: 3PD ML_CFT_3 = 133
ML_FT_PAR = 6: Parameter (without ML_CFT_PAR = 134
PD)
Service (H+3) Communication service for parameters
ML_S_RD = 1: Read service
ML_S_WR = 2: Write to non-volatile memory
Index (H+4) Index number of the parameter to be modified or read (see param-
eter index directory)
The subindex must be entered in the index element on bits 23-16
(least significant byte of the high word).
Calculation: H+4 or
MOVILNK.Index = Index + (SubIndex << 16);
DPointer (H+5) Number of the variable from which the read data is stored or from
which the data to be written is obtained (structure MLDATA)
Result (H+6) Contains the error code after the service has been performed or
contains zero if there was no error (see "Parameterization Return
Codes" in the "Communication and Fieldbus Unit Profile" manual
with "parameter list").
MLDATA WritePar (H"+0) Parameter that is sent for write services
ReadPar (H"+1) Parameter that is sent for read services

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
The following table shows the elements with unit-specific characteristics.


BusType (H+0) only only only
2: (RS485 at X13) 2: (RS485 at FSC/FIO11B) 2: (RS485 to MOVIMOT®)
5: (SBUS at X12) 5: (SBUS at FSC/FIO21B)
8: (via DFC11B)
Format (H+2) no limitation no limitation only
130: (Param + 2PD acyclical)
131: (2PD acyclical)
132: (Param + 3PD acyclical)
133: (3PD acyclical)
134: (Param acyclical)
Cyclical frame types are possible but
_MovCommDef is recommended.
Structure
Mxxx MOVLNK X1 X1: Starting variable of the command structure
MOVLNK HXX The MOVLNK command is performed using the command structure data
starting in variable HXX.
Parameter set- Description, see Parameter settings for the sender (master) (page 225)
tings for the sender
(master)
Parameter set- Description, see Parameter settings for the receiver (page 226)
tings for the
receiver

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 1 Reading an "internal" unit parameter (analog input AI1)

The following IPOSplus® program and parameter setting are used to read the display pa-
rameter P020 with the index number 8331 and then to write it to variable H011. The vari-
able structure has been entered here in the editing window for variables The variable
structure can also be created in the program using SET commands.
514449547
H0 Bus-Type 5 = SBus (not relevant)

H1 Address 253 = own address
H2 Frametype 134 = only Para
H3 Service 1 = Read
H4 Index 8331 = Index of P020
H5 D-Pointer 10 = Data pointer value at H10
Example 2 Axis-to-axis communication: Reading variables from another inverter via SBus
The value of variable H005 on the receiver axis is read and written to variable H010 in
the sender. To do this, it is necessary to have 2 inverters connected via the SBus and
for the terminating resistors to be activated (using DIP switch S12).

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Settings above: Sender (Master) / below: Receiver (slave)
514453899
H0 Bus-Type 5 = SBus
H1 Address 2 = SBus address of receiver (slave)
H2 Frametype 134 = only Para
H3 Service 1 = Read
H4 Index 11005 = Index of H5

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 3 Controlling a MOVIMOT® unit via RS-485 and 3PD

MOVIMOT® must be started up in accordance with the MOVIMOT® operating instruc-
tions.
Communication with MOVIMOT® is only possible via RS-485. Control is only possible
via the process data channel with 2PD or 3PD (min. control word and speed).
In the following example, MOVIMOT® is controlled using 3 process output data items
(control word 1, speed and ramp).
The values should be entered in variables H012 ... H014.
514510219
H0 Bus-Type 2 = RS-485
H1 Address 1 = RS-485 address of the receiver (MOVIMOT®)
H2 Frametype 133 = 3PD
H3 Service 3 = Writing without saving
H4 Index 0 = not relevant for PD
H12 6 = PO1 Control word
H13 50 = PO2 speed in percent
H14 50 = PO3 ramp in percent

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
With MOVIDRIVE® B and MOVITRAC® B, the timeout monitoring is checked for tele-
grams received within the defined timeout interval.
With MOVIMOT®, the timeout monitoring is activated with the first received cyclic
frames (ML_FT... at the sender). Acyclical communication deactivates the timeout
monitoring of MOVIMOT®.
Once cyclical communication has been started with the _MovCommOn command,
only the _MoviLink command to address 253 (internal) is possible. When using the
_MoviLink command, other units can no longer be accessed.
23.5.2 MOVCOM
The command can be used with MQx only. The MovComm commands enable cyclical
data exchange between MQx and up to 8 MOVIMOT® units via the RS-485 interface
with the MOVILINK profile.
For a detailed description, refer to _MovCommDef (page 227).
The variable is defined by the MOVCOM variable name; in the Compiler and has the
following structure.
BusType (H+0) Bus type (interface)
ML_BT_S1 = 2 (RS485 to MOVIMOT®)
Address (H+1) Individual address or group address for the MOVIMOT®to be addressed
0 ... 99 single addressing
100 ... 199 group addressing
255 broadcast
Format (H+2) Entry of process data for data transfer
Pd Pointer (H+3) Number of the variable H" in which the process data is stored or from which
the data to be written is obtained.
(The data structure for H" is described in detail below.)
Para Pointer (H+4) Number of the variable H' in which the parameter data is stored or from
which the data to be written is obtained.
MOVIMOT® does not support this function.
Variable structure of the process data

Data structure for H":
H"+0 Contains the error code after connection, or zero if there was no error 0x05000002 indicates
the connection has timed out.
The process data is coded according to MOVILINK.

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Variable structure of the parameter data

H*+0 Contains the error code after the parameter service has been performed, or contains zero if
there was no error The errors are coded according to MOVILINK.
H*+1 0: No action or parameter data exchange is complete.
1: Start of the parameter data exchange
H*+2 1: Read service
2: Write with storage in non-volatile memory
3: Writing without saving
H*+3 Index number of parameter to be revised or read
H*+4 Read data after read service. Data to be written in case of a write service.
Proceed as follows when making parameter settings:

1. Entry of service, index and data
2. Start the parameter setting process by setting StartPar to 1.
3. Wait for the service to be performed; end is indicated when StartPar is set to 0.
4. Evaluate ParaResult. If an error has occurred, the data value is invalid. If no error
occurred, the service was successful.
Sample program
514515083
23.5.3 MOVON
The command cannot be used with MOVIDRIVE®.
The command starts the cyclical communication. Communication links set up using the
MovCommDef command are activated. As of this point, you can no longer use MovCom-
mDef or MOVILINK commands. Only the MOVILINK command to address 253 (internal)
can still be used.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
23.5.4 SCOM
An SCOM command (System bus COMmunication) can be used to transfer up to 2 vari-
ables (8 bytes) via the system bus. The SCOM command initializes the transfer object
and defines whether the object should be sent acyclically or cyclically or whether objects
are to be received. In the latter two cases, the transfer must also be started with
SCOMON or SCOMSTATE.
Data exchange is only possible via the system bus and it transfers all the content of the
variables. Data exchange within the inverter is not possible. A standard CAN telegram
(11 bit identifier) is used instead of a SEW's own protocol (MOVILINK) so that the sys-
tem can also communication with non-SEW products (see the "MOVIDRIVE® Serial
Communication" manual).
In accordance with the consumer/producer principle, every unit can send objects to one
or more units and receive objects from one or more units simultaneously.
The bus run time for a message is ≤ 2 ms and depends on the baudrate setting. Com-
munication with MOVIMOT® or the MQ fieldbus interface is not possible.
Structure
Mxxx SCOM X1, X2 X1: TRANSMIT CYCLIC: Cyclical send
RECEIVE: Receive
TRANSMIT ACYCLIC: Acyclical send
X2 Hxx = Start of object structure for communication
and user data
The design of the object structure is dependent on the first argument X1.
Example SCOM TRANSMIT CYCLIC, H0

This command initializes cyclical transfer; the object structure starts at H0.
SCOM TRANSMIT ACYCLIC, H10
This command initializes a one-off cyclical transfer; the object structure starts at H10.
SCOM RECEIVE, H50
The command initializes the reception of data, the object structure starts at H50.
SCOM TRANSMIT CYCLIC, H0

+ SCOMON
or
SCOM TRANSMIT ACYCLIC, H0
SCOM RECEIVE, H0
H0 = 1100 + SCOMON
[1]
H0 = 1100
[2]
[3]
SCOM RECEIVE, H0
+ SCOMON
H0 = 1102
SCOM
514545547
Unit [1] sends the object with the no. 1100 cyclically or acyclically.

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Unit [2] receives the data. Unit [3] ignores data but is waiting for data with object number
1102.
Sender and receiver settings

Sender Receiver
IPOSplus® program with command: IPOSplus® program with command:
– SCOM TRANSMIT CYCLIC H – SCOM RECEIVE H SCOMON
SCOMON and/or • Setting of communication parameters via variables
– SCOM TRANSMIT ACYCLIC H • Timeout monitoring P817
• Setting of communication parameters
via variables
SBus baud rate (P816/P884/P894) identical for sender and receiver.
First and last physical stations:
Set the bus terminating resistor via S12.
INFORMATION
Observe the following rules when selecting the object number:
1. In the entire SBus network, an object number can only be set up for transmission
once.
2. Within a unit, an object number may only be set up once, either once for sending
or once for receiving.
See also _SbusCommDef (page 227)
TRANSMIT This argument initializes a data object whose user data is sent cyclically according to
CYCLIC: the SCOMON command. Variable H of the SCOM TRANSMIT CYCLIC H command de-
fines the start of the communication and user data.
Cyclical data exchange runs in the background once it has been started, regardless of
the current command processing in the IPOSplus® program. If the program is stopped,
the data transfer stops automatically. A change of the data object will only become ac-
tive following an IPOSplus® program restart (F5 A/P-STOP / F9 P-Start, or mains (24V
auxiliary operation) turned off and then on again)
Pro SCOM TRANSMIT... command can set up one data object at the most. Additional
SCOM TRANSMIT commands must be sent if additional data objects are to be set up.
Only one SCOMON command is required following several SCOM TRANSMIT com-
mands. After the first SCOMON command, no other SCOM TRANSMIT commands are
accepted.
The number of objects that can be set up depends on the cycle time (max. 5 objects at
1 – 9 ms, max. 10 objects at 10 – 65530 ms, i.e. 15 objects in total).

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Object structure
H+0 Object number (CAN-Bus-ID): The object number is used for addressing the data object.
The object numbers of the sender (TRANSMIT) and receiver (RECEIVE) must be the same
for the data exchange.
H+1 Cycle time in ms: Specifies the time interval after which the data is sent again.
Valid cycle times:
See _SbusCommDef (page 227)
Note:
The value 0 ms causes an error message to be issued in the return code.
The cycle time must always exceed the longest offset time.
H+2 Offset in ms distributes the bus load when several SCOM TRANSMIT... commands are used.
[1] [2] [1] [2]
tcycle toffset
514549899
Valid offset times:
See _SbusCommDef (page 227)
H+3 Number of data bytes and data format
Bit Value Function

0...3 0...8 Number of data bytes
4...7 0 Reserved
8 0...1 0 = MOTOROLA format
1 = INTEL format
The format of the sender and receiver must be
the same!
9...31 0 Reserved
H+4 Number of variable H" at which the data to be sent are to start.
H+5 Result (Return Code) of SCOM command
≥0 Free bus capacity in % (calculated value of this unit)
-1 Incorrect cycle time
-2 Too many objects set up
-3 Bus overload
-5 Wrong object number
-6 Wrong length
Ensure that the entire calculated bus utilization does not exceed 70% for additional data
exchange between slaves.
The bus utilization is calculated in bits per second using the formula:
Number of telegrams × bits/telegram × 1/cycle time
For example, 2 messages with 100 bits in 1 ms cycle = 200000 bits/s = 200 kBaud
This results in the following bus load percentage in reference to the selected baud rate.
For example, 200 kBaud / 500 kBaud = 40% < 70%

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
TRANSMIT This argument initializes a data object, whose user data is transmitted once immedi-
ACYCLIC ately. Variable H of the SCOM TRANSMIT ACYCLIC H command defines the start of
the communication and user data. A SCOMON command is not required.
A SCOM TRANSMIT ACYCLIC H command is used to send several variables. To do
so, set the variable pointer (H+2) accordingly in the IPOSplus® program before calling
each command.
Object structure
H+0 Object number (CAN-Bus-ID): The object number is used for addressing the data object. An
object number can only be allocated once in a bus system. The object numbers of the sender
(TRANSMIT) and receiver (RECEIVE) must be the same for the data exchange. The object
numbers > 1024 ... 2048 should be used to avoid a data clash whenever MOVLNK com-
mands are also used via the SBus.
Bit Value Function

4...7 0 Reserved
1 = INTEL format
the same!
9...31 0 Reserved
H+2 Number of variable H" at which the data to be sent are to start.
H+3 Status of the transmission command
0 Ready
1 Sending
2 Sending successful
10 Send error
INFORMATION
Prior to transmitting acyclical telegrams, the SBus must also be activated with
SCOMON and SCOMSTATE.
The IPOSplus® program waits at this command until the message has been sent. If no
other station is connected the telegram cannot be sent. The wait status can only be
ended by a monitoring function, for example, from another task.
RECEIVE This argument initializes a data object that contains data received cyclically or acycli-
cally. The variable in the argument of the SCOM RECEIVE command contains the vari-
able number as of which the receive data is to be stored.
The process of reading in the data must be started with the SCOMON command. The
process of reading in data runs in the background once it has been started, regardless
of the current command processing in the IPOSplus® program. After the first SCOMON
command, no other SCOM RECEIVE commands are accepted. A change of the data
object will only become active following an IPOSplus® program restart (F5 A/P-STOP /
F9 P-Start, or mains (24V auxiliary operation) turned off and then on again)
You can set up max. 32 data objects for reading in data.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Object structure
H+0 Object number: The object number is used for addressing the data object. The object num-
bers of the sender (TRANSMIT) and receiver (RECEIVE) must be the same for the data
exchange.
Bit Value Function

4...7 0 Reserved
1 = INTEL format
the same!
9...31 0 Reserved
H+2 Number of the variable H" from which point the received data is stored
Differences in user data formats MOTOROLA and INTEL:
MOTOROLA format INTEL format

CAN Data Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Variable H"+1 H" H" H"+1
Variables byte 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
INFORMATION
In order to send or receive the data via SBus2, you have to add 0x1000000 to the ob-
ject number (OR operation).
With the SCOM command, even the variables that can be stored in the non-volatile
memory (H0 – H127) and all the parameters are only written in the volatile memory.
Example 1 Cyclical transmission of two variable values (H008 and H009) with the SCOM command
from the sender to the receiver to variables H005 and H006.
Sender settings
514587147
H0 Objectno. 1025 = user-defined

H1 Cycletime 10 = 10 ms
H2 Timeoffset 0 = no Offset
H3 Len 8 = Variable length 8 bytes
H5 Returncode 96
H8 11111 = sent value

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
The length of a variable corresponds to 4 bytes. This means for a data length of 8 bytes,
two consecutive variables are transmitted.
Receiver settings
514591883
H0 Objectno. 1025 = user-defined

H1 Len 8 = Variable length 8 bytes
H5 11111 = sent value
INFORMATION
The synchronization procedure (sync ID) has been modified from MOVIDRIVE A. In
contrast to MOVIDRIVE® A, for MOVIDRIVE® B you must ensure that in the IPOSplus®
program of the master drive the actual position is initialized first and then the sync ob-
ject with SCOM().
23.5.5 SCOMON
System Bus Communication On
This command triggers the reception of data or the cyclical transmission of previously
defined data objects.
The SCOM command initializes the data objects with the arguments RECEIVE (receiv-
ing data) or TRANSMIT CYCLIC (sending data cyclically).
In MOVIDRIVE® B, the command has been replaced by SCOMST. However, due to
downward compatibility, it can still be used with MOVIDRIVE® B.
INFORMATION
This command only activates SBus 1, not SBus 2
• Preferably use the SCOMSTATE command.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx SCOMON
23.5.6 SCOMST
This statement initializes the CAN interface, starts or stops the data reception and the
acyclic transmission of predefined data objects via SBus 1 or SBus 2. The data objects
re initialized via the SCOM function.
Regardless of the value for "X1", with MOVITRAC® B, the SCOMST X1 command al-
ways has the same effect as SCOMON (page 321).
Argument Meaning
START ALL Starts cyclical communication synchronously from SBus 1 and SBus 2
STOP ALL Stops cyclical communication synchronously from SBus 1 and SBus 2
START1 Starts cyclical communication from SBus 1
STOP1 Stops cyclical communication from SBus 1
START2 Starts cyclical communication from SBus 2
STOP2 Stops cyclical communication from SBus 2
Structure
Mxxx SCOMST X1 X1: Argument

Positioning commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.6 Positioning commands

23.6.1 Reference travel GO0
GO0 The GO0 command triggers reference travel or sets an absolute encoder. In doing so,
the operating status and the 7-segment display changes from "A" (technology option) to
"c" (reference mode). Operating mode P700 is not affected.
The argument of GO0 and parameters P900 -P903 determine the reference travel be-
havior.
The argument is a combination of 3 characteristic properties (C/U; W/NW; ZP/CAM) re-
sulting in 8 selection options. RESET can be used to interrupt reference travel.
514597259
C (conditional) Only performs reference travel if the drive has not been referenced already
(that is, H473, Bit 20 = 0).
U (unconditional) Always performs reference travel.
W (wait) Waits until the axis has been referenced. No other task is performed in the
mean time.
NW (non-wait) The next command is processed during reference travel (recommended).
ZP (zero pulse) References to the zero pulse of the encoder signal (not significant if 903 = 0
or P903 = 5).
CAM (reference cam) References to the reference cam (not significant if 903 = 0 or P903 = 5).
RESET Reference travel which has started is interrupted (brakes at positioning
ramp) and the call is reset. For a reference axis, the message "Axis refer-
enced" is reset and the message "Axis in position" is set.
Parameter settings
P60_ If a reference cam is used, one input must be set to the REFERENCE CAM function.
P900 Reference offset (writes H498).
P901/ Reference speeds.
P902
P903 The reference travel type and the argument ZP / CAM determine the condition required to end
reference travel.
Example: P903 = 1, GO0 U,W,ZP
The zero pulse is evaluated according to the reference cam.
P904 Not significant for GO0.
INFORMATION
The controller must be enabled to set an absolute encoder using the GO0 command.
Alternatively, the encoder can be set without an enable by setting the offset P905 for
Hiperface® or the parameters P953 ... P955 for an SSI encoder (DIP) .

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
INFORMATION
For type 3 and 4 and for the CAM setting, the drive must be referenced and positioned
right next to the hardware limit switch. For hoist applications and the lower reference
point in particular, when the drive is positioned to the lower point, it can collide with the
hardware limit switch at the slightest overshoot. The same danger applies when the
holding brake is released.
One way to prevent this from happening is to position the drive once reference travel
is complete so that the drive is positioned a sufficient distance away from the hardware
limit switch ( approximately 0.5 ... 1 motor revolution) .
If the software limit switches have been set via parameter P920/P921, the software limit
switches are only monitored once reference travel is complete.
If the drive is not connected to an absolute or Hiperface® encoder, the reference point
is lost after an error message occurs and the drive has to be RESET.
INFORMATION
If a waiting referencing command is interrupted by withdrawing the "/controller inhibit",
the error code 39 (reference travel) is set.
The axis does not start up once the signal has been restored. The IPOSplus® program
stops at this command.
A reset must be performed (binary input, fieldbus, SHELL ...). The IPOSplus® program
starts at the beginning of the first statement.
Structure
Mxxx GO0 X1 X1: Type of reference travel

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.6.2 GOA absolute positioning / GOR relative positioning

The argument of the travel command includes the target position.
INFORMATION
If the target position is specified via a variable, the value can only be entered in incre-
ments (based on 4096 increments/motor revolution). Constants can be entered in user
travel units.
INFORMATION
be used; the target positions are written directly to H454.
There are two types of positioning: absolute and relative.
INFORMATION
Axes turning in one direction, for example, turntables, conveyor belts or roll feeders
are usually described as modulo axes (see the modulo function P960 ... P963). In this
case, a mechanical position of the axis corresponds to an actual value H455, irrespec-
tive of the number of revolutions turned (for prerequisites for this function, see the de-
scription of the modulo function).
Parameter settings for all positioning commands

Parameter Explanation
P913/P914 Travel speeds (can be changed in the program using SETSYS).
P911/P912 Positioning ramps (acceleration) (can be changed in the program using SETSYS).
P915/P203 Precontrol that can be used to influence the jerk.
P933 Jerk limitation (only with MOVIDRIVE® B).
P916 Ramp type.
P917 Ramp mode.
GOA/GO ABSO- This command performs absolute positioning to the position specified in the second ar-
LUTE gument X2. Argument X2 can be a constant, variable or an indirect variable.
The target position based on position 0 (machine zero) is entered as the travel distance.
The resulting target position is reflected in the system variables H492 (TARGET POSI-
TION).
Structure
Mxxx GOA X1 X2 X1: NoWait: Program processing is continued while the drive is
still moving. This permits the program to be processed at the
same time as the travel movement.
Wait: Program processing does not continue until the actual
position of the drive has reached the position window P922 of
the target position.
X2: K = Target position in user units as a constant.
H = Target position in user units as a variable.
[H] = variable, that contains the target position in increments,
based on 4096 increments/motor revolution.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
GOR/GO RELA- This command performs relative positioning to the position specified in the second ar-
TIVE gument X2. Argument X2 can be a constant, variable or an indirect variable.
The entered travel distance is added to the current target position H492 (TARGET PO-
SITION) of the drive and displayed there.
Structure
Mxxx GOR X1 X2 X1: NoWait: Program processing is continued while the drive is
still moving. This permits the program to be processed at the
same time as the travel movement (recommended).
Wait: Program processing does not continue until the actual
position of the drive has reached the position window P922 of
the target position.
X2: K = Target position in user units as a constant.
H = Target position in user units as a variable.
[H] = variable, that contains the target position in increments,
based on 4096 increments/motor revolution.
Example 1 The program shown below causes the drive to travel between the positions 0 revolu-
tions. and 100 revolutions (entry in the program header: numerator, denominator, unit).
A waiting period of 5 seconds elapses when a position is reached.
n
3000 rpm
0 100 revolutions
515070219
1
2
3
4
5
515071755
1. Reference travel
2. Travel to zero
3. Wait 5 s
4. Travel to 100
5. Wait 5 s

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Once the END command has been performed, the IPOSplus® program automatically
starts processing from the first line.
Example 2 The program shown below causes movement to take place between the positions 0 and
409600 increments. A waiting period of 1 second elapses when a position is reached.
The speed is increased from 100 rpm to 3,000 rpm when the drive moves beyond posi-
tion 40960. The entire return travel takes place at 3,000 rpm.
n
3000 rpm
100 rpm
0 40960 409600 Increments

515073291
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
515074827
1. Slow CW travel 100 rpm

2. Slow CCW travel 100 rpm
3. Fast CW travel 3000 rpm
4. Fast CCW travel 3000 rpm
5. Reference travel
6. Travel to zero
7. Wait 1 s
8. Set slow speed
9. Travel to end position
10. As long as Actpos Mot (H511) is less than 40960, stay in current line
11. Set fast speed
12. Stay in current line until the drive stops
13. Wait 1 s

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Endless positioning
The absolute travel range of IPOSplus® is limited to values in the range –231 ... 0 ... 231
–1. With the relative travel command, a maximum travel distance of 231 can be added
to any actual position (see number circle).
An example of infinite positioning is shown in the jog mode sample program.
INFORMATION
The GOR command always refers to target position H492. For example, if the GOR
1000 incr. command is sent 100 times in a program, the target position is set internally
to 100 x 1000 increments. The position setpoint may shift away from the actual posi-
tion of the motor if the command is called up cyclically. The IPOS control may then fail
as of a critical value 231/2 (drive turns in the opposite direction).
515076363

Program commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.7 Program commands

23.7.1 Program command END
END The END statement indicates the textual (not logical) end of an IPOSplus® program. The
END statement is not an IPOS command; you cannot delete it.
23.7.2 Subroutine call CALL

CALL Subroutines are called up with a CALL command (CALL Mxx). The corresponding jump
flags (Mxx) are inserted in front of the first command in the subroutine. A subroutine
ends with a RETURN command (RET). The RETURN command causes program pro-
cessing to jump back to the line below the CALL command. The following program lines
will then be processed. It is also possible to have nested subroutine calls (maximum
nesting depth: 32 levels).
INFORMATION
Do not exit subroutines by jumping to a main program or another subroutine. Condi-
tional exiting of the subroutine must be performed by jumping to the end of the sub-
routine.
Structure
Mxxx CALL Myyy Myyy = Label as of which subroutine begins.
Example The main program positions the drive 10 revolutions CCW, after which there is a sub-
routine call (CALL M1). Set 2 outputs of the basic unit for 1 s (the output parameters
must be set to "IPOS-OUTPUT"). The jump back to the main program (RET) takes place
next and the GOR WAIT #10 positioning command is processed.
515186699

23 f
Program commands
i
Hz
P Hz
23.7.3 Jump commands JMP

JMP/terminals The program jumps to the specified label if the input terminals marked in the mask are
all set to level 1 or level 0 (AND relation).
The bits 0 ... 5 indicate the terminals of the basic unit, bits 6 ... 13 the terminals of the
option card (DIO11A). The mask is created by entering the terminal levels directly in the
input window.
Structure
Mxxx JMP X1 X2, Myyy X1: HI= Jump if the input terminals marked in the mask are set to
level 1.
LO= Jump if the input terminals marked in the mask are set to
level 0.
X2: Ixxx ... = Mask for the input terminals.
Myyy: Jump label to which the program branches.
Example JMP HI I 0000000000000011, M03

After the JMP command has been performed, processing continues from the M03 label
if the input terminals DI00 and DI01 are set to level 1.
515191051
JMP/comparison The JPM command causes the program to jump to a specified label when comparison
in the command results in a true statement.

Program commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx JMP X1 OP X2, Myyy X1: Variable
OP: Operator: > / > = / < / <= / = / !=
X2: H = variable
K = constant
0 = zero (in a comparison with zero, only the operators = and
!= are possible).
Myyy: Jump label to which the program jumps if the condition is ful-
filled.
515195787
JMP/System Jumps to the label indicated in the command if comparison operation is fulfilled.
The system values listed can be queried directly by means of a JMP command. Other
system values are available as system variables or must be read in using the GETSYS
command and processed further.
Structure
Mxxx JMP X1, Myyy X1: UNCONDITIONED: Unconditional jump.
N == 0: Jump if the speed is equal to zero.
N != 0: Jump if the speed is not equal to zero.
NOT IN POSITION: Jump if not in position
TP1: Jump if there is an edge change at touch probe terminal
DI02.
NOT TP1: Jump if there is not an edge change at touch probe
terminal DI02.
TP2: Jump if there is an edge change at touch probe terminal
DI03.
NOT TP2: Jump if there is not an edge change at touch probe
terminal DI03.
filled.

23 f
Program commands
i
Hz
P Hz
515235723
23.7.4 Loop commands LOOP
INFORMATION
Do not exit program loops with a jump command. Jump commands and subroutines
are allowed within a program loop.
LOOPB/LOOP This command in combination with a LOOP command creates a program loop. The
BEGIN number of loop cycles (> 0) is specified as a constant. The loop ends at the associated
LOOP command. Program loops can be nested.
If the number of loop cycles is to be variable, a JMP command must be used instead of
a LOOP command and the variable condition must be checked at each cycle.
Structure
Mxxx LOOPB X1 X1: Number of loop cycles (maximum 256)
LOOPE/LOOP This command specifies the end of a program loop that was started using the LOOPB
END command.

Program commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx LOOPE
Example In the example below, variable H0 is incremented from 0 to the value 5 in 5 loop cycles.
Program processing starts again with the SET H0 = 0 command after 5 loop cycles.
515243147
23.7.5 No Operation NOP / remark REM / return RET / TASK / TASK2 / wait WAIT
NOP/NO OPERA- No operation is performed. This command can be used, for example, to achieve wait
TION times on the basis of the command cycle time. In MOVIDRIVE® A, for example, this is
1 command/ms in task 1.
Structure
Mxxx NOP
REM/REMARK The REM command adds a remark line to the program. Remark lines cannot be saved
in the inverter. All remark lines are lost after DOWNLOAD of the program followed by an
UPLOAD.
Remark lines can only be saved in program files on the PC.
Structure
Command structure X1: Any string
REM X1
RET/RETURN The RET command terminates a subroutine (see the CALL command) and jumps back
to the program from which the subroutine was called. In a main program, the RET com-
mand causes a jump back to the beginning of the main program.

23 f
Program commands
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx RET
TASK This command is used to define the start address of task 2 and task 3 and to start or
stop these with the argument X1 (START/STOP); that is, the control word of the task is
written. The control word and start address are both set to 0 when the power is switched
on, i.e. Task2 is deactivated.
This command is only available as of MOVIDRIVE® B.
Structure
Mxxx TASK X1 Myyy X1: TASK2 STOP: Stop task 2.
TASK2 START: Start task 2.
TASK3 STOP: Stop task 3.
TASK3 START: Start task 3.
Myyy: Label at which the task starts.
Example TASK TASK2 START M03

Task 2 is started at this command and the first command after the label M03 is pro-
cessed parallel to task 1.
TASK2 This command is used to define the start address of TASK2 and to start or stop these
with the argument X1 (START/STOP); that is, the control word of TASK2 is written. The
control word and start address are both set to 0 when the power is switched on, i.e.
TASK2 is deactivated.
In MOVIDRIVE® B, the command has been replaced by TASK. However, due to down-
ward compatibility, it can still be used with MOVIDRIVE® B.
Structure
Mxxx TASK2 X1 Myyy X1: STOP: Stop task 2.
START: Start task 2.
Myyy: Label at which task 2 starts.
Example TASK2 START M03

Task 2 is started at this command and the first command after the label M03 is pro-
cessed parallel to task 1.
515247499

Program commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
WAIT The WAIT command waits for the length of time specified in ms in the argument and
then continues program processing for this task once the time is up.
INFORMATION
If the waiting time is to be variable, you will have to initialize a timer (H487 ... H489)
instead of a WAIT command and program a loop with the JMP command until the
timer has expired.
Structure
Mxxx WAIT X1 X1: Waiting time in ms, 0 ... 32767.
Example SET H0 = 20000

SET H489 = H0
M01: JMP H489 != 0, M01

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
23.8 Set commands

23.8.1 Copy variables COPY
COPY The COPY command copies the number of successive variables specified in the 3rd ar-
gument. The second argument of the COPY command indicates the number of the first
source variable; the first argument indicates the number of the first target variable. Up
to 10 variables can be copied using one COPY command.
Structure
Mxxx COPY X1 = X2, X3 X1: Hxxx = Number of the first target variable.
X2: Hyyy = Number of the first source variable.
X3: K = Constant (number of variables to be copied, 1 ... 10).
filled.
Example The command COPY H2 = H20, 3 corresponds to the command sequence:

SET H2 = H20
SET H3 = H21
SET H4 = H22
23.8.2 Read system values GETSYS

GETSYS/GET The GETSYS command loads the value of an internal system value of argument X2 to
SYSTEM VALUE one or more variables of argument X1.
Structure
Mxxx GETSYS X1 X2 X1: Hxxx = Start of the variable structure containing the result
after the command has been performed.
X2:
ACTIVE CURRENT Active current in 0.1% rated unit current
ACT.SPEED actual speed in 0.1% rpm
SETP.SPEED Setpoint speed in 0.1% rpm
ERROR Error code according to the "Error messages and list of errors" table in the system
manual
SYSTEM STATUS Operating status, value of the 7-segment display without fault status in accordance
with the table "Operating display" in the system manual
ACT.POSITION Actual position depending on the encoder selected in P941 H509, H510 or H511
SETP.POSITION Setpoint position (current setpoint selection of the profile generator whilst a travel
command is being carried out), identical to system variable H491
TARGET POSITION Target position, identical to system variable H492
INPUTS Binary inputs H483 (MOVIDRIVE® A) / H520 (MOVIDRIVE® B) of the basic unit
and options; identical to system variable H483.
DEVICE STATUS Identical to status word 1 of the fieldbus unit profile (fault code + operating status)
OUTPUTS Binary outputs H482 (MOVIDRIVE® A) / H521 (MOVIDRIVE® B) of the basic unit
and the option
IxT Unit utilization in 0.1% rated unit current
ACT.POSITION / SETP.POSITION / TARGET POSITION: Resolution depends on the encoder selected in P941:
– Motor encoder: 4096 Inc./revolution
– External encoder X14: Encoder resolution P944
– DIP (SSI encoder): Encoder resolution P955

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
ANALOG INPUTS -10 V ... 0 ... +10 V = -10000 ... 0 ... 10000
H+0 Voltage value analog input 1 [mV]
H+1 Voltage value analog input 2 [mV]
CAM The GETSYS H = CAM command simulates a cam controller. Using the GETSYS
command, a standard cam controller with 1 output per cam can be used per drive.
With MOVIDRIVE® units, you can use an extended cam controller with 8 outputs.
Hxx is the first variable of a data structure (CamControl). The bit with the highest
significance (bit 31) is used in Hxx to decide which cam controller the GETSYS
command refers to.
Bit 31 = 0: Standard cam controller (all MOVIDRIVE® units). The GETSYS com-
mand activates the cam controller. The cams are formed once when the GETSYS
command is processed. If the standard cam controller is to process cyclically, the
command must be called up cyclically.
Bit 31 = 1: Extended cam controller with technology option and CFC or SERVO
mode). The GETSYS command activates the cam controller, the cams are formed
cyclically in the background.
The structure of the variables depends on whether the standard or expanded cam
controller is called.
The data structure is described in section "Position Detection and "Positioning/cam
controllers".
515353867
ANALOG OUTPUTS +/- 10 V correspond to +/- 10000
H The variable in the GETSYS H = ANALOG OUTPUTS command defines the
beginning of the following variable structure.
H+0 Contains the voltage value of analog output 1 (AO1)
H+1 Contains the voltage value of analog output 1 (AO2)
TIMER 0 Loads the current value of timer 0 [ms], identical to system variable H489
TIMER 1 Loads the current value of timer 1 [ms], identical to system variable H488
PO-DATA Reads the PO data buffer (data sent from the master to the unit). 3 PO or 10 PO
data items are read depending on the number of PO data items.
H+0 Bus type
0 = reserved
1 = TERMINAL
2 = RS-485
3 = Fieldbus
4 = reserved
5 = SBus
8 = SBus 2 (only MOVIDRIVE® B)
H+1 Number of PO data
H+2 PO1
H+3 PO2
H+4 PO3
H+5 PO4
H+6 PO5
H+7 PO6
H+8 PO7
H+9 PO8
H+10 PO9
H+11 PO10
DC-VOLTAGE DC link voltage [V]

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
RELATED TORQUE Relative torque/relative torque VFC.

REL. TORQUE VFC The relative torque is the display value based on the rated unit current for the
torque at the motor output shaft. The absolute torque can be calculated from this
value using the following formula:
Mabs = Mrel × IN × MN / (1000 × IQN)
Mabs = absolute torque
IN = Rated unit current
Mrel = relative torque based on 0.1% IN
MN = Rated torque of the motor [Nm]
IQN = Rated Q current [A] for selected connection type. The value is available in
the operating modes CFC and SERVO / VFC1, VFC1 & hoist, VFC1 & DC braking
and VFC1 & flying start.
ACT. SPEED EXT. Actual speed of the external encoder X14. The following data structure is used:
H Time Base 5 ms ... 31 ms: Mean value for speed detection of external encoder.
H+1 Encoder type
0 = Encoder X14
1 = DIP encoder
H+2 Numerator -215 ... 0 ... + 215 -1: Numerator for user scaling.
H+3 Denominator 1 ... 215 -1: Denominator for user scaling.
H+4 D-Pointer 0 ... 458: Pointer to result variable H".
H' Result unit: [nX14] = Inc/Time base.
Example: The speed of the master encoder is to be displayed in arcs per hour. With an
average value filter of 30 ms and encoder X14, the arcs per hour are calculated as fol-
lows:
11250 / 384 = (1000 ms × 60 s × 60 min) / (Incr. per full load revolution × TimeBase)
The minus sign at H32 causes the direction of rotation to be reversed.
SET H30 = 30
SET H31 = 0
SET H32 = -11250
SET H33 = 384
SET H34 = 40
GETSYS H30 = ACT.SPEED EXT.
SPEED MON. TIMER Numerator value of the speed monitoring.
The GETSYS command can be used as a prewarning for speed monitoring. Speed
monitoring is triggered when the current is at the current limit for the number of
seconds specified in P501. For example, if P501 = 200 ms, the numerator value
can be queried with GETSYS. In this way, return travel can be made at rapid
speed and, when under load, the speed can be reduced automatically by the
inverter.

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.8.3 Set commands variable SET / fault response SETFR / Indirect addressing SETI / Interrupt
SETINT / system values SETSYS
SET The SET command loads argument X1 with the content of argument X2 (variable H or
constant K). The result is written to argument X1, argument X2 remains unchanged.
Structure
Mxxx SET X1 = X2
X1: Hxxx = Result of the statement.
X2: Hyyy = Source.
SETFR/SET The SETFR command defines the response to a unit fault. The fault code is entered in
FAULT REACTION argument X1 of the command. The reaction to the unit fault is selected with argument 2.
The selected fault reaction will only be executed once the SETFR command has been
processed. The most recently selected fault response (call of the SETFR command or
changes in P83_ "Fault response") is the one in effect.
You can program all responses to a fault as long as it has a point in column "P" in the
fault list in the operating instructions or the system manual.
Example:
• Fault 27 "Limit switches missing", no point in column P: Cannot be programmed
• Fault 28 "Fieldbus timeout", point in column P: programmable
515358219

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx SETFR #X1 = X2
X1: Fault code of the fault for which the response is to apply. The
following error numbers are permitted:
08: n-monitoring
11: Overtemperature
26: External terminal (P830)
28: Fieldbus timeout (P831)
31: TF sensor (P835)
39: Reference travel
42: Lag error (P834)
43: RS-485 timeout (P833)
47: SBus timeout (P836)
77: IPOS control word
78: IPOS software limit switch (P838)
84: Motor protection (P832)
92: DIP operating range
93: DIP absolute encoder
X2:
NO RESPONSE No response (and no fault display).
DISPLAY FAULT No response, only the fault is displayed (the terminal level of an output pro-
grammed to "/FAULT" is set from 1 to 0).
SWITCH OFF, The output stage is inhibited, no torque, the brake is activated.
FAULT After reset: Response as for power off/on:
The IPOSplus® program, reference position, outputs, parameters (SETSYS command)
and variables set by IPOSplus® are reset (program starts in line 1).
E-STOP, FAULT The drive is stopped at the emergency stop ramp.
After reset: Response → SWITCH OFF, FAULT.
RAPID STOP, The drive is stopped at the rapid stop ramp.
FAULT After reset: Response → SWITCH OFF, FAULT.
SWITCH OFF The output stage is inhibited, no torque, the brake is activated.
WARNING IPOSplus® program continues, reference position, outputs, parameters (SETSYS com-
mand) and variables set by IPOSplus® are retained.*
E-STOP, WARNING The drive is stopped at the emergency stop ramp.
IPOSplus® program keeps running, → SWITCH OFF, WARNING.*
RAPID STOP, The drive is stopped at the rapid stop ramp.
WARNING IPOSplus® program keeps running, → SWITCH OFF, WARNING.*
* even after fault confirmation

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
SETI/SET INDI- Variable X1 gets the value of variable whose number is contained in variable X2.
RECT H = [H]
INFORMATION
Is the number of the indirectly addressed variables outside the defined range (e. g.
MOVIDRIVE® A range 0 ... 512), the fault message IPOS INDEX OVERFL (32) is gen-
erated.
Structure
Mxxx SETI X1 = [X2]
X1: Hxxx = Target variable.
X2: Hyyy = Number of the source variable.
Example SET H1 = 7
SET H7 = 11
SET H3 [H1]
After the program has been run, the variables have the following values:
H1 = 7
H7 = 11
H3 = 11
SETI/SET INDI- The variable with the number in variable X1 gets the value from variable X2.
RECT [H] = H
INFORMATION
Is the number of the indirectly addressed variables outside the defined range (e. g.
MOVIDRIVE® A range 0 ... 512), the fault message IPOS INDEX OVERFL (32) is gen-
erated.

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx SETI [X1] = X2
X1: Hxxx = Number of the target variable.
X2: Hyyy = Source variable.
Example SET H01 = 50

SET H0 = 10
M01 :SETI [H0] = H01
ADD H0 + 1
ADD H01 + 10
JMP H0 <= 15 , M01
After the program has been run, the variables have the following values:
H10 = 50
H11 = 60
...
H15 = 100
SETINT/SET The SETINT command sets the start address of an interrupt routine. The address is in-
INTERRUPT dicated as label in the command. An interrupt may be triggered by various events. The
events are specified in Argument X1. The interrupt routine itself must be completed with
a RET command.
A jump to the interrupt routine takes place immediately and independent of the currently
processed main program line. If the interrupt routine ends with the RET command, pro-
gram processing continues from the point where the interruption occurred (processing
of an interrupted "wait command" is continued).
The SETINT command is only in effect in task 1 and processing of task 1 is interrupted
whilst the interrupt is processed.
It is only possible to process one interrupt at a time, although an interrupt with a higher
priority can interrupt the processing of another interrupt. ERROR has the highest prior-
ity, then TOUCH PROBE, followed by TIMER 0.
An interrupt only has to be initialized once using SETINT.
515362827

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx SETINT X1, Myyy
X1:
DISABLE Deactivating the interrupt, the jump flag (Mxx) is of no importance.
ERROR Triggers an interrupt in case of a unit fault. The interrupt routine runs cyclically until the
error has been removed, at which point, the routine is left using the RET command.
Depending on the set fault reaction (parameter group 830 or SETFR command), pro-
cessing of the interrupt routine will result in a behavior other than the one described
above:
• No interrupt is performed if the faults in parameter group 830 are set to "No
response" or if the SETFR command is set to NO RESPONSE.
• The program is restarted (see the SETFR command) after acknowledgment of the
fault, if the fault response (parameter group 830 or the SETFR command) is set
to "..., FAULT". Any reference ID that has been set is lost.
TIMER 0 Triggers an interrupt when the time set in Timer 0 H489 has elapsed. An "auto reload"
with the system variable H485 takes place after Timer 0 has elapsed. This reload
value determined the time with which the interrupt routine is executed cyclically.
TOUCH PROBE Triggers an interrupt when there is a change of signal level on the touch probe termi-
nal DI02, if the touch probe was activated for terminal DI02 (parameter P601 = IPOS
INPUT) and the TOUCHP command was transmitted.
Myyy: Start label of the interrupt routine.
Example 1 Interrupt branch in the event of a unit fault

In the sample program, binary input DO01 is toggled after a 2 sec pause. The program
branches to the interrupt routine immediately if a unit fault occurs. The system returns
(RET) to the main program as soon as there is a "high" signal at terminal DI02. To reset
the fault, the parameter for input DI02 should be set to "Reset".
MQX unit errors can set the interrupt to ERROR. Unit errors from the connected
MOVIMOT® cannot trigger the interrupt.
515392779

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 2 The following example illustrates the principle of this process:

M0 :SETINTERROR M01
M01 :ADD H0 + 1
RET
END
H0 counts up as long as the unit error still occurs. After the fault reset, H0 contains the
value from the EEPROM, for example, 0. The value from the working memory calculated
during the error is lost
23.8.4 SETSYS
The SETSYS command writes the value of one or more variables to an internal system
value. The first argument selects the system value to be written whilst the second argu-
ment contains the number of the (first) source variable.
The system values are reset to their original values when the system is switched off
(mains and 24 V power).
INFORMATION
Writing system values can alter unit settings that have been made for the application
during startup. In particular, changes to positioning ramps and the maximum current
must be adapted to the features of the system to preclude the risk of damage and haz-
ards (e.g. due to mechanical overload).
516336139

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Structure
Mxxx SETSYS X1, X2
X2: Number of the first source variable.
X1: System values that can be selected

The internal fixed setpoints (parameter group P160/P170) can be altered in steps of 0.1 rpm
using the IPOSplus® program (even during travel if there is no controller inhibit).
Note:
The new fixed setpoint is only adopted after 5 ms. You may want to delay program processing
after a SetSys command with a wait command (5 ms).
If the fixed setpoint value exceeds the permitted range, the algebraic sign changes.
N11 = Internal fixed setpoint n11
PI DATA1) Process input data according to the fieldbus unit profile
H Number of PI data items
H+1 PI data 1
H+2 PI data 2
H+3 PI data 3
OP. MODE Sets the operating mode The operating mode can only be changed within the same control
procedure (CFC or SERVO) (even during travel if there is no controller inhibit).
11 CFC (speed control)
12 CFC & torque control
13 CFC & IPOS (positioning)
14 CFC & synchronous operation (DRS11A)
16 SERVO (speed control)
17 SERVO & torque control
18 SERVO & IPOS (positioning)
19 SERVO & synchronous operation (DRS11A)
IMAX Setting the maximum current (only parameter set 1) as a percentage of the unit rated current
(setting range: 0,1 ... 150%, in 0,1% steps); settings can also be made during travel.
POS. RAMP Positioning ramps (up/down); settings can also be made during travel (only for the "linear"
ramp type). Setting in ms with reference value 3000 rpm.
H Positioning ramp 1 (up)
H+1 Positioning ramp 2 (down)
POS. Positioning speed (cw/ccw); settings can also be made during travel (only for the "linear"
SPEED ramp type). Setting in 0.1 rpm.
H Positioning speed CW
H+1 Positioning speed CCW
OVERRIDE Switching override on/off; settings can also be made during travel (only for the "linear" ramp
ON type).
H=0 off
H=1 On
BRAKE Switching the brake function on/off
FUNC. ON
H=0 off
H=1 On
RAMP TYPE You should not make settings during travel (torque shocks!). Changes P916)
H=0 Linear
H=1 sine
H=2 square
H=3 Bus ramp
H=4 jerk limited
H=5 Electronic cam
H=6 I-synchronous operation
RESET Resets the system error in variable X2
ERROR

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz
ACT. POSI- Sets the motor encoder actual position ACTPOS.MOT (H511)
TION
SPLINE Internal drive calculation of an analytical cam disk. The function is only available in MDX B
MULTIAXIS with SD version -15C.
The spline calculation is initialized via the system function after up to 20 curve points (x-y =
value pairs, x = master position, y = slave position) have been specified in a master encoder
range. The calculation is then started using h+0 SplineMode and either a complete cam
disk or one segment of a selected cam disk is filled. Currently, a spline 0 procedure (for opti-
mum running) and a spline 1 procedure (for section-by-section movements and straight sec-
tions) are available. The calculation is complete after ≤ 200 ms.
– H+0 = SplineMode: (Value range: 0 ... 3)
• = 0: Interpolation not active, or calculation is finished
• = 1: Start interpolation, enter interpolated values from index 0 starting with the
electronic cam (in ascending order, from index 0 to 512).
• = 2: Start interpolation, enter interpolated values from index 512 starting with the
electronic cam (in descending order, from index 512 to 0).
• = 3: Preparatory parameter calculation for interpolation concluded; start entering
interpolated values in the electronic cam.
– H+1 = SplineModeControl:
Reserved
– H+2 = SplineDest: (Value range: 0 ... 5)
Number of the electronic cam in which the interpolated values are to be entered.
– H+3 = SplineNUser: (Value range: 2 ... 10)
Number of curve points to be used for interpolation and the calculation process (bit 7 = 0
spline 0, bit 7 = 1 spline 1)
– H+4 = SplineX0User: (Only a value >= 0 can be entered here!)
X value of the first curve point
Y value (= position value) of the first curve point
– ...
– H+42 = SplineX19User: (Only a value <= 512 can be entered here!)
X value of the 20th curve point
Y value of the 20th curve point
SS_MULTIAXIS: Total drive calculation of a trajectory.
Only available on request. Also refer to the addendum to the "Special Design SK-0C for
Caluculated Curves" operating instructions.

Set commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.8.5 VARINT
Syntax VARINT Hxx, Mxx
Description This command is not available in MOVIDRIVE® A, only as of MOVIDRIVE® B.

The command activates a variable interrupt with the data structure as of variable Hxx.
If the condition for the interrupt is fulfilled and task 2 or 3, in which this interrupt is pro-
cessed, is started, the commands are performed as of the label Mxx. The event for the
interrupt is the comparison with a variable value (see H+4). If the data structure has
been initialized, during run time the behavior of the interrupt can be dynamically adapted
to a complete VarInterrupt using an IPOSplus® command.
Note: The data from the data structure is only transferred when the command VARINT
Hxx, Mxx is called (data consistency).
Example: If the value from the data structure Hx+3 CompareVar is changed, for exam-
ple, the value is only taken into account with the command VARINT Hxx, Mxx.
Key points Hxx First variable of a data structure (see table H+0)
Mxx Label with the first command of the interrupt function.
Data structure of the variable interrupt:
structure
H+0 Control 0: All VarInterrupt = OFF/Reset
1: Interrupt gets computing time from task 2 and interrupts this task for as
long as the interrupt is processed.
2: Interrupt gets computing time from task 3 and interrupts this task for as
long as the interrupt is processed.
H+1 IntNum 0 ... 3: Defines a sequential number of the VarInterrupt.
An interrupt with the number x, which has already been activated, can
be reactivated during the program run time with another data structure
using the command call VarInt Hxx, Mxx when the same interrupt
number is specified in the new data structure at the position H+1.
This feature is not available for the task 1 interrupts.
H+2 SrcVar Number of the reference variable whose value is compared with the com-
parison value.
ScrVar is the value of the reference variable that ScrVar refers to.
H+3 CompVar Comparison value or mask used to compare the value of the H+2 refer-
ence variable.

23 f
Set commands
i
Hz
P Hz

structure
H+4 Mode 0: No interrupt event. This can be used to deactivate this one interrupt
without deactivating them all.
1: One of the bits of the reference variable, masked out using the CompVar
mask, has changed its status:
([*SrcVar(t) ^ *SrcVar(t-T)] & CompVar) != 0
2:As long as the value of the reference variable is equal to the comparison
value
(*SrcVar == CompVar)
3:As long as the value of the reference variable is not equal to the compar-
ison value
(*SrcVar != CompVar)
4:As long as the value of the reference variable is greater than or equal to
the comparison value
(*SrcVar >= CompVar)
5:As long as the value of the reference variable is less than or equal to the
comparison value
(*SrcVar <= CompVar)
6: Value of the reference variable AND the comparison value is not 0
((*SrcVar & CompVar) != 0)
7: Value of the reference variable AND the comparison value is 0
((*SrcVar & CompVar) == 0)
8: Positive edge of the bit masked out by CompVar
9: Negative edge of the bit masked out by CompVar
10: As 2; however, interrupt is only processed once each time the condi-
tion is fulfilled (edge triggered)
11: As 3; however, interrupt is only processed once each time the condition
is fulfilled (edge triggered)
H+5 Priority Priority of the interrupt (1 ... 10); task 2 and task 3 are both assigned the
priority 0.
H+6 IntEvent Process image of the reference variable from *SrcVar to the time of the
interrupt.
Example See "Task Management and Interrupts / Variable Interrupts with MOVIDRIVE® B".

Special unit commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.9 Special unit commands

23.9.1 ASTOP / MEM / TOUCHP / WDOFF / WDON
ASTOP/AXIS The ASTOP command is used to stop or re-enable the drive (see H484 bit 1). The ar-
STOP gument of the command (RAPID STOP, HOLD CONTROL, TARGET POSITION) de-
fines the stop type (ramp, control when stopped, etc.) or re-enables the drive (IPOS EN-
ABLE).
516341515
Structure
Mxxx ASTOP X1
X1:
RAPID Braking with the rapid stop ramp followed by speed control. The last target position (H492) to
STOP have been transmitted is retained. Inhibit via control word (command ASTOP (IPOS
ENABLE) is required before the subsequent travel command). The brake is applied if the
brake function is activated.
HOLD Braking with the ramp of the basic unit (P131/P133) followed by position control. The last tar-
CONTROL get position (H492) to have been transmitted is retained. Inhibit via control word (the ASTOP
(IPOS ENABLE) command is required with the subsequent travel command). The brake is
not applied if the brake function is activated.
TARGET Positioning stop with positioning ramp (P911/P912) and calculated "STOP" target position
POSITION (only possible in the positioning mode), followed by position control. The last target position
(H492) to have been transmitted is overwritten by the stop position. No inhibit via control word
(no ASTOP (IPOS ENABLE) command required before the subsequent travel command).
The brake is not applied if the brake function is activated.
Note: Since the actual position is used as the setpoint position at standstill, the command
cannot be processed cyclically. This is the case in axes with process forces or hoists because
otherwise the axis drifts slowly out of position.
IPOS The inhibit is revoked using the IPOSplus® control word.
ENABLE
MEM/MEMORIZE The MEM command makes it possible to save (load) IPOSplus® programs and/or vari-
ables in (from) the non-volatile memory on (to) the unit. The action is specified via the
argument.
INFORMATION
When using the MEM command note that the variables stored in the non-volatile
memory (H0 – 127) and all parameters are not written cyclically. This is because the
number of storage operations with the storage medium (EEPROM) is restricted to 105
storage operations.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Individual variables can also be stored using the MOVILINK command.
516345867
Structure
Mxxx MEM X1
X1:
NOP No data is stored
STORE ALL Programs and data in the working memory are saved in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM)
LOAD ALL Programs and data are loaded from the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to the working mem-
ory.
STORE Only the program from the working memory is saved to the non-volatile memory (EEPROM)
PROG.
LOAD Only the program from the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) is loaded to the working memory.
PROG.
STORE Only the variables from the working memory are saved to the non-volatile memory
DATA (EEPROM)
LOAD DATA Only the variables from the non-volatile memory are loaded (EEPROM) to the working mem-
ory.
Example If an error occurs, the program jumps to an error interrupt routine. Here, the MEM
STORE DATA command is called so that you can continue processing with the stored
interim status of variables H0 ... H127 after the error reset.
If you do not use this command, the program starts with the most recent values from EE-
PROM and overwrites the most recent working values.
TOUCHP/TOUCH The command TOUCHP enables or locks a touch probe input. The touch probe function
PROBE is generally assigned to the input terminals DI02 and/or DI03. Inputs used for the touch
probe function should be set to "IPOS input" to prevent them being allocated twice.
If there is a change of signal level at a touch probe input after the TOUCHP command
has been carried out, the current actual positions (H511, H510, H509) are stored in the
variables intended for this purpose (H502 – H507) once.
A counter is only available in MQX and MOVITRAC® 07 with variable H511. To take an-
other measurement, the touch probe must be enabled again.
It takes 100 µs to store the touch probe positions, regardless of ongoing program pro-
cessing. The terminal level must have been altered for at least 200 µs to be detected
reliably.

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
The argument can be used to select the edge change that causes a touch probe.
516734219
The touch probe positions are stored in the following variables:

Encoder Encoder position Position Position
Touch probe 1 Touch probe 2
(DI02) (DI03)
Motor encoder (X15) H511 H507 H505
ACTPOS. MOT TP.POS1MOT TP.POS2MOT
External encoder (X14) H510 H506 H504
ACTPOS.EXT TP.POS1EXT TP.POS2EXT
Absolute encoder (X62) H509 H503 H502
ACTPOS.ABS TP.POS1ABS TP.POS2ABS
Virtual encoder (only for H376 H501 TpPos1_VE H500 TpPos2_VE
MOVIDRIVE® B)
Structure
Mxxx TOUCHP X1
X1:
ENABLE 1 Enables the touch probe input DI02. When the signal changes low/high and high/low,
the actual positions are stored.
DISABLE 1 Inhibits the touch probe input DI02
ENABLE 2 Enables the touch probe input DI03. When the signal changes low/high and high/low,
the actual positions are stored.
DISABLE 2 Inhibits the touch probe input DI03
ENABLE 1_HI Enables the touch probe input DI02. When the signal changes low/high, the actual
positions are stored.
ENABLE 1_LO Enables the touch probe input DI02. When the signal changes high/low, the actual
ENABLE 2_HI Enables the touch probe input DI03. When the signal changes low/high, the actual
ENABLE 2_LO Enables the touch probe input DI03. When the signal changes high/low, the actual
The user can determine whether a touch probe input has been activated either in the
program, for example, with a MP TP2, M0 or with the SETINT TOUCHP1 M0. The user
can determine whether a stored position value lies in a specific position range by com-
paring the values with those in the following user program.

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 1 In the program, the drive travels between the absolute positions 0 revs. and 100 revs. If
there is a change of signal level at touch probe input DI03 whilst the drive is moving to
the target position of 100 revs., a further 10 revs. (40960 incr.) is traveled from precisely
this touch probe position. For return travel to position 0, the touch probe function is de-
activated using the command DISABLE2.
516738571

f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
Example 2 As an alternative to the example above, a program branch (jump flag M100) can be ex-
ecuted when the touch probe position is reached. This is achieved using the "SETINT
TOUCHP1 M100" command.
516742923
WDOFF/WDON / The watchdog is called up in the time interval specified in the argument. All tasks are
WATCH DOG halted and the drive is stopped with fault 41 if the time specified in the watchdog timer
OFF/ON H490 elapses before the monitoring function is switched off using the WDOFF com-
mand. (The output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The drive coasts to a halt
if there is no brake.)
Structure
Mxxx WDON X1 X1: Interval in ms in which the watchdog is called up.
Mxxx WDOFF

23 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Example The drive moves for as long as the level at DI05 is set to 1 ("high"). The "watchdog" func-
tion ensures that the drive does not travel for more than 10 s. If the 10 second limit is
exceeded, the drive is stopped.
516804619

Comparison commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
23.10 Comparison commands

23.10.1 Comparison operations CPEQ / CPGE / CPGT / CPLE / CPLT / CPNE
A variable is compared with a 2nd argument (variable or constant). The following com-
parisons are possible:
• Equal to (CPEQ)
• Greater than or equal to (CPGE)
• Greater than (CPGT)
• Less than or equal to (CPLE)
• Less than (CPLT)
• Not equal to (CPNE)
The result can be processed further with a subsequent jump command.
CPEQ/COMPARE The CPEQ command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is the same
EQUAL as variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not equal to zero if the
condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
The result can be processed further, for example, with a subsequent jump command.
Variable X2 remains unchanged.
Structure
Mxxx CPEQ X1 == X2 X1: Variable (result)
X2: Variable or constant
Example 1 SET H0 = 13
SET H1 = 50
CPEQ H0 == H1
After the program has been processed, H0 has the value zero and H1 the value 50.
CPEQ H0 == 13
After the program has been processed, H0 has the value one.
CPGE/COMPARE The CPGE command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is greater
GREATER OR than or equal to the variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not
EQUAL equal to zero if the condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
Structure
Mxxx CPGE X1 >= X2 X1: Variable (result)

23 f
Comparison commands
i
Hz
P Hz
SET H1 = 50
CPGE H0 > = H1
Example 2 SET H0 = -3
CPGE H0 > = -3
CPGT/COMPARE The CPGT command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is greater
GREATER THAN than the variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not equal to zero
if the condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
Structure
Mxxx CPGT X1 > X2 X1: Variable (result)
CPGT H0 > -3
After the program has been processed, H0 has the value zero.
SET H2 = 2
CPGT H0 > H2
CPLE/COMPARE The CPLE command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is less than
LESS OR EQUAL or equal to the variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not equal to
zero if the condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
Structure
Mxxx CPLE X1 <= X2 X1: Variable (result)
SET H1 = 13
CPLE H0 <= H1
CPLE H0 <= -3

Comparison commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
CPLT/COMPARE The CPLT command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is less than
LESS THAN as variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not equal to zero if the
condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
Structure
Mxxx CPLT X1 < X2 X1: Variable (result)
CPLT H0 < -3
SET H2 = 3
CPLT H0 < H2
CPNE/COMPARE The CPNE command compares, observing the signs, whether variable X1 is not equal
NOT EQUAL to the variable or constant X2. Variable X1 contains the result. It is not equal to zero if
the condition is fulfilled; otherwise, the result is zero.
Structure
Mxxx CPNE X1 != X2 X1: Variable (result)
SET H1 = 13
CPNE H0 != H1
CPNE H0 != 13

23 f
Comparison commands
i
Hz
P Hz
23.10.2 Logical operations ANDL / ORL / NOTL

ANDL LOGICAL The ANDL command is the logical AND operation of two variables. The result is written
AND to variable X1. Variable X2 remains unchanged. The result is zero when one of the two
variables = 0. The result is one when both variables != 0.
Structure
Mxxx ANDL X1 && X2 X1: Variable (result)
X2: Variable

SET H02 = 0
ANDL H01 && H02

SET H02 = 50
ANDL H01 && H02
ORL/LOGICAL OR The ORL command is the logical OR operation of two variables. The result is written to
variable X1. Variable X2 remains unchanged. The result is one when one of the two vari-
ables != 0. The result is zero when both variables = 0.
Structure
Mxxx ORL X1 ¦¦ X2 X1: Variable (result)
X2: Variable

SET H02 = 0
ORL H01 ¦¦ H02

SET H02 = 0
ORL H01 ¦¦ H02

Comparison commands
f 23
i
Hz
P Hz
NOTL/LOGICAL The NOTL command carries out the logical negation of a variable. The result is written
NOT to variable X1. Variable X2 remains unchanged. The result is one when variable X2 = 0.
The result is zero when variable X2 != 0.
Structure
Mxxx NOTL X1 = NOT (X2) X1: Variable (result)
X2: Variable

NOTL H01 NOT (H02)

NOTL H01 NOT (H02)

kVA n Assembler – Examples
24 f
"Flashing light" sample program
i
Hz
P Hz
24 Assembler – Examples
24.1 "Flashing light" sample program
24.1.1 Sample "Controller"
This sample program switches digital output DOØ1 on and off every 2 seconds.
Quick-start (exam- Requirements

ple)
Mains connection and/or 24 V supply (backup voltage terminals X10:9 (+24 V / VI24)
and X10:10 (0 V / DGND)) connected; no need to connect the motor and encoder (no
motor movement).
1. No startup required for the speed control.
2. Set the output in Shell (P621 Binary output DOØ1 → IPOS OUTPUT).
3. Start the Assembler
4. Open/activate the "Program" window and enter the sample program "Flash output
DOØ1".
5. Download the sample program from the program window (PC) to the inverter's pro-
gram memory: Press "Ctrl + F9" in the active program window
6. Start the sample program: Press "F9" in the active program window
7. Check the user program:
• The task 1 display in the program header changes from PSTOP to START.
• The program pointer runs in the program window.
• In Shell, the display parameter P052, output terminal DOØ1, changes between 1
and 0 every 2 seconds.
Assembler program window:
516819723
The program consists of:

3 remark lines (two dashed lines to highlight the program name, and one line for the pro-
gram name)
Set output DO02 (X13:3) to "0"
Wait 2 seconds
Set output DO02 (X13:3) to "1"
Wait 2 seconds
End of program / jump to start of program

Assembler – Examples kVA n
"Flashing light" sample program
f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
24.1.2 Sample "Positioning"

This sample program alternates the position of the drive 10 motor revolutions CW and
CCW every 2 s.
Quick-start (exam- Requirements

ple)
• Inverter / motor / encoder connected
• Inverter started up in VFC-n-Reg. & IPOS, CFC & IPOS or SERVO & IPOS (P700)
operating mode in accordance with the MOVIDRIVE® system manual. P700 must
have one of the settings after startup.
• Check the hardware limit switches of the Emergency switching off circuit
1. Parameter setting:
• P600 binary input DI01 → ENABLE/STOP
• P601 binary input DI02 → NO FUNCTION
• P602 binary input DI03 → NO FUNCTION
• P603 binary input DI04 → /LS CW
• P604 binary input DI05 → /LS CCW
• P700 operating mode → (VFC-n-Reg. / CFC / SERVO) & IPOS
• NUMERATOR →4096
• DENOMINATOR →1
• UNIT→ rev.
2. Enter "10 motor revolutions back and forth" sample program.
3. Download the sample program: Press "F2" in the active program window
4. Drive must not reach the limit switches. Terminals DIØ4 (X13:5) and DIØ5 (X13:6)
must have the level "1".
5. Start the sample program: Press "F9" in the active program window
6. Check the sample program:
• The task 1 display in the program header changes from PSTOP to START.
• The motor moves 10 revolutions CW or CCW alternately every two seconds.
• The change in position can be tracked in display parameter P003.
• The position setpoint and actual position are displayed in the variables H492 and
H511.

24 f
"Hoist" sample program
i
Hz
P Hz
"10 motor revolutions back and forth" sample program:
516923787
The program consists of:

3 remark lines
Travel relative 10 motor revolutions CW
Wait 2 seconds
Travel relative 10 motor revolutions CCW
Wait 2 seconds
End program
End of program / jump to start of program
The RET command is not mandatory in this example as the program was not called as
a subroutine. The return command causes the program to jump back to the first program
line, which is permitted in this case.
24.2 "Hoist" sample program

24.2.1 Characteristics
• Reference travel
• Selection of three hoist positions via binary inputs
• Notification when a selected position is reached
• Automatic movement away from hardware limit switches
The first 3 input terminals of the DIO11B option allow for 3 positions to be approached.
The drive is moved away from a hardware limit switch by entering a "1" signal at the
"RESET" input (DI02).
24.2.2 Settings
A detailed description of the configuration of inputs/outputs is available in the remark
section of the program source code.

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
24.2.3 Schematic structure

Schematic structure of the hoist with IPOSplus®:
d = 50 mm
i =5 M
BD 100 RHWLS
RSWLS
100
UP
2000
CAM
500
MZP
100
LSWLS
BD 100 LHWLS
516940939
BD = braking distance CAM = Reference cam

RHWLS = CW hardware limit switch MZP = Machine zero
RSWLS = CW software limit switch LSWLS = CCW software limit switch
UP = upper travel range LHWLS = CCW hardware limit switch
S = travel carriage

24 f
i
Hz
P Hz
24.2.4 Terminal wiring

Wiring diagram IPOSplus®
X13 MOVIDRIVE®
DIØØ 1
DIØ1 2
DIØ2 3
CAM DIØ3 4
RHWLS DIØ4 5
LHWLS DIØ5 6
DCOM 7
VO24 8
DGND 9
ST11 10
ST12 11
PLC 0V24
24V
I 01 DIO
DIO11B
I 02
I 03 1 AI21
I 04 X20 2 AI22
I 05 3 AGND
I 06
I 07 1 AOV1
I 08 2 AOC1
X21 3 AGND
O 01
4 AOV2
O 02
5 AOC2
O 03 6 AGND
O 04
O 05 1 DI1Ø
O 06 2 DI11
O 07 3 DI12
O 08 4 DI13
5 DI14
X22 6 DI15
7 DI16
8 DI17
9 DCOM
GND 10 DGND
1 DO1Ø
2 DO11
3 DO12
X23 4 DO13
5 DO14
6 DO15
7 DO16
8 DO17
+24 V 9 24VIN
516945803
PLC = external controller DI04 = /CW limit switch DI16 = Start reference travel
DI00 = /Controller inhibit DI05 = /CCW limit switch DI17 = Start positioning
DI01 = Enable DI10 = Position 1 DO10 = /Malfunction
DI02 = Reset DI11 = Position 2 DO16 = IPOS IN POSITION
DI03 = Reference cam DI12 = Position 3 DO17 = IPOS REFERENCE

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
24.2.5 Setting parameters relevant to the example

Group Parameter Setting
30_ Limits P302 Maximum speed 1 [rpm] 1500
P350 Change direction of rotation OFF
60_ Binary inputs basic unit P600 Binary input DI01 ENABLE/STOP
P601 Binary input DI02 RESET
P602 Binary input DI03 REFERENCE CAM
P603 Binary input DI04 /LS CW
P604 Binary input DI05 /LS CCW
61_ Binary inputs DIO11 option P610 Binary input DI10 IPOS INPUT
... ...
P617 Binary input DI17 IPOS INPUT
63_ Binary outputs DIO11 option P630 Binary output DO10 /FAULT
P636 Binary output DO16 IPOS IN POSITION
P637 Binary output DO17 IPOS REFERENCE
7__ Control functions P700 Operating mode CFC & IPOS
P730 Brake function YES
9__ IPOS Parameter P900 Reference offset [mm] 500
P901 Reference speed 1 [rpm] 200
P902 Reference speed 2 [rpm] 50
P903 Reference travel type 1
P910 Gain X controller 2.8
P911 Positioning ramp 1 [s] 1
P912 Positioning ramp 2 [s] 1
P913 Positioning speed CW [rpm] 1350
P914 Positioning speed CCW [rpm] 1350
P915 Velocity precontrol [%] 100
P916 Ramp type SINE
P920 SW limit switch CW [mm] 2100
P921 SW limit switch CCW [mm] -100
P922 Positioning window [inc] 50
P923 Lag error window [inc] 5000
P930 Override OFF
Travel distance factor NUMERA- Travel distance factor NUMERATOR 2048000
TOR/DENOMINATOR Travel distance factor DENOMINATOR 15708
Unit mm
24.2.6 Calculating the IPOSplus® parameters

SW limit switch see schematic structure
Travel distance The travel dimension unit should be set to mm!

factor numerator
Number of increments per revolution of the drive wheel
Incr./motor rev. × gear ratio
4096 incr. × 5 = 20480
20480 × 100 (expansion factor) = 2048000

24 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Travel distance Circumference of the drive wheel in mm

factor denominator
d×π
50 mm × π =157.0796327
157,08 × 100 (expansion factor) = 15708
Unit The unit after the travel-specific information is to be displayed in mm.
Travel speed 1350 rpm
Position window The message "Drive in position" should be issued when the target position ± 50 incre-
ments is reached.
24.2.7 Input terminals

Level Terminal terminal function Meaning
0 DI00 /Controller inhibit Switch power section on/off
0 DI01 Enable Controlled standstill
0 DI02 Reset Reset after fault (moving clear of limit switches)
0 DI03 Reference cam Switch for zero or offset value
0 DI04 Limit switch right Limit switch for stopping (+)
0 DI05 Limit switch left Limit switch for stopping (-)
0 DI10 IPOS input Hoist position 0 mm
0 DI13 IPOS input -
0 DI14 IPOS input Jog positive
0 DI15 IPOS input Jog negative
0 DI16 IPOS input Start reference travel
0 DI17 IPOS input Start positioning
24.2.8 Output terminals

Level Terminal Unit terminal function Meaning
0 DB00 MDX /Brake Brake control via auxiliary relay
0 DO01 MDX Ready Controller active, power supply to electronics OK
0 DO02 MDX /Fault no fault
0 DO10 DIO11B IPOS output -
0 DO16 DIO11B IPOS in position Drive in positioning window
0 DO17 DIO11B IPOS reference Reference travel successfully completed

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
24.2.9 Program source code (with remarks)

NUMERATOR: 2048000 DENOMINATOR: 15708 Comment
UNIT: mm
******************************************
Program: hoist
With the first 3 inputs of the option
DIO11A, the drive moves to position
0;1000;2000.
File: Hub 100.mdx

Author: SEW/AWT
Date: 01.06.98
Changed: 01.06.98
Terminal wiring of inputs:----------------

DI00 Controller inhibit
DI01 Enable
DI02 Reset (move LS clear)
DI03 Reference cam
DI04 = CW limit switch
DI05 CCW limit switch
DI10 Hoist position 0 mm

DI11 " 1000 mm
DI12 " 2000 mm
DI13 - - -
DI14 (Jog CW)
DI15 (Jog CCW)
DI16 Reference travel
DI17 Start positioning
Terminal wiring of outputs:----------------

DB00 Brake
DO01 Ready signal
DO16 "IPOS in position"
DO17 "IPOS reference"
------------------------------------------
Program start Program branch distributor
==========================================
Program branch distributor Activate interrupt routine for hardware limit switch processing
========================================== Reset/move clear of limit switch
SETINT ERROR M10 → Main program
M100: CALL M50 DI16 = 1 → Reference travel
JMP LO I0001000000000000, M101 DI15 = 1 → Jog CW
CALL M20 DI14 = 1 → Jog CCW
M101: JMP LO I0000010000000000, M102
CALL M30
M102: JMP LO I0000100000000000, M103
CALL M40
M103: JMP UNCONDITIONED , M100
------------------------------------------
Subroutine/move clear of limit switch Reset/move clear of limit switch
==========================================
M10: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M1 If drive has not moved onto limit switch (DI04/DI05 Limit switch
M3: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M2 CW/CCW), then return to branch distributor. If it has, then unlock
travel and wait until drive has moved clear of limit switch (DI02 –
ASTOP IPOS ENABLE
input terminal function "Reset")
Then stop drive by setting target position to current position
M2: ASTOP TARGET POSITION
M1 : RET
------------------------------------------

24 f
"Jog mode" sample program
i
Hz
P Hz
Reference subroutine Reference travel

==========================================
M20: ASTOP IPOS ENABLE Travel release
GO0 U,NW, ZP Reference travel, no wait, start at zero pulse,
M22: JMP LO I0000000000000001, M21 Cancel reference travel
SET H319 = 0 and the bit in the status word "IPOS Reference" = 0
BMOV H319.0 = H473.20
JMP H319 == 0 , M22
M21 : ASTOP TARGET POSITION
RET
------------------------------------------
(subroutine jog mode) Option: Subroutine (e.g. jog mode)
========================================== Jog CW
M30: RET Jog CCW
M40: RET See next example.
------------------------------------------
Main program: Hoist positioning Main program: Hoist positioning
==========================================
M50: JMP LO I0000000001000000, M51 If input DI10 is set, move to position 0 mm
GOA WAIT #0 mm If input DI11 is set, move to position 1000 mm
M51: JMP LO I0000000010000000, M52 If input DI12 is set, move to position 2000 mm
GOA WAIT #1000 mm
M52: JMP LO I0000000100000000, M53
GOA WAIT #2000 mm
M53: RET
------------------------------------------
END
24.3 "Jog mode" sample program

• Travel in two directions with binary inputs "Jog+/Jog-.
• Adjustable travel speeds and ramps.
• Endless travel possible.
• No reference travel required.
• Compliance with travel range limits (software limit switches).
• Automatic movement away from hardware limit switches.
Endless movement is possible in two directions using two binary inputs Jog+ (DI14) and
Jog- (DI15). No reference travel required. If the drive has been referenced and the soft-
ware limit switches set, travel only takes place within these limits. Movement only takes
place when there is a "1" signal at one of the jog terminals. The drive is moved away
from a hardware limit switch by entering a "1" signal at the RESET input (DI02).
24.3.2 Settings
The detailed configuration of the inputs/outputs and the variables used in the program
is documented in the remark section of the program source code.

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz

0 DI10 IPOS input -
0 DI11 IPOS input -
0 DI12 IPOS input -
0 DI13 IPOS input -


24 f
i
Hz
P Hz

NUMERATOR: 1 DENOMINATOR: 1 UNIT: Inc Comment
******************************************
Sample program: Jog mode
File: Tipp.mdx
Author: SEW/AWT
Date: 01.06.98
Function: Jog mode

- endless travel possible
- No need to reference the axis
- Travel limits are observed; software LS
- Travel speeds/ramps from H310
- Inputs jog+ (DI14)/jog- (DI15)
Parameter setting (P600) of inputs/outputs:

In inverter commas = specified function
without inverted commas = IPOS INPUT/OUTPUT

DI00 "Controller inhibit"
DI01 "Enable"
DI02 "Error reset" (move LS clear)
DI04 "Reference cam"
DI03 "CW limit switch"
DI05 "CCW limit switch"
DI14 Jog CW
DI14 Jog CCW
DI16 Start reference travel
DI17 (Start positioning)
Terminal wiring of outputs----------------

DB00 Brake
DO01 Ready signal

Variables used:---------------------
H310 = V-jog CW (1/10 rpm)
H311 = "CCW"
H312 = acceleration ramp (ms)
H313 = deceleration ramp (ms)
H316 - H319 = jog auxiliary variable
******************************************
------------------------------------------
Program start Set velocity and acceleration values for jog mode (see
========================================== remark)
Initialization
------------------------------------------
SET H310 = 5000
SET H311 = 5000
SET H312 = 2000
SET H313 = 2000
------------------------------------------

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
Program branch distributor Program branch distributor

==========================================
SETINT ERROR M10 Activate interrupt routine for hardware limit switch pro-
M100: JMP LO I0001000000000000, M101 cessing reset/move clear of limit switch
CALL M20 DI16 = 1 → Reference travel
M101: JMP LO I0000010000000000, M102 DI15 = 1 → Jog CW
CALL M30 DI14 = 1 → Jog CCW
M102: JMP LO I0000100000000000, M103
CALL M40
------------------------------------------
========================================== If there is no contact with the limit switch (DI05/DI06 LS
M10: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M1 CW/CCW), return to branch distributor. If it has, then
M3: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M2 unlock travel and wait until drive has moved clear of limit
switch (parameterized "Reset" input function DI02). Then
ASTOP IPOS ENABLE stop drive by setting target position to current position.
M2: ASTOP TARGET POSITION
M1 : RET
------------------------------------------
========================================== Travel release
GO0 U,NW, ZP Reference travel, do no wait, start at zero pulse as long as
M20: ASTOP IPOS ENABLE "Controller inhibit" = 0
M22: JMP LO I0000000000000001, M21 and the bit in the status word "IPOS Reference" = 0
SET H309 = 0
BMOV H309.0 = H473.20
JMP H309 == 0 , M22
RET
------------------------------------------
Subroutine jog mode Jog mode
========================================== Query: Is software limit switch active
Jog mode (query: Is software limit switch active) Set velocity
------------------------------------------ Set ramp time
M35 : SETSYS POS.SPEED C(C)W = H310 Query: has the axis been referenced (software limit switch
SETSYS POS. RAMP = H312 active)
SET H319 = 0 Query: both software ranges = 0 (software limit switch not
active)
BMOV H319.0 = H473.20
if software limit switch active, set flag H319=1
JMP H319 == 0 , M36
SET H319 = H496 and load jog travel variables (H317) with the software
travel ranges (system variables H496 and H497)
OR H319 ¦ H497
JMP H319 == 0 , M36
SET H319 = 1
SET H317 = H496
SET H318 = H497
M36 : RET

24 f
"Table positioning" sample program
i
Hz
P Hz
------------------------------------------ Jog CW
Jog + Move for as long as DI14 = 1 and
------------------------------------------ DI15 = 0,
M30: JMP LO I0000010000000000, M31 Query: Is software limit switch active?
JMP HI I0000100000000000, M31
CALL M35 Add 1000 motor revolutions to the current actual position
JMP H319 == 1 , M32 and use the result as the new target position
GETSYS H317 = ACT.POSITION
ADD H317 + 4096000
M32 : ASTOP IPOS ENABLE
GOA NOWAIT H317
RET
------------------------------------------
Jog -
------------------------------------------
M40: JMP LO I0000100000000000, M41 Jog CCW
JMP HI I0000010000000000, M41 Move for as long as DI14 = 0 and
CALL M35 DI15 = 1,
JMP H319 == 1 , M42 Query: Is software limit switch active?
GETSYS H318 = ACT.POSITION
SUB H318 - 4096000 Add 1000 motor revolutions to the current actual position
M42 : ASTOP IPOS ENABLE and use the result as the new target position
GOA NOWAIT H318
RET
------------------------------------------
Jog mode end
------------------------------------------
END
24.4 "Table positioning" sample program

• Binary coded selection of 16 table positions.
• Binary coded output of the currently selected table positioning.
• Clear message when selected table position has been reached.
• Automatic movement away from hardware limit switches.
The first 4 binary inputs of the DIO11B option can be used for selecting 16 table posi-
tions (travel variables H000 ... H015) in binary coded format. When a travel variable
number is selected (table pointer), it is always represented at the first 4 binary inputs of
the DIO11A in binary coded format.
Reference movement must be activated using input DI16 "Reference travel" before you
can move the drive to table positions. You can use input DI17 "Start positioning" to en-
able/interrupt the travel job (with "Controller inhibit" and "Enable" = "1" signal). When a
new table position is selected, it is advisable to set input DI17 to a "0" signal until it is
certain that all the bits of the table pointer have been set.

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
A "1" signal at output DO15 "Table position valid" indicates that the selected table posi-
tion has been reached. This output is reset once a new table position is selected. By ad-
ditionally evaluating output DO16 "IPOS in position", it is also possible to detect when
the selected table position is exited even when the controller is deactivated ("Controller
inhibit" = "0").
The drive is moved away from a hardware limit switch by entering a "1" signal at the
RESET input (DI02).
24.4.2 Settings
The detailed configuration of the inputs/outputs (see below) and the variables used in
the program is documented in the remark section of the program source code.
The table positions can be written via the variable window of the Assembler or with the
keypad in the variables (H00 ... H15). The variables are stored in the non-volatile mem-
ory.
INFORMATION
The user travel units numerator and denominator in the position window header are
not relevant here because the position values of travel variables are always evaluated
in increments (4096 increments/motor revolution).

24 f
i
Hz
P Hz

0 DI10 IPOS input Variable pointer bit 2'0

0 DO10 DIO11B IPOS output Variable pointer bit 2'0
0 DO15 DIO11B IPOS output Table position valid

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz

NUMERATOR: 1 DENOMINATOR: 1 UNIT: Inc Comment
******************************************
Program: Table positioning
File: Tab.mdx
Author: SEW/AWT
Date: 01.06.98
Function: Table positioning:

- The first 4 inputs of the DIO11 option
are used to select the positions in the
corresponding variables 0-15 in binary coded format.
-Input DI17 (X22:17) is used to
enable the selected travel command
Parameterization of inputs/outputs:
In inverter commas = specified function
without inverted commas = IPOS INPUT/OUTPUT

DI00 "Controller inhibit"
DI01 "Enable"
DI02 "Error reset" (move LS clear)
DI03 "Reference cam"
DI04 "CW limit switch"
DI05 "CCW limit switch"
DI10 Variable pointer bit 2'0

DI11 2'1
DI12 2'2
DI13 2'3
DI14 (Jog CW)
DI15 (Jog CCW)
DI16 Start reference travel
DI17 Start positioning
Terminal wiring of outputs----------------

DB00 Brake
DO01 Ready signal
DO10 Variable pointer bit 2'0

DO11 2'1
DO12 2'2
DO13 2'3
DO14 -
DO15 Table position reached
Variables used:---------------------
H300 = Travel speed CW (1/10 rpm)
H301 = Travel speed CCW (1/10 rpm)
H302 = acceleration ramp CW (ms)
H303 = deceleration ramp CCW (linear)
H320 - H324 = auxiliary variables
******************************************
------------------------------------------

24 f
i
Hz
P Hz
Program start Set speed and acceleration values for table position-
========================================== ing (see variable description in the remarks for the
Initialization program source code)
------------------------------------------
SET H300 = 15000
SET H301 = 15000
SET H302 = 1000
SET H303 = 1000
------------------------------------------
Program branch distributor Program branch distributor
========================================== Activate interrupt routine for hardware limit switch pro-
SETINT ERROR M10 cessing reset/move clear of limit switch → main pro-
gram
M100: CALL M50
DI16 = 1 → Reference travel
JMP LO I0001000000000000, M101
CALL M20 DI14 = 1 → Jog CW
DI15 = 1 → Jog CCW
M101: JMP LO I0000010000000000, M102
CALL M30
M102: JMP LO I0000100000000000, M103
CALL M40
------------------------------------------
========================================== If drive has not moved onto limit switch (DI04/DI05
M10: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M1 Limit switch CW/CCW), then return to branch distribu-
tor. If it has, then unlock travel and wait until drive has
M3: JMP HI I0000000000110000, M2
moved clear of limit switch (parameterized "Reset"
ASTOP IPOS ENABLE input function DI02).
JMP UNCONDITIONED , M3 Then stop drive by setting target position to current
M2: ASTOP TARGET POSITION position
M1 : RET
------------------------------------------
========================================== Travel release
M20: ASTOP IPOS ENABLE Delete output binary coded table position
AND H480 & FFFFFFF0 hex Delete output "Table position valid"
BCLR H480.5 = 0 Reference travel, no wait, start at zero pulse,
GO0 U,NW, ZP as long as "Controller inhibit" = 0
M22: JMP LO I0000000000000001, M21 and the bit in the status word "IPOS Reference" = 0
SET H319 = 0
BMOV H319.0 = H473.20
JMP H319 == 0 , M22
RET
------------------------------------------
Subroutine jog mode Option: Subroutine (e.g. jog mode)
========================================== Jog CW
M30: RET Jog CCW
M40: RET

f 24
i
Hz
P Hz
Main program table positioning Main program table positioning

==========================================
Check for referenced axis
------------------------------------------ Table positions are only approached with a referenced
M50: SET H321 = 0 drive
BMOV H321.0 = H473.20 (DO17 = 10 bit position in output terminal system vari-
able H473; parameter set to "IPOS reference")
JMP H321 != 0, M51
RET
------------------------------------------
Set travel speed, acceleration and deceleration ramp
Set travel velocity and ramp
------------------------------------------
M51: SETSYS POS.SPEED C(C)W = H300
SETSYS POS. RAMP = H302
Select table pointer (travel variable no.) binary coded
------------------------------------------
with 4 inputs (DI10 - DI13)
Read in variable pointer in variable H320
------------------------------------------
SET H320 = H483
ASHR H320 > > 6
Reset the output "Tab. position valid" if the table
AND H320 & F hex pointer has been changed. Store current table pointer
------------------------------------------ in comparison variable.
Check output "Table position reached"
------------------------------------------
JMP H322 == H320, M54
BCLR H480.5 = 0 Write selected table pointer to output terminals (DO10
M54 : SET H322 = H320 – DO13) without altering other outputs of the output
------------------------------------------ variable (H480)
Output binary coded variable pointer
------------------------------------------
SET H323 = H320
SET H324 = H480
AND H324 & FFFFFFF0 hex
OR H323 ¦ H324
SET H480 = H323 If DI17 = 1, then travel to position value of selected
travel variable, otherwise stop drive
------------------------------------------
Reset "Table position selection valid" signal
Enable table positioning
Unlock travel
------------------------------------------
Move to table position until position is reached or DI17
M53: JMP LO I0010000000000000, M52
= 0.
ASTOP IPOS ENABLE
Set "Table position selection valid" signal
GOA NOWAIT [H320]
JMP NOT IN POSITION, M53
BSET H480.5 = 1
------------------------------------------
Stop drive
M52: ASTOP HOLD CONTROL
M55 : RET
------------------------------------------
Table positioning end
------------------------------------------
END

Index
Index
A DPRAM synchronization ...................................... 141

Absolute encoder ...................................................53 DRS11A, binary inputs ..........................................30
absolute encoder (SSI) ........................................138 DRS11A, status message......................................30
Absolute encoder, actual position ..........................35 DRS_Ctrl / DRS CTRL...........................................30
ActPos_Abs / ACTPOS ABS..................................35 DRS_Status / DRS STATUS .................................30
ActPos_Extt / ACTPOS EXT..................................35
ActPos_Mot / ACTPOS MOT .................................35 E
Actual position source ..........................................134 Encoder scaling ................................................... 139
Actual position, absolute encoder ..........................35 Encoder scaling ext. encoder ..............................135
Actual position, external encoder ...........................35 Encoder type..................................................53, 138
Actual position, motor encoder...............................35 Error interrupt.........................................................46
AnaOutpIPOS / ANA. OUT IP ................................31 Exclusion of liability................................................15
AnaOutpIPOS2 / ANA. OUT IP2 ............................30 External encoder, actual position...........................35
Automatic encoder replacement detection...........137 External encoder, zero pulse .................................36
External encounter, C track ...................................36
B
Background color .................................................154 F
Binary inputs, basic unit ...................................32, 36 Fieldbus, setpoint position .....................................35
Binary outputs ........................................................30
Binary outputs, basic unit .....................31, 32, 36, 37 G
BREAK .................................................................283
Gain X controller ..................................................127
Bus systems...........................................................17
H
C
Hiperface offset X14 ............................................ 136
Cam distance .......................................................126
CAN encoder .......................................................139
I
CCount_Ext............................................................36
Incremental encoder ..............................................53
CCount_ExtOn .......................................................36
Incremental encoder simulation .............................53
CCount_Mot ...........................................................36
InpLevelB / INPUT LVLB .......................................36
CCount_MotOn ......................................................36
INPUT LVL.......................................................32, 36
Color, Background ...............................................154
InputLevel / INPUT LVL .........................................32
Control word...........................................................33
Interrupt activation .................................................46
Control word modulo function ................................29
Interrupts..........................................................40, 45
ControlWord / CTRL. WORD .................................33
Interrupt, error interrupt..........................................46
Copyright................................................................15
Interrupt, timer0 interrupt .......................................48
Counting direction ................................................138
Interrupt, touch probe DI02 interrupt......................47
Cycle frequency ...................................................139
IPOS counter .........................................................35
IPOS CTRL.W Task 1.......................................... 132
D
IPOS CTRL.W Task 2.......................................... 132
Designated use ......................................................17 IPOS encoder ...................................................... 134
DIO11A, analog output ..........................................31
IPOS modulo function.......................................... 140
DIO11A, analog outputs.........................................30 IPOS monitoring ..................................................131
DIO11A, binary outputs..........................................31 IPOS parameters .................................................123
DIP11A, binary outputs ..........................................31
IPOS reference travel .......................................... 123
Directories ............................................................156 IPOS setpoint.........................................................38
Directory, #include directives ...............................156

Index
IPOS special functions .........................................132 PID controller

IPOS synchronization ..........................................141 Actual value address .........................................38
IPOS travel parameters........................................127 Actual value offset .............................................38
IPOS variable edit ................................................134 Actual value scaling ...........................................38
IPOS_Setp / IPOS_SETP ......................................38 D component .....................................................38
Filtered and scaled actual value ........................38
J I component .......................................................38
Jerk time ..............................................................132 Maximum actual value .......................................38
Maximum output value.......................................38
Maximum output value control variable .............39
L
Minimum actual value ........................................38
Lag distance...........................................................34
Minimum output value........................................38
Lag error window .................................................131
Minimum output value control variable ..............39
Lag window ............................................................34
Operating mode .................................................38
LagDistance / LAG DISTAN...................................34
P component......................................................38
LagWindow / LAG WINDOW .................................34
Precontrol ..........................................................38
Liability for defects .................................................15
Proportional component.....................................38
Setpoint..............................................................38
M
Setpoint address................................................38
ModActPos / MOD.ACTPOS..................................29
Setpoint scaling .................................................38
ModCount / MOD COUNT .....................................29 Status word........................................................39
ModTagPos / MOD.TAGPOS ................................29 PID_ActAdr / PID.ACTADR ...................................38
Modulo Actual Position ..........................................29
PID_ActMax / PID.ACTMAX..................................38
Modulo denominator ............................................140 PID_ActMin / PID.ACTMIN ....................................38
Modulo encoder resolution...................................140 PID_ActNorm / PID.ACTNOR................................38
Modulo function..............................................73, 140
PID_ActOffset / PID.ACTOFF................................38
Modulo function, control word ................................29 PID_ActScale / PID.ACTSCA ................................38
Modulo numerator ..........................................29, 140 PID_CmdAdr / PID.CMDADR ................................38
Modulo Target Position ..........................................29
PID_CmdScale / PID.CMDSCA.............................38
ModuloCtrl / MODULOCTRL..................................29 PID_Command / PIDCOMMAND ..........................38
Motor encoder, actual position ...............................35 PID_Feedf / PID.FEEDF ........................................38
Motor encoder, C track...........................................36
PID_K_p / PID.KP..................................................38
Motor encoder, zero pulse .....................................36 PID_LimitMax / PID.LMTMAX ...............................38
PID_LimitMin / PID.LMTMIN..................................38
O PID_Mode / PID.MODE .........................................38
Operating state ....................................................283 PID_Outp_D / PID.OUTPD ....................................38
OptOutpIPOS / OPT. OUT IP.................................31 PID_Outp_I / PID.OUTPI .......................................38
OutpLevelB / OUTPUT LVLB.................................37 PID_Outp_P / PID.OUTPP ....................................38
Output directory ...................................................156 PID_SetpMax / PID.SETMAX ................................39
OutputLevel / OUTPUT LVL...................................32 PID_SetpMin / PID.SETMIN ..................................39
Override ...............................................................132 PID_Status / PID.STATUS ....................................39
Position offset ...................................................... 139
P Position window .............................................34, 131
Parameter description Positioning interruption detection......................... 131
P9xx IPOS parameters ....................................123 Positioning ramp 1 ...............................................127
Positioning ramp 2 ...............................................127
PosWindow / POS. WINDOW ...............................34
Processing time, task.............................................43
PSTP ................................................................... 283

Index
P9xx IPOS parameters ........................................123 P956 CAN encoder baud rate..............................139

P90x IPOS reference travel .................................123 P96x IPOS modulo function.................................140
P900 Reference offset .........................................123 P960 Modulo function .......................................... 140
P901 Reference speed 1 .....................................124 P961 Modulo numerator ...................................... 140
P902 Reference speed 2 .....................................124 P962 Modulo denominator................................... 140
P903 Reference travel type .................................124 P963 Modulo encoder resolution ......................... 140
P904 Reference travel to zero pulse....................126 P97x IPOS synchronization .................................141
P905 Hiperface offset X15 ...................................126 P970 DPRAM synchronization ............................ 141
P906 Cam distance..............................................126 P971 synchronization phase................................ 141
P91x IPOS travel parameters ..............................127
P910 Gain X controller .........................................127 Q
P911 Positioning ramp 1 ......................................127 Qualified person.....................................................17
P912 Positioning ramp 2 ......................................127
P913/P914 Travel speed CW/CCW .....................127 R
P915 Velocity precontrol ......................................127
Ramp mode ......................................................... 130
P916 Ramp type ..................................................128
Ramp type ...........................................................128
P917 Ramp mode ................................................130
RecStatS1 / SBUS1REC .......................................37
P918 bus setpoint source ....................................130
RecStatS2 / SBUS2REC .......................................37
P92x IPOS monitoring .........................................131
Reference offset ..................................................123
P920 SW limit switch CW.....................................131
Reference speed 1 ..............................................124
P921 SW limit switch CCW ..................................131
Reference speed 1/2 ...........................................124
P922 Position window ..........................................131
Reference speed 2 ..............................................124
P923 Lag error window ........................................131
Reference travel to zero pulse ............................. 126
P924 Positioning interruption detection................131
Reference travel type...........................................124
P93x IPOS special functions................................132
RefOffset / REF. OFFSET .....................................34
P930 Override ......................................................132
Resolver.................................................................53
P931 IPOS CTRL word Task 1 ............................132
P932 IPOS CTRL word Task 2 ............................132
S
P933 Jerk time .....................................................132
Safety Notes ..........................................................16
P938 speed task 1 ...............................................132
Safety notes...........................................................14
P939 speed task 2 ...............................................133
SCOPE ..................................................................30
P94x IPOS encoder .............................................134
Scope474 / SCOPE 474 ........................................30
P940 IPOS variable edit.......................................134
Scope475 / SCOPE 475 ........................................30
P941 actual position source .................................134
Setpoint position ....................................................34
P942 / P943 encoder factor numerator /
denominator .........................................................134 Setpoint position, fieldbus......................................35
P944 Encoder scaling ext.encoder ......................135 SetpointPos / SETP. POS. ....................................34
P945 synchronous encoder type (X14)................135 SetpPosBus / SP. POS. BUS ................................35
P946 synchronous encoder counting SLS_left / SLS LEFT..............................................34
direction (X14)......................................................136 SLS_right / SLS RIGHT .........................................34
P947 Hiperface offset X14 ...................................136 Software limit switch CCW.....................................34
P948 Automatic encoder replacement detection .137 Software limit switch CW .......................................34
P95x absolute encoder (SSI) ...............................138 Speed run ............................................................157
P950 encoder type ...............................................138 Speed task 1........................................................132
P951 counting direction .......................................138 Speed task 2........................................................133
P952 cycle frequency...........................................139 START ................................................................. 283
P953 position offset .............................................139 Status word SCOM ................................................37
P954 Zero offset ..................................................139 StatusWord / STAT. WORD ..................................30
P955 encoder scaling ..........................................139 StdOutpIPOS / STD. OUT IP.................................31

Index
STEP....................................................................283 TP. POS1EXT........................................................35

Structure of the safety notes ..................................14 TP. POS1MOT.......................................................35
SW limit switch CCW ...........................................131 TP. POS2ABS .......................................................35
SW limit switch CW ..............................................131 TP. POS2EXT........................................................35
Synchronization phase.........................................141 TP. POS2MOT.......................................................35
Synchronous encoder counting direction (X14) ...136 Travel speed CW/CCW ....................................... 127
Synchronous encoder type (X14).........................135 T0_Reload / T0 RELOAD ......................................33
Syntax display ......................................................154
Syntax highlighting ...............................................154 U
User timer ..............................................................33
T User watchdog .......................................................34
Target group ..........................................................17
Target position .......................................................34 V
TargetPos / TARGET POS ....................................34 Variable interrupt request ......................................38
Task implementation information ...........................44 Variable interrupts, MOVIDRIVE® B .....................49
Task management .................................................40 Variable interrupt, call ............................................49
Task processing time .............................................43 Variable interrupt, IPOS access.............................50
Task speed ..........................................................157 VarIntReq / VARINTREQ.......................................38
Task 3 ....................................................................44 Velocity precontrol ...............................................127
Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® A .....................................43 Virtual encoder.......................................................35
Tasks for MOVIDRIVE® B .....................................43
Timer0 interrupt......................................................48
W
Timer_0 / TIMER 0.................................................33
Watchdog, WdogTimer / WD. TIMER ....................34
Timer_1 / TIMER 1.................................................33
Timer_2 / TIMER 2.................................................33
Z
Touch probe ...........................................................35
Zero offset............................................................139
Touch probe DI02 interrupt ....................................47
TpPos1_Abs / TP.POS1ABS .................................35
TpPos1_Ext / TP.POS1EXT ..................................35 Symbole
TpPos1_Mot / TP.POS1MOT.................................35 _GetSys .......................................................182, 214
TpPos1_VE / TP.POS1VE .....................................35 _MoviLink............................................. 182, 223, 309
TpPos2_Abs / TP.POS2ABS .................................35 _SBusCommDef ..........................................182, 231
TpPos2_Ext / TP.POS2EXT ..................................35 _SetSys .......................................................182, 238
TpPos2_VE / TP.POS2VE .....................................35 #include directory.................................................156
TP. POS1ABS........................................................35

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

Ernst-Blickle-Str. 42
76646 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com

Manual: Ipos Positioning and Sequence Control System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual: Ipos Positioning and Sequence Control System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual: Ipos Positioning and Sequence Control System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services

IPOSplus® Positioning and Sequence Control System

Edition 11/2009 11645415 / EN

6.8 Cam controllers......................................................................................... 84

11.2 Starting the programming tool................................................................. 121

12.6 P95x absolute encoder (SSI) .................................................................. 138

13.20 Overview of the icons.............................................................................. 174

17 Compiler – Functions ..................................................................................... 204

18.3 Querying bits and input terminals ........................................................... 248

22 Assembler – Programming ............................................................................ 288

23.6 Positioning commands ............................................................................ 323

24.4 "Table positioning" sample program ....................................................... 372

Pictogram SIGNAL WORD

Pictogram Signal word Meaning Consequences if

WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries

CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries

INFORMA- Useful information or tip.

1.2 Liability for defects

1.3 Exclusion of liability

2.1 General information

2.2 Designated use

2.3 Target group

2.4 Programming errors

3.1.1 Scope of this documentation

3.1.2 Creating programs

3.2 IPOSplus® – features

• Absolute encoder processing.

• Programming in the Compiler also offers:

3.3 Controlling IPOSplus® units

3.3.1 Active control signal source

3.4 Technology options / application modules

3.4.2 Application modules

Overview of application modules

Overview of application modules

3.5 Technical data

3.6 Reference documents

3.6.1 General manuals

3.6.2 Manuals for serial interfaces/fieldbuses

3.6.3 Manuals for synchronized axis movements

3.6.4 Manuals for application modules

3.6.5 Manuals for the MQx fieldbus interfaces

4294967295 0 (decimal absolute)

4.2 Overview of the system variables

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

Furthermore, the following variables are assigned functions or reserved in

No. Name Description

No. Name Description

542 PID_Outp_P / PID-controller: Current value of the controller's P-component

No. Name Description

5 Task Management and Interrupts

5.2 Task management for MOVIDRIVE® A and B

Toolbar for MOVIDRIVE® A

[1] = Status of task 1: START = started

Toolbar for MOVIDRIVE® B